Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2004-013.C G VWv1�5,C li r 1 r � 1 A � r r r CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR NORTH COUNTY REGIONAL PARK PHASE 2 BID NO . 6038 PROJECT NO . 0399 r VOLUME 11 r r 1 1 1 . 1 II 00001 - 1 0399-00001 - Project Title Page .doc FAEngineering\Capital Projects\0399 North County Regional Park, Phase II\0399 Contract Docs\0399-00001 - Project Title Page.doc Rev. 05/01 r r TABLE OF CONTENTS NORTH COUNTY REGIONAL PARK rSECTION & DESCRIPTION DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01100 - Definitions Section 01200 - Contractors General Notes Section 01300 - Submittals Section 01400 - Quality Control Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01700 - Project Closeout Section 01720 - Project Record Documents Section 01800 - General Conditions Section 01820 - Supplementary General Conditions DIVISION 2 , SITE WORK Section 2A - Landscaping Section 2B - Irrigation System Section 02010 - Site Conditions and Subsurface Investigation Section 02015 - Trench Safety System iSection 02201 - Clearing and Grubbing Section 02202 - Excavation Section 02203 - General and Select Fill ' Section 02204 - Grassing by Sodding Section 02205 - Grassing by Seed and Mulch Section 02206 - Site Cleanup & Restoration Section 02250 - Soil Poisoning Section 02301 - Subgrade Section 02304 - Cemented Coquina Shell Base Section 02305 - Asphalt Pavement Section 02307 - Reinforced Concrete ' Section 02309 - Street Signs Section 02311 - Roadway Painting Section 02312 - Swale Construction ' Section 02401 - Drainage Pipe Section 02402 - Drainage Structures Section 02403 - Installation of Drainage Pipe & Structures Pipe ' Section 02501 - Water Mains Section 02502 - Miscellaneous Appurtenances Section 02504 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains ' Section 02515 - Site Concrete (Walks and Slabs) Section 02601 Gravity Sewer Piping Section 02602 - Appurtenances for Gravity Sewer Systems ' Section 02603 - Sewage Collection System Section 02701 - Force Mains 1 Section 02704 - Testing of Force Mains Section 02830 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates Section 02920 - Clay Infield Material DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03010 - Concrete Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork14 Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete Section 03420 - Precast Concrete Lintels DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 - Unit Masonry Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry (Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Stones) Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 . METALS Section 05030 - Powdered Coating Section 05120 - Structural Steel Section 05210 - Steel Joists Section 05300 - Metal Decking Section 05400 - Lightgauge Metal Framing Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals Section 05720 - Treads and Nosings DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry Section 06192 — Fabricated Wood Trusses . Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07190 - Vapor Barrier Section 07200 - Insulation Section 07220 - Lightweight Concrete on Insulperm Board Section 07515 - Mechanically Attached Single Ply Membrane Roofing Section 07600 - Flashing & Sheet Metal Section 07610 - Metal Roof and Wall Panels Section 07700 - Fabricated Roof Specialties Section 07710 - Gutters and Downspouts Section 07715 - Drip Flashings Section 07840 - Firestopping Section 07900 - Joint Sealers 1 DIVISION 8 Q00RSq WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Section 08200 - Wood Doors Section 08330 - Overhead Coiling Service Doors ' Section 08332 - Push -up Counter Fire Door Section 08350 - Accordian Folding Doors Section 08400 - Entrance Storefront Doors Section 08410 - Flush Glazed Storefront Windows Section 08710 - Finish Hardware Schedule 1 Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9, FINISHES Section 09100 - Lathing and Stucco Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile Work Section 09510 - Lay in Panel Ceilings Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring Section 09730 - Seamless Epoxy Flooring Section 09900 - Painting Section 09986 - Sanitary Wall and Ceiling Panels DIVISION 10 , SPECIALTIES Section 10155 - Solid Plastic Toilet Partitions Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents Section 10440 - Specialty Signs Section 10500 - Metal Lockers Section 10520 - Portable Fire Extinguishers Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 , EQUIPMENT NOT USED . ' DIVISION 12 , FURNISHINGS Section 12290 - Manufactured Casework : Light Commercial Section 12484 - Dirt Control Floor Gratings DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTUCTION ' Section 13125 - Portable Bleachers Section 13152 - Swimming Pools DIVISION 14 , CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14420 - Vertical Platform Lift DIVISION 15 , MECHANICAL Section 15055 - Common Piping Requirements Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures Section 15425 - Plumbing Specialties Section 15738 - Split-System Air-Conditioning Units Section 15810 - Ducts and Accessories Section 15855 - Diffusers , Registers , and Grilles Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls DIVISION 16 , ELECTRICAL Section 16100 - Wiring Methods Section 16140 - Wring Devices Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Section 16442 - Panelboards Section 16500 - Lighting Section 16715 - Telephone Service and Distribution C :TBLCONT.doc ' SECTION 01100 - DEFINITIONS 1 . 01 Except as specifically defined otherwise, the following definitions supplement definitions ' of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contract documents, apply generally to the work: ' A. The term "Owner", or pronouns in place of same, where used in this Project Manual shall mean the individual or group for which work is to be performed under an agreement with the Contractor. Be The term "Architect", where used in this Project Manual shall mean the firm of Edlund & Dritenbas Architect, P .A. Co The term "General Contractor", or "Contractor Record", where used in this Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor to whom the Contract for the work described and specified herein, and shown on the accompanying Drawings , has been awarded by the Owner. D . The term " Subcontractor" or "Prime Subcontractor", where used in this Project Manual shall mean all other contractors operating under a contractual ' agreement for specific work on this project with the Contractor. E. "Owner ' s Representative" shall mean that individual or individuals designated to ' represent the Owner in decisions effecting the work. The Owner' s Representative will be designated prior to beginning of construction. All correspondence with the ' "fJwne�� repxesen ative shall be in writina omitted t F . ener Afeirements : Provisions of Division - sections of these specifications . rG . Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes , graphics or schedules , or written into other portions of contract documents . Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled" and ' "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information. ' H. Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc. : These terms imply "by the Architect" of the Owner ' s Representative unless otherwise indicated. I . Approved by Architect : In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirement of the Contract Documents , J . Project Site : Space available to Contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be shared with separate contractors, for performance of the work. ' K. Furnish : Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading , unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements . 01100- 1 L . Project Manual : As used in these Contract Documents includes the Bidding Requirements , Conditions of the Contract, and the Specifications . M . Product : As used in these Contract Document includes materials , systems , and equipment. N. Install : Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar requirements . O . Provide : Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. P . Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in work that are engaged to install . Q . Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements : Most stringent requirements apply and will be enforced, unless more detailed language written directly into Contract Documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable . Where optional requirements are specified in a parallel manner, option is intended to be Contractor' s unless otherwise indicated . R. Minimum Requirements : Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry . S . The term "or equal" where used in the Project Manual shall in all cases mean an approved equal as determined by the Architect. T. Contract Documents : shall consist of all plans, specs, bid documents, addendum, application form, permits, and any other documents accumulated in the performance of the construction of this project. U. Substantial Completion : The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof, for the use for which it is intended, as expressed in the Contract Documents . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 01100-2 SECTION 01200 - CONTRACTORS GENERAL NOTE ' 101 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE FOLLOWING : ' A. The Contractor shall warranty and guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of ( 1 ) year from the date of completion. ' B . The Contractor shall secure Final Inspection and Acceptance , prior to the Release of Final Payment. ' C . The Contractor shall provide and maintain Workmans Compensation and Builders s Risk Insurance with the limits required by law and as specified herein. ' D . All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Substitutions will be allowed but only with the Architects prior written approval. Verbal approvals to Contractors request for substitution are non-binding unless they are backed up with written documentation from the Architect. E . The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the manufacturer ' s installation instructions and catalog cuts . F . The Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform all work in accordance with the best trade practices typical to the projects geographical location. ' G. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner, executed " Final Release of Lien " forms from all parties having lien rights against the Owner. ' H. Unless where noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the labor, material , equipment, and incidentals , including all testing as required in the Specifications by an ' independent testing laboratory, necessary for a complete and operating project. I . The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades and/or Subcontractors and shall ' notify the Architect that all long-lead items for the project have been ordered OL S scheduled,, ' 2 . 01 EXAMINATION OF SITE Each Contractor shall carefully examine the site before submitting his bid. No allowance ' will be made him for a lack of full knowledge of all conditions at the site, except such underground conditions as are indeterminable before the commencement of the work. 01200- 1 3 . 01 SURVEY The Contractor is responsible for stakingout the building lines and certifying Slab g rtifymg the slate elevation prior to the pouring of any concrete slabs . When the project is located within a flood zone, a copy of said slab survey shall be supplied to the Owner for his Flood Insurance qualification purposes . 4 . 01 OMISSIONS / Coo e iA� A . The drawings and specifications are intended to clee e. Anything shown on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications , or vice versa, or anything not expressly set forth in either, but which is reasonably implied, shall be furnished as if specifically shown and mentioned in both without extra charge . B . Should anything be omitted from the drawings which is necessary for the proper construction of the work herein described, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to so notify the Owner in writing, if recognized, with a copy to the Architect. In the event of the Contractor failing to give notice, of a recognized error in the plans, he shall bear the extra cost in his/her work caused thereby without extra charge to the Owner as referenced in A . I . A. 201 . 5 . 01 DIMENSIONS Figures given on the drawings govern scaled measurements and larger scale governs smaller. Do not scale the blueline prints 6 . 01 INSPECTIONS The Architect will review with the General Contractor, prior to the beginning of construction, all mandatory inspections . The General Contractor shall afford the inspector every facility for inspecting the work/materials . No piping, wiring, ducts , etc . , shall be covered up until properly inspected and approved, and until certificates , if required, shall have been issued for same . The Contractor shall notify the Architect of each inspection being requested of the Building Department. The Contractor shall give the Architect a minimum of 24 hours advanced notice of a required or periodically requested inspection . 7 . 01 PROTECTION/SECURITY/STORAGE The General Contractor shall provide and maintain the physical security of the property by providing normal lock up measures to preclude trespassing, burglary, and vandalism . All materials in or designed for the work shall be, at all times, suitably housed or protected with particular care being taken of all finished items . Building materials, Contractor ' s equipment, etc . , may be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Whenever the Contractor makes a request for payment on materials stored off-site, a Certificate of Insurance for that material must be attached . 01200 -2 ' When any room in the building is utilized as a storage space, shop, etc . , the parties making such use of those rooms shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching and cleaning that may arise from such use . The Owner, at any time during the construction of the ' project, may direct the Contractor to move materials stored in the building when it becomes necessary and this will be accomplished at no additional charge to the Owner. 8 . 01 CLEANING ' The building must be kept free from all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish at all times, at the completion of the work all paint spots must be removed from the finished floors , walls, window and door frames and any glass where required. Finished glass scratched or etched ' due to cleaning shall be replaced by the Contractor. Limits of acceptance, of any scratched or etched glass, shall be made by the Owner. 9 . 01 GLASS BREAKAGE The Contractor, before acceptance of the building, shall replace all glass that may have ' become broken, or damaged from any cause . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 01200-3 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL The provisions of this section apply to required submittals , related to units of work, not to administrative submittals such as payment requests, insurance certificates and progress reports . In addition to specific provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions related to submittals, individual specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 contain submittal requirements , specific requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section. . PART2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS A. General : Coordinate submittals with progress schedule and actual progress of work; allow ten ( 10) working days for Architect ' s and Engineer ' s processing of submittals requiring review and approval . Use transmittal form to establish complete record or submittals . Provide copies required by governing authorities, which are in addition to copies specified for submittal to the Architect. B . Shop drawings : shall be submitted for manufactured or fabricated materials as called for in the separate specification section. Drawings shall be fully identifiable with project name, location, supplier ' s name, date, drawing number, specifications section reference, etc. . . The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any Subcontractor, five (5) copies of all shop drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades to the Architect for approval with one copy of the shop drawings to the Owner' s representative for review and comment. The Contractor shall make no deviation from the approved shop drawings and/or the changes made thereto by the Architect if any . Additional prints, as may be required by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, shall be supplied by the Contractor. C . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of shop drawings for approval, to allow adequate time for the checking of drawings , manufacturer/fabrication of items , and the shipment of items to the job site in sufficient time so as to prevent any delay in the Progress Schedule . D . It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of shop drawings of those items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer, but are designed to interface with the overall project when installed . E . Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first show evidence of being checked by the Contractor, the prima- facie evidence of which shall be a " CHECKED" stamp marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" on each 01300- 1 copy of each shop drawings , placed thereon by the Contractor. Shop drawings received without the Contractor' s " CHECKED" stamp will be cause for ' immediate return without further action by the Architect until properly resubmitted. Each drawing correctly submitted will be checked by the ' Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways : a. REVIEWED : NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN ' b . REVIEWED : NOTE COMMENTS AND MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED c. REVIEWED • REVISE AND RESUBMIT ' d. REVIEWED • REJECTED F . Copies of Product Data : mark each copy to indicate actual product to be provided ; ' show selections from among options in manufacturer' s printed product data. Submit six copies ; two copies of which will be returned where required for maintenance manuals ; and an additional copy to be maintained at project site for reference purposes . ' Do not proceed with installation of manufactured products until a copy of related product data is in installer' s possession. ' 2 . 02 SUBSTITUTIONS ' A . Approval Required : 1 . The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract ' Documents. 2 . All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being ' incorporated into the work. 3 . Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this work by the Architect, in writing . Be "Or Equal" : 1 . Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Architect" occurs in the Contract Documents , do not assume that materials, equipment or methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically ' approved in writing by the Architect. 2 . The decision of the Architect shall be final . ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * 1 01300 -2 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL : The work of this section includes Quality Assurance; and the independent laboratory and field sampling, testing, inspections, supervision and reports of those materials required by the various sections of these specifications . Tests and inspections shall be performed by a recognized Testing Laboratory selected by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. 1 . 02 COOPERATION : A. Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with all trades whose work affects or is affected by the tests and inspections . Be Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance necessary in taking samples, making field tests and making inspections, and he shall schedule and coordinate his work to hold costs of tests and inspections to a reasonable minimum. 1 . 03 PAYMENTS : A . Costs for tests and inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor. Be If the results of any test or inspection indicates failure to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of retesting or reinspection. C . Manner of Work : When in the opinion of the Architect, tests or inspections are required because of the manner in which the Contractor does his work, such as questionable quality of materials and/or workmanship, questionable sources of material, substitution of materials or sources of same for those previously accepted, or failure or material to comply with specification or plan requirements ; the costs for such tests or inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor. D . Should the Contractor refuse to perform such tests , the direct cost of testing, I ncurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from the Contract sum for construction . 1 . 04 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS : The Architect reserves the right to demand for test or special examination any material or part thereof to insure compliance with the specification and he may reject any material or part judged defective as a result of such tests and the Contractor shall replace such defective material or part with material or part that does comply with the specifications at no additional expense to the Owner. 01400 = 1 1 . 05 REPORTS : Test and inspection reports shall be written immediately upon conclusion of each ' procedure ; Copies shall be provided to the following : awRcrf Architect ' Contractor 1906 TEST CRITERIA : ' The specific test and inspection procedures and their required results are enumerated herein ' by reference to recognized standards and shall be the required method for testing and judging the results unless deviations from the standards are specifically mentioned. ' 1 .07 STANDARDS : Applicable Standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited to , standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations . 1 . AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, ' 341 National Press Building, Washington, D . C . 20004 . 2 . ACI = American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford, Station, Detroit, ' Michigan 48219 . 3 . AISC = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc . 1221 Avenue of the ' Americas , New York, NY 10020 . 4 . ANSI = American National Standards Institute (successor USASI and ASA) 1430 ' Broadway, New York, NY 10018 ' S . ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials , 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103 6 . AWS = American Welding Society, Inc . , 2501 N . W. 7th Street, Miami , FL 33125 7 . AWWA = American Water Works Association, Inc . , 6666 West Quincy Ave . , ' Denver, CO 80235 8 . CRSI = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North Lasalle Street, Chicago , IL 60610 9 . CS = Commercial Standard of NBS , U . S . Department of Commerce, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 10 . FGMA = Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, KS 66611 01400 -2 11 . NAAMM = The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers , 1033 South Boulevard, Oak Park, IL 60302 12 . NEC = National Electrical Code (see NFPA) 13 . NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New York, NY 10017 14 . NFPA = National Fire Protection Association (Life Safety Code) 470 Atlantic Avenue, Boston, MA 02210 15 . SBCC = Southern Building Code Congress International , Inc . 900 Montclair Road, Birmingham, AL 35213 . 16 . SBC = Standard Building Code, latest adopted addition. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 01400-3 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROL PAR 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 GENERAL Refer to General Conditions for commitments which result in requirements for Contractor ' to provide temporary facilities as may be required for performance of the work and fulfillment of the Contract. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work, ' but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulation. Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor ' s option, subject to Owner' s acceptance . Temporary facilities is defined to exclude tools and construction machines, ' testing, demolition, alterations, soil borings, mock-ups and similar items . The contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all consumed utilities until such time as the Owner is issued the Certificate of occupancy. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 DEWATERING ' Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the work or adjacent properties . Maintain protection against flooding . Protect existing drainage systems . 2 . 02 POWER DISTRIBUTION Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with groundfault interruption feature, with ' proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug-in connections as appropriate for intended use . Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each ' circuit at distribution panel . Space 4 'gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that every portion of work can be reached with a 100-foot extension cord. 2 . 03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING Provide lighting of intensity and qualify sufficient for proper and safe performance of the ' work, and for access thereto . 2 . 04 TEMPORARY DRIVES ' Where feasible, use subbase and base construction of permanent drives and paving as ' temporary paved construction areas ; and delay installation of finish paving courses until possibility of damage from construction operations has been minimized . Otherwise , ' 01500 - 1 provide not less than compacted subgrade of satisfactory soil material . Remove temporary paving when no longer needed. 2 . 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES Provide necessary connections, piping , valves, meters, and hoses from the distribution points to points on the site where water and electrical power are necessary to carry on the work. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary utilities . 2 . 06 HOISTING, GENERAL Provide cranes , hoists, and similar temporary construction facilities as needed to adequately perform the work. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and governing regulations for installation, operation and removal . 2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including temporary stairs, ramps , ladders, runways staging, shoring, scaffolding, railings, dust controls , bracings , barriers closures , platforms , temporary partitions , waste chutes, storage shed, and similar items . 2 . 08 TEMPORARY TOILETS Where permitted by governing regulations, provide single-occupant, self-contained units of either chemical aerated recirculation type of combustion type ; glass fiber reinforced polyester enclosure ; equipped with both urinal and stool fixtures . Supply units with tissue and, where not located nearby, separate wash facilities, supply with wet-type hand towels and waste containers . Locate units so that personnel will travel no more than 200 ', including distance horizontally, to reach a unit. 2 . 09 LOCKUP AND SECURITY As construction of building structure or shell progress and it becomes feasible to secure project against intrusion, provide temporary security enclosure, doors and locks as necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance . Deliver, store and lockup materials and equipment in a manner which will prevent theft and vandalism. 2 . 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION Review exposure to possible environmental problems, with Architect . Establish procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil , excessive noise, and similar problems) . 01500-2 ' 2 . 11 TEMPORARY WATER ' The Contractor and his Subcontractors must provide water service as connected to the available municipal water system, located on the site, for all related requirements for ' construction of the work as well as any specified landscaping requirements . The Contractor shall pay for all water utilized for construction and to sustain any specified landscaping until transferred to the Owner. ' 2 . 12 JOB SITE PHONE AND FIELD OFFICE ' The Contractor will be required to engage the local telephone company to install and maintain a jobsite telephone . The Contractor shall provide the phone number to the Owner and the Architect. Unless stipulated otherwise, a job site Field Office is required ' for all projects . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 GENERAL ' A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 - Mechanical, and Division 16 - Electrical ' B . Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service . Co Modify and extend systems as work progress requires . ' 3 . 02 REMOVAL ' A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required and leave the site in a clean condition. ' B . Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 01500 -3 SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL The provisions of this section apply primarily to closeout of actual physical work, not to administrative matters such as final payment and changeover of insurance . Specific requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section . 1 . 02 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A . Record Drawings : Maintain a complete set of blue/blackline prints of contract drawings and shop drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the Contract Time . Mark-up drawings during the course of the work to show changes and actual installation conditions, sufficient to form a complete record for Owner' s purposes . Give particular attention to work for Owner' s purposes . Give particular attention to work which will be concealed and difficult to measure and record at a later date, particularly work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the project. Request subcontractors and mechanics marking the prints to sign and date each mark-up . Bind prints into manageable sets , with durable paper covers, appropriately labeled . Record drawings to be available at time of landscaping . B . Maintenance Manuals : Provide 3 sets of 3 -0 ring vinyl-covered binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed. Include operating and maintenance instructions ; extended to cover emergencies, spare parts , warranties, inspection, procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item . Provide names and phone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers as a cover sheet in the binder. 1 . 03 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner' s operating personnel, to provide on location instruction to Owner' s personnel, sufficient to ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems . Provide instructions for the following categories of work : Mechanical, electrical and electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15 and 16) . Live plant materials , lawns and irrigation systems well , pump , potable water treatment systems , fire sprinklers , security system, and fire alarm control system . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 FINAL CLEANING 01700 - 1 ' At closeout time clean or r « reclean entire work to normal level for first class maintenance/cleaning of building projects of a similar nature . Remove non-permanent ' protection and labels , polish glass , clean exposed finished, touch-up minor finish damage, clean or replace filters of mechanical systems , remove debris and broom-clean non- ' occupied spaces , sanitize plumbing facilities, clean light fixtures and replace burned- out/dimmed lamps, sweep and wash paved areas , police yards and grounds to the property line, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as ' determined by Architect and Owner' s Representative, 3 . 02 PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ' A. Prerequisites : Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before requesting the Architect ' s inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for tsubstantial completion : Complete installation of building and equipment to such level as the Owner could, ' if necessary, occupy the facilities . Submit executed warranties , workmanship bonds , maintenance agreements, ' inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of work, enabling Owner' s unrestricted occupancy and use . ' Complete instruction of Owners operating personnel , and start-up of systems . ' Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools . Be Inspection Procedures : Upon completion of Contractor ' s request for inspection the ' Architect will either proceed with inspection or advice Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled . Following initial inspection, the Architect will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be ' performed prior to issuance of certificate ; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed . Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance . 3 . 03 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE ' Upon receipt of Contractor' s notice that work has been completed, including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections , and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances , the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of ' reinspection the Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or advise contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance, if necessary, procedure will be repeated . ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * 01700-2 SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : The General Conditions of the Contract, including the General Requirements of Division 1 shall be considered a part of this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION: A . Work Included : 1 : Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of. a. Drawings b . Specifications c . Addenda d. Change Orders and other modification to the Contract e . Architect ' s field orders or written instructions f. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples g. Field test records Be Related Requirements : 1 . - Section 01300 : Submittals 1 . 03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES : A . Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Be File documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes . C . Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect. 1 . 04 RECORDING : A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letter. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 01720- 1 ' SECTION 01800 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 . 01 INCLUSION OF AIA DOCUMENT A-201 : ' A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, The American Institute of Architects Document A-201 ; 1987 Edition, as modified by the Owner, shall apply to and form part of, this section. B . A copy of the modified A . I . A. Document A-201 is available for review and may be ' examined at the office of the Architect. 2 . 01 RELEASE OF LIENS : All applications for Payment, with the exception of the initial pay request, are to be accompanied by executed Partial Release for Liens from those Subcontractors having performed work under the previous Application for Payment. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage which has come due, shall be paid until the Contractor has delivered to the Owner a complete "Final Release of Liens" arising out of this contract and, if so required by the Owner, an affidavit stating that so far as he has knowledge or information, the release is inclusive of all labor and material for which a lien could be filed . The Contractor may, at the option of the Owner, furnish a bond deemed satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify himself against any liens . 3 . 01 SUBCONTRACTORS : A list of the proposed subcontractors must be submitted to the Owner and the Architect at the bid opening . All subcontractors agree to be bound by the terms of the General Conditions , the drawings, and the specifications in so far as they are applicable to his/her portion of the work. 4. 01 GUARANTEE : ' The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall make good, any defects in the work due to faults in labor or materials , which arise or come to be discovered within one ( 1 ) years after the completion of the work and it' s acceptance by the Owner. The General Contractor shall obtain from the various Subcontractors , all written guarantees herein specified and shall deliver same to the Owner before the building shall be deemed finished and accepted. 5. 01 CUTTING AND PATCHING : ' All cutting and patching required to execute and complete any and all work under this contract shall be done by the General Contractor or his Subcontractors . The decision as to which Sub/Contractor shall do the cutting and patching shall be in accordance with local customs , but in the case of a dispute as to which Contractor shall do the cutting and patching, the final decision shall be made by the General Contractor. 01800 - 1 6 . 01 CHANGES : It is understood that the Owner shall have the right, during the progress of construction, to make any alterations , additions , or omissions that he may desire as to the work of materials herein specified or shown on the plans . The same right shall be carried into effect by the General Contractor without in any way violating or vitiating the contract, but if such changes are made, the value of same must be agreed upon, in writing, between the Owner and the General Contractors or the Owners Request for changes are non-binding . All Change Orders must be approved by the Owner ' s Governing Board before work is started. No omissions will be allowed nor extra work paid for unless it has been so ordered in writing . 7.01 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ACCIDENTS : The General Contractor shall bear losses or damages from accidents which may occur to any person or persons, by or on account of the prosecution of the work, until such time as possession is taken by Tenant. The Contractor must provide all legal and necessary guards, barricades, lights, etc . , during the course of the work. The General Contractor is solely responsible for job-site safety . 8 . 01 JOBSITE SUPERINTENDENT : The Contractor shall have full-time , on-site, job superintendent assigned to the project. The job superintendent is to be assigned, in writing, by the Contractor with the individual ' s name submitted to the Owner, thru the Architect, for approval . An alternate on-site job superintendent shall also be names in the event the primary superintendent cannot meet his daily obligations (sickness, vacation, etc.) . The same initial jobsite superintendent is to be available onsite during all project working hours throughout the extent of construction and until delivery of the project the Owner. In the event the Contractor replaces the job-site superintendent prior to substantial completion, and the Architect must spend extra time to educate and inform a new superintendent of jobsite conditions, the General Contractor will compensate the Architect for his additional time at $ 100 . 00 per hour, including travel time . 9 .01 BUILDING PERMITS AND CODE : The Contractor shall endeavor to comply with all mandatory codes pertaining to his work . Cost of all compliance requirements is to be included in the Contractor' s contract price . 10.01 SAFETY: No parts of this facility will be occupied during construction or renovation unless all existing exits and any existing fire protection measures are continuously maintained, or in lieu thereof, other measures are taken to provide equivalent safety . The General Contractor is solely responsible for job site safety . 01800 -2 ' 11A1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS : ' Within thirty (30) days of the date established for commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect the following items : 1 . A comprehensive, bar-graph, or similar format, Progress Schedule indicating a time bar for each significant category of work, arranging the ' schedule to indicate the required sequencing of each work task. This progress schedule shall be updated monthly throughout the construction phase . 2 . Project billing Schedule of Values for review and approval . ' NOTE : The submitted progress schedule should match the tasks on the schedule of value as close as possible to assist the Owner and Architect in tracking the project progress . * * * END OF SECTION * * * r r 01800-3 SECTION 01820 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 . 01 BUILDING PERMITS AND CODE : The successful Bidder shall comply with all mandatory codes pertaining to his work. Cost of all compliance requirements is to be part of the Contractors Base Bid, 2. 01 PAYMENT : The Contractor may requisition payment for work completed at intervals of not less than four (4) weeks . Requests must be based on work completed, including materials stored on the site and as yet not incorporated into the construction, and must be itemized by major components . At the option of the Owner, payment for materials stored offsite may be authorized on the provision that the Contractor provides written proof of insurance for the specific material in question. (Proof of insurance must specifically identify the material and the project by name) . Ten percent ( 10%) will be withheld from all equal amounts prior to completion. Final payment will be made following completion and acceptance of the work by the Owner and Architect. A.I .A. Documents G-702 and &703 , Application and Certificate for Payment, shall be the format for applications for payment. The Contractor is to submit payment applications along with executed Partial Release of Liens from those Subcontractors as applicable, in triplicate , to the Architect, allowing time for the Architect ' s inspection and review (4 days) as well as for Owner' s review and processing time ( 10) days . 3 . 01 INSURANCE : The successful Bidder shall have in force and effect at all times, not less that the following insurance : A . Worker' s Compensation : Must meet statutory requirements for Florida workers ' . compensation. Must minimally include Employer ' s Liability with limits of $ 100 ,000 each accident, $ 500, 000 disease (policy limit), and $ 100,000 disease (each employee) . B . Commercial General Liability : Must provide minimum limits of $ 1 million per occurrence combined single llistfor bodily injury and property damage . Shall include coverage for premises/operations, products/completed liability, contractual liability and independent contractors . C . Business Automobile : Must provide minimum limits of $ 1 million per occurrence combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage. Shall include coverage for owned autos, hired autos and non-owned autos . D . Builders Risk Insurance : Coverage shall ne all-risk with limits equal to 100 percent of the completed value of the building . It shall include a machinery/equipment endorsement to provide coverage is $ 500 per claim . 01820 - 1 ' Ten ( 10) days prior to commencement of work under this contract a certificate of insurance will be provided to the Owner for review and approval . The certificate shall provide the following : 1 The Owner will be named as an additional insured on both the general liability and business automobile policies . 2 . The Owner will be given thirty (30) days notice prior to the cancellation or modification of any stipulated insurance . Such notice shall be in writing by registered mail , return receipt requested, and addressed to the Owner. ' NOTE : It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that all subcontractors comply with all insurance requirements . ' * * *END OF SECTION * * * r 01820 -2 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK SECTION 2A - LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENE RAL 1 , DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work included : This section is part of the entire set of contract documents and shall be coordinated with the applicable provisions of the other parts . B . The extent of the landscape development work is shown on the drawings and in schedules . Completion of the work shall mean full and exact compliance and conformity with the provisions expressed or implied in the drawings and specifications. C . The work under this section includes supplying and planting of trees, shrubs and ground covers in accordance with sound nursery practice and maintaining and watering them until final completion and acceptance, but not less than 30 days from installation, and any other work as called for on the plans and in these specifications. 2 . RELATED WORK A. Site work (rough grading) . B . Irrigation (see irrigation specifications) . 3 . QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLERS : The Contractor shall have his labor crews controlled and directed by a landscape foreman well versed in plant materials, planting, reading blueprints and coordination between job and nursery, in order to execute installation rapidly and correctly. B . TREES AND SHRUBS : Provide trees and shrubs grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice. (The only exception shall be native plant material collected from field locations. ) Provide healthy vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurements. All plant material shall be graded Florida No . I or better as outlined under Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, State Plant Board of Florida. 4 . PRODUCT HANDLING A. DELIVERY AND STORAGE : The balls of B & B plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch or other protection from drying wind and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted . 2A - 1 1 B . PROTECTION 1 . Trees moved by winch or crane shall be thoroughly protected from chain marks, girdling, or other bark slippage by means of burlap, wood battens or other approved method . 2 . Container grown plants shall be carefully removed from the container so as not to disturb the root system. Spade shall not be used to cut containers . 5 . JOB CONDITIONS A. EXISTING CONDITIONS 1 . The contractor shall verify all site conditions prior to construction . ' 2 . The Contractor shall exercise care in digging and other work so as not to damage existing work including underground pipes and cables, and the pipes and hydrants of watering systems . Should such overhead or underground obstructions be encountered which interfere with planting the location of plants shall be adjusted to clear such obstruction. 3 . Should any objectionable materials such as old concrete, bricks, or other debris be encountered during planting operations, they shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. B . SCHEDULING 1 . In general the work shall proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available. 2 . Landscape installation shall not begin until an adequate source of water is available on site. 3 . The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work with all other parties involved with the job in order the eliminate unnecessary complication during the installation of his work. 4 . Upon substantial completion of work, the Contractor shall request a walk- through by the Landscape Architect to formulate a "punch list " . Contractor shall complete " punch list " items as quickly as possible, and request another walk-through to verify completion. Upon successful completion of the " punch list " items, the work will be accepted by the Owner. C . The contractor is responsible for his own bathroom and drinking facilities . 6 . GUARANTEE ' A. Considering that the Owner will be responsible for maintaining all materials after acceptance, the Contractor shall guarantee to replace all plant materials for a period of time after final acceptance as follows : 2A - 2 I . Trees (except Palms) - 180 days . 2 . Palms - I year. 3 . Shrubs and Ground Cover - 60 days . 4 . Lawn areas : a. Sod - 30 days . b . Seed - 90 days . B . Should any of the plant materials show 40% or more defoliation during the guarantee period due to the Contractor's use of improper materials or workmanship the Contractor, upon written notice, shall replace same within 15 days, without additional cost to the Owner. C . Specifically excluded from the guarantee are damages resulting from natural causes such as floods, lightning strikes, freezing or winds over 60 mph. , damages from acts of negligence on the part of the Owner or others occupying the site, fires, vandalism and herbivorous animals . D . This guarantee shall be in effect only if proper maintenance is performed by the Owner, after final acceptance of the Contractor's work. Without such maintenance, this guarantee shall become null and void . Proper maintenance shall be considered as performing the procedures described generally in Section 3 . 03 A MAINTENANCE (Items 2 & 3 ) . 7 . SUBMITTALS A . Physical samples of prepared planting soil, and mulch. B . Labels from starter fertilizer. C . Submit recommendations for controller time setting for each irrigation zone valve to the Owner prior to completion of work. D . Submit recommended plant care and maintenance procedures to Owner prior to completion of work. E . Soil test results (see Part 3 , Section IA) , F . The Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the contract amount until the submittals are received . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 . MATERIALS 2A - 3 ' A. NOMENCLATURE: Conform to the names given in Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition, prepared by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not included therein, conform generally with names accepted in the nursery trade. B . MEASUREMENTS : Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not extreme branch tip to tip . The measurements specified are the minimum size ' acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required. C . B & B PLANTS : No plant shall be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding its roots has been cracked or broken. The diameter of the ball must be sufficient to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for the maximum development of the plant . Root pruning shall have been done at a minimum of four (4) weeks before planting at the job . Anti-transpirant spray shall be applied immediately following installation. D . MATERIALS : Pot bound plant materials will be unacceptable. E . SOD : The sod shall be of firm, tough texture having a compact growth of grass ' with good root development . It shall contain no weeds, or any other objectionable vegetation. The soil embedded in the sod shall be good clean earth, free from stones and debris . The sod shall be free from fungus, vermin and other diseases . ' F . SEED : Grass seed shall be Argentine Bahia, with a minimum purity of 85 %, minimum germination of 80% and weed content not to exceed one-half percent ' ( 1 /2%) . A cover grass shall be mixed with the Bahia seed as follows : March - October: 1 /3 Bahia, 1 /3 Common Bermuda, and 1 /3 Brown Top Millet . November - Feb . : 1 /3 Bahia, 1 /3 Common Bermuda, and 1 /3 Winter Rye. 2 . MIXES A. Fertilizer shall be Agriform 21 Gram Tablets, slow release, 2040- 5 analysis, or an ' approved equal . Rates of application shall be as follows : 1 -gal . can plants 1 tablet each ' 3 -gal . can plants 2 tablets each Palm trees (single stem) 6- 8 tablets each Palm trees (multiple stem) 1 tablet per each 3 " of stem diameter: cumulative diameter measurement . Trees I tablet per each 1 /2 " of trunk diameter: for multiple trunks the diameter measurements will be cumulative. 2A - 4 B . Starter fertilizer shall be 6-6-6, 100% organic, with minor elements . This fertilizer shall have 40%-50% of its total nitrogen in a water-insoluble form. C . Lawn areas shall be treated with fertilizer applied at a rate of twenty (20) pounds per 1000 square feet . D . Soil used for planting (planting mix) shall consist of 70% Florida native peat, 30% wood chips (pine bark passing through 3 /4 " screen) and sawdust, 3 lb . starter fertilizer per cubic yard . Soil mixture used to back fill planting pits shall consist of two parts of existing topsoil from on site, and one part prepared planting mix. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 . PREPARATION A. SOIL TESTING: The Contractor shall test each site area for soil pH. Provide and supply such soil amendments as are necessary to adjust the pH range of each area to a level that will provide optimum conditions for the vigorous growth of the specified new plant material and grass (6 . 0 - 6 . 5 ) . Submit test results and proposed soil amendments outline to the Landscape Architect prior to amending soils . ( Soil amendments N. I. C . ) B . PLANT PITS : Circular pits with vertical sides shall be excavated for all plants . Diameter of pits for trees, shrubs, and ground cover shall be at least two times greater than the diameter of the ball . 2 . INS TALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE A. All plants � except as otherwise specified, shall be centered in pits and set on compacted top soil to such a depth that the finished grade level at the plant after settlement will be the same as that at which the plant was grown. No burlap shall be pulled out from under balls . Remove burlap from top 1 /3 of root ball . Roots shall be spread in their normal position . Container grown plants shall not be excessively root bound . All broken or frayed roots shall be cut off cleanly. Soil shall be placed and compacted thoroughly, avoiding injury and shall be settled by watering. No filling will be permitted around trunks . B . Form temporary earth saucers with six (6) inch high berm around all newly planted trees . Saucer diameter for trees four (4) inch caliper or less shall be approximately three (3 ) feet . Saucer diameter for trees greater than four (4) inch caliper shall be approximately six (6) feet . All trees shall be watered daily for the first month . Remove saucer berm as final mulching and sodding takes place . C . New planting shall be so set that the final level of ground around the plants shall conform to surrounding grades, or as otherwise specified . D . Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod . Solid sod shall be laid immediately upon delivery to site with closely abutting joints, with a tamped or rolled even surface. Stagger end joints minimum of 12 inches . It shall be the 2A - 5 ' responsibility of h p ty the Contractor to bung the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub areas . After the sod is laid, a top dressing of clean ' sand shall be evenly applied over the entire surface and thoroughly washed in, (if determined necessary by the Landscape Architect) . Note : Sand will not be required on properly laid sod . ' E . Alllant beds unless otherwise se noted, including tree saucers, shall be top-dressed with 3 " shredded cypress bark mulch (American Wood Products type "B " or ' equal) . F . The amount of pruning on new plant material shall be limited to the minimum ' necessary to remove dead or injured branches to compensate for the loss of roots as a result of transplanting operations. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of a plant . All cuts over one-half ( 1 /2) inch diameter shall be treated with an approved tree paint . G. Seeding operations shall conform to D . O . T . specifications, section 570, unless otherwise specified . Areas to be seeded shall be cultivated to a depth of four (4) inches below finish grade and treated with 6-6-6 fertilizer ( 100% organic) with minor elements at a rate of twenty (20) pounds per 1000 square feet . The fertilizer shall be thoroughly incorporated into the top three (3 ) to four (4) inches of soil . Do not use wet seed or seed which is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. Provide and sow Brown Top Millet or Italian Rye seed as seasonally ' appropriate, and Common Bermuda, in addition to the Argentine Bahia, at a rate of 12 lb/ 1000 S .F . . Sow seed using a spreader or seeding machine . Do not use seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour. Distribute evenly over entire ' area by sowing equal quantity in two (2) directions at right angles to each other. Final lawn area shall be reasonably free of large clods, roots, and other material which will interfere with the work of subsequent mowing and maintenance ' operations . If there are areas that do not show evidence of uniform grass growth at the end of eight (8 ) weeks after seeding, the Contractor shall reseed in the original specified manner, until uniform growth is achieved . 3 . INSTRUCTIONS A. MAINTENANCE 1 . The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from ' the beginning of landscape construction until the landscape work is accepted by the Owner, including proper watering. ' 2 . Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead or unacceptable materials, straightening turf or planter ' settlement areas, guy wire repair and tightening, wash-outs, and any other procedure consistent with good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under this contract . 2A - 6 3 . Mowing, if necessary prior to final acceptance, shall occur at regular intervals at a mowing height of 3 inches when the grass reaches a height of four and one-half (4 1 /2) inches with a standard rotary mower. At no time shall more than 1 /3 of the leaf surface be removed . 4 . It will be the Owner's responsibility to continue maintaining the landscape, following guidelines above, after final acceptance. B . GRADES : It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to finish (fine) grade all landscape areas, eliminating all surface irregularities, depressions, sticks, stones, and other debris, and remove them from the site. Rough grade shall be considered as site work (rather than landscaping) and shall be established to within f 0 . 1 ' of design grade. Contractor is responsible for installation and contouring of all berms indicated on drawings . 4 . CLEANING: The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises (grounds and pavements) free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work. 2A - 7 SECTION 2B - IRRIGATION SYSTEM ' PART I - GENERAL 1 . DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work included: This Section is part of the entire set of contract documents and ' shall be coordinated with the applicable provisions of the other parts. B . The extent of landscape irrigation system is shown on the drawings. Completion of this work shall mean full and exact compliance and conformity with the provisions expressed or implied in the drawings, schedules and specifications . Irrigation installer is not relieved of his responsibility to provide proper irrigation coverage by providing full and exact compliance with the drawings and specifications. If field conditions or other unforeseen factors warrant that design modifications are necessary, irrigation installer shall notify Landscape Architect immediately. C . The work under this section includes furnishing and installing materials to construct an automatic irrigation system and maintaining that system until final completion and acceptance, but not less than 30 days from date of installation, and any other work as called for on the plans and in these specifications . r2 . RELATED WORK A. Electrical service to pump and controller shall be provided by others under ' separate contract with Owner, in compliance with N. E . C . requirements . B . Site work (rough grading) . ' C . Landscaping (see landscape specifications) . 3 . QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape irrigation system installation shall only be performed by a firm that is ' regularly engaged full time in the installation of underground landscape irrigation systems . (Crews shall be controlled and directed by a foreman who is thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's ' recommended methods of installation, and is well versed in reading blueprints . ) B . Design modifications may be made only as necessary to meet field conditions and only as acceptable to Landscape Architect . Piping shown on plans is diagrammatically routed for clarity - route to avoid conflict with specimen plants and adjust as necessary to accommodate landscape construction . C . Contractor shall be responsible for verification at the site of all conditions and dimensions shown on the plans prior to commencement of work. 2B = 1 D . CODES AND STANDARDS : Work shall comply with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and National Electrical Code. E . REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES : Work shall comply with codes, ordinances, and regulations of all governing authorities . F . WATER TESTING: Contractor shall test the salt content (chlorides and t . d . $) of the irrigation well . 4 . PRODUCT HANDLING: The Contractor shall protect all materials and work against injury from any cause and shall provide and maintain all necessary safeguards for the protection of the public . He shall be liable for any damage or injury to person or property which may occur as a result of his negligence in the prosecution of the work. 5 . JOB CONDITIONS A. EXISTING CONDITIONS 1 . Inspection : Contractor must examine the areas and conditions under which landscape irrigation system is to be installed and notify the Landscape Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected . Contractor shall fully acquaint himself with related planting, electrical, paving, site and utilities work to preclude any misunderstanding and to facilitate a trouble-free installation at the site . 2 . Should any objectionable materials such as old concrete, bricks or other debris be encountered during the installation operation, they shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. B . SCHEDULING 1 . Crossings under paved areas as indicated, shall be installed by the Contractor. Crossings shall be installed prior to compaction of subgrade. 2 . Irrigation installation shall not begin until rough grades have been established . 3 . Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his work with all other parties involved with the job, and shall coordinate the supply of electrical power to the timing device (controller) . 4 . Upon substantial completion of work, the Contractor shall request a walk- through by the Landscape Architect to formulate a " punch list " . Contractor shall complete "punch list " items as quickly as possible, and request another walk-through to verify completion . Upon successful completion of the " punch list " items, the work will be accepted by the Owner. C . The contractor is responsible for his own bathroom and drinking facilities . 2B - 2 6 . UTILITIES ' A. Prior to excavation, verify in the field the location and depth of all new and existing utilities and take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such utilities . ' B . Repair to original condition, new and existing utilities and other work damaged by Contractor's construction. g ' C . In the case of damages to the irrigation system caused by others, the cost of repairing the work shall be paid by the party causing said damage. ' 7. SUBMITTALS ' A. After completion of piping installation, Contractor shall furnish the Owner's representative a reproducible " as built " drawing showing all sprinkler heads, valves, and pipelines to reasonable scale, and provide a minimum of two dimensions taken from fixed obvious objects to each automatic control valve, and quick coupling valve. The Contractor shall also furnish a drawing showing a graphic representation of sprinkler zones. ' B . Instruction sheets and parts lists covering all operating equipment shall be bound into a folder and furnished to the Owner's representative or Landscape Architect in two (2) copies. The Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the contract amount until the " as built " drawings and instructions and parts lists folders are received . ' C . Submit salt test results for irrigation well water. 8 . GUARANTEE ' A. Guarantee workmanshipfor period of one r p year after date of final acceptance. In addition, see to the fulfillment of all manufacturer' s warranties. B . The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a writtenarantee gu stating everything to be covered and any special conditions involved . PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' MATERIALS : Materials and equipment shall be new and shall operate at the manufacturer's published capacities. 1 . PIPE : Comply with the following unless otherwise indicated : All PVC pipe shall be 160 PSI, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC 1120) ASTM-D2241 , Type 1 , NSF approved . ' 2 . CROSSINGS : Comply with the following: All crossings under paved areas for water and conduit lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM-D1785 . 3 . PIPE FITTINGS : Comply with the following: For PVC plastic pipe, ASTM-132466 2B - 3 socket fittings with ASTM-A2564 solvent cement . 4 . SPRINKLER HEADS : Sprinkler heads shall be of the type shown on the drawings . Filter screens shall be included with all spray heads . 5 . RISERS AND SWING JOINTS : A. Risers and swing joints shall be as detailed on the drawings . B . Risers for shrub heads shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe. C . PVC Flex connections : Shall be Ag-Products heavy walled flexible PVC pipe or equal . Average length of each connection is referred to on the drawings . Special flex cement shall be utilized for making these connections. 6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES : Valves shall be as specified on the drawings . Use Teflon tape only on threaded connections . 7 . VALVE BOXES : Valve boxes shall be Ametek VP- 10 or approved equal . Install flush with finish grade as indicated on drawing. 8 . CONTROL WIRING: All wiring to automatic circuit valves shall be OF- 14 direct burial wire of a different color than the black and white wires used on the 115 volt A. C . power. Wiring from the controller to the valves shall be installed in same trench as the mainline where possible . All splices shall be made with Rain Bird snap-tite connectors, or approved equal . All wire shall be furnished in minimum 2, 500' reels and spliced only at valve or tee locations . 9 . CONTROLLER: Controller shall be as specified on the drawings. 10 . PUMP : Shall be a centrifugal, high head type as specified on the drawings. 11 . STRAINER: Shall be by Vu Flo, or approved equal . PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 . GENERAL: The Contractor shall be responsible for full and complete coverage of all irrigated areas and shall make any necessary adjustments at no additional cost to the Owner. 2 . INSTALLATION A. EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING: 1 . Perform all excavations as required for the installation of the work included under this section, including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, etc . , damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original conditions . 2B - 4 ' 2 . Trenches shall be made wide enough to allow amini mum of 2 orches between parallel pipe lines . The minimum vertical clearance between lines crossing at ' angles greater than 45 degrees is 1 inch. Trenches for pipe lines shall be made of sufficient depth to provide the minimum cover from finish grade as follows : ' a. 16 in. minimum cover over main lines . b . 16 in, minimum cover over control wires . c. 12 in . minimum cover over lateral lines to heads . 3 . Where possible, install pipe adjacent to curbs or paving to minimize ' interference with plants and their roots. Coordinate with landscape installer regarding proposed plant material locations . t4 . Keep trenches free of obstruction and debris that could tend to damage pipe and control wires. Remove excess soil from the site and leave grade as it was ' prior to sprinkler system installation. Piping shall be routed around shrubs, trees and other permanent obstacles . B . PIPE LINE ASSEMBLY 1 . Install plastic pipe as recommended by the manufacturer . and provide for ' expansion and contraction . Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends prior to installation so that a smooth unobstructed flow will be obtained . ' 2 . Install remote control valves at locations no closer than 12 inches to walk edges, buildings, and walls . Plastic pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded using solvents and methods as recommended by manufacturer of the pipe, except where screwed connections are required. Pipe and fittings shall be ' thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent with a nonsynthetic bristle brush. Care should be taken not to use an excess amount of solvent, thereby causing a burr or obstruction to form on the inside of the pipe . Allow the joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure on PVC pipe . Do not use PVC cement which has begun to gel. Do not attempt to make pipe connections during inclement weather conditions. C . SPRINKLER HEADS : Large gear-driven rotary type shall be installed so that the top is slightly above finish grade . If finish grade has not been established, set the top four inches above grade and lower when finish grade has been achieved . Sprinklers on risers shall be set at elevations so that there is no interruption of the stream from the sprinkler nozzle caused by plant material during the first growing season ( 1 year from date of installation) . Heads along curbs and walks shall be set flush to within 118 inch and two to four inches away from curb or walk. Adjust heads having an adjustment stem, for the proper radius and throw for the area ' involved . D . CONTROL WIRES : Shall be installed in a neat and orderly fashion underneath 2B - 5 17 the main and lateral pipes, if possible. Ten-inch loops shall be provided at each valve where control wires are connected . All wires passing under existing or future paving, construction, etc . , shall be encased in plastic pipe as specified, extending at least twelve inches beyond edges of paving or construction. E. TESTING: All main lines shall be hydrostatically tested in the presence of the Owner's representative at a pressure of 40 psi for a period of time not less than four (4) hours, should any leaks be found, they shall be repaired . The line shall then be retested until satisfactory. All lateral lines downstream from the remote control valves shall be visually inspected for leaks, should any be found, they shall be repaired . The line shall then be retested until satisfactory. F. BACKFILL AND COMPACTING After system is approved or sections thereof, backfill excavations and trenches with clean soil, free of rubbish. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered shall be compacted to a minimum 90% of its maximum density (AASHTO T480) . Dress off all areas to finish grades. G. PUMP ENCLOSURE : I . Pump house shall be pre-manufactured fiberglass enclosure bolted onto 6 " thick 3000 P . S . I . concrete slab . . 1 . 2 . Provide adequate interior space for maintenance. Approx. size: 4' x 4' x T tall . Increase size if necessary to accommodate equipment . 3 . Submit shop drawings for review prior to constructing. H . FINAL ADJUSTMENT Balance and adjust the irrigation system components for efficient, proper operation. This includes controller synchronization as well as individual settings of control stations. 3 . INSTRUCTIONS A. LABELS 1 . Number each zone valve box on underside of valve box cover with a black waterproof marker for reference. Numbers shall match the zone numbers on the drawings . 2 . Number each zone valve control wire at the controller with a waterproof marker and tags . Numbers shall match the zone numbers on the drawings . B . MAINTENANCE 1 . Maintain the irrigation system until final acceptance of the work. Maintenance shall include work, materials and replacements necessary to insure a complete properly operating system. 2 . It will be the Owner's responsibility to maintain the system in working order 2B - 6 duringthe guarantee gu antee penod, performing necessary Honor maintenance, keeping grass from obstructing the sprinkler heads and preventing vandalism and ' damage during the landscape maintenance operation . 4 . CLEANING: The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises (grounds and pavements) free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work. 2B - 7 i SECTION 0 2 015 - TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1 . 02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor and materials for installation and maintenance of a trench safety system . B . Trench excavations in materials other than solid rock, greater than (5) five feet in depth , or where directed by the Owner' s Representative, the Contractor shall provide a trench safety system . 1903 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B . Section 02660 - Water Distribution. C . Section 02700 - Sewerage and Drainage. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner' s Representative prior to construction, a "Trench Safety Plan" for protecting employees and the public exposed to the danger of moving ground for all excavations . The plan shall describe which method of protection or type of system will be used and where it will be used for each condition or situation encountered on the job . The plan shall comply with applicable OSHA standards . B . For any trench shoring system to be used other than shown in Table P-2 from the OSHA standard for excavating operations, the Contractor must provide certification by a Registered Professional Engineer that the system proposed by the Contractor provides protection "equal to" or "greater than" the protection provided by the Trench Shoring Systems shown in OSHA Table P-2 , C . The Contractor shall provide a bid item on his schedule of values stating the unit cost of trench safety. The cost of the trench safety system shall be included in the Contractor' s base bid, and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . The trench safety system shall meet the appropriate requirements established in the 02015 - 1 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR, Part 1926 , ' Subpart P- Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring. 1906 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination : Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. ' PART 2 = PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Timber: Timber for trench sheeting shall be hardwood, a minimum of two inches in thickness, solid and sound, and free from weakening defects such as loose knots and splits. B . Steel Sheet Piling : Steel sheet piling shall conform to one of the following specifications : ASTM A328 , ASTM A572 Grade 50, or ASTM A690 . C . Stringers and Cross Bracing : Steel for stringers and cross bracing shall conform to ASTM A588 . D . Portable Trench Boxes : Portable trench boxes shall be constructed of steel conforming to ASTM Specification A36 . Connecting bolts used shall conform to ASTM A307 . All ' welds and welding shall conform to AWS D1 . 1 . PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed . Report in writing to Owner ' s Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the work . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected . B . Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall ' then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered . ' 3 . 02 GENERAL A . The trench safety system shall be constructed, installed , and maintained in accordance ' with the plans and/or to the design prepared by the Contractor ' s Registered Professional Engineer, to prevent death or injury to personnel or damage to structures in or near these trench excavations . Materials excavated from the trench shall be stored no closer to the edge of the trench than one-half the depth of the trench. ' 02015 - 2 i 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A . Timber sheeting shall be installed in accordance with OSHA requirements . The timber sheeting shall be driven to the depth of the trench bottom . Cross braces shall be placed in the true horizontal position, spaced vertically and secured to prevent sliding, falling , or kickouts . B . Steel sheet piling of equal or greater strength may be substituted for timber trench shoring . The Contractor shall provide certification that the steel sheet piling substituted provides equal or greater protection than the timber shoring. The certification for the sheet piling shall be provided by a Registered Professional Engineer. The steel sheet piling shall be driven to the minimum depth below the trench bottom as recommended by the Registered Professional Engineer providing the design . Place cross braces in true horizontal position, spaced vertically and secure to prevent sliding, falling or kickouts . C . Portable trench boxes may be substituted for the timber trench shoring. The trench box shall be designed to provide equal or greater protection than the timber trench shoring . Certification of the design shall be provided by the Contractor prior to its use on the project . In cases where the top of the portable trench box will be below the top of the trench, the trench must be sloped to the approximate angle of repose for the soil conditions existing on the project. In areas where the sloped trench will affect the integrity of existing structures, the Contractor shall take measures necessary to protect the structures prior to sloping the trench . D . When trench jacks are used for cross bracing and or stringers, the Contractor shall provide certification by the Manufacturer, that the trench jacks provide protection greater = than or equal to timber cross bracing. E . In trenches four (4) feet deep or greater, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of trench egress using ladders or steps . Ladders must extend three (3 ) feet above the existing ground level . Ladders shall be positioned in accordance with the following : Trench Length Position of Ladder Less than 10 feet At center Less than 25 feet At third points Less than 50 feet At each end and center Greater than 50 feet Not more than 25 feet 3 . 04 SUPERVISION A . The Contractor shall provide competent supervisory personnel at each trench while work is in progress , to ensure that the Contractor' s methods , procedures, equipment and materials pertaining to the safety systems , are sufficient to meet the requirements of OSHA Standards and Regulations . 02015 - 3 3 . 05 MAINTENANCE ' A. The safety system shall be maintained in its original g nal condition . The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that the safety systems are not damaged during their ' use . If, at any time during its use, a safety system is damaged, personnel shall be immediately removed from the trench or excavated area and the safety system repaired . The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no excessive loads are imposed on the excavation. ' 3 . 06 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall make a daily inspection of the trench safety system to ensure that the system meets OSHA requirements . Daily inspections shall be made by competent personnel . If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, all work in the trench shall cease until the necessary precautions have ben taken to safeguard personnel entering the trench . The Contractor shall maintain permanent records of all daily inspections . 3 . 07 REMOVAL ' A. Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall progress together from g bottom of trench upwards . The Contractor shall remove no braces or trench supports until all personnel ' have evacuated the trench. The trench shall be backfilled to within five (5) feet of natural ground prior to removal of the entire trench safety system . None of the trench safety system can remain in-place without the written permission of the Owner ' s ' Representative. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 1 i ' 02015 - 4 SECTION 02010 - SITE CONDITIONS & SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION As per the following prepared soils investigation report prepared by Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc . , and dated June 2000 . 02010- 1 ' SUBSURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATION FOR PROPOSED NORTH COUNTY REGIONAL PARK NORTH COUNTY PARK NORTH SIDE OF CR 512 WEST OF SEBASTIAN RIVER MIDDLE SCHOOL Indian River County, Florida ' June 2000 ' Prepared for: Indian River County Public Works Department FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTIN 3504 INDUSTRIAL, 33RD STREET • Fr, p� G� INC. IN C• �, FLORIDA 34946 • TELEPHONE (561) 4614508 FAX (56I ) 46I -8880 t FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET • FT. PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 • TELEPHONE (561 ) 461 -7508 • FAX (561 ) 461 -8880 June 15 , 1999 Indian River County Public Works Department Attention: Mr . Chris Kafer, P . E . 1840 25" Street Vero Beach, Florida 32960-3365 Re : Proposed North County Regional Park Indian River County Project No . 9926 FET Job# : D-00262 Ladies and Gentlemen : The following is our report of the subsurface investigation for the above referenced project . The report presents our understanding of the project, the results of the field exploration program, our analysis of the foundation conditions, and recommendations for design bearing pressures and site preparation. SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION The site is on the north side of CR 512 just west of the Sebastian River Middle School property. The site is relatively flat and is currently undeveloped pasture land with tall grass, scattered trees and some light brush. In the southeast corner of the site there will be a shallow activity pool, an Olympic pool/diving facility and a pool house . There will also be paved and grass parking and associated paved roadways . In the south center portion of the site there will be a configuration of four baseball fields . There will be a two - story concession stand in the center of the ballfield area and a maintenance building at the south end of the ballfield area. In the northern portion of the site there will be a configuration of six soccer fields. There will be a playground area between the baseball fields and the soccer fields. We understand that several feet of fill will be placed in the areas of the pools and buildings and in the roadway/parking areas. The ballfield and soccer areas will also be filled. There will seven lakes on the project and the soil to be excavated from the lakes will be used as site fill. Y ' Indian River Countv Public Works Department Proposed North County Regional Park June 15 , 2000 FIELD INVESTIGATION A total of twenty (20) Standard Penetration Test Borings ( SPTs) were taken at designated locations across the site . Thirteen ( 13 ) SPTs were taken in the areas of the proposed swimming pools and ' building areas, and are designated on the boring logs and the layout map as SS (split spoons) borings . Six (6) SPTs were taken within the proposed lake areas and one ( 1 ) SPT was taken in the center of the soccer field area, and are designated on the boring logs and the layout map as SB (soil borings) . A water management district Hydraulic Conductivity Test was also performed. The approximate test locations are noted on the layout drawing and the boring logs are enclosed . Depth, as noted on the logs, represents the depth below the existing grades at the time the borings were taken. The SPT borings were completed employing mud rotary techniques. Samples of the in-place materials were recovered using a standard split barrel driven with a 140-pound hammer freely falling ' 30 inches (ASTM D- 1586, 'Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils ") . Samples collected from the borings were returned to our office where they were visually classified . SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS iThe subsurface conditions are relatively consistent throughout the site . Below an approximately 6- inch thick layer of soil containing surface organics, the soils in the upper 2 to 2 . 5 feet are fine sands having minimal silt/clay content and are in a generally medium dense condition. Below the surface fine sands to the termination depths of the SPTs, the soils are fine sands containing varying amounts of silt and clay, and are in a generally medium dense to loose condition. The depth to the groundwater at the time the borings were taken ranged from 4 . 3 to 5 . 2 feet below the existing grades. It is our opinion the water table levels noted on the boring logs are about 1 foot below the average dry season water table due to the recent prolonged dry period. We estimate the average wet season water table levels are about 4 feet above the noted levels or within 1 foot of the ground surface . FOUNDATION ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS The results of the test borings indicate suitable subsurface soil conditions for support of the proposed structures using conventional shallow footing foundations. All site preparation, any excavation and backfilling required during site preparation, fill placement, and excavation for footings should be performed as outlined in the following section. Please note that the recommendations in the ' following section include compaction of the original ground prior to fill placement. Our soil bearing capacity recommendations are contingent upon adequate testing of the original ground as well as the foundation fill. ' 2 Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc . Indian River County Public Works Department Proposed North County Regional Park June 15 , 2000 Based on the existing and proposed grades, several feet of fill will be placed in the building areas . In order to minimize any fill induced settlements, we recommend that all of the fill required to bring the slab areas to grade be placed and compacted prior to footing excavation. With the above criteria satisfied a soil bearing pressure of 2 ,500 pounds per square foot may be used in the design of the footings. BUILDING AND POOL AREA SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS Building and Pool Areas Site Preparation and Earthwork The foundation areas should be cleared of all trees, roots, surface vegetation, and any other deleterious matter to 5 feet outside of the proposed structure and pool areas. After clearing, the areas should be graded to an even grade and then compacted with a self-propelled steel drum vibratory roller having a minimum total applied force of 10 tons. Sufficient compactive effort should be applied to obtain a minimum of 95 % density per ASTM D- 1557 for a depth of 2 feet . The vibratoryroller should make a minimum of 8 overlapping passes, 4 in one direction, and 4 in a direction at right angles over the entire cleared area. Soil density tests should be taken in the upper 2 feet prior to fill placement . If any unstable soil conditions or soft areas are encountered during compaction operations, the project engineer, geotechnical consultant or other responsible professional should be informed, the matter investigated and a resolution determined . Fill Placement Where fill is to be placed on the existing ground, the surface must first be prepared as outlined above . The outer edges of the fill should extend out a sufficient distance to allow for compacted fill extending for a minimum of 6 feet beyond the structure outline at final grades . Due to the likelihood of a high ground water table, the first 2 feet of fill should be a uniform free draining granular soil (clean sand containing less than 3 % material finer than the No . 200 sieve) and be placed in layers not to exceed 15 inches loose measure and compacted as outlined above . Provided a dry, stable surface is achieved, the remaining fill may contain up to 7% material finer than the No . 200 sieve . Sufficient compactive effort should be applied to obtain a minimum of 95 % density for all of the fill layers. Sufficient soil density tests should be taken to verify the density has been achieved . Footing Excavation Once the footings have been excavated, representative density tests should be taken. The density at 3 Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc . Indian River County Public Works Department Proposed North County Regional Part: June 15 , 2000 the footing grade should be a minimum of 95 % density. If the bottom of the footing has been ' loosened during excavation, the footing area should be compacted with a heavy plate vibratory compactor. Sufficient compactive effort should be applied to achieve the 95 % density. ' Pool Decks The earth walls of the pool excavation usually extend out a few feet from the pool walls into the deck area. It is essential the entire depth of the backfill placed in this area is compacted to 95 % density per ASTM D- 1557 . Groundxlater Heavy rainfall and/or a high water table may occur before the earthwork commences, or during the iearthwork operation. When these conditions occur and the site preparation cannot be achieved as specified. an evaluation of the existing conditions should be conducted and the specifications revised accordingly. On-Site Inspection We recommend that the site preparation and subsequent earthwork be monitored by a qualified soils technician. The soils technician should be responsible to observe the compaction of the building and pavement areas, determine the suitability of the fill and backfill, and take representative density tests on the prepared surface, fill, backfill, and footing excavations. PAVEMENT AREA PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS Pavement Area Preparation and Earthwork The pavement areas should be cleared of all trees, roots, surface vegetation, and any other deleterious matter to 3 feet outside of the proposed paved areas. After clearing, the area should be graded to an even grade and then compacted with a self-propelled steel drum vibratory roller having a minimum total applied force of 10 tons . Sufficient compactive effort should be applied to obtain a minimum ' of 95 % density per ASTM D- 1557 for a depth of 2 feet . The vibratory roller should make a minimum of 6 overlapping passes, 3 in one direction, and 3 in a direction at right angles over the ' entire cleared area. Soil density tests should be taken in the upper 2 feet prior to fill placement . If any unstable soil conditions or soft areas are encountered during compaction operations, the project engineer, geotechnical consultant or other responsible professional should be informed, the matter ' investigated and a resolution determined. ' 4 Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc . Indian River County Public Works Department Proposed North County Regional Park June 15 , 2000 Due to the likelihood of a high ground water table, the first 1 foot of fill should be a uniform free draining granular soil (clean sand containing less than 3 % material finer than the No . 200 sieve) and be placed in layers not to exceed 15 inches loose measure and compacted as outlined above . Provided a dry, stable surface is achieved, the remaining fill may contain up to 7% material finer than the No . 200 sieve. Sufficient compactive effort should be applied to obtain a minimum of 95 % density for all of the fill layers . Sufficient soil density tests should be taken to verify the density has been achieved. With the above criteria satisfied, a standard pavement section may be constructed. All methods and materials should be in accordance with the latest version of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, UTILIZATION OF SOIL FROM LAKE EXCAVATIONS As noted in the project description, soil to be excavated from the lakes will be used as site fill. The soils in the upper 2 to 2 . 5 feet designated on the boring logs as fine sands dry rapidly and compact easily, even under wet conditions, and have a high permeability rate . These soils are excellent for building foundation or roadway fill. The soils designated as fine sands with traces of silt and clay or slightly silty, slightly clayey will take some drying time before they can be compacted and they have a relatively slow permeability rate . Soils designated as silty, clayey fine sands contain appreciable amounts of silt and clay (we estimate combined silt/clay content in the 12% to 20% range) . They do not drain well and are difficult to compact when wet and have a very slow permeability rate . Although these soils are technically suitable for use as fill, considerable drying time in stockpiles will be necessary. Use of these soils in structural areas often results in project delays. If sand with minimal silt and clay content is needed, we recommend that dredging be considered . If the lakes are dredged, it should be feasible to perform the dredging in a manner that would remove the majority of the silt and clay from the soil. If this approach is to be taken, we recommend consulting with a contractor familiar with dredging these type soils. CLOSURE This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted foundation engineering practices. The recommendations presented herein are based on the data obtained from the soil borings previously described . No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made. We do not guarantee project performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional care . This report may not account for all possible variations that may exist between conditions observed in the borings and conditions at locations that were not explored. The nature and extent of any such variations may not become evident until fin-ther explorations are made or 5 Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc. Indian River County Public Works Department Proposed North County Regional Park June 15 , 2000 guarantee project performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional care. This report may not account for all possible variations that may exist between conditions observed in the borings and conditions at locations that were not explored. The nature and extent of any such variations may not become evident until further explorations are made or construction is underway. If variations are then observed, we recommend that Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc. be requested to inspect the actual site conditions and, if necessary, re-evaluate the recommendations of this report. It has been our pleasure to assist you in this phase of your project. If you have any questions about this report or need any additional information, please call at your convenience . Respectfully submitted, FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC . Alexander H. Fraser, P . E . Florida Registration No . 16178 AHF :da Copies : Client - 2 Carter Associates, Inc . - 1 Brad Smith Associates, Inc . - 1 6 Fraser Engineering and Testing, Inc. F' RASER ENGINEERING A t _ ND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDSTREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800 . 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION p 0.0 8 Sand, light brown fine 2 14 3 .0 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 18 6 6 .o 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 8 8 . 0 clayey 16 Sand , light brown & gray fine , with traces of silt & 10 clay 12 13 . 0 14 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty 16 18 r2010 8 . 0 4 Sand , medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with 20 traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 4 .4 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS - 1 (2) GROUND WATER ._ DATE DRILLED : 5130/00 JOB NO . : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283.7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 .9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION ' 0 0.0 12 Sand, light brown fine 2 ,52 183 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 4 27 5 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 6 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , with traces of shell fragments r g 10 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 8 Sand, light brown & gray fine , with traces of silt 16 ' 18 .0 18 2 Sand , medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with 20 20 . 0 traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 .0 Water Table at 4 . 8 ' (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . , SS -2 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/30/00 JOB NO. : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283.7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800.233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION p 0.0 14 Sand, light brown fine 2 l 1 r5 , 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 21 -- 6 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 4 clayey 8 13 9 .0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty, slightly clayey 16 18 18 .0 2 Sand , medium brown fine , silty , with traces of shell 20 20 . 0 fragments Boring Terminated at 20.0 Water Table at 4 . 3 (1) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS- 3 (2) GROUND WATER _. DATE DRILLED : 5/30/00 JOB NO . : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . ' 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 .9011 ' DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0 .0 15 Sand, light brown fine 2 19 3 .0 4 4 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine, silty , clayey 23 _ ' 6 6 . 0 Sand, light brown & Yfne, slightly silty , slightly clayey 17 7 . 0 Sand , light brown fine 8 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 15 9 .0 clayey 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 .0 14 4 Sand , medium brown fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey r 16 18 . 0 18 3 Sand , medium brown fine , silty ,clayey , with traces of 20 20 , 0 shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 7 ( 1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . : SS -4 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/30/00 JOB NO . : D-00262 ' CLIENT : Indian River County Public SITE : North Count Regional County g 1 Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 4 - - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 .9011 DEPTH (ft. ) ( 1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0.0 10 Sand, light brown fine 2 12 3 . 0 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine, silty, clayey 4 4 16 — 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine, slightly silty , slightly clayey 8 8 . 9 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 7 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 18 18 . 0 2 Sand , medium brown fine , silty ,clayey , with traces of 20 20 . 0 shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . : SS - 5 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/30/00 JOB NO . : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567 .6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING INC ._ 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION ' 0 0 .0 17 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 5 19 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 26 — 5 .0 ' 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 31 clayey 8 ' 10 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 7 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly ' clayey 16 18 18 . 0 1 Sand , medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with ' 20 20 . 0 traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 ' (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . : SS -6 (2) GROUND WATER _ DATE DRILLED : 5/31 /00 JOB NO. : D-00262 ' CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDSTREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) ( 1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0 .0 13 Sand , light brown fine "Y 2 2 . 5 12 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 22 — 5 . 0 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 22 clayey 8 . 10 9 . 5 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 7 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 18 18 . 0 1 Sand, medium brown & gray fine , silty , slightly clayey , 20 . 0 with traces of shell fragments 20 Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . : SS -7 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/31 /00 JOB NO . : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567 .6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 T - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800 .233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) 0. 0 BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 15 Sand , light brown fine 2 23 3 .0 ' 4 Sand , light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with thin 30 — sand seams ' 6 6 . 5 16 8 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 11 9 . 5 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 ' 13 . 0 14 5 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 18 18 . 0 2 Sand , medium brown fine , silty , clayey , with traces of ' 20 20 . 0 shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 ' (1) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . . SS - 8 ' (2) GROUNDWATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/31 /00 JOB NO . : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 ' Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 . 8880 - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800.233 .9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0 .0 7 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 0 7 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 4 18 _ 5 . 5 6 18 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 8 5 9 . 5 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 14 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 18 18 .0 2 Sand, medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with 20 20.0 traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 5 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO . : SS -9 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5/31 /00 JOB NO. : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 . 7711 FAX 561 .461 . 8890 T Z7 _ . _ FRASER ENGINEERING AND T 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDS'T'REET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 STu � �' INC . HONE 800. 233 .9011 '7 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) T'(2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION ' 0 0. 0 ' 12 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 5 14 ' 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 25 = 6 6 . 5 14 8 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty, slightly 13 9 . 0 clayey 10 Sand, light gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 . 0 _ 14 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightl r clayey Y silty , slightly 16 ' 18 18 . 0 5 Sand, medium brown & gray fine , silty , slightly clayey , ' 20 20. 0 with traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 ' Water Table at 4 . 3 ' (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS - 10 (2) GROUND WATER DATE DRILLED : 5/31 /00 JOB NO. : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE ; NOS County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 . 7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 ERASER ENGINEERING � AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33 STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 , 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0. 0 ION 15 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey, with sand 4 4 . 0 seams 13 = Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty, slightly 6 6. 0 clayey 8 22 Sand, light brown & gray fine, slightly silty , clayey, with traces of shell fragments slightly 19 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 12 13 . 0 14 3 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 16 18 18 . 0 20 2 20. 0 Sand , medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 (1) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS - l l (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 5131100 JOB NO. : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE , Works De North County Regional Park Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 . 7508VERA BEACH 561 .567.6167 ��j STUART 561 .283.7711 FAX 561 .461 . 8880 � - FRA SER ENGINEERING AND TESTIN INC .3504 INDUSTRIAL 33 � STREET FORT PIERCE, u � G� a ' FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL' DESCRIPTION 0 0. 0 ' 2 12 2 . 0 Sand, light brown fine 4 17 3 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine, silty , clayey 6 Sand , light brown & gray fine, slightly silty , slightly ' 6 — clayey 15 7 . 0 8 Sand , light brown & gray fine , with traces 7 of shell 10 9 . 5 fragments Sand, light brown & gray fine, silty , clayey 12 y ' 13 . 0 14 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine ,' 16 clayey slightly silty , slightly 18 18 . 0 ' 20 4 2000 Sand, medium brown & gray fine , silty, clayey Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 4. 8 ' (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS - 12 (2) GROUND WATER DATE DRILLED : 5/31100 JOB NO. : D_00262 ' CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE. North Works Department County Regio=Park CR 512 Indian River County FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERA BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 . 8880 - FRASER ENGINE 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDEKING AND TESTING, INC . STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTIO 0 0. 0 N 15 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 0 11 Sand , light brown & gray fine, silty , cla e 4 yy 28 6 5 .5 28 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty, slightly 8 clayey 29 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , e silty , clayey YY 12 13 . 0 14 7 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 16 clayey 18 18 . 0 IIIII 1 Sand, medium brown fine , siltyIII, clayey , with traces of 20 20. 0 shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 4 . 3 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SS - 13 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED: 5/31 /00 JOB NO. : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE: North CountyRegional Works Department g nal Park CR 512 Indian River Count , Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 . 7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART561I28397711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 F BASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . ' 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDSTREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800 . 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION t 0 0 . 0 ' 18 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 .0 19 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey t 4 25 5 .0 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly 29 clayey , with traces of shell fragments 8 17 9 .0 10 Sand , light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 12 ' 13 .0 14 4 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 ' 18 18 .0 4 Sand, medium brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with 20 200 traces of shell fragments Boring Terminated at 20 . 0 Water Table at 4 . 5 ' ( 1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SB - 1 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 6/02/00 ' JOB NO. : D-00262 ' CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 ' Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .-7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283.7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 .9011 DEPTH (ft. ) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0. 0 16 Sand, light brown fine 2 2 . 13 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey , with sand seams 32 5 .0 6 Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 15 TO 8 Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey , with 24 9 .0 traces of shell fragments 10 Sand, light gray fine , silty , clayey 12 13 .0 14 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 16 18 18 .0 4 Sand , medium brown fine , silty , clayey 20 20 . 0 Boring Terminated at 20.0 Water Table at 4 . 5 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SB -2 (2) GROUND WATER — DATE DRILLED : 6/02/00 JOB NO. : D_00262 CLIENT . Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 - FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 ' DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0.0 ' 13 0 5 Sand, medium gray fine, slightly organic , with grass 2 2 Sand , light brown fine 5 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 4 .5 16 _ ' 6 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey , with pieces of cemented sand & shell fragments 21 8 21 9 . 0 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey ' 12 13 . 0 14 11 Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , slightly ' clayey 16 18 18 . 0 ' 3 Sand, medium brown fine , silty , clayey 20 20 .0 Boring Terminated at 20 .0 ' Water Table at 4 . 5 ( 1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO SB -3 ' (2) GROUND WATER _ DATE DRILLED : 6/02/00 JOB NO. : D-00262 ' CLIENT : Indian River Count Public tc SITE . North County Regional Park ' Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 ' VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283 .7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 - FRASER ENGINEERING AND 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT P TESTING , INC , PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (fL) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0.0 13 Sand, light brown fine 2 15 24 4 Sand, light brown & gray fine, silty , clayey 20 _ 5 .0 6 18 7 . 0 Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey 8 Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey , with 15 traces of shell fragments 10 12 r13 . 0l� 14 9 Sand , light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 16 18 18 .0 2 Sand, medium brown fine , silty , clayey 20 20.0 Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 4 . 5 (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SB -4 (2) GROUND WATER - DATE DRILLED: 6/02!00 JOB NO. : D_00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 .7508 VERO BEACH 561567.6167 SMART 561 .283.7711 FAX 561 .461 . 8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC . 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 9011 DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION ' 0 0.0 2 16 2 . 0 Sand, light brown fine ' 4 13 3 , 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 19 _ Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty , slightly clayey , with ' 6 — pieces of cemented sand & shell fragments 20 g 8 . 0 l0 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , with traces 10 of shell fragments 12 ' 13 . 0 14 5 Sand, light brown & gray fine ' clayey , slightly silty , slightly 16 ' 1s 18 . 0 ' 20 20 . 0 Sand, medium brown fine, slightly silty , slightly clayey Boring Terminated at 20. 0 ' Water Table at 4 . 8 ' (1 ) "N" VALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT BORING NO. : SB -5 (2) GROUND WATER DATE DRILLED : 6/02/00 JOB NO. : D-00262 CLIENT: 11. 11, Indian River County Public SI Works Department YE ' Nom County Regional Park CR 512 Indian River County, Florida FORT PIERCE 561 .461 . 7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567. b167 STUART 561 .283.7711 g ' AX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINES 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RDRING AND TESTING, INC . STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE8 00.233 . 9011PHONE DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0.0 2 12 2 .0 Sand, light brown fine 12 3 . 0 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty, clayey 4 • 4 . o y Sand, light brown & gshell fragments fine , silty,ment clayey, with traces I S Of cemented sand & 6 _ g s 23 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , sli htl g 8 . 0 clayey, with traces of shell fragments g y 10 10 Sand, light gray fine , slightly silty, slightly clayey 12 13 . 0 14 12 Sand, light brown & gray fine , with 16 clay traces of silt & 18 18 . 0 4 Sand , medium brown fine, silt , clayey yey 20 20 . 0 Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 5. 2 (1) «NVALUE - BLOWS PER FOOT (2) GROUNDWATER BORING NO. : SB -6 DATE DRILLED : 6/02/00 JOB NO. : 13..00262 CLIENT; Indian River County public SITE : North County Regional Park Works Department CR 512 Indian River County, Florida - FORT PIERCE 561 .461 . 7508 VERO BEACH 561 .567.6167 STUART 561 .283. 7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 FRASER ENGINEERING AND . _ 3504 INDUSTRIAL 33RD STREET INC . STREET FORT PIERCE, FLORIDA 34946 * PHONE 800. 233 . 90�1l DEPTH (ft.) (1 ) (2) ' BORING LOG - SOIL DESCRIPTION 0 0. 0 22 Sand, light brown & gray fine 2 22 4 4.5 Sand, light brown & gray fine , silty , clayey 11 6 — Sand , light brown & gray fine , slightly silty , sli htl 22 clayey, with traces of shell fragmentsg y 8 ' 24 10 12 13 , 0 14 10 Sand, light brown & gray fine , slightly silty, slightly 16 clayey ' 18 4 19 . 0 ' III IIIIIIIII 20 20. 0 Sand, medium brown fine , silty, claye ' Boring Terminated at 20. 0 Water Table at 5 . 2 ' (1) "N" VALUE . BLOWS PER FOOT (2) GROUND WATER — BORING NO. : SB - ' DATE DRILLED : 6/09/00 JOB NO, : D-00262 CLIENT: Indian River County Public SITE : North Count Works Department Y Regional Park CR 512 FORT PIERCE 561 .461 . 7508 Indian River County, Florida vERO BEACH 561 .567. 6167 sTUART 561 .283. 7711 FAX 561 .461 .8880 SECTION 02201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1 . SCOPE A . The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment, and all operations required to ' clear and grub the site as shown on the Plans and specified herein. 2. GENERAL A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush, logs , stumps, roots, weeds , rubbish, rocks, structures designated to be removed, concrete and other deleterious material and obstructions resting upon or protruding through the surface of the ground . Stumps , roots 3 " and over and similar obstructions shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the existing ground. All structural items shall be excavated to full depth, completely removed, and the excavation backfilled per these specifications . Be The Contractor shall clear and grub the areas described below: 1 ) Within the areas of development. 3 . DISPOSAL A . BURNING PERMITTED ON SITE 1 . When permitted by local governing authorities , trees, stumps , brush, weeds and similar natural materials may be burned on site . The Contractor shall dispose of all unburned residue off site, and if required by the Engineer, spread the ash. Material which will not burn or will not burn without air pollution such as asphalt and tires shall be hauled off site for disposal in an approved manner. B . OFF SITE DISPOSAL 1 . When on site burning is not permitted, all material shall be hauled off site by the Contractor for disposal in an approved manner. C . The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with the provisions of all necessary permits . All fees shall be paid by the Contractor. D . No material shall be buried on site . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02201 . doc 02201 - 1 iSECTION 02202 EXCAVATION L SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, equipment, and transportation to excavate and haul material in accordance with the Plans and Specifications . 2 . GENERAL ' A . The Contractor shall excavate for the roadways , structures, swales , etc . , as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, and shall dispose of all materials excavated at a site designated or approved by the Owner. 3 . DISPOSAL A . In all areas where excavation is to be done, all earth, rock, muck and other materials shall be removed and separated as to suitable and unsuitable material for backfill as defined herein. B . The Contractor may, for his own convenience, elect to temporarily stockpile any portion of the excavated material at a job site location designated by the Owner, for later use or disposal . The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as not to endanger the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site location . All excavated unsuitable material shall be disposed of at a location designated or approved by the Owner. All excavated suitable material that is not reused by the Contractor within the job site shall become the property of the Owner and shall be disposed of as directed by the Owner. 4 . SHEE'T'ING AND BRACING A . Where excavations may endanger workmen y , existing structures, utilities or other facilities , it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to immediately install and maintain adequate sheeting and bracing per OSHA specifications in order to protect said facility . No work shall proceed in such excavations until the sheeting and bracing has been properly and completely installed . The sheeting thus installed shall be removed as the work progresses or, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut off below finished grade and left in place . Sheeting and bracing may be either steel or wood at the option of the Contractor. B . Sheeting and bracing shall be installed in a manner that will allow for removal without injuring or endangering workmen, the work, adjacent structures, and the like . Voids caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be promptly and completely filled with sand and compacted to a degree equal to the surrounding soil . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02202 . doc 02202 - 1 5. DEWATERING A . All water encountered during excavation shall be promptly and completely removed to a depth below the exposed excavation surface sufficient to provide a dry working surface. The excavation shall be kept dry until the work to be built or placed therein has been completed as specified . Dewatering shall be done in a manner that will not cause sloughing or caving of the excavation walls . Water from said dewatering shall be disposed of in a manner as will not result in violations of State water quality standards in receiving waters , nor cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to the work completed or in progress . Any and all damage caused by dewatering shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The receiving point for water from said operation shall be approved by the applicable regulatory agency and the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and any other approval necessary . 6 . REMOVAL OF MUCK, ROCK AND OTHER UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. All muck, rock , clay, marl, gravel , boulders, heterogeneous fill material and any other organic or unsuitable " materials of excavation" encountered under pavement areas , structures and utilities shall be excavated and removed. Also any " unforeseen obstacles " such as buried trees or timbers , abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses , or any other type of debris encountered shall be removed . Be Stripping shall be accomplished to clean in-place sand or other suitable material as approved by the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material within areas which are to receive footings, slabs or other foundations shall be completed for the full area under such structures and to ten feet minimum outside the maximum perimeter. Where pavement is to be placed, said removal shall include all area under the surface and extend to the outside of shoulders and under sidewalks and bike paths, or as directed by the Engineer. C . All roots, stumps , logs , limbs, timbers, boulders, or any material which is not suitable for backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly and excavated and disposed of by the Contractor at his expense . D . All " materials of excavation" and " unforeseen obstacles " will be considered as incidental to construction and no additional compensation will be allowed . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02202 . doc 02202 - 2 ' SECTION 02203 GENERAL & SELECT FILL, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION ' 1 . SCOPE A . The Contractor shall furnish all of the material , equipment, plant, labor, transportation and supervision necessary so as to complete the Work as shown on the Plans and specified herein. 2 . GENERAL A. Where structures or unsuitable material have been removed suitable backfill or fill material shall be provided, placed and compacted to elevate the site to the finish grade as shown on the grading plans. Pre-fill compaction shall be accomplished prior to this operation, as specified herein . 3 . MATERIAL rA. General Fill - All humus , peat, spongy material , roots, stumps , muck, paving materials , and other objectionable materials shall be unsuitable for backfill . Suitable material for backfill shall consist of sandy-loam, clayey-sand, sand, gravel , soft shale, or crushed stone . The Engineer shall be the sole judge of what constitutes suitable and unsuitable material for backfill other than those materials listed above . B . Select Fill - Shall consist of a clean sand containing less than 2% fines passing a No . 200 sieve and must have a uniformity coefficient of 1 . 5 or greater but not more than 4 . 0 . Effective grain size should be between 0 . 20 and 0 . 55 millimeters diameter. Laboratory permeability shall be greater than 80 ft/day . Laboratory sieve analysis and permeability test results of this fill shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval . 4 . BORROW A . If there is not sufficient excavated material of a suitable quality to complete the ' work, the Contractor shall provide and deliver the necessary suitable additional material to the job site . ' 5 . UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REPLACEMENT A . Fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in layers not to exceed eight inches before compaction. All fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, wood, and other deleterious substances , and shall not contain rocks or clods having a diameter of more than three inches . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02203 . doc 02203 - 1 B . If soil cement paving is proposed, local yellow sand or hard pan shall not be used for the subgrade nor in the base. 6. PRE-FILL COMPACTION A. Should the pre-fill surface elevation be below that required for the base of proposed building foundations or paving subgrade, the areas within road rights-of-ways , under parking areas, and the areas under and within five feet of proposed buildings shall be precompacted . This precompaction shall be performed equally on existing ground and on surfaces which have been excavated to remove unsuitable material . The top two (2) feet of said areas shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 % of maximum as determined by AASHTO T- 180 . The maximum spacing between density tests shall be 500 feet. 7. COMPACTION A. Backfill material shall be compacted to 95 % of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 . Equipment suitable and adequate for uniform compaction to the specified density shall be used for backfill operations subject to the approval of the Engineer. All compaction equipment shall be in good working order and any worn or defective equipment shall be immediately replaced or repaired . 8 . SOIL STABILITY AND COMPACTION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer. B . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to evaluate the method for approval . C . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer. D . In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural .class, a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of use. E. Tests for in-place density (percent compaction) shall be taken at locations designated by the Engineer. E:\PSW\P\99-9Ie\TechsSpecs\techspec-02203 .doc 02203 -2 ' SECTION 02204 ' GRASSING BY SODDING 1 . SCOPE A . The Contractor shall furnish all materials , labor, equipment and supervision ' required to prepare the soil , fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of grass by sodding of the areas so designated on the drawings and as specified herein. ' 2 . GENERAL A . PREPARATION 1 . The area to be sodded shall be clear of old sod and weeds . The area shall be fine graded and the surface loosened, by scarifying, if necessary . If the soil is dry it shall be moistened to provide an optimum growing condition . B . FERTILIZER 1 . Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area to be sodded at the rate of ' 400 to 500 pounds per acre . The fertilizer shall have a chemical designation of 124 - 8 . Soil which has a PH of 5 . 0 or lower shall , if directed by the Engineer, have an application of dolomite lime stone, but the amount of dolomite applied shall not raise the PH above 6 . 0 . C . SOD ' 1 . The sod shall be either St. Augustine or Bahia as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sod shall be of a tough texture with a good mat of roots . It shall be free of weeds and other objectionable grasses . Approximately three days prior to cutting the sod, it shall be closely mowed and raked to remove excess growth and debris . The sod shall be cut with sufficient thickness to retain the root system intact . There shall be a minimum of delay between the cutting of the sod and the laying so that it is live, fresh and uninjured when laid . i 1 ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02204 . doc 02204 - 1 D . LAYING 1 . No sod shall be laid until the Engineer has approved the condition of the prepared area. The sod shall be placed with the edges in close contact. Where the sod is laid on a slope the pieces of sod shall be laid with staggered joints to minimize erosion along the joints and where the sod is laid in drainage swales and ditches the joints shall be staggered in the line of flow for the same reason. After the sod is laid it shall be brought into close contact with the soil by tamping, light rolling or other acceptable means . Where the sod may slide due to the steep slope it shall be pegged to firm soil with wood pegs . E . WATERING 1 . The sod shall be kept watered on an as need basis for the duration of the contract period and in no case for less than two weeks . When the grass is watered it should be at the rate of one inch or 620 gallons per 1000 square feet per application. F. MAINTENANCE 1 , The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the , sodded area in a satisfactory condition until 30 days after final acceptance of the project or until the end of the two weeks watering period, which ever is later (see Paragraph E above) . Such maintenance shall include the filling, leveling and repair of any washed or eroded areas and the resodding of any areas which may have been damaged or are not growing satisfactorily. E : \ PSW\ P \ 99 - 91e \ TechsSpecs \ techspec - 02204 . doc 02204 - 2 SECTION 02205 GRASSING BY SEED & MULCH 1 . SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials , labor, equipment and supervision required to prepare the soil, fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of ' grass by applying seed, fertilizer and mulch by the method in the areas so designated on the Drawings, in areas disturbed by construction under this Contract and/or otherwise specified herein. i2 . GENERAL ' A. GENERAL As early in the contract as practical the Contractor shall prepare the areas to be grassed and plant them so as to allow time for establishment of a stand of grass prior to end of the Contract Period. Areas to be grassed shall be approved by the Engineer prior to planting . Seeding and mulching will not be permitted when wind velocities exceed 15 miles per hour. No seeding shall be done when the ground is unduly wet or in an untillable condition. B . EQUIPMENT 1 . Fertilizer Spreader - The device for spreading dolomitic limestone and fertilizer shall be capable of uniformly distributing the material at the specified rate. 2 . Seed Spreader - The seed spreader shall be an approved mechanical hand spreader or other approved type of spreader. ' 3 . Mulch Cutting Equipment - The mulching equipment shall be of a type capable of cutting the specified materials uniformly into the soil and to the required depth. ' 4 . Rollers - A traffic roller or other suitable equipment will be required for rolling the grassed areas . C . METHODS 1 . Area Preparation - The ground which is to be seeded shall be prepared by thoroughly pulverizing the soil to a depth of 2 to 4 inches . The prepared soil shall be loose and free of large clods, roots and other robjectionable material that will interfere with the grassing or maintenance operations . Prior to seeding & mulching, the ground shall have been fine graded to the plan section and reasonably smooth. C :\Down1oad\techspec-02205 .doc 1 02205- 1 2 . Application of Fertilizer -If there is reason to believe that the soil PH is lower than 5 . 5 , the Contractor shall have the soil tested. If it is below 5 . 0, the Contractor shall apply sufficient dolomite limestone to bring the PH to between 5 . 0 and 6 . 0 . The fertilizer to be used shall have a chemical designation of 12-8 - 8 . At least 50 percent of the phosphoric acid shall be from normal supper phosphate having a minimum of two units of sulphur. The fertilizer and/or limestone shall be spread uniformly over the area to be grassed at the rate of 1 , 000 pounds per acre . Immediately after the fertilizer is spread, it shall be mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately four inches . 3 . Seeding - While the soil is still loose and moist, the seed shall be scattered uniformly over the area. Unless otherwise directed, the grass seed shall be 20 part Bermuda and 80 parts Argentine Bahia. The Bahia seed shall be scarified seed having a total germination of 85 % . 10 to 20 parts of a Quick- growing noncompetitive grass seed such a millet or Italian rve shall be included to provide early ground cover. The rate of spread for the permanent-type seed mixture shall be 100 pounds per acre The rate of spread for the quick growing seed shall be 20 pounds per acre 4 . Mulching - Approximately two inches , loose thickness, of the mulch material shall be applied uniformly over the seeded . area, and the mulch material cut into the soil with the equipment specified so as to produce a loose mulched thickness of three to four inches . Care shall be exercised that the materials are not cut too deeply into the soil . 5 . Rolling - Immediately after completion of the seeding and mulching, the entire area shall be rolled thoroughly with the equipment specified. At least two trips over the entire area will be required. 6 . Watering - The seeded areas shall be watered so as to provide optimum growth conditions for the establishment of the grass . In no case, however, shall the period of maintaining such moisture be less than two weeks after the planting. D . MAINTENANCE 1 . The Contractor shall maintain the grassed areas in a satisfactory manner until 90 days after final acceptance of the Contract and until the seed has germinated and a stand of grass established . Maintenance shall include repairing any damaged or eroded areas and reseeding any areas which do not produce a satisfactory stand of grass . E:\PSW\P\99-91 a\TechsSpecs\techspec-02205 .doc 02205-2 ' SECTION 02206 ' SITE CLEANUP & RESTORATION ' i . SCOPE ' A . The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials required or necessary to clean up the site after the construction is ' completed and to restore items disturbed or damaged due to his construction operation. 2 . GENERAL A . During the progress of the project, the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. All rubbish, surplus materials, and unused construction equipment shall be removed . All damage shall be repaired so that the public and private property owners will be inconvenienced as little as possible . B . Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses , ditches , gutters , ' drains , or catch-basins as a result of the Contractor' s operations, such material or debris shall be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work, and the ditches , channels , drains , etc . , shall be ' kept clean. C . Before the completion of the project, the Contractor shall , unless otherwise especially directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and structures which he builds ; remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other construction equipment furnished by ' him ; remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around privies , houses , and other buildings used by him ; remove all rubbish from any grounds which he has occupied; and leave the roads , all parts of the premises and adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition. ' D . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair, rebuild, or restore to its former conditions , any and all portions of existing utilities , structures , equipment, appurtenances, trees and shrubs, or facilities , other than those to be ' paid for under the specifications, which may be disturbed or damaged due to his construction operations . ' E . The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him and his subcontractors and on completion of the work shall deliver the facilities undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02206 . doc 02206 - 1 SECTION 02250 - SOIL POISONING A . Compound application shall be done by an established and certified pest control organization as per Section 815 -3 . 8 of Section 815 of the Minimum Property Standards for 1 & 2 living units, Federal Housing Administration (November 1966) . B . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee stating the concentration of the poison utilized, the rate and the method of application. The guarantee shall be for a period of not less than five (5) years, with the cost for a five (5 ) year inspection and protection program to be included in the base bid . C . The Contractor shall not begin soil treatment until such time as the subgrade preparation is completed and ready for the vapor barrier installation. D . The below listed chemicals are toxic to plant and animal life and are to be applied, with due caution, only by experienced personnel . Apply to those areas to be treated, one ( 1 ) of the following chemicals, at not less than the designated concentration applied in a water emulsion. 1 . Dursban TC 1 % 2 . Demon TC 1 % E . Apply an overall treatment of toxicant, at a rate of one ( 1 ) gallon per ten ( 10 square feet, under the entire area of the building floor slab and to a distance of 5'-0 " beyond the building perimeter where it is abutted by a slab/walkway or paving . Apply additional toxicant, at a rate of two (2) gallons per lin. ft. , to expansion joints and where the floor slab is penetrated by floor drains . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 02250- 1 SECTION 02208 - GRASSING BY SPRIGGING ' PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for grassing all areas indicated on plans . The Engineer shall designate those areas to receive sprigs and those to receive sod. The Engineer shall also designate the type of sprig/sod to be used in each ' area. 1 . 02 STORAGE OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall provide space for storage of sprigsrior to placement in a manner that P will not endanger or restrict pedestrian or vehicular traffic or interfere with other aspects of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 SPRIGS The playing fields shall be sprigged with hybrid 419 Bermuda Grass Sprigs . 2 . 02 SOD Sod Grass shall be as per plans and in accordance with Section 02204Grassing by Sodding . A. Delivery and Storage : Each of the species or varieties of sprigs and sod shall be furnished and delivered on field pallets . During handling and storing, the sprig grass shall be cared for in such a manner that it will be protected from damage by heat, moisture, rodents , and other causes . ' 2 . 04 GRASSING EQUIPMENT A. Rollers : A cultipacker, traffic roller, or other suitable equipment will be required for rolling the sprigged area. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS Spricr operations will not be permitted until the soil is moist and in proper condition to induce growth. No sprigging shall be done when the ground is below 40 degrees F . , unduly wet, or otherwise not in a suitable condition. Whenever a suitable length of right-of--way or 02208-1 adjacent area has been graded, it shall be made ready, when directed by the Engineer, and sodded in accordance with Section 02204 of these specifications . Sodding shall be incorporated into the project at the earliest practical time in the life of the contract. ' 3 . 02 SPRIGGING ' Install Hybrid 419 Bermuda grass sprigs at 800- 900 bushels per acre . Water immediately after planting and keep soil moist for 3 to 5 weeks . One week after planting, apply 250 pounds ammonium nitrate per acre, once for the first 3 weeks . Apply when grass blades are ' dry . Follow by watering to prevent burning. Apply 1 /4 lb . 24D per acre to control broadleaf weed as labeled until weeks are gone . Begin mowing turf at 1 " height 3 to 4 weeks after planting . Second application to be 500 pounds per acre application of 10-20-30 fertilizer. ' Repeat ammonium nitrate applications as necessary until grow-in is complete . A. Watering : ' Newly-sprigged areas are to be watered by Contractor as necessary to keep sprigs alive . Dead sprigs shall be replaced by Contractor prior to closeout. ' Be Rolling: Immediately after completion of the sprigging, the entire grassed area shall be rolled thoroughly with the equipment specified. At least two trips over the entire area will be required. ' C . Operations on Steep Slopes : Do not place sprigs on steep sloped areas . Utilize frill sodding methods to control erosion. 3 . 03 TURF CARE PROGRAM It shall be Contractor ' s responsibility to provide a turf care program for a 6-month period commencing on the date of final project acceptance . This turf care program shall include aerifying, insect control , weed control, disease control, rye grass over seeding and spot sprigging operations as necessary to maintain each field in healthy condition. Application rates of insecticides, herbicides, fungicides, nematicides , soil fumigants , etc . , shall be in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations . Fertilization shall be performed by the Owner in accordance with Contractor ' s and fertilizer manufacturer' s recommendations . Fertilizer shall be 10-20-30 . Contractor shall make, at a minimum, one visit per month to the fields to inspect and perform any operations necessary to maintain the fields in healthy condition. All mowing operations shall be performed by the Owner at substantial completion of the project. A one-year Performance and Payment Bond is required for the entire prod ect. ' A. Turf Care Chemicals : Acceptable herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, and nematicides are as follows : 1 . Herbicides : Trimer plus, Pennant, Sencor 2 , Insecticides : Nemacr, Mocad, Triumph, Orthene, OL , of Ofthanol 3 . Fungicides : Daconil 4 , Nematicide : Daconil 02208-2 B . Typical Turf Care Calendar : ' Contractor shall submit to Engineer a proposed turf care calendar indicating generally during which month(s) various operations are typically performed. A sample calendar ' would be as follows : 1 . January : Weed control 2 . February : Aerate 3 , March: Fertilize 4 . Etc . * * *END OF SECTION * * * r 02208-3 ' SECTION 02301 SUBGRADE 1 . DESCRIPTION A. The subgrade will be constructed such that after being compacted it will ' conform to the line, grade, and cross sections as shown on the Drawings . Shoulders shall be stabilized and compacted as specified herein for subgrades . 2 . LIMEROCK BEARING RATIO A. The subgrade shall have a minimum bearing ratio of 40 as determined by the Limerock Bearing Ratio Test. In an area where the bearing ratio is less than 40, stabilizing material approved by the Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread and mixed in accordance with Section 160-5 . 3 " Mixing " of the 1991 Edition of the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (FDOT Specs) . 3 . CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. The subgrade shall be shaped, graded, and rolled to conform to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings . Fine grading of the subgrade to its final profile shall be accomplished after the existing ground has been excavated as close as possible to the design elevations . In fill areas , fine grading of the ' subgrade shall be accomplished after fill is spread and compacted in accordance with Section 02203 of these Specifications . ' B . All drainage culverts and utility conduits which will be installed under the pavement shall be installed prior to the final shaping and compaction of the subgrade . As-built elevations shall be confirmed to meet design drawings prior to ' placement of base material . 4. COMPACTION A . The top of the subgrade in both cuts and fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum dry density to the depth specified on the ' Plans . The required density shall be maintained until the base course has been constructed . The subgrade shall be compacted with an approved self-propelled steel drum or pneumatic tired roller weighing not less than 8 tons . All hollows ' and depressions which develop under rolling shall be filled in with suitable material . The process of grading and rolling shall be repeated until no depressions develop . After compaction, the top surface of the fine grade shall be true to line ' and grade at all locations . If the fine grade becomes rutted or displaced due to any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall regrade it and recompact it. Ditches , drains, and swales shall be maintained along the completed ' subgrade section after their construction. C : \ D0wn1oad \ techspec - 02301 . doc 02301 - 1 1 Be In no case shall the Contractor proceed to construct the base course on the subgrade until the subgrade has been tested for Limerock Bearing Ratios and compaction, line and grade is checked, and approval given by the Engineer. 5 . STABILIZED SHOULDERS A . Stabilized shoulders shall be constructed on each side of the paved roadway section to the width, depth and slope as shown on the Plans and Typical Sections . The stabilized shoulder material shall have a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio of 40 as determined by the Limerock Bearing Ratio Test. In an area where the bearing ratio is less than 40, stabilizing material approved by the Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread, and mixed thoroughly throughout the entire depth and width of the stabilizing limits .. No specific density will be required and compaction shall be only to the extent directed by the Engineer. 6 . COMPACTION TESTING A . In general , Limerock Bearing Ratio tests on the subgrade shall be taken at approximately 500 lineal foot intervals . Exact locations will be designated by the Engineer. Be The maximum dry density of the subgrade material shall be determined by the Modified Proctor Test using the procedure as described by ASTM D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method A) . In general , there shall be one Modified Proctor Test per 500 lineal feet at a location which is representative of the type of subgrade material used on the project. Each material which is inherently different in composition from other subgrade material and which is used over a widespread area of the project, will necessitate an additional Modified Proctor Test, C . In general , in-place density tests shall be performed at approximately 500 feet intervals for each lift. Additional density tests may be required by the engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory, the contractor shall re-excavate and re ,, compact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is achieved . C : \ D0wn1oad \ techspec - 02301 . doc 02301 - 2 ' SECTION 02304 ' CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE COURSE 1 . DESCRIPTION ' A. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation necessary to construct a Coquina shell base course upon the completed stabilized subgrade . The base course shall be constructed in accordance with the lines , grades , and typical section as shown on the Drawings . Unless otherwise noted construction shall conform to the provisions of Florida ' D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 250, 1991 Edition. 2 . MATERIALS A . Coquina shell shall conform to the requirements of Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications, 1991 Edition, Section 915 , and shall be from a source acceptable to Florida D . O . T. The material shall have a minimum LBR value of 100 . Prior to placement, the material shall be crushed or broken to such a size that no less than 97 percent by weight will pass a 3 1 /2 inch sieve and no more than 20 percent dry weight shall wash through a No . 200 sieve . No visible clay or organic matter will be permitted . 3 . PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL ' A . After the subgrade is completed and approved, the Contractor shall furnish and spread the coquina shell in a uniform distribution. Spread thickness shall be a minimum of 8 inches . Segregated areas of fine or course rock will not be permitted . ' Such areas shall be removed and replaced with properly graded rock. B . After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be scarified and ' shaped so as to produce the required grade and cross section after compaction. ' 4 . COMPACTION A . The required compaction of the coquina shell base course shall be a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum dry density . B . No less than 8 - 10 ton steel drum or pneumatic tired roller shall be used to ' compact the base course . All depressions shall be filled and the process of rolling and filling shall continue until a thoroughly compacted uniform ' surface is produced. During final compaction operations , if blading of any area is necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compaction operations for such areas shall be completed prior to making the field density-compaction test on the finished base . C . Should the subgrade material become mixed with the base course material at any t CADown1oad\techspec-02304 .doc 02304- 1 time, the Contractor shall remove the mixture, reshape and recompact the subgrade, replace the materials removed with additional coquina shell and reshape and recompact the coquina shell base at no cost to the Owner. D . If cracks or checks appear in the base which would impair the structural integrity of the base in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the cracks or checks b i y rescarEying, reshaping, refilling with coquina shell where necessary, and recompacting at no cost to the Owner. E . The finished coquina shell base shall be checked for thickness at intervals of not more than 500 feet. Any areas which are less than 7- 1 /2 inches in thickness shall be corrected by scarifying and adding rock. The scarifying shall extend for 50 feet either side of the deficient area. Areas which are less than 1 /2 inch deficient in thickness shall be corrected if the Engineer determines that the area is extensive or may adversely affect the quality of the finished work . 6. PRIME COAT A. The prime coat shall be a rapid curing liquid cut back asphalt equal or equivalent to RC-70 or RC -250 at the Contractor's option, and conforming to Sections 300 and 916-2 of the 1991 Edition of the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, B . The surface of the base material shall be cleaned after final compaction and the moisture content of the base shall not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture before the prime coat is applied. The prime coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor. The entire length of the spray bar shall be set at the height above the surface recommended by the Manufacturer for even distribution. The prime coat shall be applied to the finished base course at the rate of 0 . 15 gallons per square yard at a temperature between 100° F. t° 1110 F . The prime coat shall be applied such that a period of no longer than two (2) hours lapse prior to application of the asphaltic concrete wearing course, unless the prime coat is covered with sand or screenings as outlined in Section 300-6 . 5 of the 1991 Edition of the Florida D . O . T. Specifications. 7. TESTING A . The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the Modified Proctor Test procedures of ASTM-D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method D) . The percentage compaction and in-place density shall be determined according to procedures of ASTM-D „ 2167 Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method " or the nuclear method ASTM- D2922 . In general , one Modified Proctor Test per 500 lineal feet of roadwork shall be performed on a representative sample of base material from location(s) designated by the Engineer. In-place density testing shall be performed at the rate of one test per 500 lineal feet of roadwork at comparable locations unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. C :\DON7lload\techspec-02304 .doc 02304-2 SECTION 02305 ASPHALT PAVEMENT ' 1 . DESCRIPTION ' A. Under this item, the Contractor shall construct an asphalt concrete wearing surface for pavement upon a previously prepared base course conforming to the lines, grades, and typical section shown on the drawings . ' 2 . LIMITATIONS OF LAYING OPERATION ' A. Bituminous materials shall be applied only when the temperature of the air in the shade is above fifty degrees Fahrenheit (50' F . ) . Any bituminous mixture caught in transit by a sudden rain may be laid at the Contractor's risk. However, no ' work shall be started if local conditions indicate that rain is imminent, and under no circumstances shall the mixture be laid while rain is falling, or when there is water on the base. When wind is blowing to such an extent that sand, dust, etc . are being deposited on the surface being paved to the extent that the bond between layers will be diminished, the bituminous materials shall not be spread on the surface . B . The Contractor shall supply thermometers as required b the Engineer for p Y q Y In determining the temperature of all bituminous materials as they are applied . Laying ' of bituminous materials will not be permitted unless the material has obtained the proper temperature and temperature determination at the job site has been made . 3 . TACK COAT A . Where a tack coat is required (as determined by the Engineer) prior to ' application of the asphaltic concrete wearing surface or against an existing asphalt surface, an Emulsified Asphalt, Grade RS 2 shall be used. The tack coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor or by hand at the rate of 0 . 05 gallons per square yard and at a temperature between 100° F . and 150° F . The tack coat surface shall be kept free from traffic until the subsequent layer of asphaltic concrete has been laid. Excessive application of tack coat on the existing ' asphalt surfaces will be eliminated by the Contractor prior to paving the asphalt concrete. ' 4. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE WEARING SURFACE ' A. The wearing surface for the proposed roadways and driveways shall be 1 - 1 /2 inches of Florida D . O . T . Type S - I asphaltic concrete conforming to the requirements of Section 331 of the 1991 Edition of the Florida D . O . T . Standard ' Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The material shall be laid uniformly so that it will result in a compacted thickness of 1 - 1 /2 inch . The asphaltic concrete shall be laid down at a temperature of between 230°F and 310 OF . The temperature of the asphalt concrete delivered to the job shall be ' EAPSW\P\99-91e\TechsSpecs\techspec-02305 . doc 02305- 1 constant and wide fluctuations of temperature during the day will not be permitted . Asphaltic concrete whose temperature is less than 210oF when delivered to the job site may result in immediate rejection from application by the Engineer. All material rejected by the Engineer shall be replaced with specified material by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B . The asphaltic concrete shall be applied by an approved type of self propelled paver, such as a Barber Green, capable of making a continuous 10 ft. wide pull . The paver shall have a disbursing hopper, a compacting devise, and a screed capable of adjustment to produce the required paving cross section. The screed shall be equipped with heaters . Co Immediately after the asphaltic concrete is spread, any deviations from the typical section shall be remedied by placing additional material or by removing surplus material while the mixture is still hot. D . Rolling should begin as soon as possible after the asphaltic concrete has been spread as specified. Rolling of the longitudinal joint should be immediately behind the paving operation. The initial pass with the roller should be made as soon as it is possible to roll the bituminous mixture without cracking the mat or having the mix adhere to the roller wheels . E. The rolling shall be done by a " Rolling Train" , consisting of a steel wheel seal roller, and a pneumatic tired traffic roller and a steel wheel finish roller. All of which shall be on the job when the asphalt laying commences and remain on the project until the paving work has been completed. F . Rolling of the longitudinal joint should be immediately behind the paving operation . The initial pass with the roller should be made as soon as it is possible to roll the bituminous mixture without cracking the mat or having the mix adhere to the roller wheels . To prevent adhesion of the mix to the roller, the wheels should be kept moist with only enough water to avoid picking up the material . G. Steel wheeled rollers shall be of the tandem type . For seal rolling, these rollers shall weigh between 5 and 12 tons and for final rolling, they shall weigh between 8 and 12 tons . H. Traffic rollers shall be of the self propelled pneumatic tired type, equipped with at least seven (7) smooth tread, low pressure tires , with the tire pressure maintained between 50 to 55 pounds . Traffic rollers shall weigh between 6 and 10 tons . Wobble wheeled rollers are prohibited from rolling on this project. I . The speed should not exceed 3 mph for steel wheeled rollers or 5 mph for pneumatic tired rollers . J . Finish rolling should be done while the material is still workable enough for removal of roller marks , before the pavement temperature has dropped C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02305 . doc 02305 - 2 below 140o F . Abrupt turning of rollers on the paving mix which causes - undue displacement shall not be permitted. Finish rolling should be accomplished by use of the steel wheel roller. K. Should any irregularities or defects remain in any course after compaction, they should be removed promptly and replaced with new material to provide a uniform texture surface conforming to line and grade . The finished surface shall ' be such that it .will not vary more than one forth inch ( 1 /4 " ) from the ten foot ( 10') straight edge applied both parallel and perpendicular to the center line of the pavement. The thickness of the pavement shall be no more than one forth ' inch ( 1 /4 " ) greater or less than the specified thickness . Correction of deficiencies in pavement thickness will be in strict accordance with those procedures described in Section 330 14 . 2 of the Florida D . O . T . Specifications for Road and ' Bridge Construction, 1986 Edition. L . Areas which are inaccessible to a roller (such as adjacent to curbs, gutters, ' manholes , etc .) shall be compacted by the use of hand tamps , small vibratory tampers, or other satisfactory means . ' M. The edges of the wearing surface shall be straight, true, and clean in all cases , and must meet the approval of the Engineer. Should the edges of the wearing surface not meet the approval of the Engineer, they shall be saw cut to a ' straight, true , clean line by the Contractor at his expense . t ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02305 . doc 02305 - 3 SECTION 02307 REINFORCED CONCRETE 1 . SCOPE A. The work covered under this section shall include, but not be limited to, concrete manholes , inlets , catch basins, curb, curb and gutter, street repair, and sidewalks . It shall include all materials, equipment, labor, finishing, form work and curing . 2 . GENERAL A . The concrete shall be a workable plastic mix composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, air and water proportioned and mixed to provide the strength of concrete called for upon the Plans . The water-cement ratio shall be kept to the minimum necessary to achieve proper placing and finishing . Any item relative to concrete or reinforcing under this item that is not covered herein, shall be in accordance with the ACI 318 -71 Building Code and the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by Portland Cement Association. Be Concrete mixing may be done in a portable mixer, a transit- mix truck, or if less than five cubic feet, in a mortar box; provided all ingredients . including water are accurately measured by weight or volume . Measurement by the " shovel full " is specifically prohibited. No mixer shall be loaded above its rated mixing capacity. Co Transit mix trucks shall not wash out their trucks on the site without the specific permission of the Engineer and any waste concrete shall be removed to a public dump . 3 . CEMENT A . Cement shall be portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 types I , IA, III and /or IIIA . Cement, if delivered to site, shall be in unbroken paper bags plainly marked with the manufactures name, the brand name, the type of cement, and the weight of cement in the bag. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness . Bags containing caked cement shall be rejected . Cement shall be used in the same order as received, that is first in, first out. 4 . AGGREGATES A . Aggregates shall conform to the latest Florida Department of Transportation Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Stockpiling of aggregates shall be done in such a manner as to prevent segregation or contamination. C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02307 . doc 02307 - 1 5 . AIR ENTRAINMENT ' A. Air entrainment is required and shall be maintained between 3 and 6 percent considered as an optimum. Concrete showing more than 6 percent may be ' rejected . 6 . ADMIXTURES ' A . Admixtures other than for air entrainment shall not be used without the specific written approval of the Engineer. 7. FORMS ' A. Forms shall be built to provide a neat and workmanlike finished job . The forms shall be mortar-tight and of sufficient strength material to prevent any bulging or sagging from true line and grade and to withstand vibrating . Any form ties shall be removed to a depth , of at least 14 /2 inches, the holes reamed out large enough to be adequately patched and the hole filled with sand cement mortar. ' 8 . PLACEMENT AND INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice of his intent to pour concrete to permit inspection of the forms, placement of reinforcing steel, and equipment for mixing, transporting and placing of the concrete . No concrete ' will be placed prior to completion of the form work and placing of the reinforcing to the Engineer' s satisfaction. No concrete shall be placed unless an adequate vibrator and adequate provisions for curing are on hand. Concrete ' test cylinders will be made by the Engineer' s representative at random and at any time there is doubt about the quality of the concrete . Failure of the concrete to come up to design strength will be cause for rejection and ' replacement of the structure . Be Every effort shall be made to obtain a water tight and durable concrete free ' from voids, rock pockets and the like . Should defects occur, they will be called to the Engineer's attention and repaired in accordance with his directive or, if extensive replaced. ' C . Concrete finish on n exposed surfaces shall be as designated gated by the Engineer. ' 9 . REINFORCING ' A. All reinforcing steel shall be fabricated from new billet steel and shall unless otherwise noted conform to ASTM designation A615 , Grade 40 . All bars shall be securely tied in place with soft iron wire, 16 gage or heavier. No steel chairs ' will be permitted. Unless otherwise noted all bars shall have 2 inches of concrete cover. All bends shall be in accordance with the A. C . I . Building Code . ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02307 . doc 02307 - 2 10 . CURING A . General : The concrete shall be continuously cured fora eriod of at least 7 days . Curing shall be commenced after f nishina has been completed and as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit application of the curet material without marring the surface . Any curing material removed or damaged during the 7 day veriod shall be replace immediately . After forms are removed, the surfaces exposed shall be cured by placing a berm of moist earth against them or by any of the methods described below, for the remainder of the 7 day curing period. c 1 . Wet Burlap Method : Burlap shall be placed over the entire exposed surface of the concrete with sufficient extension beyond each side to insure complete coverage. Adjacent strips shall be overlapped a minimum of six inches . The burlap shall be held securely in place such that it will be in continuous contact with the concrete at all times and no earth shall be permitted between the burlap surfaces at laps or between the burlap and the concrete. The burlap shall be kept thoroughly wet throughout the curing period. 2 . Membrane Curing Method : Clear membrane curing compound or white-pigmented curing compound shall be applied by hand sprayer in a single-coat continuous film at a uniform coverage of at least one gallon to each 200 square feet. Any cracks, checks or other defects appearing in the coating shall be recoated immediately. The curing compound shall be thoroughly agitated in the drum prior to application, and during application as necessary to prevent settlement of the pigment. 3 . Polyethylene Sheeting Method : Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to insure complete coverage . Adjacent strips shall be overlapped a minimum of six inches . The sheeting shall be held securely in place such that it will be in continuous contact with the concrete at all times . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec- 02307 . doc 02307 - 3 ' SECTION 02309 - STREET SIGNS 1 .01 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this heading consists of furnishing and installing street signs, traffic control signs, and handicapped parking signs . ' B . The signs shall conform to the requirements of the Federal Highway Administrations Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices as adopted by The Local County having jurisdiction over this project. The handicapped parking signs shall comply with the ' requirements of the Florida Accessibility Code and the Americans with Disabilities Act. The location of the signs shall be subject to the approval of The Local County Traffic Engineering Department and Code Enforcement Division. * * * END OF SECTION * * * t 02309- 1 - SECTION 02311 ROADWAY PAINTING 1 . DESCRIPTION A. Work under this heading consists of painting traffic stripes and pavement markings . 2. TRAFFIC STRIPS AND MARKINGS WITHIN COUNTY RIGHT-OF-WAY A . Thermoplastic traffic stripes and markings shall be used for all work within County Right-of--Ways . Be Thermoplastic traffic strips and markings shall be installed in accordance with Section 711 of the Florida D . O . T. Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 1991 Edition, and any other applicable D . O . T. regulations or specifications . C . No thermoplastic traffic stripes or markings shall be applied until thirty (30) days minimum after. the asphalt has been laid down. 3 . INTERIOR ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT PAINTING A . GENERAL L Work under this heading consists of painting parking spaces, road centerline stripes, roadway edge stripes , stop bars, handicap parking identifications, and directional markings where indicated on the Plans . Unless otherwise noted on the Plans or herein, the centerline stripes shall be yellow and all other markings shall be white . Be WHITE TRAFFIC PAINT 1 . White traffic paint shall conform to the requirements of Florida D . O . T. Traffic Paint Code T- 1 (white) as specified in the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bride Construction 1991 , Section 971 - 12 . 2 . formulated and manufactured from first grade materials and free from defects and imperfections that may adversely affect the finished product. C . YELLOW TRAFFIC PAINT 1 . Yellow traffic paint shall conform to requirements of Florida D . O . T. Traffic Paint Code T-2 (Yellow) as specified in the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bride Construction 1991 , Section 971 - 12 . 3 . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02311 . doc 02311 - 1 - D . GLASS BEADS 1 . The stripe along the edge of the road p g g s shall have durable reflective glass spheres applied at the rate of six pounds per gallon of paint while ' the paint is still tacky enough for them to adhere at that rate . E . APPLICATION OF PAINT 1 . The paint stripes shall be a uniform 4 inches in width and be applied at the wet film rate of 15 Mils, exclusive of the glass spheres . The road edge ' stripe shall be applied with the outside edge of the stripe at a uniform 4 - 6 inches from the edge of the finished pavement. Prior to applying the paint the location of parking spaces, centerline and edge stripe shall be adequately marked with chalk, tacks or other suitable means . The equipment used to apply the paint shall be capable of uniformly applying the paint at the specified thickness without thinning and with well defined edges . The surface must be dry when the paint is applied . ' 2 . Paint spills , alignment errors, application defects, etc . shall be removed by sand blasting or any other means which will remove the paint without harming the pavement. t3 . No paint shall be applied to the asphalt until three weeks after the asphalt has been laid down unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. ' 4 . TEMPORARY TRAFFIC STRIPPING AND MARKING ' A . When required by the Engineer or other agencies, temporary traffic striping and marking shall be applied as soon as practical after the asphalt has been laid . ' B . Until the temporary traffic striping and marking is applied, the Contractor shall maintain safety along the road improvements using warning signs , traffic cones, emergency lights and other equipment as necessary, in accordance with the Manual On Uniform Traffic Control Devices , latest edition. ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02311 . doc 02311 - 2 SECTION 02312 SWALE CONSTRUCTION L DESCRIPTION A. Fine grading of swales shall be accomplished after the existing ground has been excavated and compacted to within + 0 . 2 ft. of the design elevations . Fine grading of the swale areas will be done by a motor grader unless otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer. Hand dressing will not be required except where shown on the Drawings or in confined areas where equipment operation is restricted. B . The Contractor shall maintain and keep open and free from leaves, sticks, rubble, and other debris, all swales graded by him until final acceptance of the work. C . The finished grade shall be completed and shaped to a surface which varies no more than 0 . 1 foot above or below the Plan elevations except that, adjacent to pavement, grates , or sidewalk, the swale shall be graded to match the edge of the pavement, grate or sidewalk. D . In areas where sodding is required, finished soil grade shall be set 0 . 2 foot below the plan elevation to compensate for sod thickness . E . Compaction to a specific density will not be required unless so directed by the Engineer. However, swales shall be compacted to a firm, even surface true to grade and cross section. All swales must be rolled. F . Fine grading of the swale areas shall preferably be done prior to paving the asphalt wearing course . If the Contractor chooses to fine grade the swale areas subsequent to paving, he must exercise extreme care when dressing areas adjacent to pavement areas to avoid damage to the pavement. No handling of swale material shall be permitted on the pavement surface . G . After final dressing of the swales, the Contractor shall seed or sod them as required by the Plans in accordance with Section 02204 or 02205 of the Specifications_ C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02312 . doc 02312 - 1 SECTION 02401 ' DRAINAGE PIPE 1 . GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install drainage pipes of the size and type and at the invert elevations shown on the Drawings. 2 . MATERIALS A. Corrugated Steel Pine - Where shown on the Drawings as " CMP " , the drainage pipe and required coupling bands shall be corrugated galvanized ' steel and shall conform to the requirements of Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications . ' B . Corrugated Aluminum Pine - Where shown on the Drawings as " Aluminum CMP " . or " CAP " , the drainage pipe and required coupling bands shall be corrugated aluminum and shall conform to the requirements of Section 945 of the FDOT Specifications . C . Concrete Pine - Where shown on the Drawings as RCP, the drainage pipes shall meet the requirements of ASTM C76- 70 (Class III) and Sections 941 and 942 of the FDOT Specifications , unless otherwise noted. D . PVC PIPE - Where shown on the Drawings as PVC , the drainage pipe and fittings shall be Sch . 40, Polyvinyl Chloride, and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9484 of the FDOT Specifications , unless otherwise noted. E . Bituminous Pipe Coating - Where shown on the Drawings as Asphalt Coated, ' metal pipe, "ACCMP " , the pipe and fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and out in conformance with Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications . ' F . Filter Cloth - Where required shall be Amoco Propex 4545 , or equal , approved by Engineer prior to ordering. ' G. Mitered End Sections - Mitered end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D . O . T. Road Design Standard Index (No . 272 , 273 or 274) called for on the Drawings . H. Flared End Sections - Flared end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D . O . T. Road Design Standard Index (No . 270) called for on ' the Drawings . I . Polyethylene Pipe — Where shown on Drawings as "PP ", all polyethylene pipe shall be Hancor Hi -Q or ADS N- 12 (or approved equal) , with silt tight jointing as manufactured by the pipe manufacture . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02401 . doc 02401 - 1 J. Under drains — Under- drain piping shall be 4 " perforated polyethylene tubing with smooth interior wall with Drain Guard Protective Wrap as manufactured by ADS (or approved equal) . C : \ Download \ techspec - 02401 . doc 02401 - 2 _ SECTION 02402 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES L GENERAL A . Under this item, the Contractor shall build and/or install new catch basins , manholes, dropholes, drop inlets , junction boxes , leaching basins and the like of the types and at the locations shown on the Drawings . ' 2 . MATERIALS A . The materials used in the construction of these structures shall . comply with Section 345 "Portland Cement Concrete " (Type II), Section 415 " Reinforcing Steel " (Grade 40), and Section 425 -3 " Materials " of the FDOT Specifications . Be Sand-cement riprap shall conform to Section 405 of the these Specifications . p ons . 3 . CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A . Construction of the structures shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 " Inlet, Manholes , and Junction Boxes " of the FDOT Specifications . Required minimum compaction shall be 95 percent of maximum density (AASHTO T- 180) and 100 percent of maximum density (AASHTO T480) in areas of paving or curbing . Be The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for review and approval on all precast structures prior to granting fabrication approval . 4 . GRATES , FRAMES , AND COVERS A . Grate, frame and cover castings shall be of uniform quality and free from blowholes , porosity, hard spots , shrinkage, cracks or other injurious defects . They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shot blasting and, unless otherwise specified, shall be covered with a smooth coating of coal tar pitch varnish of a type which will be tough, tenacious, and resilient throughout the range of expected service temperatures . Be Material used in the manufacture of the castings shall conform to ASTM Specifications A-48 Class 30 Iron or to United States Government Specifications QQI-652 , (latest revision) for gray iron castings . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02402 . doc 02402 - 1 C . All castings shall be manufactured true to pattern and with a close fit of component parts . Frames and covers in roadway and traffic areas shall be of non-rocking design or shall have machined bearing surfaces so that fitting parts will not rattle or rock under traffic . D . All grates , frames and covers located within road right-of- way or traffic areas shall be capable of withstanding the AASHTO 1-1-20 vertical , dynamic wheel load. C : \ Download \ techspec - 02402 . doc 02902 - 2 SECTION 02403 ' INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPE AND STRUCTURES L SCOPE . A . This section covers the handling of materials and the work required to install , ' construct and join, piping, fittings , and appurtenances for a complete drainage system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. ' 2 . GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A . All work shall be proved to be in first class condition and constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications . All defects and leaks disclosed by required testing shall be remedied. All tests shall be performed by the Contractor and observed by the Engineer. B . All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding . The free-water surface shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding, haunching, and initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the required density, and until required density tests have been performed. C . Temporary supports shall be installed for adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface structures, water lines, drains , and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work. Any structures which may have been disturbed shall be restored upon completion of the work. D . Blasting shall not be permitted except by written approval of the Engineer. E . Trenching and subsequent backfilling within the general construction site shall be accomplished as expeditiously as possible in order to prevent trench decay and maintain a clear operational area. F . Prior to any excavation or trenching outside the designated limits of the work site , the Contractor shall secure the necessary permits and/or authorization from the applicable Owner, or confirm that such has been previously obtained. The stipulations of said permit or authorization shall be completely followed and, prior to construction operations , notice shall be provided to the appropriate Owner and Engineer. ' G. All work shall be installed in accordance with these specifications, the applicable sections of the FDOT specifications , manufacturers recommendations and the Drawings . ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02903 . doc 02903 - 1 3 . HANDLING MATERIALS A . Pipe, fittings , and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by hand or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage . Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped . Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Be In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 4 . ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND COVER FOR BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines, depths , and grades . Be Wherever obstructions not indicated on the Drawings are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration in the Drawings is required, the Engineer will order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the owners of the structures for the removal , relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions . C . The maximum permissible deflection for pipe and fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Installation of drainage pipe less than 18 " diameter in runs of 100 feet or greater, or as required by the Engineer, shall be controlled by use of a laser to maintain proper grade . The Contractor shall also be responsible for verifying elevations of the pipe , as indicated on the Drawings, at sufficient points during progress of the work to identify discrepancies between actual and plan elevations due to laser misalignment, equipment error, etc . , and to correct the work as required to conform to the Drawings . 5 . PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION A. TRENCH DIMENSIONS 1 . The minimum width of the trench shall be equal to the outside diameter of the pipe at the joint plus 8 inches for unsheeted trenches , or 12 inches for sheeted trench, and the maximum width of trench, measured at the top of the pipe, shall not exceed the nominal pipe diameter plus two feet, unless otherwise shown on the Drawing details or approved by the Engineer. Trench walls shall be vertical from the bottom of the trench to a line measured one foot above the top of the pipe. From one foot above the top of the pipe to the surface, the trench walls shall be as nearly vertical as soil conditions will permit, unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings . Spaces for joints, fittings, manholes and other structures shall be maintained unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, or alternate methods are detailed on the Drawings . Should the specified maximum width of trench be exceeded , the pipe shall be adequately reinforced as directed by the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 2 r r 2 . Trench grade for pipe or structures not requiring special bedding rmaterial shall be defined as the grade of the bottom surface of the utility or structure to be constructed or placed within the trench. Such shaping of the trench bottom, as may be required to provide suitable bedding, shall be ' considered to be a part of this work. Trench grade in non-cushioning material shall be defined as 6 inches below the outside of the bottom of the utility, which 6 inches shall be backfilled with suitable bedding material . Unauthorized excavation below trench grade shall be backfilled to trench grade and suitably compacted by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. Final trimming and grading of trench bottom shall be done manually. r6. BACKFILL AND BEDDING MATERIALS A . Type 1 - Type 1 material shall be either well-graded crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the requirements of ASTM Designation C33 -71a, Gradation 67 (3 /4 inch r to No . 4 Sieve) or air cooled blast furnace slag along or in combination with crushed stone and/or crushed gravel conforming to ASTM Designation C33 -71a requirements . This material shall be used primarily for pipeline and manhole foundations . r B . Type 2 - Type 2 material shall be unclassified material obtained from the Contractor' s excavations and approved by the Engineer. The material shall be substantially free from wood, roots, humus, peat, muck, and other organic materials , and shall not contain clods, stones, masonry rubble, and the like, greater than 6 inches through the largest dimension. In general , the material shall consist of sand, loam, sandy- loam, clayey- sand, gravel , or crushed stone . C . Type 3 - Type 3 material shall be select granular material , free from organic matter, of such size and gradation that the desired compaction can be readily ' attained and shall meet the requirements for A3 material according to the Revised Bureau of Public Roads Classifications . Material from the Contractor' s excavations may be used, if it meets the above requirements . ' Otherwise it must be imported. 7. BEDDING AND FOUNDATIONS iA . CLASS A (CONCRETE CRADLE OR CONCRETE ARCH BEDDING) 1 . This class of bedding shall be used only where specifically shown in the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. If the use of a concrete cradle is required the pipe shall be bedded in a monolithic cradle of a 1 , 500 PSI r concrete with a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel , whichever is greatest, and extending up to the sides of the pipe to a height equal to 1 /2 of ' the outside pipe diameter. The cradle shall have an overall width equal to 1 - 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater. rC ; \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 3 2 . If a concrete arch is required, the pipe shall be embedded in carefully compacted Type 1 material having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel, which ever is greater, and extending up the sides for a height equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The top half of the pipe shall be covered with a monolithic Class C concrete arch having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum of four inches over the crown of the pipe, whichever is greater, and extending down the sides for a depth equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The arch shall have an over all width equal to 1 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches , whichever is greater. B . CLASS B (FIRST-CLASS BEDDING) 1 . Where Class B Bedding is required, the trench shall be excavated below the planned bottom of the pipe to a depth equal to 1 /4 the nominal diameter of the pipe, or 6 inches, whichever is greater. The over excavated depth shall be backfilled using either Type 1 or Type 3 materials carefully compacted and shaped using hand tools so as to provide a uniform support for the lower portion of the pipe barrel . Shaping under the pipe bells shall be so that the bell does not support the pipe and joints can be made without bedding material interference . 2 . At the option of the Contractor, Class B Bedding may be used in place of Class C (Ordinary Bedding) provided that the exercise of this option shall create no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of those portions of the project on which he proposes to exercise this option. C . CLASS C (ORDINARY BEDDING) 1 . The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the utility pipe . The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding shall be shaped so that the pipe will be in continuous contact therewith for its full length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0 . 6 of the outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be sufficient so that the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference . D . UNSUITABLE BEDDING MATERIAL 1 . Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface . In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation are , in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe, such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 4 necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be ' removed and the Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and backfill in accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding . All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. ' 8 . PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL ' A. INITIAL BACKFILL 1 . Initial backfill shall be placed as soon as possible after laying the pipe and rshall maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more ' than five pipe joints separate laying and backfilling operations . Initial back fill shall include all haunching and backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the pipe . All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry . 2 . Initial backfill shall be done as specified below: a. Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the pipe , taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe . Backfilling shall be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe . b . During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both ' sides of the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface . c . Where thrust blocks , encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are below grade, no backfilling shall start until ' the specific items have been inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative . ' d . The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed before the remainder of the trench is backfilled . Initial backfill shall be compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T480 . No subsequent ' backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative . B . SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL 1 . Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 5 finished ground level or bottom of subbase . 2 . Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers , rollers, or vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved surfaces , and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted to the specified density prior to placing subsequent layers . The thickness of the loose layer may be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained. C . BACKFILL MATERIAL 1 . Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock or stone greater than 1 1 /2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3 backfill as determined by the Engineer. 2 . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid Documents . All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the price set forth in the Contract. 3 . Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench. Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural drainage and not present an unsightly appearance . No excavated material shall be placed on private property without the consent of the property owner. D . COMPACTION METHODS 1 . Mechanical compaction shall be accomplished using pneumatic or gasoline-powered tampers or flat-plate vibrators, with the exception that the first two feet of backfilling over the pipe shall be compacted by hand- operated tamping devices . 2 . Flooding or puddling with water to consolidate backfill is not acceptable, except where sand is encountered below unpaved areas only, and only with prior approval by the Engineer. The flooding or puddling operation shall be repeated with each two feet of backfill placed . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . d0c 02403 - 6 ' E . DENSITY TESTS ' 1 . The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer. ' 2 . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the Engineer prior to testing . At the request of the Engineer, ' the Contractor shall provide such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to evaluate the method for approval. ' 3 . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer. 4 . In general , at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural class , ' a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of use . ' S . Generally, in-place density tests shall be performed at approximately 20 foot intervals ; one each side of pipe for each 12 inch lift. Additional density tests may be required by the Engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory , ' the Contractor shall re-excavate and recompact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is obtained. 9 . PIPE SYSTEM LAYING AND JOINTING ' A . GENERAL L Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and ' fittings shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer' s directions with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket placement, lubrication, bolt ' torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling methods for joint assembly . 2 . Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked for damage or defects such as cracks, blisters , coating/lining separation, gouges , and the like . Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked " REJECTED " and immediately removed from the work site . ' C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 7 3 . Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris , sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets , gasket grooves, spigots, and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining. 4 . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit. 5 . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is seated . 6 . Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device such as chain-puller, come-along, and the like is required, the device shall be used in a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause significant disturbance of the prepared bedding . In no case shall joints be made by it or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint. 7 . Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the installation. 8 . The installed piping system shall be kept free of dirt, trench water, and other foreign matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress . 9 . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill or approved anchoring devices sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy. 10 . INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS A. Fittings , plugs , and caps shall be set and jointed to pipe in the manner heretofore specified for cleaning, laying and jointing pipe . 11 . INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Excavation for drainage structures shall be of sufficient size to permit construction of the structure to progress without hindrance from the - walls of the excavation or from sloughed materials . No less than 12 inches clearance shall be provided between excavation walls and walls of the structure . If soil conditions encountered at the bottom of the excavation would in the sole opinion of the Engineer be unsuitable for foundation, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the unsuitable material to the depth where suitable bearing can be obtained . C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 8 ' e determination of then necessity e essity for and the extent of additional excavation shall be made by the Engineer, who shall inform the Contractor in writing ' regarding such necessity and the extent. This excavation shall then be backfilled to the appropriate grade with Type 1 or Type 3 backfill material , placed in 8 inch layers and compacted to a density equal to 100 percent of the maximum density as ' determined by AASHTO T480 . B . Installation of drainage structures shall conform to the details as shown on the ' Drawings and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 of the 1986 Edition of the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 percent of maximum density per AASHTO T480 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density in areas of paving or curbing . C . Backfill shall not be placed against cast-in-place concrete structures until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to resist the load without damage, and in no case , less than seven days after the concrete was placed. 12 . AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A . During the installation of Drainage Pipe and Structures the Contractor shall keep accurate records of the As-Built construction showing the location of all changes in alignment, services , utility crossings , and similar data. Items shall be located from tpermanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes, valves, etc . Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing showing the above information. 1 C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02403 . doc 02403 - 9 k. C SECTION 02501 WATER MAINS 1 . GENERAL A . Scope The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment and labor required for the installation of water mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans . The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these water mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification. B . References Standards applicable in this Specification shall be : 1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) . a. AWWA C 104 (ANSI A21 A) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for water. b . AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -inch through 484nch for water and other liquids . C , AWWA CHI (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings . d . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe . e . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids . f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53 ) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings , 3 -inch through 1124nch for water and other liquids . g . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances . h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch through 124nch. i . AWWA M23 Manual of Water Supply Practices , " PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" . CADown1oad\techspec-0250 Ldoc sC 5 01 - 1 i 2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A. ASTM D - 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion ' Materials . 3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg . ) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99 - 801 (Dated 1981 ) . 1 b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and an 18 -inch drop . C . Submittals 1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5 ) sets of shop drawings for the following items . a. Material specifications for all pipe types, fittings, joints , joint restraint, specials , and miscellaneous appurtenances . All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Engineer. I2 . MATERIALS A . Pipe 1 ) Ductile Iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 ANSI A21 . 51 and shall be minimum thickness class 50 . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated . The pipe interior shall be cement lined and seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104 . The exterior of the pipe shall have a. minimum 10 mile thick coating of coal tar epoxy, "Kop-Coat" Bitumastic 300M or "Proco" EP 214 . The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three blue color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using paint with the word " Water Main" in 14nch high letters appearing one or more times every 24 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with an attached blue plastic identification tape marked " Water" . Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, ductile iron pipe shall be ' furnished in standard 18 or 20 foot laying lengths , and have mechanical joint ends . 2) P .V . C . Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside diameter of cast iron pipe . C :\Download\techspec-02501 . doc SC501 - 2 I P . V . C . pipe (4 " through 12 " ) shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi . P . V . C . pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide a light blue color. The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using permanent ink with the word " Water Main" in 14nch high letters appearing one or more times every 244nches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with plastic identification tape marked " Water" . P . V . C . pipe sizes shall conform to the following : a. Pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a minimum wall thickness of DR- 18 . b . Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-B4145 , shall meet AWWA C 905 standards for potable water application requirements, and shall be DR48 wall thickness . B . Fittings All underground fittings shall be ductile iron with mechanically restrained joints . Fittings shall conform to the following : 1 ) Fittings for pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall be compact ductile iron conforming to AWWA C 153 . Fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi . Fittings shall have mechanically restrained joints . 2) Fittings for pipe sizes over 12 " shall be ductile or cast iron conforming to AWWA C110 . Fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi . Fittings shall have mechanically restrained joints . 3 ) All fittings shall be lined and coated as specified for ductile iron pipe. 4) Retainer glands for fitting restraint shall not be permitted . C . Joints 1 ) Push on Joints - Joints for PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber gasket compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) . Special fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation. 2) Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be used on fittings for changes in horizontal or vertical alignment on all pipes, up to 12-inches in diameter. All mechanical joints shall be restrained as further outlined in these specifications . Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C111 , CADown1oad\techspec-02501 . doc 5C501 - 3 3 ) Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment of pipe shall be mechanically restrained. As indicated on the drawings, pipe lengths located upstream and downstream of restrained fittings shall also be ' restrained. Method of joint restraint shall be as follows : a. P .V . C . pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with " EBBA IRON" series 500, or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C . pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained with " EBBA IRON " series 1500 , or other approved restrainer. ' b . P . V.C . pipe in diameters over 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with " UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C , or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C . pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained with " UNI-FLANGE " large diameter series 1350-C , or other approved restrainer. ' c . Mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with "EBBA IRON", Megalug Series 1100 restrainers , or approved equal . Push-on ' ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with pipe manufacturer' s restrained joints , such as U . S . Pipe " TR-FLEX GRIPPER RING" , American Pipe " LOK-RING " or " LOK-FAST" joints , or approved equal . d. Retainer glands shall not approved . ' 4) Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material . The gasket shall provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and ' gasket tolerances . Installation and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by the manufacturer. D . Foundation Rock A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits : Passing 3 /4 " - 100% Passing 3 /8 " - 20 - 55 % Passing #4 - 0 - 10% Passing # 8 - 0 - 5 % ' E . Buried Identification Tape Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe . Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width, consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a solid aluminum foil core . Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, ' reverse print laminated to aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed . CADoNvn1oad\techspec-0250 Ldoc SC 5 01 - 4 Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the following words, unless otherwise approved : " CAUTION BURIED WATER MAIN BELOW" Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility marking tape as manufactured by Pro -Line Safety Products Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # l , West Chicago , IL . F . Detectable Buried Trace Wire Trace wire shall be continuous # 14 THHN, single conductor copper wire . PVC color sheathing shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) . 3 . EXECUTION OF WORK The installation and testing of the water main shall be done in accordance with AWWA (ANSI) C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe, plus the additional requirements described herein or shown on the Plans . A . Preparation 1 . Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable, for the proper installation of all water mains , and appurtenances in the locations shown on the drawings . Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. B . Trenching 1 . Pavement Cutting - Asphaltic pavements shall be cut by pneumatic hammers or mechanical pavement cutters ; saws , or other method approved by the Engineer. Concrete pavement or concrete base pavement shall be sawed. Both types of pavement shall be cut and removed RELor to any excavation . 2 . Excavation - The excavation in which the pipes and appurtenances are to be constructed shall be excavated in open cut, except where otherwise stated on the Plans , in such a manner to such depths and widths as will give suitable room for bracing , supporting, pumping , draining and for removing from the excavation any material which the Engineer may decide is inadequate for foundation. The maximum trench width at the top of the pipe shall be in accordance with the trenching details . The Contractor may, where it will not interfere with the work or adjacent structures or property , slope the sides of excavation. The sides of the trench may only be sloped from a point in compliance with the trenching details . CADown1oad\techspec-02501 .doc SC501 - 5 No compensation will be allowed for such excavation and the Contractor shall include its cost in the prices bid . ' The materials of excavation shall include all materials encountered, such as clay, sand rock, marl , muck, gravel, boulders , heterogeneous fill materials , old timbers , or any combination of these . Any unforeseen obstacles ' such as buried trees or timbers, abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses or any debris encountered shall be removed. All "materials of excavation" and " unforeseen obstacles " will be considered ' as incidental to construction and no additional compensation will be allowed. ' All roots, stumps, logs, limbs , boulders or any material which is not suitable for backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly as excavated and disposed of by the Contractor at his expense . 3 . Length of Trench to be Opened - The length of trench to be opened or the area g P g P of surface to be disturbed and unrestored at any time will be limited by the ' Engineer with regard to expeditious construction and the convenience of the Owner. Excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the pipe laying without the consent of the Engineer. 4 . Sheeting and Bracing - The Contractor shall be responsible for properly supporting the sides of all trenches and excavations with timbers or other supports wherever necessary or required to properly safeguard the trenches , adjacent properties and structures and at restricted right-of-way . The cost of ' all necessary timber, sheeting and bracing whatsoever (left in place or removed), shall be included in the unit prices bid under force main installation. ' Portions of the timber sheeting driven below the elevation of the top of the pipe shall not be disturbed or removed . Timber sheeting and bracing shall be left in place if so ordered by the Engineer and/or where shown on the Plans to avoid undermining or otherwise endangering the work or adjacent structures . ' All sheeting left in place shall be cut off or driven at least 18 -inches below finished grade, unless otherwise ordered . tGreat care shall be exercised in the selection of sheeting and bracing of adequate design, type , size and strength. The adequacy of the timber used for all supporting and bracing purposes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall use only men of seasoned experience for this type of work. The sizes and lengths of the timber used shall conform closely to the needs of the work and oversizing as well as undersizing should be avoided . In placing and driving the sheeting , proper workmanship and ' equipment shall be used to achieve a true alignment and close contact of the sheeting boards . Timber sheeting shall be straight and sound; free from shakes , cracks, large or loose knobs and other defects impairing its C :\Down1oad\techspec-0250 Ldoc SC501 - 6 strength and durability. It shall be squared to the required dimension throughout its entire length. If required for the proper execution of the work where running sand, quicksand or other semi- fluid material difficult to handle is encountered, the timber sheeting shall be tongue and groove . The Contractor may, in lieu of sheeting, bracing and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths , use a "trench box " ("trench shield" or "mule " ) provided pipe sections are secured downstream by a cable(s) stretched through and secured to the end section of pipe by means of a timber and a cable clamp , all materials being of adequate size and strength. The cable shall be held taut during the process of advancing the "box " . - This procedure may be used so long as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the work is proceeding satisfactorily. The Engineer may revoke permission to use the "trench box " at any time he feels unsatisfactory or inadequate work is being performed and the Contractor shall, without appeal, immediately begin using sheeting„ bracing and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths . At all times , when soil conditions permit, the bottom edge of the "trench box " shall be no lower than the springline of the pipe, so as to not disturb the trench compaction when advancing the " trench box " . 5 . Placing of Excavated Material - All excavated materials shall be placed where indicated by the Engineer in such a manner as not to endanger the work and so that free access will be maintained at all times to all parts of the trench and to all fire hydrants and their gate valves in the vicinit Such material shall be neatly piled so as to interfere as little as possible with traffic . 6 . Drainage - The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping or other dewatering equipment and shall provide at his own expense satisfactory drainage whenever needed in trenches and other excavations during the progress of the work and its completion for inspection. Water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon any concrete, masonry or pipe until work has been inspected and the mortar or concrete has properly set . Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the water table shall be lowered by the use of a well point system. Open trench pumping may be permitted only upon approval by the Engineer of the method of pumping and drainage to be used . If open trench pumping is approved, the water must be conveyed entirely through approved coarse mgterial placed below the bottom of the "Foundation" hereinafter described. The depth of this coarse material shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Materials and workmanship used for the well point system shall be in keeping with the approved standard practice . The well point system shall function so as to enable pipe, concrete cradle and appurtenances to be installed without interference from running or standing water at the bottom of the trench . The E:\PSW\P\99-91 e\TechsSpecs\techspec-02501 . doc 02501 - 7 Engineer shall make the final decision as to the acceptability of the well point system or any part thereof. ' Where necessary , pea gravel or graded sand shall be used in conjunction with the well points as they are installed in insure continuous pumping in the dewatering of fine material . The cost of dewatering shall be included in the various unit prices bid under water main installation. ' 7 . Disposal of Water from Excavations - All water pumped or bailed from trenches or other excavations shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a ' suitable point of discharge by the Contractor at his own expense . The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from ' excavations in a manner that will not cause injury to public health, private or public property, any portion of the work completed or in progress , the surface of the streets, or cause any impediments to the reasonable use of the site by other Contractors . The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all the local regulations and those of the Department of Environmental Regulation regarding pollution of waterways . Should the size of Contractor' s ' dewatering equipment, or the quantity of disposed water, or the method of disposal require a St. Johns' River Water Mgmt. District permit, the Contractor shall obtain such permit at no additional expense to the Owner and ' with no additional time added to the Contract. The Contractor shall take special precautions to eliminate any odor problems resulting from the discharge of sulfide water, such as the use of submerged discharge outlets and overflow ' basins . 8 . Preparation of Trench - Trenching as shown on the Plan details shall be standard for this project. The trenches shall be constructed by excavating to the depth indicated on the Plans . The trenches shall then be manually shaped to fit the bell and lower quadrant of the pipe barrel . Mechanical excavation shall be limited to provide an undisturbed trench ' bottom for the lower quadrant and bell of the pipe . Final excavation shall require hand shaping for placement of the pipe . If mechanical overcutting occurs, the pipe bedding shall consist of four (4) inches of washed and graded ' sand or crushed rock on undisturbed soil . C . Laving of Pipe ' All pipe , fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe . Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be installed . All lumps , blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe . CAD own Ioad\techspec-0250Ldoc SC501 - 8 As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe brought to correct line and grade . At times when pipe laying is not in progress , the open end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug . When practical, the plug shall remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry . When it is necessary to deflect the pipe from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table 5 and 6 in AWWA Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe . 1 ) Thrust Restraint - All valves , dead ends, tees , and bends for changes in alignment shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All items installed in the mainline which may cause vertical or horizontal thrust forces shall require the item and appropriate length of upstream and downstream pipe to be mechanically restrained with approved devices . 2) Backfill a. General - Where the trench has been dewatered, backfilling must progress sufficiently before pumps are shut off to prevent flotation of pipe . Any pipe that has been displaced perceptibly from its correct position shall be removed and re-laid properly at the. Contractor' s expense. Backfilling shall follow pipe laying within 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but shall not be performed in any case until the Engineer has approved the line for backfilling . Water shall not be added except as required to obtain Optimum Moisture Content and " flooding " or "puddling" for compaction will not allowed . Backfill material shall be free of roots, logs, limbs , clays, large rocks or any material or debris determined to be unsuitable by the Engineer. The Engineer may reject any material which he considers unsuitable for backfill . The compaction procedures specified herein shall be considered " minimum procedures" to prevent after-settlement and the Contractor shall reopen, refill and recompact any trenches indicating improper backfill procedures or after-settlement. All road crossings shall be backfilled immediately, made passable and maintained passable until the permanent repair is made . b . State-Owned Rights-Of-Way Under Pavements - The initial lift (stage 1 ) shall consist of clean, fine, select materials, not exceeding 3 /4 " in diameter under the haunches of the pipe . The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 " . The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 100% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-99 . Subsequent lifts (stage 2) to 12 " above the pipe shall be constructed as specified for stage 1 , except that had operated mechanical tampers may be used . Additional lifts in stage 2 , from 12 " above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free from organic material and stones or clumps C :\Download\techspec-02501 . doc SC501 - 9 exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the final 6-inch layer) in diameter, and mechanically compacted in 6-inch layers to an average maximum density of 100% as determined by AASHTOT-99 . ' c . All Other Areas Under Pavements - The initial lift shall consist of clean, fine , select materials , not exceeding 3 /4 " in diameter under the ' haunches of the pipe . The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4 " . The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 95 % of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180 . Subsequent lifts to 12 " above the pipe shall ' be constructed as specified for the initial lift, except that had operated mechanical tampers may be used. Additional lifts from 12 " above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free from ' organic material and stones or clumps exceeding 34nches (2 -inches in the final 6-final layer) in diameter, and compacted in 64nch layers to an average maximum density of 95 % as determined by AASHTO T- 180 . d. Areas Outside of Pavements - Backfill of all areas outside of pavements shall be constructed as specified above for " all other areas under ' pavements " except that the additional lifts shall be constructed as specified to the finished grade . ' e . Density Testing - The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with ' the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed ' necessary by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and Engineer. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction over compacted material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be performed on a representative sample of each ' inherently different material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill . ' As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of one test location per 300 lineal feet (or fraction thereof) of trench on the compacted backfill, under each drive lane at all roadway crossings and at all significant ' changes in bedding and backfill material . Tests shall be taken in one foot lifts beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade . Test locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized ' representative . If any test results are unsatisfactory , the Contractor shall re- excavate and recompact the backfill , at his expense, to the extent directed by the Engineer until the required compaction is obtained . The cost of all proctor and density tests shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the cost of installed and completed water main. CADownloadVechspec-02501 .doc SC501 - 10 3 ) Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices between valves or fittings . Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline . Following placement of tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or damage to the tape . 4) Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings, with splices , branches , connections and terminations as shown on the plans . 5 ) Separation Requirements Water mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or proposed sanitary or storm sewer, or any other sanitary hazard . Water mains crossing sanitary hazards shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical clearance of 18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sanitary hazard. Where the water main passes under the sanitary hazard or the 18 inch clearance cannot be met, the water main shall have . a full pipe length centered on the sanitary hazard. The water main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall be encased in a minimum of 6 inches of concrete all around . D . Field Quality Control 1 ) Hydrostatic Tests - The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and shall perform all work required in connection with the test, including temporary plugs where required. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 p . s . i . The required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation shall be applied for not less than two hours , and all pipe , fittings, valves and joints shall be made water-tight if leakage is evident. No ductile iron pipe installation will be accepted unless and until the leakage is less than that as specified under Section 4 . 2 of the AWWA (ANSI) C600 , P . V . C . pipe installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as applicable . E . Adjusting and Cleaning 1 . Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the original or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the completion of backfilling and surface irregularities , that are dangerous or obstructive to traffic, are to be removed . Paved sections shall conform in grade with adjacent areas and shall be of at least equal quality. Design mixes for flexible pavement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All damaged or undermined areas of existing pavement, not previously removed, shall be removed and restored to original conditions or in the specified manner. CADown1oad\techspec-02501 . doc SC501 - 11 ! Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments, or other hard material , lying on sections or pavement which are not to be removed. Removal , ' replacement and restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on drawings . F . Connection to Existing Mains The Contractor shall make no connection to the County/City ' s existing water system without the County/City first being given adequate notice of the connection and shall have a County/City representative present to witness the connection and to operate any existing valves . ! CADownload\techspec-0250 Ldoc SC 5 01 - 12 SECTION 02502 MISCELLANEOUS APPURTENANCES 1 . GENERAL A . All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished . The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable . B . All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body . 2 . WATER SERVICE TAPS A . Service saddles with fusion bonded plastic coated, ductile iron bodies having stainless steel double straps and elastomeric gasket shall be used for all taps . Corporation stops shall be brass with IPS inlet thread and compression outlet for polyethylene tubing, and shall conform to AWWA C800 , 3 . CORPORATION COCKS A. Corporation cocks for connections to ductile iron or PVC piping shall be all brass or bronze suitable for 150 psi operating pressure, shall be iron pipe thread design, and similar to Mueller Co . H- 10046 , or equal , and shall be of the same size water service tubing as shown and/or noted on the Drawings . 4. FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS A . Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings or as further specified hereafter. 1 . Split type coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping as noted on the Drawings . The couplings shall be mechanical type for radius groove piping . The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock grooved pipe ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction and expansion. 2 . Couplings shall consist of malleable iron, ASTM Specification A47 , Grade 32510 housing clamps in two or more parts , a single chlorinated butyl composition sealing gasket with a " C " shaped cross-section and internal sealing lips projecting diagonally inward , and two or more oval track head type bolts with hexagonal heavy nuts conforming to ASTM Specification A183 and A194 to assemble the housing clamps . Bolts and nuts shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. C : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02502 . d0c SC502 - 1 i 3 . Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged points . Pipes shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic ' couplings . Flanged adapter connections at fittings, valves , and equipment shall be Victaulic Vic Flange Style 741 , equal by GustinBacon Group, Division of Certain-Teed Products, Kansas City, Kansas, or equal . 4 . Sleeve type couplings shall Ypbe used with all burred piping . The ' couplings shall be of steel and shall be Dresser Style 38 , Smith Blair Style413 , Baker Allsteel, or equal . The coupling shall be provided with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise . ! 5 . All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed . 6 . Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within a pipe . 7 . If the Contractor decides to use victaulic couplings in lieu of flanged joints , he shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints . 5 . TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A . Tapping sleeves shall be long body, mechanical joint type with flanged outlet, ductile iron construction, split in two sections and designed for assembly around the main without halting service . The sleeve shall be suitable for use with the type and O . D . of pipe being tapped. iB . Tapping ' valves ends shall be a standard flange (for bolting to the sleeve) by mechanical joint. Valves shall have oversized seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters and, except as otherwise specified, shall be similar in construction and operation to AWWA C509 resilient seated gate valves . Tapping valves and sleeves shall be cold water pressure rated at 200 psi minimum for valve sizes up to 12 inches or less and 150 psi minimum for valve size over 12 inches . Tapping sleeves and valves shall be " Mueller" or approved equal . 6 . FIRE HYDRANTS A . Hydrants shall be dry barrel, traffic model , compression type, 5 - 1 /4 inch valve, opening left, with one 4- 1 /2 inch pumper nozzle and two 2- 1 /2 inch hose nozzles (National Standards Threads) . Hydrants shall have mechanical joint 6 " inlet connection and National Standard pentagon operating nut. Hydrants shall be Kennedy Guardian, model K81 A, Mueller, model A423 or Clow Medallion. Hydrants shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C502 . All hydrants shall be painted Federal Safety Yellow - Rustoleum 944 . Hydrants and associated gate valves shall be connected to the main using anchoring fittings , or other approved restraining devices , i iC : \ Down1oad \ techspec - 02502 . doc SC502 - 2 SECTION 02504 TESTING AND DISINFECTING WATER MAINS 1 . FILLING AND FLUSHING NEW WATER MAINS A. Prior to filling any new water main, an isolation valve (either existing or new) shall be installed between the existing water main and any new extension of the water main. The isolation valve shall be provided with a locking mechanism by the Contractor, with the key provided to the Utility Department. The valve shall remain locked in the closed position at all times except during flushing as supervised by the Utility Department and Engineer. Prior to connection of the new main to the isolation valve, the valve shall be pressure tested to 150 psi and checked for watertightness . Any valve which is found not to be watertight shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. B . Filling of the new water main shall be by means of a temporary fill connection utilizing either of the following : 1 ) A 2-inch jumper across the isolation valve from the existing active water main to the new water main. The jumper shall be connected : to the mains using previously specified 24nch by pipe diameter tapping saddles . The corporation stop shall be 2 -inch in size, manufactured as previously specified, except that the tapping end shall be M. I . P . T. and the fill connection end shall be F . I .P . T. The jumper shall incorporate an AWWA approved and certified backflow preventer mounted a minimum 184nches above ground surface and a gate valve for regulating flow. 2) A 24nch jumper from an active fire hydrant to the new water main . The jumper shall be connected to the new main as specified above . The jumper shall incorporate a hydrant meter, an AWWA approved and certified backflow preventer and a flow regulating gate valve . The fill connection shall be used for filling the new water main and for pulling bacteriological samples from the new main. The fill connection shall be maintained in place until after filling, flushing, testing, disinfection of the new water system, and clearance for use from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (F . D .E . P . ) has been received. After testing , the fill connection shall remain open to provide a minimum 20 psi in the new water system until clearance for use from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (F . D . E . P .) has been received . C . Flushing of the new water main system shall be conducted under very controlled conditions . The Contractor shall provide 3 /4 -inch by pipe C AD ow n l o ad\techspec-02 504 . doc - diameter tapping saddles on the existing and new water mains within 5 feet on ' either side of the isolation valve . The Contractor shall install 3/4-inch corporation stops, bushings , and temporary pressure gauges . The new water main system may then be flushed as followed under the supervision of the ' Utility Department and Engineer. 1 ) The Contractor must make a written request to the Indian River ' County inspection division at least 48 hours prior to the time desired for flushing . ' 2) Flushing shall not be requested or attempted during peak demand hours of the existing water system. 3 ) All downstream valves in the new system shall be opened prior to opening the isolation valve . If subsequent downstream valves require closing to flush only a portion of the new water main system, they shall rbe individually closed with the pressure drop across the isolation valve carefully monitored. 4) The pressure on the upstream side of the isolation valve shall not drop below 35 psi . The isolation valve shall be throttled as needed to meet this requirement. 5 ) The isolation valve may only be opened a portion of the way in order to maintain a minimum pressure drop across the valve of 15 psi . The i isolation valve shall be throttled as needed to meet this requirement. M After completion of flushing, the isolation valve shall be locked in the closed position until clearance for use from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (F . D . E . P .) has been received . After clearance from F . D . E. P . , the Contractor shall remove all filling and pressure gauges . The corporation stops shall be turned off and permanent brass plugs shall be installed in the female ends . 2 . DISINFECTING POTABLE WATER PIPELINES A . Before pressure testing against existing water system valves and before being placed into service , all potable water pipelines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the latest edition of AWWA C-651 , " Standard Procedure for Disinfecting Water Mains . " The procedure shall be approved by the Engineer. The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be as shown on the Drawings . Taps for chlorination and sampling shall be uncovered and backfilled by the Contractor as required . B . The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the lines, and then introduce chlorine in approved i C ADownload\techspec-02504.doc - dosages in accordance with Table 11 - 1 through a tap at one end, while water is being withdrawn at the other end of the line . The chlorine solution shall remain in the pipeline for no less than 24 hours . Co Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities and replaced with water from the existing water system . Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the replacement water shall then be made in the presence of the Engineer in full accordance with the AWWAManual C-651 . Passing bacteriological test results shall be remitted to the Engineer within one week of testing . All sample points shall be sampled on the same day. The Contractor will be required to re-chlorinate and retest any non-passing segment. The line shall not be placed in service until the requirements of the State and County Public Health Department are met. D . Special disinfecting procedures shall be used in connections to existing mains, and where the method outlined above is not practical . E . The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary with an independent commercial laboratory approved by the Department of Health and Rehabilitative Service (HRS) for the collection and examination of samples of water from disinfected water mains . These samples shall be examined for compliance with HRS requirements . Sampling shall be made daily and continuously until two successive examinations are found satisfactory. Should any examination be found unsatisfactory, the line shall be flushed and disinfected again. Certified copies of all laboratory analyses shall be provided to the Engineer within one week after testing. The cost of all sampling, flushing, and disinfecting shall be included in the contract price and no additional charge shall be made to the Owner for this work. County personnel shall operate all valves and be present to determine volume of water used for flushing . TABLE 11 - 1 Chlorine Required to Produce 25-mg/L Concentration in 100 ft. of Pipe by Diameter Pipe 100-Percent 1 -Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution in . The gal . --- ----- --- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------=--------------------------- 4 0 . 013 0 . 16 6 0 . 030 0 . 36 8 0 . 054 0 . 65 C :\Down1oad\techspec-02504.doc ' 10 0 . 085 1 . 02 - 12 0 . 120 1 .44 r16 0 . 217 2 . 60 r 3 . PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPING r A. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with r Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to test the line . Engineer shall be present during all r testing, and final inspections . P .V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of AWWA M23 . No hydrostatic testing against existing system valves shall be allowed until the section to be tested has been r bacteriologically cleared. The temporary fill connections shall be removed or otherwise isolated from the existing system prior to pressure testing . r B . The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than 150 psi . The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain the r required test pressure . Corporation cocks at least 3 /44nches in diameter, pipe riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line . Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours . The ' cost of these items shall be included as a part of testing . co The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic r pressure test and shall be of not less than 2 hours duration. All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated regardless of total leakage as shown by test. Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and r retested as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves and accessories shall be removed and replaced . The pipe section to be tested shall be between valves or in such sections as may be r directed by the Engineer by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as required . In no case shall the section of line to be hydrostatically tested exceed 2000 feet in length. The line shall be filled with water and all air ' removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate means shall be provided for measuring the water required to ' maintain this pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage . rD . The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least five (5 ) working days before starting the test. The Contractor shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after rcompletion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe coating shall be repaired by the rContractor. E . The Engineer or the Engineer's representative must be present during testing . rC :\Down1oad\techspec-02504. doc SECTION 02515 - SITE CONCRETE (WALKS & SLABSI PART 1 = GENERAL The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 -- Specifications Sections , apply to work of this Section. 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION A . Extent ofportland cement concrete paving, walks and slabs are shown on the drawings . B . Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" Section. C . Concrete and related sections are specified in Division 3 . D . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards : Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports , and materials, certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers . 1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS A . Traffic Control : Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities . B . Utilize barricades , warning signs and warning lights as required . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A . Forms : Steel , wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal . Use straight forms , free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring steel forms , masonite or laminated boards to form radius bends as required . B . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete . 02515- 1 t C . Reinforcing : Welded Wire Mesh plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185 , or Fibermesh admixture . ' D . Concrete Materials : Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete materials , ' admixtures , bonding materials , curing materials, and others as required . 2 . 02 CONCRETE MIX. DESIGN AND TESTING ' A. Design mix to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, 3 /4 " aggregate, air-entrained admixture and water to produce the following properties : 1 . Compressive Strength : 3000 psi minimum at 28 days . 2 . Slump Range :e : 2 " to 411 . ' 3 . Air Content : 5 % to 8 % . 4 . Water reducing or other supplemental admixtures will not be allowed. 5 . Pea rock pump-mix will not be allowed for any slabs on grade . ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION A . Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete . Be Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for ' additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive concrete . C . Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. D . Check completed form work for grade and alignment to following tolerances : 1 . Top of forms not more than 1 /8 " in 10 ' . 2 . Vertical face on longitudinal axis , not more than 1 /4 " in 10' . 3 . Clean forms after each use , and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage . ' 02515 -2 3 . 02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT : A . General : Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified . Be Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade . Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. C . Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix . Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms . Use only square-faced shovels for hand- spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels , and joint devices . D . Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than '/2 hour, place a construction joint . Do not use concrete pumps unless they are capable of delivering 3 /4 " rock mix. 3 . 03 JOINTS : A . General : Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to- line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete . Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated . Be Tooled Joints : Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. CO Construction Joints : Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than %2 hour, except where such pours terminate at expansion joints . D . Sawcut Control Joints shall be cut a minimum of 1 " deep within 24 hours of concrete placement and located per drawings . 3 . 04 CONCRETE FINISHING A . After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating . Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible . Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture . 02515-3 Be After floating, test surface to trueness with a 10' straightedge . Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities , and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. ' C . Work edges of slabs , back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool , and round to %Z " radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface . D . After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has ' disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows : 1 . Broom finish, by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface, ' perpendicular to line of traffic . Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. tE . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed . After form removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honey-combed areas . ' Remove and replace areas of sections with major defects , as directed by Architect. 3 . 05 CURING rA . Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections . Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever ' possible . 3 . 06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION ' A . Repair or replace broken or defective concrete , as directed by Architect. ' Be Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas . Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy resin grout. C . Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted , maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and ' spillage of materials as they occur. D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains , discolorations , dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 02515-4 SECTION 02601 GRAVITY SEWER PIPING 1 . GENERAL A. Scope The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling and delivering and the installing of polyvinyl chloride gravity sewer mainline pipe and service laterals as herein specified . Installation of service laterals shall follow the installation of service wye or tee in the main within seven (7) calendar days . B . References Standard applicable in these Specifications shall be : 1 ) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) . a. ASTM D3034- 81 Standard Specification for Type ` PSM (Polyvinyl Chloride) PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings . b . ASTM D232140 Standard Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe . C , ASTM F477-76 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. d . ASTM D3212- 81 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals , 2) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials . a. AASHTO T480-74 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 lb . (4 . 54 kg . ) Rammer and an 18 -inch (457 mm) Drop . b . AASHTO T-9944 The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5 . 5 lb . (2 . 5 kg .) Rammer and a 122-inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99 -801 (Dated 1981 ) . C . Submittals 1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5 ) sets of shop drawings for the following items . All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Engineer. CADown1oad\techspec-02601 .doc SC601 - 1 ' a. en Pipe length and class , fittings and special pieces . � ' b . Joint method to be used. C , Manufacturers' data on electronic marker system to be supplied. 2 . MATERIALS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings ' 1 ) Unless otherwise noted in the Plans , PVC pipe and fittings shall be extra strength, SDR 35 , push-on point with thickened integral bell and elastomeric gasket, conforming to ASTM D3034 . The pipe shall have a standard laying length of 12 . 5 feet or 20 feet . Necessary fittings and adapters shall be compatible with SDR 35 pipe . Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212 . Connections to pipes of other materials or to pipes with dimensions not compatible with SDR 35 pipe shall be made using couplings of rigid P .V . C . construction with elastomeric gaskets, as manufactured by " Harco " , or equal . B . Service Lateral Marker System ' 1 ) A stake shall be placed at the end of each lateral and shall be 4" x 4 " pine, 4 feet long. The stake shall be pressure treated lumber, painted red at the top . ' C . Buried Identification Tape ' Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed for all pipe . Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width, consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a solid aluminum foil core . Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed. ' Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted ' continuously with the following words , unless otherwise approved : " CAUTION BURIED SEWER BELOW" ' Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility marking tape as manufactured by Pro -Line Safety Products ' Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # 1 , West Chicago , IL . ' EAPSW\P\99-91e\TechsSpecs\techspec-02601 .doc 02601 -2 D . Detectable Buried Trace Wire Trace wire shall be continuous # 14 THHN, single conductor copper wire . PVC color sheathing shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) . E . Foundation Rock A sieve analysis of the limerock shall conform to the following limits : Passing 1 " - 100% Passing 3 /4 " - 90 - 100% Passing 3 /8 " - 20 - 55 % Passing #4 - 0 - 10% Passing # 8 - 0 - 5 % 3 . INSTALLATION A . General Requirements 1 ) All work shall be proved to be in first class condition and constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications . All defects and leaks disclosed by required testing shall be remedied. All tests shall be performed by the Contractor and observed by the Engineer. 2) All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding . The free water surface shall be shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding , haunching, and initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling , the water level shall be kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the required density, and until required density tests have been performed . 3 ) Temporary supports shall be installed for adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface structures, water lines , drains, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work. Any structure which may have been disturbed shall be restored upon completion of the work. 4) Blasting shall not be permitted except by written approval of the Engineer. 5 ) Trenching and subsequent backfilling within the general construction site shall be accomplished as expeditiously as possible in order to prevent trench decay and maintain a clear operational area. C :\DoHmload\techspec-02601 .doc SC601 -3 6) Prior to any excavation or trenching outside the designated limits of the ' work site, the Contractor shall secure the necessary permits and/or authorization from the applicable Owner, or confirm that such has been previously obtained. The stipulations of said permit or ' authorization shall be completely followed and, prior to construction operations, notice shall be provided to the appropriate Owner and Engineer. ' Be Handling Materials ' 1 ) Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by hand or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage . Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped . Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground . 2) In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be ' unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. C . Alignment, Grade, And Cover For Buried Piping Systems 1 ) Gravity sewers shall be laid and maintained to . the required lines , depths , and grades . 2) Wherever obstructions not indicated on the Drawings are encountered during ' the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration in the Drawings is required, the Engineer will order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the ' removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions . 3 ) The maximum permissible deflection for pipe and fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 4) Installation of gravity sewers shall be controlled by use of a laser to ' maintain proper grade . The Contractor shall also be responsible for verifying elevations of the pipe, as indicated on the Drawings, at sufficient points during progress of the work to identify discrepancies ' between actual and plan elevations due to laser misalignment, equipment error, etc . , and to correct the work as required to conform to the Drawings . ' D . Pipe Trench Excavation ' 1 ) Trench Dimensions a. The minimum width of the trench shall be equal to the outside diameter of the pipe at the joints plus 8 inches for unsheeted trenches, or 12 inches for sheeted trench, and the maximum width of trench, measured at the top of the pipe, shall not exceed the ' CADownload\techspec-02601 .doc SC6014 nominal pipe diameter plus two feet, unless otherwise shown on the Drawing details or approved by the Engineer. Trench walls shall be vertical from the bottom of the trench to a line measured one foot above the top of the pipe . From one foot above the top of the pipe to the surface, the trench walls shall be as nearly vertical as soil conditions will permit, unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings . Spaces for joints , fittings, manholes and other structures shall be maintained unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, or alternate methods are detailed on the Drawings . Should the specified maximum width of trench be exceeded, the pipe shall be adequately reinforced as directed by the Engineer, at the Contractor' s expense . b . Trench grade for utilities or structures not requiring special bedding material shall be defined as the grade of the bottom surface of the utility or structure to be constructed or placed within the trench. Such shaping of the trench bottom, as may be required to provide suitable bedding, shall be considered to be a part of this work. Trench grade in non-cushioning material shall be defined as 6 inches below the outside of the bottom of the utility, which 6 inches shall be backfilled with suitable bedding material . Unauthorized excavation below trench grade shall be backfilled to trench grade and suitably compacted by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. Final trimming and grading of trench bottom shall be done manually . E. Backfill and Bedding Materials 1 ) TYPE l - Type 1 material shall be either well-graded crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the requirements of ASTM Designation C33 - 71a, Gradation 67 (3 /4 inch to No . 4 Sieve) or air cooled blast furnace slag along or in combination with crushed stone and/or crushed gravel conforming to ASTM Designation C33 -71a requirements . This material shall be used primarily for pipeline and manhole foundations . 2) Type 2 - Type 2 material shall be unclassified material obtained from the Contractor' s excavations and approved by the Engineer. The material shall be substantially free from wood, roots , humus , peat, muck, and other organic materials, and shall not contain clods, stones, masonry rubble, and the like, greater than 6 inches through the largest dimension. In general, the material shall consist of sand, loam, sandy- loam, clayey- sand, gravel, or crushed stone . 3 ) Type 3 - Type 3 material shall be select granular material , free from organic matter, of such size and gradation that the desired compaction can be readily attained and shall meet the requirements for A3 material according to the Revised Bureau of Public Roads Classifications . Material from the Contractor's excavations may be used , if it meets the above requirements . Otherwise it must be imported . C:\Download\techspec-02601 .doc SC601 -5 F . Bedding and Foundations ' 1 ) Ordinary Bedding ' a. The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the utility pipe . The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding shall be shaped so that the pipe ' will be in continuous contact therewith for its full length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0 . 6 of the outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be ' sufficient so that the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference. ' 2) Unsuitable Bedding Material a. Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction ' unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface . In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation are, in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe, such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The ' Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be removed and the Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and ' backfill in accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding . All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. G. Pipe Trench Backfill 1 ) Initial Backfill ' a. Initial backfill shall belaced as soon as p possible after laying the ' pipe and shall maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more than five pipe joints separate laying and backfilling operations . Initial backfill shall include all haunching and backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the pipe . All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry . ' b . Initial backfill shall be done as specified below: b4 . Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the pipe, taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe . Backfilling shall be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe . ' CADown1oad\techspec-0260Ldoc SC601 -6 b-2 . During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both sides of the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface . b-3 . Where thrust blocks, encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are below grade, no backfilling shall start until the specific items have been inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative. b-4 . The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed before the remainder of the trench is backfilled . Initial backfill shall be compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180 . No subsequent backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative . 2) Subsequent Backfill a. Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the finished ground level or bottom of subbase . b . Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers, rollers , or vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T480 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved surfaces , and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted to the specified density prior to placing subsequent layers . The thickness of the loose layer may be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained . 3 ) Backfill Material a. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock or stone greater than 1 1 /2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3 backfill as determined by the Engineer. CADownloadVechspec-02601 .doc SC601 -7 1 tb . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid Documents . All material that ' is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the price set forth in the Contract. ' c . Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the trenches where space is available ' to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench. Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the site location with the Engineer and shall maintain ' his operations to provide for natural drainage and not present an unsightly appearance . No excavated material shall be placed on private property without the consent of the property owner. ' 4) Compaction Methods a. Mechanical compaction shall be accomplished using pneumatic or gasoline-powered tampers or flat-plate vibrators, with the exception that the first two feet of backfilling over the pipe shall be compacted by hand- operated tamping devices . b . Flooding or puddling with water to consolidate backfill is not acceptable, except where sand is encountered below unpaved areas only, and only with prior approval by the Engineer. The flooding or puddling operation shall be repeated with each two ' feet of backfill placed . 5 ) Density Tests a. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to ' demonstrate conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary ' by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and Engineer. b . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the Engineer prior to testing . At the request of the ' Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to evaluate the method for approval . ' c . In no case shall the Contractorp roceed with construction on compacted material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer. ' CADown1oad\techspec-0260Ldoc SC601 -8 d. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural class , a minimum of two test locations per mainline run between manholes shall be performed. e. As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of on the compacted backfill and shall be taken in one foot intervals beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade . Test locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized representative . If any test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re-excavate and recompact the backfill, at his expense, to the extent directed by the Engineer until the required compaction is obtained . f. The costs of all sampling, proctor and density testing shall be paid for by the Contractor. H. Pine System La ing and Jointing 1 ) General a, Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and fittings shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's directions with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket placement, lubrication, bolt torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling methods for joint assembly . b . Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked for damage or defects such as cracks , blisters , coating/lining separation, gouges, and the like . Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked " REJECTED " and immediately removed from the work site . C , Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris, sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets, gasket grooves , spigots, and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining . d . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit. CADown1oad\techspec-0260Ldoc SC601 -9 te . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is seated. f. Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device such as chain-puller, come- ' along, and the like is required, the device shall be used in a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause significant disturbance of the prepared bedding. In no case ' shall joints be made by "popping-on" or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint. ' g . Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the installation. h . The installedi in s shall be kept free p p S stem y p of dirt, trench water, and other foreign matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress . ' i . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill ' or approved anchoring devices sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy . I . Installation of Fittings ' 1 ) Fittings , plugs , and caps shall be set and jointed to pipe in the manner heretofore specified for cleaning, laying and jointing pipe . ' 2) Installation of manholes shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section425 of the 1986 Edition of the Florida D . O . T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 ' percent of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density in areas of paving or curbing . ' 3 ) Density tests shall be taken on the compacted backfill at all manholes . There shall be a minimum of one test location for each manhole . The test location shall be taken at the location designated by the Engineer' s representative . ' The density tests shall be taken at each location at one foot intervals beginning at the bottom of the excavation and ending at the final grade . The costs of all testing shall be paid for by the Contractor. ' CADown1oad\techspec-0260Ldoc SC601 - 10 J. Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices between valves or fittings . Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline . Following placement of tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or damage to the tape . K. Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings , with splices, branches , connections and terminations as shown on the plans . L . As-Built Drawings 1 ) During the installation of gravity sewer lines, the Contractor shall keep accurate records of the As-Built construction showing the location of all changes in elevation, alignment, services, utility crossings , structures and similar data. Items shall be located from permanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes , valves, etc . Immediately upon completion of the sanitary sewer inverts and prior to placement of roadway base, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing, signed and sealed by a Florida registered surveyor, showing the manhole separations, inverts and rim elevations . CADow iloadVechspec-02601 .doc SC601 - 11 1 1 1 SECTION 02602 APPURTENANCES FOR GRAVITY SEWER SERVICES i 1 . SCOPE 1 This section describes the materials for appurtenances to be used in construction of gravity 1 sewerage services as shown on the Plans and specified. 2 . SEWER CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES AND WET WELLS 1 The first joint shall be not more than 24 " from the outside of the manhole . PVC pipe must enter the manhole through a manhole coupling as manufactured by Kor-N- Seal , ' Inc . or approved equal . 3 . CLEAN OUTS 1 Clean outs shall be provided immediately prior to the service lateral end and where shown or specified . Clean out opening for pipe 8 inches or larger in diameter shall be not less 1 than 6 inches in diameter. Clean out openings for pipe less than 8 inches in diameter shall be of the same diameter as the pipe except at the ends of service laterals where they shall 4 inch in diameter as shown on the Drawings . i 1 i 1 1 i 1 C :\Down1oad\techspec-02602.doc SC602 - 1 1 SECTION 02603 SEWAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM 1 . GENERAL A . Scope The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling and delivering and the installing of polyvinyl chloride gravity building sewer as herein specified . Be Submittals 1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following items . All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Engineer. a. Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings b . Clean-out Fittings and Accessories c . Identification Tape 2 . MATERIALS A . Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC. 1 ) Pipe for on-site gravity sewer lines shall be Schedule 40 (D . W. V.) polyvinyl chloride (P .V. C .) pipe and shall conform to the latest ASTM Designation D 2665 . In addition to the requirements of ASTM specifications, the pipe shall not be out-of--round or crooked in alignment as determined by the Engineer. Any length of pipe 4 inches or greater in diameter whose inside diameters measured at right angles to each other vary more than 1/4 inc may be rejected. P . V . C . material shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM Designation D1785 . All P . V. C . materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer' s specifications (not in direct sunlight) . P . V . C . pipe and fittings which show signs of ultraviolet degradation shall be considered substandard and unfit for use, and will be rejected by the Engineer or Owner. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be supplied in 10 or 20 foot lengths and manufactured by "WOPLAS " products or approved equal . C :\Down1oad\techspec-02603 . doc Sc603 - 1 B . Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings 1 ) Fittings installed in polyvinyl chloride gravity sewer pipe shall conform to ' the same specifications as the pipe in which they are installed. All wyes , fittings, laterals , etc . shall be manufactured by "LASCO", or approved equal . Adapters shall be compatible to the approved pipe and appurtenances . All joints shall be glued slip joints . ' C . Sanitary Clean-Outs 1 ) Clean-outs shall be constructed of an in-line P .V . C . sweep and riser pipe, the ' same size as the gravity main. The riser pipe shall terminate with a slip by F . I . P . T. hub installed at finished grade. A solid bronze, countersunk, square headed plug shall be provided in the hub . D . Buried Identification TaDe ' Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe. Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width, consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a solid aluminum foil core . Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed. Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the appropriate lettering for the intended use . 3 . INSTALLATION A . General Requirements 1 ) All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding . The free water surface shall be shall be lowered to at least 4 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding and initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be kept ' sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the required density until required density tests have been performed . ' 2) Trenching and subsequent backfilling within the general construction site shall be accomplished as expeditiously as possible in order to prevent ' trench decay and maintain a clear operational area. C:\Down1oad\techspec-02603 . doc Sc603-2 Be Engineer Inspection 1 ) No underground utilities shall be backfilled or tested without first being inspected by the Engineer or his representative . The Contractor shall provide a minimum 24 hours advance notice to the Engineer of any inspections or test required by the utility installations . CO Installation of On- Site Water Piping All pipe and fittings shall be installed according to AWWA Manual M23 and Sections 02202 and 02203 of these specifications for P .V . C . pipe . Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be installed. All lumps, blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe . As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe brought to correct line and grade . At times when the pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug . When practical , the plug shall remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. D . Installation of Buried Identification Tape Tape shall be tied to each riser or. fitting and shall run continuously with no splices between riser or fittings . Tape shall be placed) at a maximum depth of 12 inches below finished grade directly above the pipe . centerline . Following placement of tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or damage to the tape . Tape shall be installed throughout the entire length of the project. 4. TESTING A. Ali nment The Contractor shall perform lamping of the gravity sewer system between the wet well and clean-out upon completion of backfilling. No visible distortion or reduction from full inside diameter of pipe due to unauthorized curvature, sagging/hogging, flattening, or obstruction shall be allowed. Be Soil Testing Soil testing shall be conducted by an approved laboratory service. All test results shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer who is certified to supervise such data collection and provide such test results . Proctor tests shall be taken for each material type encountered . At a minimum density tests shall be taken for each foot of lift, in each run of pipe not to exceed 200 foot of separation per test location. CADown1oad\techspec-02603 . doc Sc603 -3 SECTION 02701 FORCE MAINS 1 . GENERAL ' A . Scope ' The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment and labor required for the installation of force mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification. B . References Standards applicable in this Specification shall be : 1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National ' Standards Institute (ANSI) . a. AWWA C104 (ANSI A21 . 4) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron ' and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for water. b . AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -inch through 48 -inch for water and other liquids . C , AWWA C I I I (ANSI A2 Ll 1 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and ' Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings . d . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe. e . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids . f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53 ) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch through 112-inch for water and other liquids . g . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water ' Mains and Appurtenances . h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 -inch through 12-inch. i . AWWA (ANSI) C905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water ' transmission pipe, nominal diameters 14-inch through 36-inch. MIsc2\Alan Schm\ForcMain . SC4 p 2 r7ol,,- � i . 2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D - 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials . 3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99 - 801 (Dated 1981 ) . b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and an 18 -inch drop . co Submittals 1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5 ) sets of shop drawings for the following items . a. Material specifications for all pipe types , fittings, joints, joint restraint, and specials . All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions, Article 6 . 24 through 6 .28 . 2 . MATERIALS A . P1Ue 1 ) Ductile Iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 , ANSI A21 . 51 and have a rated working pressure of 350 psi (minimum) . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated . The pipe interior shall receive a 40 mil lining of "Protecto 401 ". The exterior of the pipe shall have a minimum 1 mile thick bituminous coating in accordance with AWWA C 151 . The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using paint and with the word "Force Main" in 3/4-inch high letters appearing one or more times every 21 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, buried pipe may be continuously spiral wrapped with plastic identification tape marked "Force Main". Lettering or identification tape shall be brown in color for force main . Ductile Iron Pipe shall conform to the following classes : a. Ductile Iron Pipe under roadways shall be minimum pressure class 350 . b . Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe shall be minimum thickness class 53 . MIscMan Schm\ForcMain.SC4 02'70/- Z. r ' SECTION 02704 TESTING FORCE MAINS 1 . SCOPE ' A . This Section describes the procedural, material, and acceptance requirements for cleaning and testing of the mainlines with regard to quality, alignment, tightness , and overall integrity of the installed system. 2. GENERAL rA. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials , transportation, pumps , gauges , and equipment necessary to flush and test the installed pipe system as required by these Specifications . B . The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary connections, corporation stops, blowoffs , and the like required for flushing and testing, and upon completion of satisfactory tests, shall remove same and install appropriate plugging/capping devices or permanent connections as required. r Co The Contractor shall notifythe Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of g all acceptance testing to be performed . No testing for acceptance of the work shall begin until the Owner and Engineer or his authorized representative are present. D . No interconnection shall be made between the new work and an existing active pipe system, except that necessary and approved by the Owner for testing, until the work is approved for use by the Engineer and until all approvals and clearances required by applicable construction permits for use of the work are issued by the permitting agency . E . At least 3 business days prior to conducting each item of work under this Section, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a description of the specific equipment, materials, and procedures to be used, plus identification of proposed rwater source(s) , to be used for this particular work item. r3 . FLUSHING A. Upon completion of each run of pipe between main valves or between a main valve r and a terminal point, the pipe run shall be flushed with clean water at a minimum full diameter velocity of 2 . 5 ft./sec . in order to remove sand, debris, and other foreign materials prior to pressure testing. rB . The pipe run to be flushed shall be slowly filled with clean water with all valves open to allow escape of air pockets . High points in the pipe shall be vented with air ' release valves . When the system is full and prior to flushing , all valves shall be fully closed . C :\Down1oad\techspec-02704.doc x, C . Flushing shall continue until a minimum water volume of two times the aggregate pipe volume has passed through the pipe section being cleaned. The aggregate pipe volume shall include all pipe carrying flushing water from the point of introduction to the work to the point(s) of discharge from the run being cleaned. D . For nominal pipe sizes of 6 inches and smaller, the pipe shall be flushed through a discharge extension of at least the full pipe diameter. For nominal pipe sizes greater than 6 inches, a 6 inch diameter discharge extension pipe, connected to the work with reducer(s), may be used in lieu of a full diameter blowoff. 4 E . Flushing water shall be carried beyond the trench and shall be discharged in a manner that will not cause erosion nor structural damage on or off-site, and will not cause contravention of State water quality standards in receiving surface waters . The Contractor shall provide adequate extension pipe, sedimentation basin(s) , and/or diffusion devices as necessary to prevent such damage. 4 . HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE AND PRESSURE TESTING A. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to test the line . P. V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of AWWA M23 . Upon completion of flushing, the installed pipe system shall be tested for tightness under a continuous hydrostatic gauge pressure of 25 psi and then 100 or 150 psi as applicable, ± 5 psi as applicable, determined at the lowest point in the system, for a period of 2 hours . The allowable leakage rate shall not exceed that defined in and specified by AWWA C600- 82 or AWWA M23 , Be If the work is subject to acceptance by a municipal or private utility with its own adopted test requirements more stringent than those stated herein with regard to pressure, duration, and/or allowable leakage rate, such requirements shall supersede these specifications . C . Testing shall be performed separately on each valved-off section of the installed system . Testing shall be against closed in-line valves with each valve in the system subject to the full test pressure differential for full test time at least once during the course of testing. D . Allowable leakage shall be calculated based on the pipe diameter(s) and total laid length of the run being tested, with no additional allowance for fittings , or joints . No visible leakage shall be allowed . If visible leakage is noted during the course of testing, or if allowable leakage is exceeded, such leakage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the test repeated or extended for an additional period up to the full test time with suitable adjustment for previous make-up water used, at the Engineer's discretion. CAD own 1 oad\techspec-02704.doc E. The pumping/pressurizing and make-up water measuring equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to testing . The pressurizing equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner that will minimize pressure surging and pulsing within the pipe. ' F . The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary valved tap with a 1 /4 " FPT connection to receive the pressure gauge in each pipe run to be tested. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall remove and plug the pipe . ' G. Inre aration for testing,p p sting, the pipe shall be slowly filled with clean water from an approved source, taking care to purge all air pockets. Water remaining in the pipe system after flushing may be used and supplemented as necessary with prior approval by the Engineer, and clean test water may be reused for sequential testing of pipe segments . H . In conducting the test, water shall be pumped into the full pipe until test pressure is attained, and make-up water shall be added as soon as the pressure drops to 5 psi below test pressure . All make-up water shall be accurately measured, and the total test leakage shall be defined as the volume of make-up water added. ' I . Should the tested section fail to meet these requirements, the Contractor shall , at his own expense, locate and repair the defects and retest the section until it is acceptable . ' J. Immediately upon completion of a passing pressure test all valves shall be operated ' to insure their full opening and closing . ' C :\Down1oad\techspec-02704 . doc SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCING & GATES ARTA - GENERAL 1 . 0 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including G neral and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, Add dum, apply to work of this section. B . lated Work Specified Elsewhere r 1 . Irrigation - 02500 2 . dscaping - 02480 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION O WORK Extent of chain link fen es and gates is indi ated on drawings . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide chain link fences and ga s as omplete units controlled by a single source including necessary erection accessories, fi i s, and fastenings . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s tec al data, an 'nstallation instructions for metal fencing, fabric, gates and accessories . PART 2 - PRODUCT 2 . 01 GENERAL A . Dimensio s indicated for pipe, roll -formed, and H-sections are inside dimensions , exclusiv of coatings . B . Avail le Manufacturers : Subje t to compliance with requirements, manufa ers offering products which may be i orporated in the work include ; but are not li ited to, the following : 1 . Galvanized Steel Fencing & Fabric : a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation b . American Fence Corporation c . Anchor Fence, Inc . 028304 ' REVISED 12 / 10 / 2003 SECTION 02830 - CHAIN LINK FENCING BACKSTOPS & GATES PART A we GENERAL ' 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, Addendum, apply to work of this section. Be Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1 . Irrigation - 02500 2 . Landscaping - 02480 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of chain link fences and gates is indicated on drawings . This section defines permanent fencing. For temporary construction fencing refer to Section 01500 , 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide chain link fences and gates as complete units controlled by a single source including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer ' s technical data and installation instructions tions for , metal fencing, fabric, gates and accessories . PART 2 - PRODUCT 2 . 01 GENERAL A. Dimensions indicated for pipe, roll -formed, are outside dimensions, ' exclusive of coatings . Be Available Manufacturers : ' Subjectto compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to , the following : 1 . Galvanized Steel Fencing & Fabric : a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation ' b . American Fence Corporation C , Anchor Fence, Inc, d . Ameristar 02830- 1 REVISED 12 / 10 / 2003 2 . 02 STEEL FABRIC A. Fabric : Zinc coated galvanized, with a minimum of 1 . 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of ' surface area and conform to ASTM A-392, Class 1 . No . 9 ga. core (0 . 1 ' 48 " +/- 0 . 005 " ) size steel wires , 2 " diamond mesh. ' B . Furnish one piece fabric widths for fencing up to 12 ' high, ' C . Fabric Finish as called out on the drawings . 1 . Galvanized, ASTM A 392, Class I with not less than 1 . 2 oz. Zinc per sq.ft. of surface. For standard perimeter fencing the top selvage is to be twisted and barbed. ' For ballfield outfield fencing the top selvage shall be knuckled down to prevent injury . 2 . At backstops , and 10 foot high adjacent fencing in front of the bleachers and dugouts, provide black vinyl coated galvanized fabric, per ASTM F668 , class 1 . 2 . 03 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Steel Framework General : Galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A 120 or A 123 , with not less than 1 . 8 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of surface area, per ASTM F 1083 , table 1 , schedule 40 . All ' coatings to be applied after welding. Pipe shall be straight and true to section. Fittings and Accessories : Galvanized, ASTM F 626, with zinc weights per Table I . B . End, Corner, and Pull Posts : Minimum sizes and weights as follows : Up to 6 ' fabric height, 2 . 875 " OD galvanized steel pipe, 5 . 79 lbs . per lin. foot. Over 6' fabric height, 2 . 875 " OD steel pipe, 5 . 79 lbs . per lin. foot. C . Fence/Line Posts : Straight Runs- space 10' C . C. maximum, unless otherwise called out on the drawings, of following maximum sizes and weights . ' Radiused outfield fence runs- space 8 ' c. c . maximum, unless otherwise called out on the drawings . Of following maximum sizes and weights . Up to 6' fabric height, 2 . 375 " OD galvanized steel pipe, 3 . 65 lbs . per lin. foot. Over 6' and up to 8 ' fabric height, 2 . 875 " OD galvanized steel pipe , 5 . 79 lbs . per lin. foot. Over 8 ' fabric height, 2 . 875 " OD galvanized steel pipe, 5 . 79 lbs . per lin. foot. ' D . Gate Posts : Furnish posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate installation, for normal gate widths as follows : ' 02830 -2 ' REVISED 12 / 10 / 2003 ' LEAF WIDTH GATEPOST LBS ./LIN , FT. Up to 6 3 . 000 " OD pipe 5 . 79 Over 6to 13 ' 4 . 000 " OD pipe 9 . 11 ' Over 13 ' to 18 ' 6 . 625 " OD pipe 18 . 97 Over 18 ' 8 . 625 " OD pipe 28 . 55 ' E: Top and Bottom Rails : Manufacturer ' s longest lengths at 21 ', with expansion type couplings, tubular steel, 0 . 051 thickness X 7 " long, expansion type for each joint. Provide means for ' attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull and end post. Use 1 . 66 " OD pipe, at 2 . 27 lbs . per lin.ft. ' F . Tension Wire : Marcelled 7 gage, coated coil spring wire, metal and finish to match fabric . Locate at bottom of all 6' high fence only. G. Wire Ties : 9 gauge galv. steel, Twist-Tight ties , or an approved equivalent tie . H . Hog Rings : Steel wire, 11 gauge, with a minimum zinc coating of 0 . 80 ounces per ' square foot of wire surface . J. Post Brace Assembly : Manufacturer ' s standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0 . 375 " diameter rod and adjustable tightener. K. Post Caps : ' Pressed steel, cast iron or cast aluminum alloy designed to fit snugly over posts to exclude moisture . Supply cone type caps for terminal posts and loop type for line posts . All fittings to conform to ASTM F-626 . ' L . Stretcher Bars : One-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, less 2 " , with minimum cross-section ' of 3 / 16 " x 3 /4 " . Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post. ' M. Stretcher Bar Bands : Space not over 15 o . c . , to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull, and gate posts . ' N. Baseball Backstops : All primary verticals to 18 ' height, one-piece lengths, schedule 80 galv. , 4 " OD, with ' . 3 " wall thickness , at 12 . 51 lbs . per lin. foot. Intermediate horizontal members, one- piece lengths , schedule 40 galv, 1 . 90 " OD , at 2 . 70 lbs . per lin.foot. 02830-3 REVISED 12 / 10 / 2003 2 . 04 GATES A . Fabrication : ' Fabricate perimeter frames ofates from om metal and finish to match fence framework. Assemble gate frames by welding . Provide security against removal or breakage of ' connections . Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories . Space frame members maximum of 8 ' apart unless otherwise indicated. ' 1 . Provide same fabric as for fence, unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges . Attach stretcher bars to gate frame at ' no more than 15 " o . c . Provide top and bottom rails and tie mesh to rails . 2 . Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 3 /8 " diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates exceeding 4 ' wide, to insure frame rigidity without sag or twist. ' Be Swing Gates : Fabricate perimeter frames to match top rail material, 1 . 66 " OD pipe, galv. , at 2 . 27 ' lbs . per lin foot. C . Gate Hardware : ' Provide hardware and accessories for each gate, galvanized per ASTM F626, and in accordance with the following. ' D . Hinges : Size and material to suit gate size; non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180 deg . gate opening (90 degrees in and 90 degrees out) . Provide one and one-half pair of hinges ' for each leaf over 6 ' nominal height. E . Latch : ' Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. tF . Drop Pins : Provide adjustable drop pins at all double drive gates . G. Double Gates : Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of 2 " OD galv . pipe , 7 . 2 lbs . per lin. ' foot X 24 " long, driven into soil and designed to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eyes as integral part of latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with single padlock. 02830-4 ' REVISED . 12 / 10 /. 2003 H. Concrete : ' Provide concrete consisting of portland cement, ASTM C 150, aggregates ASTM C 33 , and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 day ' compressive strength of 2500 psi using at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd. , 3 /4 " minimum size aggregate, maximum 3 " slump, and 2% to 4% entrained air. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION ' A. Do not begin installation and erection before finaladin is gr g completed, unless otherwise permitted. ' B . Excavation: Drill or hand excavate (using post hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and ' spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil . 1 . If not indicated on drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum ' diameter recommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than 4 times largest cross-section of post. ' 2 . Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 " lower than post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 " below finish grade surface . C . Setting Posts : ' Center and align posts in holes . 3 " above bottom of excavation. 1 . Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check ' each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations . ' a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 1 " above grade and crown to shed water. ' D . Top Rails : Run rail continuously through post caps, bending to radius for curved runs . Provide ' expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. E . Brace Assemblies : ' Install manufacturer ' s standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric . Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0 . 375 " diameter ' rod and adjustable tightener. ' 02830-5 C ' REVISED 12 / 10 / 2003 ' F . Fabric : Leave approximately 2 " between finish grade and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated . Pull fabric taunt and tie to posts , rails , and tension wires . Install ' fabric on the playing field side of fence , and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released . ' G. Stretcher Bars : Thread through or clamp to fabric 4 " o . c. , and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 " o . c . ' H . Gates : Install gates plumb , level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ' ground-set items in concrete for anchorage . Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary . ' J . Tie Wires : Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns . Bend ends of wire to ' minimize hazard to persons or clothing . 1 . Tie fabric to line post, with wire ties spaced 12 " o . c . Tie fabric to rails and braces , with wire ties spaced 24 " o . c . Tie fabric to tension wires, with hog rings spaced 24 " o . c . ' K. Fasteners : Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric ' side . Cut off all exposed threads and peen the nut where it meets the thread to prevent removal of nut. ' L . Bottom Tension Wires at 6 ' high fence runs : Install tension wires to fence fabric . Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced at 24 " o . c. ' M . Bottom Rails : Install bottom of rails at 2 " above finish grade with boulevard clamps . Tie the fabric ' to the botom rail to match the top rail . (No bottom rails at 6 ' high fence runs) . ' N . Backstop Installation : Provide all welded framework. Clean all welds after on site fabrication, and prime and paint with two coats of zinc based galvanized paint ' 3 . 02 COMPLETION A . The area of installatin shall be left free of debris caused by the installation of the ' fence . . * * *END OF SECTION * * * ' 02830-6 Install gates plumb , level , and secure for full opening without interference sn tall ground-set items in concrete for anchorage . Adjust hardware for Smoot operation and lubricate where necessary. J . Tie Wires : Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which ched, clasping pipe a d fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turn . Bend ends of wire to mi imize hazard to persons or clothing . ' 1 . Tie fabric to line post, with wire ties spac 12 " o . c . Tie fabric to rails and b aces , with wire ties spaced 24 " o .c . e fabric to tension wires , with hog ' rin s spaced 24 " o . c . K. Fasteners : ' Install nuts for t Sion bands and har are bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side . Bend ends of bolt or score thread to prevent removal of nuts . * * * D OF SECTION * * * ' 02830 -6 SECTION 02920 - CLAY INFIELD MATERIAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION A. This work shall consist of loading, hauling and spreading of clay infield material in accordance with these specifications and the Contract Drawings . 1 . 02 JOB CONDITIONS A . If, during the placement of infield material, either the weather or the clay becomes unsuitable for spreading, operations shall cease and only be resumed when authorized by the Owner' s Representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 CLAY INFIELD MATERIAL A . Clay shall be bright orange in color and shall be free of refuse and debris . B . Clay infield material shall be no less than 50% Florida Orange Clay and no more than 50% clean Yellow Sand . Co The clay infield material shall be thoroughly mixed together prior to placement on the prepared field sub-base . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A . Before applying clay infield material, the areas to be treated shall be pressed and shaped to a uniform surface . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A . Florida Clay infield material shall be spread on designated areas to a minimum depth of six (6) inches , over a four (4) inch yellow sand sub-base at 98 % compaction. Be Clay infield material shall be compacted with a roller weighing no less than 500 lbs , 02920- 1 PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT ' A . Payment for work specified in this section to be made under : 1 . All payments shall be based on the unit measure shown on the Bid Proposal , ' as measured in place by OWNER or COUNTY ENGINEER. * * * END OF SECTION* * * 02920-2 DIVISION 3 , CONCRETE SECTION 03010 CONCRETE A . Materials : Concrete : Transit Mix ASTM C- 94-74a 3000 P . S . I. Cement Portland ASTM C- 150-76 , Type I Aggregates : ASTM C-33 -71a Water: Potable Reinforcing : Intermediate Grade Billet ASTM A 615072 and A 305 -60 Deformation ASTM A 305 Wire Mesh : ASTM A 18642 Reinforcing Accessories : Hot-Dipped Galvanized with ASTM D- 544 B . Standards for Work : A. C . I . 318 - 89 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete A. C . I . 318 - 89 Detailing standards A. C . I . 315 -92 Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings A . C . I . 301 -96 Recommended Practice for Concrete Form Work C . R. S . I . 347R-94 Recommended Practice for Placing reinforcing Bars C . General Requirements : 1 . No concrete shall be placed/poured without prior notice to the Owner and the Architect. All concrete is to be placed in a continuous operation. 2 . All form work shall conform to the shape and dimensions as shown on the drawings . The Contractor is to properly brace and tie water-tight the form work so as to insure dimensional stability and safety . The Contractor shall wet down the forms until permitted to do so by the Architect. Any defective concrete or concrete surfaces that are out of alignment, shall be removed and replaced . All such repair work shall be accomplished by approved concrete repair methods . 3 . Unless specified elsewhere on the drawings, all concrete shall be of a design-mix to achieve ' a comprehensive strength of 3 , 000 P . S . I . at 28 days . No retempered or contaminated concrete will be allowed. All concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes of dispatch time . 4 . Reinforcement shall be cleaned of all scale and excessive rust . All reinforcement shall be set with the standard accessories per A . C . I . 315 -74 . Minimum concrete coverage of reinforcement steel shall be as follows : 030104 ' a. Footings - 3 " min. b . Slabs - 3 /4 " min . ' c . Beams and Columns - 1 - 1 /2 " min . 5 . The Contractor shall properly set all anchors and bolts required for blocking, equipment, etc . 6 . The Contractor shall utilize mechanical means for consolidation of concrete as well as ensure no segregation of materials . 7 . All concrete driveways shall be cured a minimum of seven (7) days at a ' minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit before any vehicular traffic is allowed on drives . ' 8 . Finishing tolerance for floor slabs shall be in accordance with defined tolerances stipulated in Section 03300 . 9 , The Contractor shall provide all expansion material , cold joints , control joints (mechanical or saw-cut) and expansion joints as indicated and specified on the drawings . ' 10 . Concrete testing is to be paid for by the Contractor and is to be performed by an independent testing lab and shall consist of, but is not limited to , the ' following : ' a. Slump Test : One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute ; slump not to exceed 4 " , plus or minus V . ' b . Compressive Strength Test : Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour; footings , floor slabs , columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested at seven (7) days and two (2) specimens ' test at twenty eight (28 ) days . Hold one cylinder for future use if test does not comply at 28 days . C , All test results are to be reported , in writing, to the Owner, the ' Architect, the Contractor and the Concrete Producer on the day tests are performed . d. Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load ' discharged from the mixer. e. If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer ' s request for additional cylinders, slump or load test. ' 11 . Concrete light walkways are to have a ht broom finish . The Contractor shall g ' provide saw-cut control joints at 5 ' - 0 " o . c . or at walkway intersections and when abutting a building slab . The concrete shall be saw-cut within 24 hours of the pour. The walkway shall be sloped so as to insure no standing ' water. 03010 -2 12 . All slabs on grade are to be Regular 3 /4 rock concrete at 3000 psi ultimate strength at 28 days . NO PUMP MIX, (pea rock) , will be allowed for any slab on prepared grade. This does not prohibit the pumping of the regular 3 /4 rock mix . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 03010-3 ' SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications of Workmen: 1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during ' execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards , and the requirements of this work, and who shall direct all work performed under ' this Section. B . Codes and Standards : 1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of Building Code ' that has jurisdiction and Occupational Safety and Health Act. 2 . Where provision of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the ' requirements of this Section of these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. ' 3 . Product Standard PS 1 -74 for softwood plywood . 4 . American Concrete Institute Standard recommended practice for concrete ' formwork, ACI 347-latest edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 FORM MATERIALS A . Form Lumber: 1 . All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as allowed for under Re-use of Forms in Part 3 of this Section of the Specifications . All form lumber shall be one of the following, a combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Engineer. a. "Plyform", Class 15/8 " or 3 /4 " PS 1066 , C -D exterior plywood , ' bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association. b . Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade , seasoned, surfaced four (4) ' sides . 2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS ' -03100- 1 A . All other materials , not specifically described but required for proper completion of concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance approval of the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A . Inspection and Soil Treatment : 1 . Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is completed to the point where this installation may properly commence . 2. Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations , the referenced standards, and the original design. 3 . Treat underlying soil to prevent vegetation growth and insect infestation. 3 . 02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS A. General : 1 . Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and able to withstand pressures without excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete . B . Embedded Items : 1 . Set all required steel frames , angles , grilles, bolts, inserts , and other such items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed . C . Bracing : 1 . Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain position and shape and to ensure safety to personnel . 2 . Construct all bracing and supporting members of amply size and strength to safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which they may be subjected . 3 . Space the forms the proper distance apart and securely tie them together, using metal spreader ties that vie positive tieing and accurate spreading 3 . 03 RE-USE OF FORMS 03100 -2 ' A. General : L Re-use of forms shall be subject to advance written approval of the Structural Engineer. ' Be Requirements : 1 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re- ' use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule of placement of concrete from the schedule obtainable if all form were new. ' 2 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re- use of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms no less acceptable appearance to finished exposed concrete . 3 . 04 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General : 1 . Minimum periods to form removal after concrete placement shall be as follows : Slabs and curbs 24 hours Vertical walls (4 ' -0 " Ht. ) 36 hours Vertical walls (over 4'-0 " Ht. ) 7 days 2 . Removal of formwork may be extended if deemed necessary by the Structural Engineer, Be Removal . 1 . Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping ' off inside the wall surface and point up and rubbing the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas . ' 2 . Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts , using water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one ( 1 ) part Portland cement and two and one-half (2 - 1 /2) parts sand ; apply grout immediately after removing forms . ' * * *END OF SECTION * * * 03100 -3 SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Qualifications of Workmen L Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B . Codes and Standards 1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the Building Code that has jurisdiction. 2 . Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A . Shop Drawings 1 . Within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract, and before any concrete reinforcement materials are fabricated and/or delivered to the job site, submit Shop Drawings to the Architect. 2 . Do not fabricate and/or deliver concrete reinforcement to the job site until receipt of Shop Drawings approval from the Architect. 1 . 04 PRODUCT HANDLING A . Protection 1 . Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades . 2 . Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and other bond-breaking coatings . B . Placements 1 . In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 032004 PART2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. All concrete reinforcement materials shall be new, free from rust, and complying with the following reference standards unless otherwise specified on the drawings . 1 . Bars for reinforcement : " Specifications for Deformed Billet- Steel Bars for ' Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-615 , latest editions , Grade 60 , except that bars No . 4 and smaller may be Grade 40 . ' 2 . Wire for reinforcement : " Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A- 82 , 3 . Wire fabric : "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A485 , latest edition. i2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials , not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of concrete reinforcement, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1 . Prior to installation of the Work of this Section carefully inspect ect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence . 2 . Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with ' all pertinent codes and regulations , the approved Shop Drawings , and the original design. ' B . Discrepancies 1 . In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2 . So not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such ' discrepancies have been fully resolved . 03200 -2 3 . 02 BENDING A . General 1 . Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and ASTM A- 615 , 2 . Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or on the approved Shop Drawings. 3 . Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material . 3 : 03 PLACING A . General 1 . Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by means of approved metal chairs, spacers, and metal hangers . B . Clearance 1 . Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half ( 1 - 1 /2) times the nominal diameter of round bars . 2 . Provide minimum concrete covering of reinforcement as shown or noted on the Drawings . 3 . 04 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust scale loose mill scale, oil paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce the bond between steel and concrete . PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT No separate Payment shall be made for work specified in this Section . Payment for work specified in this Section shall be included in Payment made for other Sections . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 03200-3 SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Formwork Section 03100 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200 Unit Masonry Section 04200 Metal Building Systems Section 13122 Plumbing Section 01500 Electrical Section 01600 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) : 1 . C-31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 2 . C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 3 , C -39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical ' Concrete Specimens 4 . C42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete 5 , C- 94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete 6 . C- 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete 7 . C- 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 8 , C- 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete B . ACI standards (Latest Editions) : ' 1 . ACI-318 , Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ' 2 . Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI-301 (Latest Editions), Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings , except as modified by the supplemental requirements herein. i1 . 03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A . All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM recommendations referred to herein. 033004 i Be Tests shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Architect. C . Contractor will pay for testing, including tests which indicated failure; in which case that test and all costs incurred as a result thereof, shall be paid for by the Contractor. D . Standard slump tests shall be taken of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. The maximum slump of concrete shall be 4 " plus/minus 1 " , unless specifically otherwise noted . Slump for Reinforced Vertical Columns should be 8 " to 11 " . E. Concrete that fails by test shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. F. Test for strength shall be made as follows : 1 . Slump Test: One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute. Maximum slump measurements as stated above. 2 . Compressive Strength Test: Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour; footings, floor slabs, columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested at 7 days and two (2) specimens tested at 28 days . Hold one cylinder for future use if test does not comply at 28 days . 30 . All test results are to be reported, in writing, to the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor and the Concrete Producer on the day test are performed. 4 . Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load discharged from the mixer. 5 . If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer ' s request for additional cylinders, slump or load test . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 CONCRETE A. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM C450 . Be Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 . C . Mixing water for concrete shall be potable and meet the requirements of ASTM C- 94 , 2 . 02 ACCESSORIES 03300 -2 ' A . Anchor slots, reglets and inserts of type, size and spacing required by trades involved, and shown on plans . ' Be Vapor Barrier: . 006 mil Polyethylene Film, such as "visqueen" or an approved equal . rC . Chemical Curing Compound : Application of a curing compound shall be made to all slabs and such application ' shall conform to ASTM C -309 . The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface . It shall not ' be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications . Acceptable materials shall be one of the following : 1 . Burke Company Aqua resin Cure 2 , Sika Corporation Sikagard Cure/Hard 3 , Sonnebom Hydrocide D . Expansion Joint Water Stops : Continuous, pre-formed, finned, center bulb type , polyvinyl chloride, of sufficient width to provide 3 " minimum embedment in concrete each side . Equal to ' Greenstreak # 703 . E . Pre-molded Joint Filler: Bituminous Fiber Type, ASTM D - 1751 - 83 and D 545 -77 equal to "Celotex Flexcell" of thickness and width indicated or required . rPART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A . Concrete Mix : ' All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed and in accordance with ASTM Specifications C-94 (Latest Edition) . Minimum 5 bags cement per yard of concrete . ' Be Concrete Strength: Unless specifically noted otherwise, all concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of f c = 3000 psi . A design mix shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer employed by the concrete supplier. The Contractor ' shall submit to the Architect/Engineer the concrete materials and the concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance . This submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the materials and to establish ' the mix designs . 03300 -3 C . Job Tempering : All Concrete shall be placed within 1 - 1 /2 hours after introduction of water to the mix . Under no condition may additional water be added . Submit time stamped batching tickets on delivery of concrete to job site . All concrete where water has been added will be removed and replace with proper concrete at no cost to the Owner. 3 . 02 PLACING OF CONCRETE A . Review: No concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel , pipes , sleeves , inserts, etc , have been set in place and reviewed by the Owner ' s representative . Contractor shall notify the Owner ' s representative of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to pouring. B . Placing : Concrete shall be placed in properly cleaned and prepared forms in accordance with the requirements of ACI-301 . C . Conveying : Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as - rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is maintained . All other requirements of ACI-301 shall be followed. D Depositing; Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which is hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. E . Consolidation : All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding, or forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items , and into corner of forms eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness . 3 . 03 JOINTS A . Construction Joints : 1 . Locate as shown or near points of minimum shear and as approved by Architect/Engineer for beam or slabs . 2 . Locate joints in vertical members , walls at underside of floors or beams , and at tops of footings . 3 . Floor slabs keyed joints maximum spacing 20 ' plus or minus each direction unless otherwise noted . 03300-4 ' Be Expansion Joints : ' i . Locate as shown on drawings . 2 . Joints in walkways maximum at 20' o . c . , snap lines and saw-cut 1 /8 " wide by l " deep between expansion joints in equal bays at not over 5 ' o . c . , within 24 hours of concrete placement or until concrete is trafficable with power saw. ' 3 . Joints shall be straight and smooth. They shall have hardened before fresh concrete is deposited against them. ' 4 . One half inch joint where slabs are up against the exterior of masonry walls , unless otherwise detailed . Do not place any expansion material on the inside face of masonry walls where slabs are poured against same walls . 3 . 04 CURING A . Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable afterlacin but not more than 3 P g hours thereafter. Provide a total wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees F minimum temperature . Be Curing of structural members shall begin immediately after removal of forms . r C . Apply curing compounds as specified above, clear for exposed slabs . Compound ' used on floors that are to receive tile or other additional finish shall be compatible with adhesives and finish materials . Apply first coat of curing compound as soon as possible after pouring. ' 3 . 05 FINISHES A . Formed Surfaces 1 . Finishes - Defined : a. Rough Form Finish . Reasonable true to line and place . Tie holes and defects shall be ' patched and fins exceeding 1 /4 " in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the forms . b . Smooth Form Finish : The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform ' texture on the concrete . It may be plywood, tempered concrete- form-grade hardboard, metal , or other material capable of producing ' the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material shall be 03300-5 orderly and symmetrical , with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain, torn surfaces , worn edges, patches , dents, or other defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie holes and defects shall be patched . All fins shall be completely removed. It is the intention of this surface to produce an Architectural Surface suitable for public view as a completed surface to receive paint. Strict quality control of this surface shall be required . See ACI 301 . C , Smooth Rubbed Finish : To be applied to all smooth form finishes . (All work will conform with ACI Standard 301 -latest edition) to produce a smooth Architectural effect. 2 . Finishes - Unspecified Buildings If the finish is unspecified, the following finishes shall be used as applicable. a. Rough Form Finish . For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view, including concrete to receive stucco, b . Smooth Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces exposed to view. c. Smooth Rubbed Finish : Concrete shall have a Smooth Rubbed Finish applied to produce an Architectural effect. 3 . Patching : Immediately after stripping forms patch all defective areas with mortar similar to the concrete mix except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted . Bulges, minor honeycomb and other minor defects, as designated by the Architect, shall be patched only where exposed to view. Clean, dampen, and fill tie holes with patching mortar. All patching shall follow procedures and conform to ACI 301 : a. Major defective areas , as judged by the Owner' s representative including those resulting from leakage of forms, excessive honeycomb, large bulges and large offsets at form joints , shall be chipped away down to sound concrete . The patching mortar shall be pressed in for a complete bond and finished to match adjacent areas , or where defective areas impair the strength of the member in question, as judged by the Owner ' s representative, the member shall be removed or united as determined by the Owner ' s representative . 03300-6 ' b . Minor defective areas , as judged by the Owner ' s representative including honeycomb, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties, and those resulting from leakage of forms shall be patched with grout ' without resorting to chipping . Minor bulges and offsets at form joints shall be finished as specified herein below. ' Be Uniform Surfaces - Flatwork General : Grade and screed the surfaces to the exact elevation, or slope shown or required. Make proper allowances for setting beds for ceramic tile . After ' screeding tamp mixture thoroughly to drive the coarse aggregate down from the surfaces and apply the applicable finish specified hereinafter. Always slope exterior walks away from the building at 1 /4 " per foot. Uncovered walks slope at 1 /4 " per foot or crown. Covered walks between buildings always slope to drain to the exterior and away from the buildings . At cross intersections of the walks, and at exterior doors, warp the surfaces to drain ' water from the walls . Provide control joints as indicated on drawings . Follow the requirements and procedures of ACI 301 . ' 2 . Finishes - Definitions (See also ACI 301 ) a. Scratched Finish: ' After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled to a Class B tolerance, surface shall be roughened with stiff brush, ' rates or metal lath roller, before final set. b . Floated Finish : After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until water sheen has disappeared and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operations of a power driven float. Consolidate with power driven float, check trueness of surface, fill low spots and cut sown high spots to achieve Class B tolerance . Then, re-float to uniform, ' smooth, granular texture . c . Troweled Finish : ' Finish same as above for floated finish and in addition, steel trowel the surface by hand to produce a smooth, glassy, impervious surface free of trowel marks to a Class A tolerance . On surfaces intended to ' support floor coverings , defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding . ' d . Broom Finish : Finish same as above for floated finish to a Class B tolerance and tthen draw a broom or burlap belt across surface transversely. 03300-7 3 . Finishes - Unspecified When type of finish is not specified, the following shall be applicable . a. Scratched Finish : For surfaces to receive bonded cementitious application, i . e. ceramic tile, etc . , refer to drawings for locations of tile areas . b . Troweled Finish : For surfaces intended as smooth walking surfaces or for receipt of floor coverings . c . Broom Finish : For exterior walks , loggias, curbs and where indicated on drawings . d . Float Finish : Exterior platforms, steps , stairways, landings, and ramps . 5 . Specific Finish Locations a. Slab areas to receive ceramic tile, resilient floor coverings , specialized gymnasium flooring, or slabs within a .minimum of 2 feet each side of accordion doors shall be "dead level" - Class A. b . All other slab areas - Class B . 61 - Tolerances for finishes as specified shall be as follows : a. Class A - True planes within 1 /8 " in 10 ft. b . Class B - True planes within 1 /4 " in 10 ft. NOTE : Tolerances shall be measured by placing a 10 ft . straightedge anywhere in any direction. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 03300-8 ' SECTION 03420 - PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Furnish and install all required Precast Lintels and Door Headers in the locations called ' out on the architectural and structural drawings as manufactured by WEKIWA CONCRETE PRODUCTS , INC . or an approved equal . Lintels available through CSR ' Rinker. 1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' Concrete Section 03010 Concrete Formwork Section 03100 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200 ' Cast in place Concrete Section 03300 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A . ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) : 1 . ASTM A615 (Grade 40) for reinforcing bars . 2 . ASTM A416 , 7 wire for prestress strands . ' B . ACI StandardsLa ( test Editions) : 1 . ACI 315 , Detail Reinforcement. ' 2 . Concrete Operations shall comply with ACI Standards . 3 . Design and Construction shall conform to the specification of the national ' concrete masonry association and ACI 530 , 4 , ACI 318 -95 , Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete . ' C . Standard Building Code, latest edition. D . American Society of Civil Engineers minimum design loads for Buildings and ' Other Structures (ASCE 7-95) . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 CONCRETE A . Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 days : ' 1 . Pre-cast w/standard reinforcement- 3500 PSI . 2 . Pre-cast w/prestress reinforcement- 5000 PSI . ' 3 . Concrete Fill (placed in field) - 3000 PSI . 2 . 02 MASONRY t A. Minimum masonry unit strength fm 1250 PSI . B . Mortar shall be type- S . 03420- 1 2 . 03 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing bars : ASTM A615 (grade 40) . B . Prestress Strands : ASTM A416, 7-wire . C . Steel is placed in the precast lintel at time of fabrication. D . Minimum coverage of steel to be 3/4 inch for top bars and 1 . 5 inches for bottom bars . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site to ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A . Lift and support units at designated lift points . Shoring of precast units shall be installed and removed solely by the contractor under the direct supervision of the manufacturer. B . Minimum bearing required at each end is 4 inches . Bearing preferre& is 8 inches . C . Do not install any damaged units . 3 . 03 DEFECTIVE WORK A . Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements , including strength, tolerances , and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units that meet requirements of this section . The contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from corrections to precast lintels . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 03420 -2 ' SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to work of this Section. ' 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A . Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A . Construction Tolerances : 1 . Variation from Plumb : For vertical lines and surfaces of columns , do not exceed 1 /4 " , ' 2 . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions : For columns and thickness of walls , from dimensions shown, do not exceed ' minus 1 /4 " nor plus ''/i " . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS ' A . Product Data: Submit manufacturer ' s specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, ' accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements . Include instructions for handling, storage , installations and protection. 1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work : 1 . During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day ' s work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress . B . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in ' place . C . Staining : ' Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted . Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry . ' D . Protect sill , ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 04200- 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MASONRY UNITS GENERAL A. Manufacturer : Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas . 2 . 02 FACE BRICK A . Provide clay brick shown on contract documents . Color, texture, finish and configuration per plans . 1 . A . S . T. M. C-216 latest edition, Grade SW. Type FBX. 2 . Dimensions : Standard or Jumbo . See plans . 3 . Minimum compressive strength 8 ,000 psi . 4 . Maximum saturation coefficient 0 . 78 . 5 . Minimum IRA 6 g/30 sq . in. 6 Maximum IRA 30 g/30 sq . in. Where IRA exceeds 30g/30 sq . in. pre- wetting brick is recommended. 7 . Shapes : Where special shapes are shown on architectural drawings, manufacturer shall provide shop drawings for architect ' s approval prior to manufacturing shapes . B . Mortar: Type S consisting by proportion-- 1 part Portland Cement (A . S . T. M. C- 150, Type I or Type II, Low Alkali), '/2 part hydrated lime (A. S . T. M . C -207) and 4 - 1 /2 parts sand (A. S . T. M. C- 144) . C . Bond : Running Bond unless otherwise shown on the plans . D . Jointing : Concave unless otherwise shown on the plans . E. Construction: Strictly adhere to Uniform Building Code Sec . 2104 or ACI 530 . 1 . 2 . 3 , F . Weep Holes : Provide tooled open head joints in lieu of rope wicks or plastic tubing . G. Base Flashing : Provide copper base flashing per the Drawings . 2 . 03 CONCRETE BLOCK A . Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type, face size , exposed face and , under each form of block included, for weight classification . 1 . Grade N Grade N except Grade S may be used above grade in exterior walls with weather protective coatings and in walls not exposed to weather. 04200 -2 ' 2 . Size : Manufacturer ' s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 " long x ' 8 " high ( 15 -5/8 " x 7-5/8 " actual) x thicknesses indicated. 3 . Type II C . M. U. , moisture controlled units . ' 4 . Hollow Loadbearing Block : ASTM C-90 and as follows : a. Weight Classification : Normal weight. 2 . 04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C- 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B . Hydrated Lime : ASTM C-297, Type S . ' C . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C- 144 , except for joints less than 1 /4 " use aggregate graded with 100 % passing the No . 16 sieve . ' D . Aggregate for Grout : ASTM C404 . ' E. Joint Reinforcement : Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10' , with prefabricated corner ' and tee units , and complying with requirements indicated below: 1 . Width : ' Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2 " less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces exposed to exterior and %s' elsewhere . 2 . Wire Size for Side Rods : ' 9 gauge galvanized . 3 . Wire Size for Cross Rods : ' 9 gauge galvanized 4 . For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods : a. Truss design, as manufactured by Dur-o -wall, (or approved equal) , with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 " o . c . Units to be 9 gauge hot dipped galvanized . 04200 -3 2 . 05 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Bars : Deformed steel , ATSM A-615 , Grade 60 for bars No . 3 to No . 18 , Be Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips : Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry walls : size and configuration as indicated . 1 . Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA- 805 , C . Bond Breaker Strips : Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D -226, Type I (No . 15 asphalt felt) . 2 . 06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A . General : Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments , air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents , anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated . Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Be Mixing : Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer: comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content. C . Mortar for unit Masonry : Comply with ASTM C - 780 , proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. D . Grout for Unit Masonry : Comply with ASTM C - 476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry . Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will comply completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. 1 . Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 " in horizontal direction, unless otherwise indicated . 2 . Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 " or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated . 04200-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 INSTALLATION. GENERAL A . Do not wet concrete masonry units . ' Be Cleaning Reinforcing : Before placing, remove loose rust, and other coatings from reinforcing . C . Thickness : Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal ' thickness indicated. D . Build chases and recesses as shown on required and required for the work of other ' trades . Provide not less than 8 " of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses . ' E . Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work ' immediately adjacent to the opening . F . Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped ' edges . Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible . Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units . 3 . 02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES ' A . Variation from Plumb : For vertical lines and surfaces of columns , walls and arises do not exceed 1 /4 " in 10' or 3 /8 " in a story height not to exceed 20 ' , nor %2 " in 40' or more . For external corners , expansion joints , control joints , and other conspicuous lines , do not exceed 1 /4 " in any story of 20 ' maximum, nor %i " in 40 ' or more . For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1 /4 " in 10' 3 %2 " maximum . Be Variation from Level : ' For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels , sills , parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1 /4 " in any bay or 20' maximum , nor %2 " in 40 ' or more. For top surface of bearing walls no not exceed 1 /8 " between adjacent ' floor elements in 10 ' or 1 / 16 " within width of a single unit. C . Variation of Linear Building Line : For position shown in plan and related portion of columns , walls and partitions , do not exceed % " in any bay or 20 ' maximum, nor 3 /4 " in 40' or more . 04200-5 D . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions : For columns and thickness of walls , from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1 /4 " nor plus % " . E . Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness : Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 " , with a maximum thickness limited to % " . Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 ". 3 . 03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate openings, movement-type joints , returns and offsets . Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations . B . Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Co Stopping and Resuming Work : Rack back '/2-unit length in each course : do not tooth . Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry . D . Built-in Work: As the work progresses , build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications . Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items . 1 . Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated . Where built-in items are to. be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core . 2 . Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 " ) under bearing plates, beams, lintels , posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated . 3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells . Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters , and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells . 04200-6 B . Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3 /8 " joints . tCO Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated . ' D . Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. ' E . Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. ' F . Collar Joints . After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly and with mortar for all exterior walls . G : Corners : Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners , unless otherwise ' shown. 1 . For horizontally reinforces masonry, provide continuity at corners with ' prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding . H . Intersecting and Abutting Walls : ' If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8 " maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4' - 0 " o . c . , vertically, or omit ' blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 '- 0 " o . c . vertically . Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1 - 1 /2 " x 1 /4 " x 2'- 0 " long with ends turned up not less than 2 " or with cross-pins . If used with hollow masonry units, embed ' ends in mortar-filled cores . J. Non-bearing Interior Partitions : Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise shown. 1 . Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate or metal . Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of structure above approaches final position. ' 3 . 05 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A . General : Provide Dur-O -Wall , (or approved equal) , truss-type , horizontal reinforcing at every other block course . At door and window openings , provide continuous Dur i 042004 O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from the opening . Extend Dur-O -Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap splices shall not be less than 6 " . B . Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C . Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted . D . Reinforce the following walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. 1 . Hollow concrete masonry walls . E . Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows : 1 . For single wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16 " o .c . vertically, unless otherwise indicated . 2 . For parapets , space reinforcement at 8 " o . c . vertically, unless otherwise indicated. F . Reinforce masonry openings greater than V -0 " wide, with horizontal joint re- inforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8 " apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill . Extend reinforcement a minimum of T -0 " beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints . 1 . In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above . 3 . 06 LINTELS A. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels before handling and installation . Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels . B . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls , use specially formed U-shaped lintels units with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout. C . Provide minimum bearing of 8 " at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated . 3 . 07 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A . Refer to Division - 4 , Section 04230 "Reinforced Unit Masonry" for installation requirements applicable to reinforced unit masonry . 04200 -8 3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . When field observation by the Architect or the Owner' s Agent which generates questions relating to tolerance or quality control, the Contractor shall employ , at his own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field quality control tests for masonry indicated . Comply with requirements for ' qualification and acceptance per tolerances stipulated within this section. B . Unit Test Method : For each type indicated and per Division - 4 , Sections 04200 and 04300 . ' C . Mortar Tests : For each type indicated, test mortar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM C-780 . Conduct tests no less frequently than that required to evaluate mortar used to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are taken for testing . D . Prism Test Method : 1 . Compression Test : If required by Architect, test masonry prisms by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM E-447 , Method B . 2 . Evaluation of Quality Control Tests : Masonry work, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements , will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated. 3 . Protection : Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. * * * END OF SECTION * * * i 04200 -9 _ Modified ASTM C- 90 for Architectural Block Architectural Concrete Masonry . Units : in Florida . ' Florida Concrete •and Products Association Per ASTM C-90 . This guideline spe4cation hos been developed by the. Flodda Concrete and Products Assodahoo as a recommended standard for Architectural Concrete Masonry ' . Units in Florida: � . 1 . SCOPE _ - 1 :1 ► This specification covers *hollow and solid architectural masonry units. There are .thiee classes of Architectural Unit • ( 1 ) D E M A C O normal weight, (2) medium weight and (3) lightweight. . 1 .2 ► 2 Concrete masonry units covered by this specdication are made from lightweight or normal weight oggregates ora B L O C K combination of both. • Y T A R M A C 2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2. 1 ► ASTM Standards . C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates . C90 Specificdtion for load-Bearing CMU's C140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C150 Specification for Portland Cement (210 Specification for Mortar. for Unit Masonry C331 Specification for lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units E514.90 Test Method for Water Penetration and leakage Through Masonry - (595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements . (IIB Specification for fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete . . C989 Specifications for Ground Blast Furnace Slag for use .irt Portland Cement Concrete 3 CLASSIFICATION 3. 1 ► Types •. There is one type of Architectural Concrete Mosonry Unit. It described as exhibiting higher strength, greater density, lowetpermeability, and greater ability to resist efflorescence thawregular masonry units; 3 .2 ! . All architectural concrete masonry units covered by this specification will be manufadured to nonmoisture controlled ctBetjp having a possible moisture content at time of use...,exceeding .45% of total obsarption (average of three units) thereby requiring the use of control joints as shown in Table I % . Phone: 1 . 800 . 4 • TARMAC url: www.tormacomerica.com DEMACO BLOCK—THE. ARCHITECTURAL BLOCK AUTHORITY 2/98 TABLE T MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL SPACING OF VERTICAL CONTROL JOINTS ► , Wall Vertical Spacing of Bed 'Joint Reinforcement (inches) Maximum Horizontal Spacing ( feet) ► Exterior ' none 20 16 26 8 32 - • Interior none . ` • 26 16 . 32 8 36 4 MATERIALS 4 . 1 ► Cementitious Materials.- Materials shall conform to the following applicable specifications: : 4. 1 . 1 Tortland Cement - ASTM-150 ; 4 . 1 .2 Blended Cements • ASTM C- 595 4 . 1 .3 Pozzolans - ASTM C-618 4 . 1 .4 Blast Furnace Slag Cement - ASTM C-984 4.2 ► Aggregates . Aggregates shall conform to the following specifications, except that grading requirements -shall not necessarily apply: 4.2 .1 Normal Weight Aggtegates ASTM C-33 4 .2 .2 lightweight Aggregates' - ASTM C-331 . 4 .3 ► Integral Water Repellent AdmkWm. Funits be manufactured with an integral water repellent admixture, applied at the .dosage recommended by the admixture manufacturer: : . 4 .3. 2 The integral water repellent admixture shall be certified, by the admixture manufacturer, with the wall showing no visible water when tested in accordance � . with E 514-90. . 4 .4 ► Other Constituents Air entraining agents, coloring pigments, integral water repellents, finely ground silica, and other constituents shall be •previously established as suitable for use in concrete masonry and shall conform to applicable ASTM Standards or shall be shown by test or experience to be not detrimental to the durability ' of the concrete masOmy units or any material Customarily used in masonry construction. S PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS • ' 5. 1 ► CMd's • After. 28 days from the time. of manufacture, the units shall conform to the physical requirements prescribed in Table 3 . 5 .2 ► All units shall have a minimum age of 7 days prior to delivery to the job site. 5.3 ► Face Shell (FST) and web thicknesses (WT) for hollow units shall conform to the requirements listed . in Table 2 : TABLE 2 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF FACE- SHELLS AND WEBS ► Nominal Width (W) Of Units ► Face Shell Thickness• (FST) Minimum ► WeV Minimum Thickness ► Equivalent Web' Minimum Thickness Inches Inches Inches ; ' Inches . 4 3/4 . 3/4 1 S/R• 6 1 1 21/4 8 1 1/4 . 1 • 2 1/4 10 . 13/8 11/8 .21/2 12 1 1/2 11/8 21 j2 ' ► A Average of measurements on 3 units taken at the thinnest points when mePsured as described in C140. When this Stdndord is used for split face u r ts, a maximum of 10 percent of a split face shbr area moy have thickness less than those shown, but notkss that 3/4 inch: 6 Sum of the meosured thickness of all webs in the unit, multiplied by-12 and divided by the length of.the amt. ' -5 .4 ► Solid Units: 5.4 . 1 The net cross-sectional area of solid units in every plane parallel to the bearing' surface shall. not be .less than 75% of the gross cross-sectional area measured in the some plane: phone: I e 800 . 4 a TARMAC url : www.tarmocamenca.com ' 2/98 . 5 .5- ► End Flanges: 5.5:1 for units having end flanges, the. thickness of each flange shall not be less than the minimum face shell thickness. 6 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS . , 6 . 1 . ► Overall dimensions for width, height and length of a smooth surface shall not differ by mare than t0/8" from the specified standard dimension. 6.2 Variations in the initiating point of the split - on top, bottom, or sided shall riot vary more than ±1 /8 6. 3 ► Thetheoretical plane established by Me split surface shall not vary more than t0/4F, . -6.4 ► The length of CMU's that are fluted or scored shall not 'vary more than ±1 /16' . 7 FINISH AND APPEARANCE 7. 1 ► All units shall be. sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or would significantly impair the strength or permanence . of the construction. Minor cracks incidental to the usual method of manufacture; or minor chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, are not grounds for rejection. 7.2 ► Chips & Cracks - five percent of a shipment may contain slight cracks or small chips not. larger than I in. in any dimension: Units used in exposed wall construction, ' Me face or faces that are to be exposed ;hall not show objectionable imperfections when viewed .from a distance of not less than 60 .feet under diffused lighting. 73. 0o Color & Texture' - The color and texture shall be specified by the -purchaset. The finished surfaces that will be' exposed shall conform to. an approved sample consisting of not less than two. units of each color. 7.4 ► Test Panel • A test panel shag be constructed, of contractor's expense. The panel is to be not'less Man 4' high by 6' long arld shag be viewed for acceptance ata distance . of not less than 60 feet under diffused light. The tooling 'of mortar, general quality, texture; and color of block shall be as required for the project and by the project documents.. The consistency' of color cannot be reliably assured from test panel viewing as too few block and mortar batches are involved. Block -of each size, style or type may be impractical to construct into a test panel. 8 OTHER REQUIREMENTS 8. 1 ► Acoustical Rating' When special acoustical properties of CMU are required, they shallbe specified. 8.2 ► Admixture: Admixture shrill be compatible with CMU's and mortor: 8.3 ► Fire rating: When a specific fire rating is required, it shall be specified by the architect and certificate supplied by the CMU producer. This certification will show the fire rating based on theequivalent thickness and type of aggregate. 8 ,4 Mortar: A type S mortar shall be' used* ` . 8,5 . ► - R Value: When energy properties of the CMU and/or wall system are specified, Me 'required density of the CMU and insulation material shall be' specified by the architect and certificate supplied by the CMU producer. . . 8.6. ► Strength: When higher strength CMU's are required,- the strength shag be specified by the architect/engineerand certified by the manufacturer.' 8. 7 Poo Weight: When o'specific weight or density is specified, the producer of the CMU.shall furnish a recent.certifi ation complying with the required weight. 9 SAMPLING AND TESTING 9. 1 ► The purdiaser or authorized representative shall be accorded proper facilities to inspect and sample the CMU's of the place of manufacture from . the lots ready for delivery. 9.2 ► Sample and test units, by a . CMEC accreditedlaboratory; In accordance with ASTM Method C-140. , - . TABLE 3 STRENGTH AND ABSORPTION REQUIREMENTS Compressive . Sfrength Minimum PSI ' Water Absorption Max.• Ib/cf (Av. 3 units) With Oven Dry Weight of Concrete Ib/cf ► Average Net Area ' Weight Classification ► Average of'3 Units * Individual Unit ►. light Weight Max: 10SI lb/d ► Medium Weight 106-121 Ib/cf ' P, Normal Weight more than 128 Ib/if - •2800 2S00 . 14 12 10 u. Nigher compressive strengths may be specified .when required by design. Consult with local suppliers to determine avolabiliry of units of higher compressive strength. b. To prevent water :penetration, proper detailing; construction, flashing and drainage should be provided. ' phone: 1 -• 800 4 • TARMAC url: www. tarmacamerica . com ; 3/98 SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A . Materials: ' Block : ASTM C-90-70, cured 28 days Y Mortar: Type " S " (ASTM C 270-71 ) Lime : ASTM C 207- 76 Sand : Clean Masons Sand ' Water : Potable B . General Requirements : ' 1 . Set blocks with 3 /8 " full , flush joints in running bond . Use a masonry interlock (50% masonry bond) at all intersecting walls where possible . All work not plumb, true and accurate shall be replaced. 2 . Store all materials off the ground and protect from all dirt and foreign material . 3 . Re-temper as required to maintain initial consistency. Do not allow the mortar to stand more than one ( 1 ) hour without retempering . Discard the mortar if it has begun to set . 4 . Provide Dur-O -Wall , (or approved equal) , truss-type, horizontal reinforcing at ' every other block course . At door and window openings, provide continuous Dur- O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from the opening . Extend Dur-O-Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap splices shall not be less than 6 " . ' 5 . All cells designated on the drawings to be filled with concrete are to be kept clean of any and all debris . Provide inspection/clean-out holes at the bottom course . 6 . All lintels shall have a minimum of eight (8 ) inches of bearing length. ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * ' 04230- 1 DIVISION 54 METALS SECTION 05030 - POWDERED COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A . Powdered coating applied to aluminum surfaces . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500 . B . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 . C . Aluminum Door Frames , Entrances and Storefronts - Section 08400 . D . Aluminum Windows - Section 08520 . E . Glazed Curtain Walls - Section 08900 . F . Louvers And Vents - Section 10200 . G . Sectional Overhead Doors - Section 08360 . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Properly identified product data. C . Manufacturer' s full range of custom colors, texture and gloss . B . Manufacturer' s data sheet including cleaning recommendations . 1 . 04 REFERENCES A . American Architectural Manufacturer ' s Association (AAMA) 1 . AAMA 605 . 2-90 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels , with the following exceptions . a) Five year South Florida exposure test will be met effective March 1996 . b) Due to environmental considerations acid chromate surface preparation is not used . B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1 . ASTM D117- 89 Guide to Test Methods and Specifications For Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin . 2 . ASTM D522 - 85 Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings With Conical Mandrel Apparatus . 3 . ASTM D523 - 85 Test Method for Specular Gloss . 05030- 1 4 . ASTM D2247- 87 Practice For Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Humidity . ' S . ASTM D2794- 84 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) . 6 . ASTM D3359- 87 Method For Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method Be ' 7 . ASTM D3363 -74 Test Method For Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. The manufacturer of the powdered coatingshall have produced p ed the coating products for not less than five years and shall be capable of furnishing both products and ' instructions for touch-up . Be The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall provide each applicator or fabricator ' of items which receive the coating with 3 by 5 inch samples of color(s) to be used, as standard of uniform quality during the shop finishing operation. ' C . Items to be coated in the powdered coating shop shall be protected in their bare metal state while in transit to the powdered coating shop . 1 . 06 GUARANTY A . After final acceptance , furnish Owner written guarantee against defective organic powdered coating material and application for a period of six (6) years . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A . " Archkote 6000 " Powdered Coating by Arch Aluminum and Glass Co . , 1400 S . W. ' Th Court, Suite F . , Pompano Beach, FL 33069 , (561 ) 785 -9600 , (Dade) 947- 8745 . 1 . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 . 2 . 2 . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up . 3 . Color shall be custom color per Architect ' s selection. Be "Tiger Drylac" Powder Coatings ' 2605 Beltline Avenue Reading, PA. 19605 Tel . (215 ) 921 - 9697 ' 2 . 02 PRODUCT QUALITY AND CHARACTERISTICS A . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 . 2 . ' 05030-2 B . Powder Coating Characteristics : Glossy Semi Gloss Mat Surface Surface Surface Thickness 2 . 503 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils /60-90 /60 - 90 /60- 90 Gloss 80-90 55 -65 15 -25 Cross Hatch Adhesion (2) Pass 100% Pass 100% Pass 100% Mandrel Bending (3 ) 1 /8 "/3mm 5/32 "/4mm 3 / 16 "/5mm Erichsen Cupping IS01520 5/ 161 /8mm 1 /4 "/7mm 3 / 16 "/5mm Impression Hardness (4) 95 95 95 Impact Test (5 ) Up to 160 " Up to 160 " Up to 160 " /lb . /lb . /lb . Pencil Hardness (6) 2H (min :) 2H (min. ) 2H (min.) Dry Mill Test OK OK OK Salt Spray Test (7) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test, max. undercut. max . undercut. max . undercut. Humidity 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16 " m/ 1m1 / 16 "/ lmm Resistance (8 ) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test, min . blisters min . blisters min . blisters 1 / 1611/ 1 min 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16 "/ Imin ( 1 ) Gloss According to Gardner 60 Degrees , ASTM D523 . (2) Cross Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D3359 Method B . (3 ) Mandrel Bending Test, Astm D522 . (4) Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215 . (5) Impact Test, ASTM D2794, 1 / 10 " distortion . (6) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363 . (7) Saltspray Resistance Test, ASTM D117 . (8 ) Humidity Resistance Test, ASTM D2247 . 2 . 03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up . 2 . 04 SHOP APPLICATION CONDITIONS A . Apply and cure coating in dust free surroundings, in a humidity range of 30 to 85 percent, and in a surrounding air temperature of not less than 50 degrees F . B . Do not apply coatings to surfaces which are dirty, dusty, rusty, damp or oily . 05030 -3 ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Aluminum : Clean with chemicals or etch to remove grease , dirt and loose oxide film ' using manufacturer' s recommended products . B . Previously Powdered Coated Metal (touch-up) : Remove dirt, grease and bond breaking substances and roughen area to be touched up with finabrasiveve paper and touch-up with air dry spray supplied by applicator. ' C . Prepare surfaces to receive powder coating and shop apply powder coating according witmanufacturere ' ` s recommendations . ' 3 . 02 COLOR MATCHING A . Powdered coating shall be formulated and applied so as to maintain uniform color, texture and gloss . ' B . All applications of powder coatings shall maintain uniform color, texture, gloss and quality of application to match accepted sample . ' 3 . 03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A . Apply powder coating system according to manufacturer ' s published ' recommendations . B . Due to the sensitivity of these coatings to dust pickup during their extended curing times , apply all coats of powder coating system at shop or factory, under dust free , temperature and humidity-controlled conditions . 3 . 04 POWDERED COATING APPLICATION ' A . Pneumatically feed dry powder to spray gun . Impact a low amperage , high voltage charge to the powder. ' B . Uniformly spray apply powdered coating to electrically grounded metal surfaces . C . Allow sprayed surfaces to bake in ovens at temperatures recommended by coating ' manufacturer. D . Finished surfaces shall be fully and uniformly coated without pinholes , bubbles , sag , ' runs , lumps , marks or discoloration. Surface finish shall be of uniform color, texture and gloss . ' 05030 -4 3 . 05 TOUCH-UP A . After powder coating has been in place at least 15 days , and within 30days of Architect-Engineer ' s inspection of the product prior to certification that the work is complete, check all powder coated surfaces for damage, missed areas and discoloration. B . Prepare surfaces and touch-up damaged, missed and discolored areas to bring coating system to full dry film thickness , in color and gloss matching that of adjacent coated ; areas . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 05030-5 DIVISION 5, METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. This Section includes the labor and materials required for the proper completion of structural steel work as shown on the drawings or specified . Be Generally,a ly, this work is as follows : t1 . Furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel beams , columns, trusses , attached lintels , column base and cap plates , including all bolts and ' welding as required for the complete installation of the work. 2 . Furnishing all anchor bolts and leveling plates for installation under other ' sections . 3 . Shop painting and field touch-up of all steel . 4 . Erection drawings and shop details . 5 . Providing all tools, equipment and temporary bracing required for safe, proper and expeditious erection of the work. 6 . Furnishing of all loose lintels . C . Related work of other sections : ' Steel Joists Section 05210 ' Metal Decking Section 05300 Painting Section 09900 ' 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards : All structural steel work shall comply with the ' Specifications for the "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", latest edition, issued by the American Institute for Steel Construction, and shall comply with the requirements of local building codes . ' -05120- 1 r B . All welding shall be done by the electric arc process and conform to the Code of Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society . All welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with this code, and holding current certificates . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, at earliest possible date to insure timely delivery and proper coordination of work by others . No variation from design sizes will be permitted but recommendations for modification of connections or details to better suit fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed, in writing to the attention of the Architect. B . Shop Drawings shall include erection plans , details of individual members, and index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained. Fabrications shall not be started until shop drawings are approved. C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or disapproved by Architect. D . Only shop drawings bearing the approval seal and signature of the licensed professional engineer who supervised their preparation shall be used in the field and all other shop drawings will be considered void . E . Work under this section includes responsibility for dimensions to be correlated and confirmed in the field and for information thatpertains solely to fabrication processes and to techniques of construction. F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members which are required by other trades . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A . All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 . Steel shall be new, clean, and straight (foreign steel not acceptable) . B . High tensile strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A325 , or A490 . C . Ordinary unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 . D . Arc welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM Standards Spec . A233 , latest edition . 05120 -2 E. Shop coat of paint shall be Manufacturer ' s Standard Shop Primer, or approved equal . ' 2 . 02 FIELD COORDINATION ' A . All measurements shall be verified in the field, particularly for work installed before delivery of steel . Contractor shall notify Architect in writing of any discrepancy between elevations, locations , conditions, etc . , shown on the drawings ' and those actually encountered in the field, and shall not proceed with the work until discrepancies have been resolved. ' Be The Contractor shall check all drawings and shall be responsible for completeness and correct fittings of all work. ' C . All anchor bolts and plates required to be set in concrete shall be furnished and delivered, together with templates and/or instructions for setting, in ample time for installation by other trades . 2 . 03 FABRICATION ' A. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists , bends , and open joints between components parts . If straightening or flattening is required, it shall be done in a manner that will not damage the material . ' Be Columns and stiffeners shall be milled at bearingends to true surface,, at right angles to the axis or at the proper angle, to insure uniform bearing . ' C . Column baseplates shall hall be of sizes indicated on the drawings , with straight and ' true top and bottom surfaces . Base plates may be straightened by pressing to obtain satisfactory contact bearing . ' D . Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched 1 / 16 " larger than the normal diameter of the bolts . Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted . Holes that must be enlarged shall be remade . Bolts shall fit holes snugly and nuts shall be drawn up ' tight and shall have full grip in bolts . E . Provisions of work by other trades : Open holes or studs shall be provided for ' attaching of work by other trades which adjoins , attaches to , or connects with Structural Steel . Particular notice shall be given to requirements where miscellaneous metal adjoins structural steel . ' F . All exposed steel shall be free of stampings, mill scale or imperfections . All cuts and notches at exposed steel shall be ground and finished smooth . All welds on exposed structural steel shall be filled having an additional bead or beads as required, and ground smooth to receive shop primer coat. 05120 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 ERECTION A. Columns and struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or slope using Surveyor ' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks . Struts and columns shall be kept plumb during erection for which all temporary, braces , guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is properly secured . Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns . B . The Contractor shall provide all necessary additional bracing, beams , temporary struts, ties, guys , clip angles , etc . , that may be required to erect the structural frame and maintain it in alignment until the building is completed . Any extra guying after completion of decking to be by general contractor. C . Welding and bolting of all connections shall follow the setting of the steel as closely as plumbing and alignment will permit. D . Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment. Any work not affected by such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision. E . Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure, construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect of personnel having legitimate business at the site . Location of supports for derricks , hoists, rigging or materials, shall be carefully studies and shall be reviewed by the Architect if any questions arise . R Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed except with the written permission of the Architect. G. Self-lubricating bearing plate assemblies shall be installed in the field . After installation, a protective covering shall be provided to insure that no dirt, or other injurious materials comes in contact with the bearing surfaces . 3 . 02 CONNECTIONS A . All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise shown on plans . B . Field connections shall be welded where specifically shown. All other field connections shall be bolted with 3 /4 " minimum A307 machine bolts , except for the following, which must be made with 3 /4 " minimum A325 high strength bolts : Connections of beams supporting roof mounted machinery . Other connections as noted on the structural drawings . 05120-4 Co Where bolted connections are used, they shall be standard beam connections as detailed in the AISC Manual, having a strength at least equal to one-half the tabulated load capacity of the AISC Manual . ' D . Where welded connections are used, they shall be Welded Frame Beam Connections , as detailed in the AISC Manual , but of a length and capacity at least ' equal to that of "Minimum Beam Connections" . E . Where the combination of shop welding and field bolting is used, the appropriate ' portions of the bolted and welded standards specified above shall be combined. F . High tensile bolts shall be installed in accordance with the March 1964 ' Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, approved by the Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation using the Turn-of-nut method with one washer. However, bolts shall ' be designed as A307 bolts for all connections in which they are used . ' G. Common machine bolts shall have shanks of proper length to provide full grip . H. Provide approved lock washers to prevent slipping of nuts . ' 3 . 03 PAINTING A. All structural steel , not encased in concrete, shall be prepared for painting according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-AP3 Power Tool Cleaning and shall receive one shop coat of 1 mil . maximum, thick paint. ' B . Paint, if manufacturer shop primer, shall be thinned with the building manufacturers approved material and applied at a spreading rate of 400 s . f. per ' gallon. The thinner shall be compatable with the finished painting materials and methods of application. C . The Contractor shall submit the name and characteristics of proposed paint to the Architect for approval . All paint shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer ' s recommendations to achieve the above desired results . The prime ' coat shall be compatible with the finish paint. D . After erection, all bolts, welds and serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be ' painted with one coat of the material used for the shop coat . ' E . Steel beams and girders encased or partially encased in concrete shall not be painted where encasement occurs . ' F . Steel beams and girders scheduled to receive sprayed on fireproofing shall not be painted. * * *END OF SECTION * * * r SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : A . This Section shall include the labor and materials required for the proper completion of open- web steel joist work as shown on the drawings, or specified . B . Generally , this work is as follows : Design, fabrication, and erection of open-web joists and truss girders . Furnishing and installing all accessories necessary for, or incidental to the completion of all joist work . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : Codes and Standards : Design, fabrication and erection of all series open-web joists shall conform to Standard Specifications for Steel Joists , LH series, K series , and steel girders, adopted by S . J. I . and A. I . S . C . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : A . Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions at earliest possible date to ensure timely delivery and proper coordination of work by others . B . Furnish shop fabrication and erection drawings for approval by the Architect before fabrication . Shop Drawings shall indicate joist type, number, sizes, spacing, bridging , connections , anchoring and all other details of erection. Shop drawings and design calculations shall be prepared under the direction of and signed, dated , and sealed by an engineer registered in Florida in accordance with the Florida Board of Professional Engineers Statements on Responsibilities of Professional Engineers , C . OnlyShop Drawings bearing Engineer' s Approval Stamp shall be used in field and all other Shop Drawings shall be considered void . 05210- 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 GENERAL ' A . The standard specifications for the Steel Joist Institute, referred to above, as they apply to foists shall apply to the work of this Section, except as otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. B . Weldiniz shall conform to the best practice as recommended in the Code for Fusion Welding ' and Gas Cutting of the American Welding Society. ' 2 . 02 MATERIALS : A . Steel for joists shall conform to applicable types listen in referenced specifications above . B . Electrodes for arc weldiniz shall conform to one of the E60 or E70 classifications of ASTM A ' 233 , latest edition, as required. C . Paint for shop coat of steel joists shall be Gray rust inhibiting, standard with manufacturer. 2 . 03 DESIGN AND FABRICATION: ' A . All open-web steel joists shall be fabricated from welded hot rolled steel shapes , plates or bars or cold formed shapes . ' B . Joists shall be designed to carry additional loads occasioned by openings and any concentrated loads shown on the contract drawings . ' C . Ceiling extensions or extended upper and lower chords shall be provided where required for joists . ' D . All joists shall be fabricated by a member of the Steel Joist Institute, in accordance with the Iatest Edition of The standard Specifications of the Steel Joist Institute and the latest edition of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 1 . For projects complying with the State Requirements For Educational Facilities, Design ' of joists for wind forces shall comply with ASCE 7-93 , Importance factor 1 . 1 . Design wind velocity shall be 100 mph . ' 2 . All other joists shall be designed for the net uplift produced by wind, less gravity dead load, in accordance with ANSI A581 - 82 120 MPH wind velocity exposure "C," with an importance factor of 1 . 1 . ' 3 . All joists shall be designed� g to support the weight of any roof top units indicated on the roof plan or mechanical drawings . 05210 -2 E . Joists and connections shall be made by connecting the members directly to one another by electric arc or resistance welds, times the design stress , and shall be sufficiently rugged to resist stresses incidental to handling and erection. F . Welding shall be executed in accordance with the "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society and shall be done by welders holding a current Certificate . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 ERECTION : A . The bearina ends of joists shall extend onto supports not less than the following distances : LH- Series and K- Series on steel beams a minimum of 2 %2 " , and a minimum of 4 " on concrete beams . B . Before setting any joists the Contractor shall check the levels and locations of steel bearings . C . Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings , end anchorage for all joists shall be in accordance with the Steel Joist Institute Specifications referred to above . D . All bridging shall be secured to the joist flanges and parallel steel beams by welding or bolting unless otherwise required by the drawings . 3 . 02 PAINTING : A . All materials shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign matter before being painted , either at the shop or in the field. Materials shall not be painted in damp or freezing weather unless under cover and protected until the paint is thoroughly dry. No materials shall be loaded for shipment until the shop coat is fully dried. B . Joists shall be painted with one shop coat of rust inhibitive paint standard with the manufacturer. C . Immediately following the erection of all steel joists and accompanying metal parts , all marred surfaces of the shop coat and all erection marks shall be shop painted with the same material as used for the shop coat. Field painting shall be done under another section . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 05210 -3 SECTION 05300 - METAL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENT Drawings and General precision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions ! and Division- 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1 . 02 SUMMARY Extent of metal decking is indicated on structural drawings , including basic layout, type of deck units, gauge and thickness . ! 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories . Include manufacturer ' s certifications as may be ! required to show compliance with these specifications . B . Shop Drawings : Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels , anchorage details , and conditions , requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump pans , cant strips , cut openings, special jointing or other accessories . ] ! C . Insurance Certification : Assist owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ! A . Codes and standards : Comply with p y provisions of the following codes and standards except as otherwise indicated or specified : AISI " Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members ", 1986 with 1989 addenda. AWS D1 . 3 " Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" . SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks" . ASCE-7-93 for wind loads , SBC Chapter 16 , SBC Sections 2204 for other requirements . ' B . Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS D 1 . 1 . ! PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following : METAL ROOF DECK UNITS : Bowman/E . G . Smith, Div. Cyclops Corp . Consolidated Systems , Inc . 05300 - 1 Epid Metals Corp . Mac-Fab Products , Inc . Marlyn Steel Decks , Inc . , Tampa Roll Form Products, Inc . United Steel Deck, Inc . Wheeling Corrugating Co . Wolverine Deck Co . 2 . 02 MATERIALS A . Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units : ASTM A 446 , Grade A B . Miscellaneous Steel Shapes : ASTM A 36 , C . Sheet Metal Accessories : ASTM A 526 , commercial quality, galvanized . D . Galvanizing Repair Paint : High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) . E . Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer ' s standard vulcanized, closed-cell , synthetic rubber. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 , 01 INSTALLATION A. General_ Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations and final shop drawings , and as specified herein. B . Place deck units or supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened . Do not stretch or contact side lap interlocks . C . Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units . D . Place deck units flat and square , secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. E . Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry. F . Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locking deck bundles to prevent overloading of structural members . G . Do not use floor deck units for storage working platforms until permanently secured . 05300-2 3 . 02 FASTENING DECK UNITS A . Positive attachment of structural sheets to steel roof joists shall be not less frequently ' than the following maximum spacings . 1 . One fastener shall be placed near the corner of each sheet or at overlapping corners of ' sheets . 2 . Along each supporting member, the spacing of fasteners shall not exceed eight inches ' on centers at ends of sheets nor twelve inches on centers at intermediate supports . 3 . The spacing of edge fasteners between panels and supporting members , parallel to the direction of span, where continuous interlock is not otherwise provided shall be not ' more than 12 " on center. 4 . The periphery edges of metal decks shall be fastened to resist uplift in special end, edge and corner zones . B . Fastening patterns must consider eave and corner areas to insure that fasteners will safely resist the required wind uplift . See ASCE 7-93 , wind velocity 100 mph, iImportance factor 1 . 1 . C . The fusion welding of structural sheets shall be through weld washers not less than 14 gage in thickness and 1 " in diameter, contoured if necessary to provide continuous contact. 3 . 03 ROOF LSUBGIRT ATTACHMENT : ' A . Positive attachment of 6 " , 14 gage Z-sections thru structural sheets , to structural steel support members shall be provided by 2 " long carbon steel AB point # 14 Hex Head self tapping screws , spacing shall not be more than 48 " on center. ' B . Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal r p ac welding, appearance and quality of welds , and methods used in correcting welding work. C . Cutting and Fitting_ Cut and neatly fir deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. ' D . Reinforcement at Openings , Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown. ' E . Hanger Slots or Clips : Provide UL approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts , diffusers , or lighting fixtures . Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be used instead of hanger slots . Locate slops or clips at not more than 14 " o . c . in both directions , not over 9 " from walls at ends, and not more than 12 " from walls at sides, unless otherwise shown. 05300 -3 F . Roof Sump Pans • Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface . Space welds not more than 12 " o . c . with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in roof sump bottom to accommodate drain size indicated . G. Closure Stns • Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and other construction . Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. H. Tough-Up Painting • After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members . Tough-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . In areas where shop-painting surfaces are to be exposed, apply tough-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces . I . Tough-Up-Pai_ ntin= Clean and touch-up painting of field welds , abraded areas and rust spots , as required after erection and before proceeding with field painting, is included in Division 9 under Painting . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 05300-4 SECTION 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS ' Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. ' 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of lightgage metal framing (LtGMFrm) is shown on drawings . Types of lightgage metal framing units include the following : 1 . "C " shaped steel studs . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Components Design : Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance P P J with AICS "Specification for design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" . B . Fire-Rated Assemblies : Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations , provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. C . Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for lightgage metal framing components include the following : 1 . Shaped load bearing studs, 1 -5/8 " flange : Alabama Metal Industries Marino Ware Dietrick Roll Form Products, Inc . U . S . Steel Corp . Wheeling Corrugating Co . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS iA . Products data : Submit manufacturer ' s product information and installation instructions for each items of lightgage framing and accessories . rB . Shop Drawing_ Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer ' s product data. Signed and sealed Shop Drawings required by a Florida Registered Structural Engineer. 05400- 1 Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations , number, type, locations and spacing, Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices , accessories, and details required for proper installation. 1 . 05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage . Deliver to protect site in manufacturer' s unopened containers or bundles , fully identified with name, brand, type and grade . Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable water proof coverings . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 METAL FRAMING A . System Components : With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer ' s standard steel runners (tracks , blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners) , and accessories recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system . B . Materials and Finishes For 16 gage and heavier units , fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40 , 000 psi ; ASTM A 446, A 570 , or A 611 . For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 , 000 psi ; ASTM A 466 , A 570 , Or A 611 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating at exterior wall panel studs . Provide prime coated finish with one coat of shop-applied redoxide , zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-inhibitive primer for interior studs . "C"- Shape Studs : Manufacturer' s standard load-bearing steel studs of size shape, and gage indicated with 1 . 625 " Flange and flange return to lip . 2 . 02 FABRICATION A . General : Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection . Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joins welded, Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion, Stud panels to be rechecked for plumbness after installation. B . Fastenings : Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners , as standard with manufacturer. 05400 -2 ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION Pre-Installation Conference : Prior to star of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project site with installers of other work including metal panels, door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A . Manufacturer' s Instructions • Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer' s printed or written instructions and recommendation, and Engineered Shop Drawings, unless otherwise indicated . B . Runner Tracks : Install continuous tracks sized to match studs . Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs . Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 " o . c . spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners , nor 16 " o . c . for other types of attachment. Spacing of studs at metal wall panels to be as per panel manufacturers request. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks . C . Set studs plumb , except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb ' walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements . D . Where stud system abutts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure . E . Install supplementary framing wood blocking and bracing metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures , equipment, services , casework, heavy trim and furnishing , wallmounted door stops , bathroom grab bars and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition . Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer ' s recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported . F . Installation of Wall Stud S , stem Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by ' either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges . G . Frame wall openings larger than T4 square with double stud at each jamb of frame ' except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer ' s instructions . Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings . Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall . Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 05400-3 SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section. 1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK A . Provide all labor. materials, necessary equipment and service, to complete the miscellaneous metals work and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as "NOT IN CONTRACT" (NIC) * B . Includim but not necessarily limited to the following : 1 . Roof opening framing - (Roof Drains, Roof Curbs , Roof Scuttles , Vent Fans , Exhaust Fans) . 2 . Miscellaneous anchors and fastenings . 3 . Piping, RWL, Chilled Water Line (Supports for hangers) . 4 . Steel & Alum . ladders to Scuttles & Mezzanines . 5 . Miscellaneous Angles . 6 . Louver Door Security Panels . 7 . Safety Nosings . 8 . Masonry Openings for Exhaust Fans . 9 . Folding Door Support Framing . 10 . Recessed Ceiling Framing Supports . 11 . Shop Coat Painting of All Items . 1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTION A . Structural Metal Section 05100 B . Painting Section 09900 C . Mechanical Section 15000 1 . 04 LIST OF SAMPLES . CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission by the Contractor tot he Consultant for approval . 055004 ' B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the contract Documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility. ' C . Submit samples. certificate and shop drawings as required or requested by the Architect/Engineer whether included in this list or not, and as requested on the drawings . ' D . Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, notarized and signed by an officer of the ' company and shall state the required information explicitly and specifically. Said certificates shall bear the Notary ' s embossed seal . ' 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A . Submit shop drawings for all fabricated items in accordance with Contract Conditions , ' plus plan locations. B . Coordinate roof framing opening supports with Steel Joists Shop Drawings . Submit ' steel Joist and Miscellaneous Metal Shop Drawings as prescribed . 1 . 06 QUALITY STANDARDS ' Conform to a licable portions of th - pP p e following : A . American Institute of Steel Construction (A. I . S . C . ) ' B . American Welding Society (A . W. S .) ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 BASIC MATERIALS ' A . Steel shapes - ASTM A- 36 B . Steel pipe -ASTM A-36 , galvanized where called for. C . Bolts ASTM A-325 , galvanized for exterior use, and where called for on plans . D . All exterior steel items to be hot dipped galvanized . E . Aluminum pipe - ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T6 . 2 . 02 STEEL & ALUMINUM LADDERS ' A. Fabricate to size and detail , with welded joints dressed smooth. B . Erect ladders as indicated, securely fastened to structure. C . Steel ladders to be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A- 123 - 59T. 05500-2 2 . 03 LOUVER DOOR SECURITY PANELS A. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors , wire mesh security panels . I . Wire Mesh : 10 gauge steel wire woven into I " diamond mesh securely clinched to frames . 2 . Frames : 3/4 " cold rolled channels drilled at 6 " o . c . through both flanges to receive # 10 self tapping non-corrosive machine screws with tamper proof heads . 3 . Mesh and frames to be hot dipped galvanized material . 4 . Apply panels to exterior face on doors with non-removable head screws . Completely cover louvers . 2 . 04 FASTENERS A . General : Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-coated fasteners where built into exterior walls where fasteners are not exposed . Select fasteners for the type , grade and class required . B . Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type , ASTM A307, Grade A . C . Lagy Bolts : Square head type, FS 1717-13 -561 . D . Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel , FS FF- S -92 . E. Wood Screws : Flat had carbon steel, FS FF-S - 111 , F. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel , FS FF- W-92 , G. Masonry Anchorage Devices : Expansion shields , FS FF- S -325 . H . Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B - 588 , type, class and style as required . I . Lock Washers : Helical spring type carbon steel , FS FF- W- 84 , 2 . 05 ROUGH HARDWARE A . Fabricate bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors , hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring securing woodwork to concrete or other structures . Provide straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items as specified on the drawings . 05500 -3 ' Be Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections ; ' elsewhere , furnish steel washers . 2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS ' A . Fabricate all steel headers , angles , channels , ladders , steel shapes , inserts , anchors , brackets , support framing, as indicated and/or detailed on plans . 2 . 07 SHOP COAT PAINT A . Apply shop coat paint to all ferrous metal . Be Apply shop touch-up coat paint to all galvanized metals . C . Aluminumroducts to be p mill finish unless called out otherwise on the drawings . ' * * *END OF SECTION * * * r 05500-4 SECTION 05720 - TREADS AND NOSINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : A. Extent of each type of tread and nosing is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section. B . Types of work specified in this section include the following : Exterior aluminum stair nosing Interior aluminum stair nosing 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS : A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer' s product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified material and fabricated product . 1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS : A . Coordinate work of this section with interfacing adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation . Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 STAIR NOSINGS A . Aluminum : Type 431 as manufactured by Wooster Products Inc . or equal . B . Steel : 4 " type AX as manufactured by Safe-T-Metal Corp . or equal . C . Fasteners : Standard integral cast anchors . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS : 05720- 1 ' A . General : Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer ' s installation instructions and recommendations . Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated . Set units true to line and level as indicated. ' 3 . 02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION : ' A. Clean exposed metal surfaces . B . Protection : Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of nosings during construction, to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering at time of substantial completion. ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * 05720-2 DIVISION 6 , CARPENTRY SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Documents and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition : Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated . Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for : 1 . Nailers & dead wood 2 . Cant strip 3 . Wood roof curb supports 4 . Door frame bracing 5 . Chalk, tack board, backing 6 . Casework backing 7 . Plumbing backing - (Supports) 8 . Projection screen backing 9 . Window stripping 10 . Recessed clock/speakers (framed opening) 11 . Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets (framed opening) RWL Access to clean out. 12 . Toilet partition backing 13 . Recessed electrical panels backing 14 . Mirror backing 15 . Acoustical backing 16 . Ceiling trim backing B . Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6 . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A . Wood treatment Data : Submit treatment manufacturer' s instructions for proper use of each type of treated material . B . Pressure Treatment : For each type of specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards . 061004 C . For water-borne preservatives , include statement, that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 % prior to shipment to project site . ' D . Fire-retardant treatment : Include certification by treatment plant that treatment material complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces . 1 . 04 PRODUCT HANDLING ' Delivery and Storage : Keep materials dry at all times . Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks . 1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS ' Coordination : Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for an accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS ' A . Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 . B . Plywood Standards : Comply with PS 1 . C . Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or ' without finish. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provided actual sizes as required by PS 20 , for moisture content specified for each use . Provide ' dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated . Provide seasoned lumber with 10% maximum moisture content at time of dressing . ' B . Framing Lumber : (2 " through 4 " thick) ' C . For light framing (less than 6 " wide), provide the following grade and species : Construction grades , any species . 06100-2 D . Miscellaneous Lumber : Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips , bucks , nailers , blocking , furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members . Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and as follows . Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. E . Grade : Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB ) or No . 2 boards (SPIB or WWPA) . F . Plywood : Where plywood will be exposed in finished work supply the following : 1 . Where painted finish is indicated, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade C concealed, for exterior use ; and provide A-D/INT- APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior use . 2 . Concealed Plywood : Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide C -D Plugged/INT-APA . For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide 3 /4 " fire- retardant treated plywood with exterior glue . 2 . 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners and Anchorages : Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications ' for nails , staples , screws , bolts , nuts , washers and anchoring devices . Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending nails . Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners . Interior work shall utilize hot dipped galvanized . B . Building Paper : Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 15 # or 30 #, ASTM D226 . 2 . 04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative treatment : Where lumber of plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated" , or is specified herein to be treated , comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPA standards listed below. Mark each treated items with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements . 06100 -3 B . Pressure-treat above- ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2 . After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15 . Treat indicated items and the following : ' Wood cants, nailers, cures blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing . Wood sills , sleepers, blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete . ' C . Fire-Retardant Treatment : Where "FR- S " lumber or plywood is specified or otherwise indicated, provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure impregnations with fire-retardant chemicals , and which have a flame spread rating of ' not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84, and show no increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon continuation of test for an additional 20 minutes . Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19% . ' Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood. D . Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces . ' PART 3 - EXECUTION - INSTALLATION 3 . 01 GENERAL ' A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint ' arrangement. B . Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines , with members plumb and ' true and accurately cut and fitted. ' C . Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards . Countersink nail head on exposed carpentry work and fill holes . ' D . Use common wire nails except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between members . Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 1 ' 06100-4 3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS4 NAILERS4 BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS A . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached . Coordinate location with other work involved . B . Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading . Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces , unless otherwise show. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible , anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1 ''/z" wide and thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved . Remove temporary grounds when no longer required . 3 . 03 WOOD FURRING (WD-FURS A . Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges of openings . Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. B . Furrine to Receive Plywood Paneline Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 " x3 " furring at To . c . , horizontally and vertically . 3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL (WD-FRMS A . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not show, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of National Forest Productions Association. Do not splice structural members between supports . B . Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule " of "Manual for Housing Framing" and other recommendations of the N . F . P . A. 3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (,PWD) A . Com with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA) , for the installation of plywood . 3 . 06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 . All work shall comply with the standards of the American Institute of Timber Construction, AWI, API , AWPA, and local codes and regulations . 2 . All framing shall be square, plumb and true. 3 . All furring shall be shimmed to a plumb, true surface . 06100-5 4 . All lumber in contact with masonry shall be #2 yellow pine, pressure treated . 5 . Coordinate blocking and backing requirements of all trades and provide where indicated and required . ' 6 . Provide solid blocking behind all shower valves . 7 . Provide rough openings for all manufactured items such as medicine cabinets , fire ' extinguisher cabinets, etc . 8 . Provide fire cats in all interior and exterior frame walls where vertical cavity exceeds ' 8 feet. 9 . Construct 3 /4 inch BC plywood plenum bases, including vertical sides, for all Closet ' Mounted Air-Handling Units . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 1 t 06100-6 SECTION 06192 -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 Work Included A. Fabricate, supply and erect wood trusses as shown on the drawings and as specified. Work to include anchorage, blocking, curbing, miscellaneous framing and bracing . 1 . 02 Definitions A. TRUSS : The terms "truss" and "wood truss component" refer to open web load carrying assemblies suitable for support of roof decks or floors in buildings . B . MANUFACTURER : A manufacturer who is regularly engaged in design and fabrication of wood truss components . C . TRUSS INSTALLER: Builder, general contractor, contractor or sub-contractor who is responsible for the field storage, handling and installation of trusses . 1 . 03 Design A . Trusses shall be designed in accordance with these specifications and where any applicable design feature is not specified herein, design shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of latest edition of National Design Specifications for Wood Construction (NDS) American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) , and Design Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses (ANSUTPI I) Truss Plate Institute (TPI), and code of local jurisdiction. B . Manufacturer shall furnish design drawings bearing seal and registration number of a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where trusses are to be manufactured and installed. The truss fabrication/shop drawings shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to fabrication . C . Truss design drawings shall include as minimum information : 1 . Span , depth or slope and spacing of trusses ; 2 . Required bearing width within 1 /8 of an inch; 3 . Design loads as applicable : a. Top chord live load; b . Top chord dead load ; c . Bottom chord live load ; d . Bottom chord dead load; e . Concentrated loads and their points of application ; and f. Wind uplift reactions at a typical truss and all girders . 4 . Adjustment to lumber and plate design loads for condition of use ; 5 . Reactive forces, their points of occurrence and direction; 6 . Truss Plate Manufacturer' s plate type, gage , size and location of plate at each joint; 06192 - 1 7 . Lumber size, species and grade for each member; 8 . Location of any required continuous later bracing, ie . T-backs , lateral or diagonal bracing ; 9 . Calculated deflection ratio and/or maximum deflection for live and total load; 10 . Maximum axial compression forces in truss members ; 11 . Location of joints . NOTE : provide splice blocks at all bottom chord splices that do not occur at panel points ; 12 . Connection requirements for: a. Truss to truss girders ; b . Truss ply to ply; and c . Field splices . PART 2 = PRODUCTS 2 . 01 Materials A. Lumber : 1 . Lumber used for truss members shall be in accordance with published Values of Lumber rules writing agencies approved by board of review of American Lumber Standards Committee . Lumber shall be identified by Grade mark of a lumber inspection bureau or agency approved by that Board, and shall be as shown on design drawings . 2 . Moisture content of lumber shall be no less than 7 percent nor greater than 19 percent at time of fabrication. 3 . Adjustment of values for duration of load or conditions of use shall be in accordance with National Design Specifications for Wood Construction (NDS) . 4 . Fire retardant treated lumber, if applicable, shall meet specifications of truss design and ANSI/TPI 1 - 1995 , par 9 . 1 . 5 and shall be redried after treatment in accordance with AWPA Standard C20 . Allowable values must be adjusted in accordance with NDS par 2 . 3 . 6 . Lumber treater shall supply certificate of compliance . B . Metal Connector Plates : ' 1 1 . Metal connector plates shall be manufactured by MITEK or ALPINE/ LUMBERMATE/CLARY and shall be not less than . 036 inches in thickness (20 gage) tand shall meet or exceed ASTM A653 -94 grade 37, and shall be hot dipped galvanized 1 according to ASTM A653 -94 , coating designation G60 . Working stresses in steel are to be applied to effective ratios for plates as determined by test in accordance with ' Appendix E and F of ANSI/TPI 1 - 1995 . 2 . In highly corrosive environments , special applied coatings or stainless may be required . 1 See plans for specific description of plates . 3 . The truss manufacturer shall furnish a certified record that materials comply with steel 1 specifications . 1 06192 -2 2 . 02 Fabrication 1 . Trusses shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a permanent nature . Trusses shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using precision cutting, jigging and pressing equipment meeting requirements of ANSI/TPI 1 - 1995 , Section 4 . Truss members shall be accurately cut to length angle and true to line to assure proper fitting joints within tolerances set forth in ANSI/TPI 1 - 1995 , Section 4, and proper fit with other work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 Handling . Installation and Bracing A . Trusses shall be handled during fabrication, delivery and at jobsite so as not to be subjected to excessive bending . B . Trusses shall be unloaded on smooth ground to avoid lateral strain. Trusses shall be protected from damage that might result from on-site activities or environmental conditions . Prevent toppling when banding is removed . C . Handle during installation in accordance with Handling, Installing and Bracing Wood Trusses (HIB-91), TPI, and ANSI/TPI 1 - 1995 . Installation shall be consistent with good workmanship and good building practices and shall be the responsibility of the Truss Installer. D . Apparent damage to trusses, if any, shall be reported to Manufacturer prior to installation. E. Trusses shall be set and secured level and plumb, and in correct location. Trusses shall be held in correct alignment until specified permanent bracing/strapping is installed . F. Cutting and altering of trusses is not permitted. G. Concentrated loads shall not be placed atop trusses until all specified bracing has been installed and decking is permanently nailed in place . Specifically avoid stacking full bundles of decking or other heavy materials onto unsheathed trusses . H. Erection bracing is always required . Professional advice should always be sought to prevent toppling or dominoing of trusses during installation . Safety is the sole responsibility of the Truss Installer. I . The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and furnishing the materials used for installation and permanent bracing . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 06192-3 SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Be Wood Doors Section 08200 C . Finish Hardware Section 08700 D . Chalkboards, Tackboards , & Pegboards Section 10100 E . Plastic Laminated Toilet Partitions Section 10160 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - STANDARDS A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this Specification. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI Standards . Be Any items not given a specific quality grade , shall be custom grade . Products of other manufacturers der c C . facturers may be proposed un conditions o rtions as set forth in the Contract Conditions of these Specifications . 1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver manufactured material in original packages . Be Store all finish materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements . 1 . 04 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK Shelving not included in Casework Specifications nor in Casework Drawings : A. SWI Custom Grade, if stained. Be AWI Economy Grade, if painted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 INTERIOR WOODWORK FOR PAINT FINISH A Quality Grade : Economy grade requirements of AWI Quality Standards . Be Wood Species : B and better V . G . Fir, Birch, or where indicated on Drawings - B and better Oak. 06200- 1 C . Plywood : All plywood shall be exterior grade, Group 1 , A, B . Veneer grades . This shall include any plywood shelving to receive paint as indicated on the casework drawings . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF WOODWORK A. Only experienced finish carpenters are to work on exposed woodwork. B . Erect all work plumb level and true to the line and detail . C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation. D . Naili Use finish nails and counter sink. Fill holes with putty after prime coat. E. Sand all finish woodwork and leave ready for finishing . 3 . 02 DOORS A. Install doors as provided under other Sections of these Specifications . B . Install doors true and plumb with equal clearances at jambs and head. Co Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation. 3 . 03 HARDWARE Install finish hardware as specified under another Section of these Specifications . A. Installation of all finish hardware shall be by a skilled and experienced mechanic in a neat and workmanlike manner. Where required, the hardware shall be removed for application of finishes and fully protected until final installation. B . Carefully tag and file all keys in the key file and deliver all keys to the Owner ' s representative at the completion of the job . See Finish Hardware for detailed specifications and instructions . 3 . 04 CLEAN UP A. Leave all work in neat and in a finished condition. B . Remove all debris as result of work under this Section of these Specifications . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 06200-2 DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION ' SECTION 07190 - VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED WORK FOUND IN OTHER SECTIONS Soil conditions under vapor barrier - Section 02010 Concrete - Section 03010 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 VAPOR BARRIER : A . 6 Mil Polyethylene film under concrete slabs . B . Anti-tear visqueen on lower face of joists on elevated manufactured buildings . Co Tape : As recommended by manufacturer of vapor barrier. D . Staples : monel or stainless when exposed to weather. rPART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION : A. Apply vapor barrier over entire area to receive slab ; lap edges 12 inches and seal with tape . Turn edges up to top of slab or down to bottom of footings . Where expansion joints are indicated at adjacent vertical surfaces , extend vapor barrier beyond expansion joint filler and turn up to top of slab . Where expansion joints are indicated within the slab , lay vapor barrier continuous under expansion joint filler. B . Apply anti-tear visqueen to underside of joists of manufactured buildings with monel or r stainless steel staples at 6 inches on center perpendicular to tension of visqueen. Lap all edges a minimum of 6 inches . Seal around all mechanical, electrical, or similar penetrations to prevent moisture and rodent infiltration. Provide solid backing adjacent to and around said penetrations to receive moisture barrier. 3 . 02 PROTECTION : Protect vapor barrier from damage . Repair punctures and tears using patches of the material which overlaps a minimum of 12 inches . Seal with tape or secure with staples . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07190- 1 SECTION 07200 - INSULATION PART 1 - CEILINGS 1 . 01 When Wood Trusses : Provide (R- 19 or R-30 as called out on the wall sections) Batt insulation - installed between the bottom chords of the pre-engineered roof trusses . Install in all ceiling spaces and where shown on the drawings . 1 . 02 When Steel Joists : (Three methods) A. Provide R- 19 nailable rigid roofing deck secured to pan-deck as per drawings . B . Provide (R49) Batt insulation - laid on top of the suspended acoustical panels when no insulation is provided on the metal roof decking . Refer to drawings for placement. C . Provide (R- 19 overall average) EPS roof deck insulation as an integral pour with the lightweight concrete decking . Refer to drawings for placement and thicknesses . 1 . 03 When Concrete Joists and Deck : Provide roof top insulation board per plans for uppermost floor. No ceiling insulation for all lower floor/ceiling assemblies . 1 . 04 When Ceiling Assembly is used as a return air plenum Insulation within the plenum space must meet flame spread and smoke development ratings of the SBC for an exposed installation. PART 1 - EXTERIOR WALLS : 2 . 01 When Concrete Block Walls : (Two Methods) A . Provide furring on the interior face of the block walls as per plans and place rigid insulation of thickness called out on the wall sections . B . Fill the exterior block cells with CoreFill 500 amino -plast, Class-A, Foam insulation, (or an approved equal product) . The thermal properties for an 8 " block/60 lbs . Density wall assembly is R- 14 . 2 . Install in strict compliance with manufacturers application procedures . 2 . 02 When Wood Frame or Steel Assembly Walls : R- 11 in 3 '/2 " walls, and R- 19 in 5 '/2 " walls . Utilize foil faced or waxed Kraft paper faced fiberglass batt insulation. 2 . 03 When Insulated Concrete Tilt-wall Sandwich Panels : Provide extruded Dow STYROFOAM Brand rigid blue board insulation with heat formed , regular spaced holes identifying connector plate locations . Thicknesses per the plan with a minimum of 1 %2 inch thickness in all applications . 072004 ' PART 3 - INTERIOR WALLS : 3 . 01 Framed Walls . Wood or Metal Stud : 34 /2 " Sound Batt insulation where shown on the plans . Staples or Adhesive : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. PART 4 - ATTIC BARRIERS : ' 4 . 01 When called out on the plans,- , provide a foil drape between the floor/roof trusses prior to installing the plywood decking . R- 10 Min. Staples : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. PART 5 - INSTALLATION : 5 . 01 Allow proper air space for thermal insulation, using flanges provided, in accordance with manufacturer ' s printed instructions . 5 . 02 When utilizing a vented soffit assembly provide a minimum of a 2 air space at all perimeter overhangs between the insulation face and the underside of roof decking . Utilize vinyl or cardboard prefab vent sleeves as required to maintain said clearance. 5 . 03 Concealed Installation : in buildings of an a construction shall have g Y type aflame spread rating of not more than 75 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 . 5 . 04 Exposed Installation : in buildings of an a construction shall have g Y type aflame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 . 5 . 05 Vapor Retarders : in order to prevent indoor air quality problems in hot, humid climates, vapor retarders such as asphalt impregnated felts , polyethelenes, or "Tyvics", should be placed on ' the outside , or weather side , of the insulation. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 1 07200-2 SECTION 07220 - LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE ON INSULPERM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections , apply to work of this Section 1 . 02 SUMMARY A. Extent of roof and deck insulation is shown on drawings . Includes light weight insulating concrete and rigid insulation board. Be Framing for openings, edge angles , wood nailers and structural expansion joints are specified in other sections . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s literature describing products and methods of mixing and application instructions. Be Substrate : The applicator shall be responsible for inspection and submit written approval of the substrate as being suitable for the roof insulations system . C . Certificates : Submit test reports certified by an independent testing laboratory stating that materials and mix intended to be used meet specified requirements . The cast density shall be checked at the point of placement and the mix adjusted to obtain the specified density . A minimum of 4 test cylinders (3 " x 6 ") shall be taken for each days work or for each 8 cubic yards of material placed. These specimens shall be protected from any damage and tested in accordance with ASTM C495 . D . A "Performance Warranty" shall be issued to the owner by the insulating concrete manufacturer, through the applicator, upon the completion of the job indicating a minimum average "R" value of 20 . 4 . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Applicator : An applicator regularly engaged and properly equipped for application of lightweight insulating concrete, and licensed by the manufacturer shall furnish all labor, equipment and supervision for installing the complete roof insulation assembly, including the slotted, corrugated metal decking . 1 . 05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Deliver materials in manufacturer ' s original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers clearly marked as to type and grade of material . 07220- 1 ' Be Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage . Co Do not use cement which shows indications of moisture damage , caking, or other ' sign of deterioration. 1 . 06 JOB CONDITIONS ' A. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete when ambient temperature is below, or ' expected to fall below 40 degrees F . , for the first 72 hours after placement. Be System to meet elevations and slopes shown on drawings . ' PART 2 - PROD CTS ' 2 . 01 MATERIALS A . Insulating Concrete : ZONOLITE aggregate based concrete as manufactured by ' W. R. Grace & Co . , or equal such as PERLITE . Be Portland Cement : ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III . ' C . Aggregate : ASTM C 332 , Group I . ' D . Water: Clean, potable, free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkai and organic materials . ' E . Air Entraining Admixture : ASTM C 260 . F . Control Joint Filler: ASTM C612 , Class 2 , glass fiber type . G . Insulation Board : INSULPERM as manufactured by W. R. Grace & Co . It shall have 30 holes and 30 slots in each sheet. 2 . 01 DESIGN MIX A . Design lightweight insulating concrete mix to product the following minimum physical properties . ' Wet Density at Point of Placement : 52 . 0cf, plus-or-minus 8 . P , P 0 pcf, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 495 . ' Oven Dry Density : 25 pcf, plus-or-minus 3 pcf, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 495 , Compressive Strength : Minimum 125 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM C ' 495 . Be Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer. ' Co Use minimum amount of water necessary to product a workable mix . 07220-2 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A . Control Joints : Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical surfaces, including curbs , walls , and vents , for full depth of insulating concrete . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Deck shall be filled with a slurry of insulation concrete to a level of 1 /8 " above the corrugations before insulation board is installed . B . Placement of insulation board must be made within 30 minutes of the slurry and installation of the top pour must be made within 4 hours of the insulation board placement. C . Insulation board shall be placed with joints staggered in a brick-like pattern. Board shall be butted together and placed in a manner that provides full contact of slurry to board, causing the insulating concrete to enter the holes in the board for a locking/keying effect. D . Place lightweight insulating concrete in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air content. Deposit and screed in a continuous operation until and entire panel or section of roof area is completed . Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or floating . Place lightweight insulating concrete to depths and slopes as shown on drawings . Leave top surface in acceptable condition to receive subsequent roofing application . E . Insulating concrete shall be poured with approved equipment. The mixing time shall be sufficient to provide a thorough, consistent mix that will screed to a smooth surface (Min . 2 " thickness) . F . Begin curing operation immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than 3 days in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . G . Provide temporary protection of removable waterproof covering to prevent direct exposure to moisture if roofing application is not started immediately after completion of curing. 3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Owner will engage an independent testing laboratory to take samples and conduct test to evaluate lightweight insulating concrete . Take samples in accordance with ASTM C 172 , except as modified by ASTM C 495 . 07220-3 Determine wet density in accordance with ASTM C 138 . Determine compressive strength and over dry density in accordance with ASTM c ' 495 . Make at least 6 molds during each placement. Be Report test results to Architect, Contractor, and lightweight insulating concrete producer within 24 hours of completion of each test. C . Flood test : Prior to commencement of roofing, the deck shall be flood tested by the insulating concrete applicator to insure positive slope to drain. If there is any ponding water or question as to positive drainage, it shall be corrected before placement of roofing materials . 3 . 04 DEFECTIVE WORK ' A. Refinish or remove and replace lightweight insulating concrete surfaces which are too rough to receive finish roofing, or where physical properties do not meet specified requirements, as determined by Architect. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07220-4 SECTION 07500 - FIBERGLASS-BASE ASPHALT SHINGLES ' PART I - G .RAL ' 1 . 01 The roofing shingles shall be manufactured by one of the following companies : G.A .F . , ELK, CertainTeed, Owens Corning or TAMKO . Shingles shall carry Underwriter ' s Laboratories and ASTM Labels : UL Wind Resistant ASTM D -3018 , Type 1 ' ASTM D -3161 , Type 1 UL997 UL Class A fire rating ASTM E- 108 , Class A ' UL 790 ASTM D -3462 NOTE : In addition to the above minimum UL and ASTM requirements , the fiberglass shingles installed must meet minimum wind warranty requirements of up to 120 mph for 10 years. ' Install shingles to meet requirements of published Manufacturers instructions . ' 1 . 02 Submittals : Color and style sample showing three or four tab design with a full range of colors available per manufacturer. Product literature and installation procedures . Manufacturers warranty . 1 . 03 Deliver materials to site in manufacturer ' s unopened bundles with labels intact and legible . Handle and Store materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped ' water. Store roll goods on end. 1 . 04 Project Conditions : Proceed with installing shingles only when the weather is appropriate ' for a quality installation. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces . 1 . 05 Wgm : Warranty terms and conditions apply per Manufacturer with a minimum 30 year limited transferrable warranty. Workmanship : Applicator warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of One Year. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 Fiberglass/ Asphalt Shingles : as manufactured by G.A.F . , ELK, CERTAINTEED , OWENS CORNING or TAMKO . Fiber glass-based asphalt shingles complying with ASTM specifications listed above . Shingles shall have factory applied self-sealing strips or ' be interlocking. ASTM D3462 is the standard for shingles made with fiberglass felt. Shingles shall be Algae Resistant. Weight per 100 square sq . ft . - acceptable range is 300 ' to 355 pounds per square. Four (4) or five (5) bundles per square . Weight will vary with style and manufacturer . Refer to wall section on the drawings for additional design information. 07500-1 r r ' 2 . 02 Underlavments - As called out on the wall section on the drawings and meetingor exceeding these specifications . ' A. No 30 UL premium quality TAMKO, or approved equal, pp q organic felt (non-perforated) that is saturated with asphalt. Acceptable for use as an underlayment felt to be applied over the deck prior to the installation of fiberglass/asphalt shingles . UL Laboratories Built-up Type 30 Label in accordance with U1 . 55A. ASTM D-226, Type II . 72' X 36 " 216 sq. ft. Per roll . Laying lines 2 " , 12 " and 17 " . ' B . No 30 ASTM premium quality TAMKO or approved equal ,pp q al , organic felt that is saturated with asphalt. Acceptable for use as an underlayment felt to be applied over the ' deck prior to the installation of fiberglass/asphalt shingles . ASTM D -226, Type H . 72 ' X 36 " 216 sq. ft. Per roll . ' C . No 30 - Non-UL Saturated Felt features a premium quality TAMKO organic . felt (non- perforated) that is saturated with asphalt. Acceptable for use as an underlayment felt to be ' applied over the deck prior to installation of fiberglass/asphalt shingles . Underwriters Laboratories Prepared Roofing Accessory. 72 ' X 36 " 216 sq. ft. Per roll . Laying lines 2 " , 4 " , 12 " , and 17 " . 2 . 03 Hip and Rid e Shin les • Site cut shingles of same color as field of roof or manufactured Hip and Ridge . ' 2 . 04Fasteners : Nails to be hot dipped galvanized or Aluminum with minimum - 12 gauge shank and a minimum 3 /8 inch head. Nails must be long enough to penetrate at least 3 /4 inch ' into solid decking, or extend a minimum of 1 /8 inch through any specified APOA rated sheathing . NO STAPLES will be accepted . Pneumatically applied rotary nailers are acceptable using zinc- coated, 12gauge shank nails . ' 2 . 05 Accessories : All accessories must be of compatible mat _ p materials to the fiber glass based shingles . ' ART 3 - INSTALLATION 3 . 01 Install roofing.s stems per the manufacturer ' s specifications , and in accordance with The Standard Building Code, Current Edition . ' 3 . 02 Installers shall be certified installers , certified by the manufacturer of the respective roofing systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect prior to ' installation. ' 07500-2 1 3 . 03 Upon completion of the roofing system installation, an inspection will be made by a roofing ' system representative . Corrections to the installation of the roofing system, as deemed necessary by the roofing system representative, will be made at no additional cost to the ' Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued. 3 . 04 Shiners (nails that missed the trusses or joists, visible from below the roof deck), shall be ' removed by the General Contractor prior to installing any underlayments or finished roofmg. ' * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07500=3 1 SECTION 07515 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED SINGLE-PLY ROOFING SYSTEM PART l - SCOPE ' 1 . 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Membrane roofing utilizing a mechanically attached E.I . P . Single-Ply System meeting ' design wind uplift ASCE 7-98 , wind speed per ASCE FIGURE 6- lb Basic Wind Speed Map . ' 1 . 02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. This specification must be followed without variation as it applies to only those building roofs having deck structures capable of supporting the guidelines set forth t ' herein. f S B . All applications require review by the Manufacturers Technical Service Department ' before any specification is valid. Co A Manufacturers Materials Submittal List must me completed, signed by an officer of the company, submitted to and approved by the Manufactures Technical Service Department before any consideration for warranty and/or the release of any materials will be authorized. 1 . 03 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS A. An engineering study indicates that the structure is unable to accommodate additional ' live and dead loads when considering a ballasted system . B . Building height, deck type, roof slope and/or high wind areas, which may require additional fastener enhancement. ' C . Moisture conditions in existing roof which would prohibit a retrofit. D . Coal tar retrofits and/or direct contact with bituminous materials. (See Sec . 2 . 03 and ' 3 . 04) E . Newly completed membrane is subject to chemical discharge not listed on the ' Manufacturers chemical resistance publication. F . Manufacturers membrane is subjected to heavy foot traffic and wear due to servicing of ' roof mounted equipment that will require the inclusion of walkboards . G. Mechanical fastener pull-out resistance tests must be conducted as a means of ' determining the deck acceptability for proper mechanical attachment of roof insulation and singly-ply membrane . NOTE : A minimum of ten ( 10) pull-out tests will be - ' required for attachment evaluation. H . Compliance with EPA and OSHA requirements published by local, state , and Federal authorities . 07515-1 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . The Single-Ply Membrane Roofing System shall be installed by a roofing contractor, ' approved by the Manufacturer in strict accordance with approved specifications and details as amended and approved by the Manufacturers Technical Service Department to meet and environmental conditions . B . Roofing Contractor and key supervisory su erviso personnel shall have attended a Manufacturers Contractor Training Seminar for the roofing system to be installed . C . A Material Submittal Form must be completed, signed by approved contractor and ' submitted to the Manufacturers Technical Service Department, along with roof drawings indicating building height, roof dimensions , perimeter areas, method of perimeter securement, penetration details and their location (unusual details must be ' shown as to their anticipated construction and approved in writing by the Manufacturers Technical Service Department prior to installation) . D . The Manufacturer will offer, if requested, technical assistance for pre job conference and initial job start-up , providing a minimal 10 day lead time . ' E. Final inspection shall be performed by a Manufacturers Technical Representative for acceptance and approval of appropriate warranty. ' F . No deviations or changes from approved specifications will be allowed without written approval from the Manufacturers Technical Service Department, as the project would be considered an unauthorized installation and ineligible for Warranty coverage . ' G. All roofing materials , (for school installations only), shall be certified b nationally Y a Y recognized independent testing laboratory per SREF 5 . 3 (7) (c)2 . 1 . 05 ARCHITECTURAL SUBMITTALS A . Submit most recent published technical literature and specifications issued by the Manufacturers Technical Service Department. B . Submit sample guarantee and letter from the Manufacturer approving the roofing contractor. ' C . Submit Roofing Contractor' s approval copy of Materials Submittal Form including approved tapered layout installation details . Architectural details conflicting with the Manufacturers approval shall be brought to the Architects attention prior to Materials Submittal Form approval . D . Submit approval from the Manufacturer stating that any accessories submitted not manufactured or expressly approved in the Manufactures literature are approved and compatible with the Manufacturers Roofing System . 07515-2 E . Submit letter from the Manufacturer stating that all OSHA requirements relating to all chemicals and solvents have been conveyed to the applicator. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS ) may be substituted for manufacturer' s letter. 1 . 06 WARRANTY A. Roofing Membrane Manufacturer' s Warranty - furnish the Owner with a T written (20) Twenty Year NDL Warranty for the roof membrane system (Materials) and the installation (Labor). 1 . 07 . MATERIAL DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials and/or packages to the job site in manufacturer' s original, unopened containers, with legible labels and in sufficient quantity to allow for continuity of work. B . Select and operate material handling equipment in a safe manner, guarding against damage to existing construction or newly applied roofing and conforming to manufacturer ' s recommendations of handling and storage . C . Provide appropriate protection to all materials from weather conditions , i. e. , moisture, wind, extreme cold or heat as per manufacturer' s recommendations. 1 . 09 COORDINATION A. Prior to ordering of materials, a pre-roofing conference will be held with the approved roofing contractor, membrane manufacturer representative, representative of the building Owner and the architectural representative to discuss the specified roofing system and its proper application. The architectural representative or building representative shall notify all parties a minimum of seven days prior to he meeting . B . Coordinate application of the roofing system with other trades in such a manner that the complete installation is weather tight and in accordance with all approved details and warranty requirements . 1 . 10 INSPECTIONS AND JOB CONTROL A. A Manufacturers Technical Representative shall be available to make recommendations necessary to insure compliance . The Technical Representative shall be responsible for recommending any specification alternatives due to unforeseen job conditions . B . The roofing contractor shall notify the Manufacturers Technical Service Department in writing, of job completion. The Manufacturer will schedule a final inspection with the Roofing Contractor. 07515-3 C . A Final Inspection Report shall list all items not meeting the Manufacturers requirements and shall be discussed in detail with the roofing contractor at the time of final inspection. The roofing contractor shall notify the Manufacturer via corrective ' action /form/photographs that all defects found at the final inspection have been corrected . Upon the Manufacturers acceptance of the corrective action form, the specified warranty shall be issued. NOTE : If a reinspection by the Manufacturer is ' required prior to warranty issuance, the contractors account shall be debited for the additional technical representative ' s expense . 1 . 11 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At the time of issuance of the warranty, a full set of instructions shall be provided detailing preventative maintenance and noting a list of harmful substances which may damage the roofing membrane . ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 ROOFING MEMBRANE Roofing membrane shall be an ethylene interpolymer (EIP) alloy, reinforced with knitted polyester fabric conforming to the following physical properties : FIBERTITEAT (OR APPROVED EQUAL) ' MATERIAL TEST METHODS PRODUCT PROPERTY (Units) DATA ' - Thickness ASTM D - 751 . 045 Minimum Inches ' - Tensile ASTM D -751 (lbs . ) 550 x 500 - Strength ASTM D - 882 (psi) 9500 - Elongation ASTM D-751 (%) 20 warp x 30 fill ' - Tear Strength ASTM D- 751 (lbs . ) 125 8 " x10 " Sample - Puncture Fed, Std . 101B 300 ' Resistance Method 2031 (lbs . ) - Water Vapor ASTM E-96 Proc . A 1 . 3 ' Transmission (gm/m2/24 hours) - Water Absorption ASTM D-471 (%) Plus or minus 5 . 0 14 days @ 70F ' Maximum - Dimensional ASTM D - 1204 (%) 0 . 5 Stability ' - Low Temperature ASTM D-2136 (F) -40 Flexibility ' 07515-4 - Factory Seam ASTM D-751 , Grab 100 Strength Method (% of Fabric Strength) - Shore "A" ASTM D -2240 80 Hardness - Accelerated Carbon Arc with water 5 , 000 hrs . -no cracking, Weathering spray blistering, or crazing . h' - Hydrostatic ASTM D-2240 80 Resistance - Wicking Test U. S . Army Natick 1 /8 " Maximum Test (inches) Flame Mil-C-20696C Type Pass Resistance II Class 2 - Fungi Resistance ASTM -G 21 , 28 days No growth - Oil Resistance Mil-20696C No swelling, cracking or leaking . - Hydrocarbon Mil-C-20696C No swelling cracking Resistance or leaking . Approved Manufacturers of comparable Single-Ply Membrane Roofing Systems (either meeting or exceeding the above) are as follows : Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. Seaman Corporation Saginaw, MI 48601 Sarasota, FL 34243 Ph : (800)-248 -0280 Ph : (800)- 9274578 Seal-Dry/USA Inc. Little Rock, AR 72204 Ph : (800)-732-5379 2 . 02 SEPARATION LAYER : (WHERE APPLICABLE) Separation layer shall be one of the following : A. The inclusion of a separator sheet (slip sheet) is required on all new lightweight insulating concrete decks . Separation layers may also be required on some retrofit application Contact the Manufacturers Technical Department for specifics . B . Separation sheets may be of the following : ' 3 . 50 lbs . / 100 S . F . non woven glass fabric . 2 . 701bs ./ 100 S . F . non woven polyester fabric . 2 . 08 lbs ./ 100 S . F . non woven polyprophlene fabric . 07515-5 NOTE : Project specifications involving lightweight insulating concrete must be submitted for review by the Manufacturers Technical Department prior to Materials Submittal Form approval . ' 2 . 03 PITCH BARRIER (WHERE APPLICABLE) A . Coal Tar Pitch Retrofit 1 . All coal tar pitch retrofits will require the inclusion of a pitch barrier. 2 . Pitch barrier shall be a minimum ten ( 10) mil polyethylene . Roll width shall be ' a minimum of 72 in. with a minimum of 0 . 4 permeance . NOTE : The inclusion of a pitch barrier in a coal tar pitch retrofit is only to promote long term aesthetic quality . NO deviations will be permitted, unless signed documentation from the building Owner/Architect waiving the pitch barrier is filed with the Manufacturers Technical Department. ' B . Water Vapor Transmission ' 1 . Vapor barrier shall be a minimum be ( 10) mil polypropylene or approved material . Roll width shall be a minimum of 72 in. with a minimum of 72 in. with a minimum of 0 .4 permeance as per ASTM E96/A. NOTE : Consult N. R. C .A. Bulletins for appropriate guidelines . 2 . 04 LAMINATED METAL ' A . 24 GA . Hot-dipped G-90 or stainless steel laminated polymeric coating as supplied by or approved by the Manufacturer. ' 2 . 05 FASTENING DEVICES A. Single-ply membrane attachment shall utilize 2 in. barbed round, hot-dipped, ' galvanized stress plate . Membrane fastener shall be as listed within the Manufacturers Approved Fastener List. ' B . Insulation fastener and stress plate shall be as listed on the current Manufacturers List. Only plastic, locking stress plates shall be used for insulation fastener assemblies . ' C . Any deviation from the Manufacturers Approved Fastener List shall require written approval from the Manufacturers Technical Service Department. ' 2 . 06 SEALANTS , MASTICS AND SOLVENTS ' A. As supplied or approved by the Manufacturer. All sealants , mastics and solvents shall be listen on the Material Submittal Form . A short description of hits use shall also be included . ' 07515-6 2 . 07 ROOF INSULATION A . Isocyanurate Roof insulation shall be U. L . classified foil or glass faced with a minimum composite strength of 2 . 0 PCF . , minimum 1 in . thick. B . Extruded Styrofoam Roof insulation shall be factory laminated Kraft-reinforced foil facers on both sides with a minimum density of 1 . 5 pcf, compressive strength of 15 psi . at 10% deformation. Unfaced Extruded Styrofoam roof insulation shall be stepped or tapered . Minimum Fastener Requirements C . All insulation boards shall be installed in accordance with the roof insulation manufacturer' s instructions if they are more stringent that the Roofing Manufacturers minimal fastener requirements . D . Extruded styrofoam roof insulation shall have a minimum of six (6) approved fasteners per 4 ' x 8 ' board . NOTE : Extruded styrofoam must not be used over coal tar pitch roofs . 2 . 08 ROOF WALKWAY MATERIALS A. Walkways / protection membranes or circulation areas, shall be as furnished or approved by the manufacturer. Contact the Manufacturers Technical Department for installation instructions . No loose, unsecured walkway mats, pallets or boards will be accepted. 2 . 09 WOOD NAILERS Wood shall be No . 2 or better southern yellow pine, kiln dried, wolmanized, as furnished by Koppers Company, Inc . , or an approved equal conforming to Federal specification TT- 550, TT-W- 517 and American Wood Preservers Institute Standard LP-2 , NOTE : Creasote or asphaltic type preservatives are not acceptable . 2 . 10 EXPANSION JOINTS Expansion joints shall be per the Manufacturers specifications, flashed with the Manufacturers membrane . 2 . 11 TERMINATION BAR Termination bar shall be the following : 1 /8 in. x 1 in . type aluminum rectangular bar having smooth, rounded edges as approved by the Manufacturer. (Flat stock cut on a shear is not acceptable) . Termination bar shall be pre-punched with 9/32 in. holes or slots 8 in. O/C . 07515-7 ' NOTE : Termination bars must be installed with a minimum space of 1 /4 in. between bars . Consult the Manufacturers Technical Service Department for approved termination bar fasteners . ' 2 . 12 OVERNIGHT SEAL ' Contractor must maintain a watertight seal during any interruption of roof construction or at the end of the day. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES ' A. The general contractor shall be responsible for providing a smooth acceptable surface for the proper installation of the single-ply membrane, roof insulation and specified ' components on all new construction projects . B . The roofing contractor shall be responsible for the inspection of the deck surface as to ' suitability for roofing and notify the general contractor and architect of any defects that require correction prior to roof application. ' C . Retrofits require the removal of all loose aggregate (gravel) by power brooming and/or vacuuming. ' D . Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, low areas that will not drain properly, foreign material, ice, wet insulation, and unevenness or any other defect which would ' prevent execution and quality of application of the single-ply membrane roofing as specified. ' E . Clean all exposed metal surfaces such as pipes, pipe sleeves, drains , duct work, pitch pockets , etc . , by removing loose paint, rust and any asphalt or coal tar pitch of any kind . Remove and discard lead sleeves at soil stacks . ' F . It the existing proof is coal tar pitch or has been repaired with coal tar pitch or has been resaturated with coal tar pitch, a special pitch retarder will be required. Note Section t 2 . 03 . G. DO NOT PROCEED WITH ANY PART OF THE APPLICATION UNTIL ALL ' DEFECTS AND PREPARATION WORK HAVE BEEN CORRECTED AND COMPLETED . ' 3 . 02 INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS (WHERE APPLICABLE) ' A. Install treated lumber at the same heights as insulation layer. Wood nailers are to be installed at all perimeters as shown in approved details . The surface under the wood nailers shall be FREE OF ALL GRAVEL and shall be as even as possible . 07515-8 B . Where wood nailers are installed directly on the substrate, the substrate shall be carefully examined to confirm that the entire area provides a suitable fastening surface . All defects shall be repaired by the appropriate trade prior to installation. C . Nailers shall be installed and anchored in such a manner to resist a force of 75 lb . Per linear foot in any direction. D . Nailers around curbs and expansion joints are recommended. Consult the Manufacturers Technical Service Department for options . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION OF SEPARATION LAYER (WHERE APPLICABLE) A. LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 1 . REFER TO Section 2 . 02 . 2 . Approved insulation board or materials selected from Section 2 . 02 are acceptable . B . VERTICAL WALLS (With Existing Bituminous Membrane Flashing) 1 . Separator materials (refer to 2 . 02) 2 . %2 " exterior plywood . 3 . Manufacturers approved metal serving as wall covering/flashing . ANY DEVIATIONS AND/OR MODIFICATION REQUIRES WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM MANUFACTURERS TECHNICAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT, 3 . 04 INSTALLATION OF PITCH BARRIER (Where applicable) A. COAL TAR PITCH RETROFIT 1 . Install vapor barrier directly on existing substrate . 2 . Lap joints a minimum of 4 in. and seal with an approved adhesive or tape prior to the application of approved roof insulation. 3 . Insulation board, regardless of facing material, is not considered a suitable separation layer for coal tar pitch retrofits . Refer to 2 . 03 . B . WATER VAPOR TRANSMISSION 1 . Consult N. R. C .A . bulletins for appropriate guidelines . 3 . 05 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Roof insulation shall be mechanically fastened tin accordance with the roof insulation manufacturer' s recommendations and must be approved by the Manufacturers Technical Service Department. All insulation boards must be attached by a Factory Mutual stress plate and fastener approved by the Manufacturers Technical Service department. 07515-9 i B . Install roof insulation in parallel courses with tightly butted and staggered joints . i Boards must be cut accurately to fir neatly around all penetrations . Small pieces and scraps of insulation shall not be used. ' C . Install no more insulation than can me covered during the same working day. ' D . Taper roof insulation to drain sumps using tapered edge strips . If insulation layer is 1 - in. or less, taper 12 in. from the drain bowl . If insulation thickness exceeds 1 - 1 /2 in. , taper 18 in. from the drain bowl . Mechanically fasten all tapers using two fasteners per board. E . At the end of each working day, provide a watertight cover on all unused insulation as ' to avoid moisture penetration. NOTE : Consult the Manufacturers Technical Service Department for Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories insulation fastening requirements . 3 . 06 INSTALLATION OF SINGLE-PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE A . QUALITY CONTROL i1 . It will not be the responsibility of the roofing contractor to initiate a QC program to govern all aspects of the installation of the new single-ply membrane roofing system. 2 . The job foreman and or supervisor will be responsible for the daily execution of the QC program which will include but is not limited to the inspection and probing of all heat welding incorporated within the single-ply membrane roofing system. 3 . If inconsistencies in the quality of the welds are found, all work shall cease until corrective actions are taken to insure the continuity of all field and detail welding. B . PANELED ROLLS ' 1 . 10 ft . , 15 ft. , and 20 ft. wide rolls shall be installed snug, but not taut utilizing � g chalk lines, and maintaining (good lay flat) characteristics . ' 2 . Adjoining rolls shall overlap the fastened edge of a minimum of 4- 1 /2 in. maintaining proper roll staggering as to avoid back water seams . ' 3 . Stagger the factory welds so that each weld falls equal distance between the factory welds on adjacent rolls . C . NON PANELED ROLLS (58 IN . X 100 FT. ) 1 . When job conditions necessitate the utilization of roll roofing application procedures , follow all standard Manufacturers Installation Specifications, in addition to the following : 07515- 10 a. Install rolls so that rolls overlap 5 in. to the back line of the underlying, adjacent roll . b . Stagger the rolls so that the tails , or roll ends do not line up . D . PERIMETER SHEETS (29 IN . X 100 FT) 1 . A minimum of two perimeter sheets shall be installed, parallel to all exterior roof perimeters , including parapet walls , expansion joints and other changes in the plane of the deck. 2 . Install perimeter sheets square to chalk lines with proper staggering to avoid back water seams . 3 . Adjoining rolls shall overlap the fastened edge a minimum of 44 /2 in. maintaining proper staggering to avoid back water seams . 4 . Factory Mutual I-90 classification may require additional perimeter sheets at all exterior roof perimeters that are not bordered by a parapet, with a minimum of 24 in. above the plane of the deck. Consult the Manufacturers Technical Service Department for additional perimeter fastening data. E. ATTACHMENT 1 . All decking not listed as approved by Factory Mutual for mechanical attachment or decking exceeding 10 years in age require documented pull out values for fastener resistance . 2 . All testing is to be performed by the appropriate fastener manufacturer or an authorized representative with certified test results being submitted to the Owner. 3 . Pull out values are to be submitted to the Manufacturer Technical Service Department, for approval prior to the ordering of materials . 4 . Fastener patterns shall be at 12 inches O . C . at the perimeter and in the field of the membrane roofing . F . PANELED ROLL ATTACHMENT 1 . The following are minimum FM 1- 90 requirements for the attachment of the prefabricated ( 10 ft. , 15 ft. , and 20 ft. x 102 ft. ) rolls . Alternative spacing requirements may be required to achieve FM equivalency ratings due to deck type, building height, fastener resistance values and special geographic zone considerations . a. Tabs - install fasteners and barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN , O . C . 07515- 11 b . Roll ends - install fasteners and barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN . O . C . ' c . Side laps - install fasteners and barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE with two fasteners and stress plates per panel, approx. 27 in. O . C . ' G. NON PANELED ROLL ATTACHMENT 1 . The following are minimum FM I- 90 requirements for the attachment of the 58 in. x ft. rolls . Alternative spacing requirements may be required to achieve FM equivalency ratings due to deck type, building height, fastener resistance values and special geographic zone considerations . a. Side laps - install fasteners and barbed stress plates in a STRAIGHT LINE ON THE CENTER LINE 18 IN. O . C . b . Roll ends - install fasteners and barbed stressP lates in a STRAIGHT LINE 18 IN. O . C . H . PERIMETER SHEETS 1 . All perimeter sheets are to be installed by terminating the exterior edge to previously installed wood nailers by nailing with galvanized anular ring shank nails 6 in. O . C . or appropriate screws and barbed stress plates . 2 . Subsequent perimeter sheets toward the interior of the roof are fastened with approved fasteners and barbed stress plates 12 in. O . C . J. WELDING ! 1 . All field seams exceeding 10 ft. in length shall be welded with an approved automatic welder. 2 . All field seams must be clean and dry prior to initiating any field welding . 3 . Remove foreign materials from the seams (dirt, oils , etc . ) With Acetone, MEK or approved alternative . Use CLEAN cotton cloths and allow approximately five minutes for solvents to dissipate before initiating the automatic welder. Do not use ' denim or synthetic rags for cleaning . ' 4 . All welding shall be performed only by qualified personnel to ensure the continuity of the weld. 5 . All finished seams shall exhibit a homogeneous bond a minimum of 1 - 1 /2 in. in width. ' 07515- 12 i K. INSPECTION 1 . The job foreman and/or supervisor shall initiate daily inspections of all completed work which shall include, but is not limited to the probing of all field welding with a dull pointed instrument to assure the quality of the application and insure that any equipment or operator deficiencies are immediately resolved. 2 . Insure that all aspects of the installation (sheet layout, attachment, welding, flashing details , etc . ) Are in strict conformance with the most current Manufacturers Specifications and Details . 3 . Excessive patching of field seams because of inexperienced or poor workmanship will not be accepted at time of FINAL INSPECTION FOR WARRANTY, 4 , ANY DEVIATION FROM MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND/OR DETAILS REQUIRES WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE MANUFACTURERS TECHNICAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO APPLICATION TO AVOID ANY WARRANTY DISQUALIFICATIONS . 3 . 07 FLASHING A. Clean all vents, pipes, conduits, tubes, walls and stacks to bare metal . All protrusions must be properly secured to the roof deck with approved fasteners . Remove and discard all lead, pipe and drain flashings . Flash all penetrations according to approved details . B . Remove all cant strips and loose wall flashings . C . Flash all curbs , parapets and interior walls in strict accordance with approved Manufacturer Details . D . All flashing shall be totally adhered to approved substrate with an approved mastic applied in sufficient quantity to insure total adhesion. E . The base flange of all membrane flashing shall extend out on to the plane of the deck, beyond the wood nailer to a maximum width of 8 in. F . Vertical flashing shall be terminated no less than 8 in. above the plane of the deck with approved termination bar or metal cap flashing . G . Vertical wall flashing terminations shall not exceed 30 in. without additional, parallel horizontal rows of termination bar between the deck and the termination point of the flashing . Spacing between horizontal rows shall not exceed 24 in. H . Complete all inside and outside corner details with Manufacturers unreinforced membrane . 07515- 13 I . PROBE ALL SEAMS WITH A DULL, POINTED PROBE TO INSURE THE WELD HAS CREATED A HOMOGENEOUS BOND , 3 . 08 CORNERS A. All inside/outside corners shall be installed in strict accordance with Manufacturer ' Details for a complete watertight installation. Non-reinforced membrane, either field fabrication sheets or pre-sized inside/outside corners shall be used . 3 . 09 PENETRATION ACCESSORIES Install penetration accessories in strict accordance with approved details . Insure penetration accessories have not impeded in any way the working specification of the penetration. (Refer to the related trade for the technical specification) 3 . 10 FLASHINGS (METAL) A. All perimeter edge details are to be fabricated from Manufacturers metal or an approved two piece locking system . B . Insure all facias are 2 in. lower than the bottom of the wood nailers . C . Fasten all metal flashing to wood nailers or approved substrates with approved fasteners 8 in. O . C . D . Break and install metal in strict accordance with approved details , insuring proper attachment, maintaining %2 in. expansion joints . E . Solidly weld expansion joints with a 5 in. strip of Manufacturers membrane welded to metal (Cover plates) . 3 . 11 ROOF DRAINS Flash all roof drains in a strict accordance with Manufacturers roof drain details . Replace all worn parts that may cut the single-ply roofing membrane or prevent a watertight seal . ' Replace all drain bolts or clamps holding the drain compression ring to the drain basin. FiberTite unreinforced 60 mil membrane or lead sheet may be used as drain flashing . Lead shall be set in Manufacturers approved mastic . Lead sheets and drain basins must be free of any asphalt or coal tar pitch residue prior to installation. NOTE : Replace all broken drains strainers . 3 . 12 PITCH PANS A . Every effort shall be made to eliminate the need for pitch pans including the removal of existing pans . Contact the Manufacturers Technical Service Department for specific design recommendations . ' 07515- 14 B . Fabricate pitch pans from the Manufacturer approved meta. Pitch pans must have a minimum of 2 in. clearance of the roof penetration . Pitch pans shall be filled with non- shrinking grout to within 2 in. of the top of the pan. Allow grout to dry and fill remainder of pan with a two part pourable sealant. Pitch pans or sealant to be approved by the Manufacturers Technical Department , 3 . 13 EXPANSION JOINTS A . Flash all expansion joints in strict accordance with approved details . Fasten all joint material according to manufacturers specifications . Insure the expansion material has sufficient material to expand to the widest point in expansion without causing undue stress on the expansion joint material . B . If the expansion joint is a "factory system" insure installation instructions and warranties have been submitted with the Material Submittal Form. 3 . 14 SEALANT A . Apply approved sealant to all surface mounted reglets and where called for in approved details . Apply a bead of sealant large enough to fill the void entirely. Tool the sealant to shed water, following manufacturer' s instructions and installation guides . Use primer when recommended by the manufacturer. 3 . 15 TEMPORARY SEALS A. At the end of each working day or at the sign of rain, install temporary watertight seal where the exposed edge of the completed new roofing terminates at the uncovered deck or existing roof surface . If the old roof surface is covered with slag, spud back an area 6 in. from where the membrane will be sealed to the deck. Use a sufficient size strip of single-ply roofing membrane or sealing tape to bridge the new membrane and the roof deck. If using single-ply membrane, the strip must be welded to the new roofing membrane and cemented to the cleaned roof deck. B . Prior to the commencement of work, remove all temporary seals if they will cause a water damn and any exposed roof cement if used, DO NOT TRACK ROOF CEMENTS ONTO THE ROOF MEMBRANE , 3 . 16 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY Consult Manufacturers Technical Department for walkway membrane installation procedures . 3 . 17 LIGHTING ROD INSTALLATIONS Upon request the Manufacturer will provide certain recommendations for lightning rod installation. Lightning rod contractors and building Owners must coordinate installation with the roofing Manufacturers roofing contractor. -07515 - 15 3 . 18 CLEAN-UP i A. Remove all debris and excess material from the roof area. Pick up all loose fasteners and sheet metal scraps . B . Insure that watertightness of the entire system for warranty inspection. iC . Protect all roof surfaces to damage from other trades . PART 4 - WARRANTY 4 . 01 REQUEST FOR WARRANTY ' A . Request for warranty inspection notification shall be completed by the approved applicator and forwarded to the Manufacturer at least fourteen ( 14) days prior to the requested date of inspection. Any special information regarding access to the roof shall be included . iB . The warranty shall be issued to the approved roofing contractor after satisfactory inspection by a Manufacturers Technical Representative . ' C . The General Contractor shall provide a "final statement of compliance" to the Architect, which states that the finished roof membrane complies with the approved ' contractual documents . D . The roof membrane shall be inspected by the Manufacturer' s Representative within one year of acceptance of the roof membrane by Owner. PART 5 - RELATED WORK DESCRIBED IN OTHER SECTIONS NOT PART OF SINGLE- PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SPECIFICATION A. Wood nailers , Sleepers and Platforms - Section 06100 . B . Metal Drip g Flashin - Section 07715 . ' C . Sealants other than Roofing System - Section 07900 . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07515- 16 SECTION 07600 - FLASHING & SHEET METAL PART 1 - FABRICATED SHEET METAL 1 . 01 GENERAL A. Conform to profiles and sizes shown, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required . B . Drip Edge — bent to the configuration and dimensions shown on the drawings . Finish as defined on the wall section. Co Seal all seams with epoxy, metal seam cement and, where required for strength, rivet seams and joints . D . Coat backside of flashing with 15 -mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, FS TT-C 494 , where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates including cementitious materials, wood or other absorbent materials ; or provide other permanent separation. E . Provide for thermal expansion of running metal work, by overlaps or expansion joints in fabricated work. Where required for watertight construction, provide hooked flanges filled with polyisobutylene mastic for 1 " embedment of flanges . Space joints at intervals of not more than 30' for aluminum. Conceal expansion provisions where possible. 1 . 02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS • A. Anchor work in place with non-corrosive fasteners, adhesives , setting compounds , tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements . Comply with recommendations of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " by SMACNA. B . Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric sealants , complying with FS SS - T-00227 - 00230 , or 001543 . C . Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances which could cause corrosion. D . Performance : Water-tight/weatherproofing performance of flashing is required . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A . Contractor to submit manufacturers catalog cuts or shop drawings of all flashing systems as called out on the drawings , for approval by the Architect . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 07600- 1 SECTION 07610 - METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels , related accessories , valleys, hips , ridges , eaves , corners, rakes and miscellaneous flashing and atttaching devices . All roofing assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured by one of the following : A . Berridge Manufacturing Company, Inc . Phone : 1 - 800-231 - 8127 Be AEICOR Metal Products, Inc . Phone : 1 - 800-432- 1802 C . AEP SPAN Phone : 1 - 800 - 527-2503 D . AMP , Atlanta Metal Products , Inc . Phone : 1 - 800 - 554- 1097 E . BUTLER Manufacturing Company Phone : 1416 -968 -2380 D . DELCOA Metal Roofing Manufacturer Phone : 1 - 800-375 -METAL 1 . 02 STORAGE AND HANDLING Store panels and materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped water. 1 . 03 WARRANTY Submit a written three 3 year warranty from installer and manufacturer against leaks , ' defective workmanship and materials . Submit manufacturer ' s written finish warranty that applies . Shall meet Underwriter' s Laboratory UL90 classification . Provide manufacturer' s standard twenty (20) year warranty against color change or chalking . 1 . 04 REFERENCES A. S . M .A. C .N . A . (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor' s National Association) . Be N . R. C . A . (The National Roofing Contractors Association) . Roofing and Waterproofing Manual , including construction details , and Handbook of Accepted Roofing Knowledge . Co Manufacturer ' s Construction Details Handbook. D . ASTM A- 653 -97 E . ASTM A-525 - 86 076104 F . ASTM A- 792- 86 G. ASTM B -209 H . ASTM B -370 J. Aluminum Association . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A . Installing contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels , anchoring details , joint details , trim, flashing and accessories . Show details of weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work. B . Installing contractor shall submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish . Co Installing contractor shall submit calculations with registered engineer seal , verifying roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressure imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 METAL ROOF AND/OR FASCIA PANELS : As manufactured by one of the approved Manufacturing Corporations . NOTE : Match existing panel color and profiles when connecting to existing buildings . 2 . 02 SHEET MATERIALS A . Panel configuration to be a structural standing seam, 12 " , 16 . 751 , or 20 " wide X 1 " or l - 1 /2 " high. Panel in color specified by Architect. Single Lengths, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer' s specifications . Steel shall be ASTM A653 -97 Grade C G90 , Coating ASTM 52546 Hot Dipped Galvanized, 24 Gauge core steel or galvalume ASTM A-792 - 86 , B . Aluminum shall be ASTM B -209 in . 032 inch or . 040 inch thickness with an H- 14 temper. C . Copper shall be ASTM B -370 coiled rolled in 16 or 20 ounce . NORTH COUNTY REGIONAL PARK : shall utilize RADIUS PANEL, in 12 " , or 17 . 5 , or 19 . 5 " wide profiles , with curved 1 " high snap on seams as manufactured by DELCOA or an approved equal . Color: Patina Green Kynar 500. Clips top be spaced as needed to meet local uplift requirements but not to exceed 24 inches on center. 07610 -2 2 . 03 FASTENING Fastening is to be installed at spacings per manufacturer ' s specifications at perimeters and field. Fasteners shall be a minimum of # 8 wafer head type sdrews compatable with the ' material being used, concealed at all times . If and exposed fastener must be used, it can only be a #44 pop rivet of the same material (or compatable) and finish as the roof panels . 2 . 04 FLASHINGS Flashings are to be of the same gauge, material and finish. ' 2 . 05 ACCESSORIES ' All accessories must be of compatible materials to the metal panels . 2 . 06 FINISH Finish shall be Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating applied on the Berridge Coil Coating Line with a top side film thickness of 0 . 70 to 0 . 90 mil over 0 . 25 to 0 . 31 mil prime coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 0 . 95 to 1 . 25 mil . Bottom side shall be coated with a primer with a dry film thickness of 0 . 25 mil . Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 finish supplier. PART 3 = INSTALLATION 3 . 01 Install metal roof/fascia systems per the manufacturer ' s specifications . 3 . 02 Installers shall be a certified installer, certified b the manufacturer of the e respective roofing/fascia systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect ' prior to installation. 3 . 03 Upon completion of the metal roof/fascia system installation, an inspection will be made r by a roofing/fascia system representative . Corrections to the installation of the roofing/fascia system, as deemed necessary by the roofing/fascia system representative , will be made at no additional cost to the Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued . ' * * * END OF SECTION* * * 07610 -3 L SECTION 07700 - FABRICATED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Types of roof specialties include the following : Spun aluminum roof vents . (Air flow in one direction) Plastic roof vents . (Air flow in one direction) Spun aluminum breather vent. (Air flow in two directions) Plastic roof breather vent. (Air flow in two directions) Pillow Block Pipestands (V-shaped cradel and U- shaped cradel) Be Sealants include installation are specified in Division 7 per roofing manufacturers installation instructions . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance requirements • Provide accessories in combination with structural roof assembly complying with U. L . class 90 resistance . Be Field Measurements : Verify size, location and placement of units prior to fabrication roof assembly complying with U. L . class 90 resistance . C . Applicator : An installer regularly engaged and properly equipped for application of roof and breather vents and pipestands in conjunction with single ply roofing systems . The licensed/approved installer shall furnish all labor, equipment, material and supervision for installing the complete roof assembly and specified vents and pipestands as one assembly and one source of responsibility . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : A . Product Data : submit manufacturer' s specifications ; certified test data, where applicable; and installation instructions for required products . Be Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of roofing accessories . Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners , joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements . 07700- 1 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS : A . Manufacturer : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of the following manufacturer, or an approved equal : Portals Plus , Inc. (Vents & Breathers) Miro Industries (Pipestands) 1400-768 -6978 2 . 02 MATERIALS 1A, Alumi-Vent / Alumi-Breather : Furnish and install Portals Plus Alumi-Vent or Alumi- Breather as manufactured by Portals Plus, Inc. , at a minimum spacing of one per 1000 sq. feet. B : The Alumi-Vent or breather shall be . 050 spun aluminum with a base flange diameter of 12 " and a height of no less than 7-3 /4 " . The stand pip will have a 4 - 1 /4 " base opening that will contain an insulating insert and a 2- 1 /2 " counter flashing rain cap that will be a locking, vandal proof type . C . The Plasti -Ven t or breather shall be made of block high-density polyethylene with a base flange diameter of 10- 7/ 16 " and a height of no less than 7-3 /4 " . The stand pip will have a 54 /2 " base opening with a 2 - 1 /2 " counter flashing rain cap that will be a locking, vandal proof type . ' D . Model 02- The pipe or conduit rests in a "V" shape cradle which allows movement of the pipe at narrow contact points . This unique design prevents damage to roof membrane by reducing and eliminating pipe movement friction. Model 02 has a load limit of up to 80 lbs . Per unit and can carry up to 2 " outside diameter pipe or conduit. Color : black. Units may be stacked up to 4 high. E . Model 24-R- The pipe or conduit rests in a "U" shape cradle on a nylon roller which is seated upon a Teflon lubricant. This unique design prevents damage to roof membrane by reducing and eliminating pipe movement friction. Model 24 - R has a load limit of up to 100 pounds and can carry up to a 4 1 /4 " outside diameter pipe . Color : black. Units can be stacked up to 4 high. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A . Coordinate location of vents per roof drawings . Coordinate delivery of such long- ' lead items to project site . 07700-2 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A . Locate and place units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. Clean and prepare at least 8 " in each direction from center of Vent/Breather. Cut hole in existing roof membrane and insulation, to expose roof deck. Fill hole with loose fill fiberglass insulation . Be Place Vent/Breather over hole . With single ply membrane attach vent to roof deck with manufacturers approved fasteners . Clean and prepare Vent/Breather per roofing manufacturer. Flash Vent/Breather with appropriate flashing material per Roofing Manufacturer' s specifications . C . Refer to -Division,-7 sections for sealants in connection with installations of roofing membranes . D . To install pillow blockipestands : 1 . Center the pipestand beneath the pipe so that the cradle allows the pipe to be squarely over and through the cradle of the pipestand. 2 . Set the pipe in the pipestand without dropping or causing undue impact. If desired, the installation of an additional sheet of roofing material or a traffic pad beneath the pipestand can be used . For built up roofs, all loose aggregate from an area 10 inches square should be removed from the area Directly beneath the pipestand . 3 . Adjust roller to evenly distribute load weight. 4 . Secure the pipe to the Model 02 and 24-R pipestands by using plumbers tape and two 1 /2 " # 10 screws in the guide holes at the top of each pipestand. NOTE : allow sufficient room between the pipe and plumbers tape to provide for free movement of the pipe without binding . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07700 -3 r ' SECTION 07710 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 1 . 01 GENERAL : ' A . The gutter and downspout system shall be an Industrial Series as manufactured by Southern Aluminum Finishing Company or an approved equal . B . Furnish and install a perimeter utter and downspout stem as located on the P g p Y drawings . The size shall be as per the details on the drawings . The gutter and downspouts shall be manufactured of aluminum, . 040 thickness , with a white E . S . P . finish. Co Gutters shall be tapered and notched to provide a 1 " telescoping lap joint. Gutters shall be pre-punched at 12 on center to provide for thermal movement. D . Provide manufacturer' s support brackets and interior straps . Brackets shall be a compatible material to gutter with matching finish and color. 2 . 01 INSTALLATION : A. Support Bracket Installation : Install support brackets at 30 " on center to allow a maximum 1 /8 " slope per 40 feet of gutter. Attach brackets with 2 " x # 10 stainless wood screws . B . Gutter Installation : Install gutter from left to right (roofside into support brackets . Lap each telescoping ' section a distance of 1 " seal and rivet at 2 " on center. Nail or screw rear of gutter with 1 - 1 /2 " stainless fasteners . C . Inside Strap Installation : Install straps at 30 " on center alternating with support brackets . Strap shall be hooked into leading edge of gutter and riveted at its rear side . Strap must not be fastened in a way that might restrain thermal movement. D . Expansion Joints : Install manufacturer' s standard elastomeric expansion joint assembly, at 40'-0 " intervals . iE. Miter Corners : Install manufacturer ' s welded miters at corners . ' F . End Caps/Terminations : Install manufacturer ' s end caps at all end terminations . ' G . Outlets : Field cut outlet hole in a neat workmanlike manner. Hole shall be located 1 " from ' backside of gutter. 07710- 1 H. Downspouts : Install downspouts at centers/locations per the drawings and building elevations . Utilize extruded or formed-closed type downspouts with thickness and finish as listed in this specification. Utilize the manufacturer ' s connecting sleeves at all joints . 1 . When a surface water shed collection system is called for on the drawings, provide kick-out elbows at the termination base of each downspout at 45 or 75 degrees and provide concrete splash blocks at each downspout to control erosion. 2 . When a subgrade water collection system is called for on the drawings , provide a direct tie-in to the underground roof drainage and collection system. J. Wall Brackets : Install manufacturer ' s wall brackets on downspouts at a maximum spacing of 5 ' . Secure to stucco with 1 . 5 " stainless expansion fasteners . Fasten downspouts with (4) 1 /8 " x 3 /8 " pop-rivets per bracket. K . Outlet Tubes : Provide stainless steel outlet tubes at connections of gutters to downspouts with % " flanges riveted in place with (4) 1 /8 " x 1 /4 " pop rivets . Hold downspouts 1 " off of the wall . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07710 -2 ' SECTION 07715 - DRIP FLASHING PART I " GENERAL : 1 . 01 The roof drip-edge and/or cap flashing for the building Perimeters shall be a sna - lock system as manufactured by one of the following companies : ' A . W. P . Hickman Company . ' B . Architectural Products Company . ' C . Metal-Era Roof Edge Systems . D . Southern Aluminum Finishing Company . 1 . 02 Provide a Manufacturers fifteen-year warranty. The roof edge system shall c an'Y a Factory Mutual I-90 approval . 1 . 03 Conform to profiles and sizes shown, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required . PART 2 - MATERIAL : A . When Aluminum is called out on Details : The fascia shall be a minimum of . 063 aluminum. The finish shall be clear anodized. Concealed splice plates shall match the color and finish. Provide galvanized spring ' clips . Provide fascia and clips in l Oft. lengths . Mitered corners shall be factory fabricated with welded joints . Coordinate with Roofing System Manufacturer' s installation instructions before starting installation of drip edge system. ' B . When Copper is called out pp on the Details : The fascia/cap flashing shall be bent to the configurations shown and be a minimum of 16 ounce copper. Concealed fasteners shall be non-corrosive, as recommended by the manufacturer of each material or system. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' A . Installation shall conform to manufacturers written instructions . The continuous spring clip shall be installed and fastened on the face at 12 inches on center with minimum 14 /4 in . galvanized steel roofing nails . Secure as required by roofing ' system manufacturer. The fascia with concealed joint cover shall be installed with a downward snapping action. Installing contractor shall carefully cut and fit smaller intermediate sections of fascia to fit the building dimensions . ' B . Provide for thermal expansion of running metal work, by overlaps or expansion joints in fabricated work. Where required for watertight construction, provide hooked flanges 07715- 1 filled with polyisobutylene mastic for 1 " embedment of flanges . Space joints at intervals of not more than 10 feet for aluminum and 10 feet for copper. Conceal expansion provisions where possible . C . Coat backside of flashing with 15 -mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, FS TT- C 494, where required to separate metals from corosive substrates including cementitious materials, wood or other absorbant materials ; or provide other permanent separation . 5. D . Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric sealants, complying with FS SST- 00227-00230 , or 001543 . E . Performance : Water-tight/weatherproofing performance of flashing is required. F . Provide for thermal expansion and building movements . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 07715-2 SECTION 07840 = FIRE STOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to work specified in this section . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Work, in general , includes furnishing and installing fire and smoke barrier penetration seals ' for openings in floors , walls, and other elements of construction. 1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTION Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections , including : Concrete Work Section 03010 Unit Masonry Section 04200 Joint Sealers Section 07900 Lathing & Stucco Section 09100 Gypsum Drywall Section 09250 Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Work Division 15 & 16 Sections 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Applicator Qualifications : One year experience installing UL classified fire stopping . ' B . Performance : Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating equal to that of ' the construction. 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS ' A . Shop Drawings 1 . Submit shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals in dictating proposed UL systems materials , anchorage , methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction. ' 2 . Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer approved modifications . 07840 = 1 B . Manufacturer' s Data: Submit copies of manufacturer ' s specifications , recommendations , installation instructions , and maintenance data for each type of material required . Include letter indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is recommended for the applications shown. C . Applicator' s Qualification Statement. List past projects indicating required experience. 1 . 06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer ' s clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, grade, and UL label where applicable . B . Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at site. C . Store materials in clean, dry ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abuse, and moisture . Follow manufacturer ' s instructions . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Existing Conditions 1 . Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding . 2 . Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. B . Environmental Requirements 1 . Furnish adequate ventilation of using solvent. 2 . Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. 3 . Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame . 4 . Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by fire stopping materials . 1 . 08 GUARANTEE Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance , 07840-2 ' migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by the material for the exposure indicated . The guarantee period shall be one year from date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products which may be incorporated in the work include but not limited to , the following : 1 . "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp . 2 . "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25 % Electrical Products Div./3M 3 . Flame Stop , Inc . 4 . Rectorseal ' s Bio -Fireshield 5 . Allied Gold A-1000 2 . 02 MATERIALS A . Provide materials classified by UL to provide Fire Barrier equal to time rating of ' construction being penetrated. B . Provide asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes and have been tested in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E- 814 . PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 PREPARATION ' Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil , loose materials, rust or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required ' fire resistance . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION ' A . Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Building Materials Directory and in accordance with manufacturer ' s instruction . ' B . Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. ' C . Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than 4 inches in width and subject to traffic or loading , install fire stopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. ' D . Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic . 07840-3 3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas . Be Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities . C . Perform under this section patching and repairing of fire stopping caused by cutting or penetration by other trades . 3 . 04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A . Clean up spills of liquid components . Be Neatly cut and trim materials as required . C . Remove equipment, materials and debris , leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. 3 . 05 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONDITIONS Requiring UL approved classification, may include but are not limited to : A . Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Round Opening Be Insulated Metal Pipe Through Round Opening C . Metal Pipes or Conduits Through Large Opening D . Busway Through Rectangular Opening E . Cables Through Opening F . Cable Tray G. Blank Opening H . Non-metallic (plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Opening I . Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall J. Non-metallic (plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall K. Cables Through Gypsum Board Wall L . Insulated Metal Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall M. Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Construction N . Non-metallic (plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Construction O . Cables Through Wood Construction P . Duct Opening Flange Seals * * * END OF SECTION * * * 07840-4 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 MATERIALS ' A . Colors : Manufacturer' s standard best-performance color; except "black" where exposed to view, unless another color is indicated or selected by Architect. Be Compatibility : Provide materials carefully selected for compatibility with each other and with substrates in each joint system ; conform with manufacturer. ' Co General Characteristics : Provide type, grade, class, hardness and similar characteristics of material as indicated or, where not indicated, to comply with ' manufacturer' s recommendations relative to exposures , traffic, weather conditions and other factors of the joint system for the best possible overall performance . Provide foam backing rod, size and location as per Construction Details . D . Exterior Sealant : 1 , W. R. Grace & Company - "Hornflex Two -Component" 2 . Products Research & Chemical - "Rubber Caulk 250 Sealant" 3 . Tremco Manufacturing - "Lasto Meric" ' 4 . Sonneborne (ChemRex Inc , ) 5 , G.E . Silicones 6 . Pecora Corporation E . Interior Sealant: ' 1 . W. R. Grace & Company - "Hornflex One-Component" 2 . Tremco Manufacturing - "Mono" 3 . Products Research & Chemical - "RC Rubber Caulk 7000 " ' 4 . Sonneborne (ChemRex Inc . ) 5 , G . E. Silicones ' 6 . Pecora Corporation F . Colors : ' To match adjacent surface colors . ' PART 2 - INSTALLATION : 2 . 01 Clean joint surfaces and prime or seal as recommended by sealant manufacturer. ' 2 . 02 Support sealant from back with construction as shown, or with joint filler. 07900- 1 2 . 03 Install sealants to size and shape shown or, if not shown, with slightly concave surface as follows . 2 . 04 Bond or "weld" ends of gasket members to form a continuous, uninterrupted seal ; miter corners or use molded corner units . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 07900-2 DIVISION 8 . DOORS , WINDOWS AND GLASS SECTION 08100 = HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ' A . Wood Doors Section 08200 B . Finish Hardware Section 08700 CO Painting Section 09900 ' 1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA Hollow Metal Work shall be manufactured by one of the following or equal : A. Ceco Corporation B . Steelcraft C . Firedoor Corporation of Florida D . Quality Engineered Products Co . , Inc . , Tampa, FL E . Republic Steel Doors & Frames , Pembroke Park, FL F . Amweld Building Products , Inc . G. Curries ' 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS : SHOP DRAWINGS ' A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each type of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details , supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames . B . Show glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors . ' 1 . 04 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery : Deliver products to thejob site in their original unopened containers or wrappings clearly labeled with the manufacturer' s name and brand designation, door schedule number, referenced specification number, type , class and rating as applicable . B . Storage : ' Store products in an approved dry area; protected from contact with soil and from exposure to the elements . Keep products dry at all times . Co Handling : Handle products in a manner that will prevent breakage and damage to products . 08100- 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A . Frames (Door) 1 . Exterior: 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel . Exterior: 14 gauge A-60 gals. coated bonderized sheet steel, over 6 '-0 " in width. 2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel . Interior: over 4'-0 : in width, 14 gauge . B . Hardware Reinforcement (Frames) - Steel 1 . Hinges : 7 gauge by 1 - 1 /2 " x 10 " 2 . Closers and holders : 12 gauge by 16 " 3 , Strikes : 12 gauge by 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 " , or 14 gauge drawn box C . Frames (Window) 1 . Exterior : 14 gauge A- 60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel 2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel D . Doors 1 . Exterior: Face sheets 16 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100 Grade III , Model 2 , full flush, hollow metal, seamless construction. Closed top and bottom edges flush with face sheets . Extra heavy duty. 2 . Interior : Face sheets 16 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100 Grade III, Model 3 , full flush, hollow metal , seamless construction. Closed top and bottom edged flush with face sheets . 3 . Internal Stiffeners : Currie 707 with polystyrene core or approved equal . 4 . Sound Deadening : Type standard with the manufacturer. 08100-2 ' S . Hardware Reinforcement - Steel : a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " x 10 " b . Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 5 " x 12 " c . Locks : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 " d. Push/pull plates : 16 ga. x 14 " x 14 " e. Panic bars : 3 " x 8 " and 4 " x 24 " (24 ga.) f. Glazing and louver beads : 18 ga. ' 6 . Clips, Anchors, Bolts, Screws and Rivets : Steel, types standard with the manufacturer. ' 7 . Metallic filler : FS TT-F-322 ' 8 . Shop Primer: Baked-on rust-inhibitive . ASTM - B117 Federal Specification TT-P- 636 ' 9 . Field Painting : See Section 09900 2 . 02 FABRICATION ' A . Frames 1 . Formed to profile as shown on drawings, constructed with square corners , and ' free of defects , warps or buckle . 2 . Welded-type for concrete , masonry construction and metal stud construction. ' 3 . Corners and connections welded with exposed welds ground flush and smooth. ' 4 . Reinforcement : ' a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " x 10 " b . Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 16 " C , Strike : 12 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 " ; or 14 ga. drawn box 5 . Frames punched to receive rubber silencers , three each door on lock side and two at head of double doors . ' 6 . Provide removable spreaders attached to bottom of door frames , to insure correct alignment during shipping and installation. ' 7 . At angle type thresholds , notch frames and extend exterior portion down to lower floor level . ' 08100-3 8 . Provide sheet metal grout guards in frames at all lock bolts and tapped hardware locations . 9 . Do not fill frames with mortar unless specifically called out on the drawings . 10 . Do not fill mullions , including removable mullions, with mortar unless specifically called out on the drawings . 11 . Silencers shall be installed in frames after doors are installed and painting is completed. B . Anchors 1 , Provide 16 gauge angle shaped floor slips welded to jambs and punched for two 3/8 " diameter bolts each. 2 . Provide adjustable length clip angles as required. 3 . Jamb Anchors a. Frames set in masonry : For doors not more than 7 ft. High, provide not less than three 10 " long adjustable 14 gauge corrugated galvanized masonry anchors for each - jamb over 7 feet, not less than 4 for each jamb . b . Frames set against previously placed masonry or concrete : For doors not more than 7 feet high, by approval of Owner ' s representative only punch each frame jamb and dimple countersink for not less that three 3 /8 " diameter flat head screws . For doors over 7 feet high, punch less that four 3/8 " diameter flat head screws . Provide pipe sleeves with spacers welded into each jamb at each fastening location. Provide 3 /8 " diameter galvanized steel flat head screws with approved expansion anchors or toggles as required . After installing flat head screws fill head of countersink screw with body filler then sand flush with frame . C , Frames set in metal stud partitions : Provide 16 gauge metal jamb anchor clips welded in each jamb at following locations : One at top, one 12 " down from top and 24 " o. c , for remainder of jamb frames . C . Doors 1 . Internal stiffeners spaced at not over 6 " o . c . 08100-4 2 . Face sheets spot welded to internal stiffeners at not over 5 " apart and in a manner that will prevent the welds from showing on the exposed side of face sheets . ' 3 . Hardware reinforcement welded in place as required for hardware application. ' (See Section 2 . 02) . 4 . Sound deadening : ' Interior surfaces treated with a sound deadening material to eliminate metallic ring . ' S . Provide 16 gauge pre-bonderized zinc coated steel perimeter channels . Bevel stile edges 1 /8 " in 2 " . 6 . Spot-weld channels to face sheets 3 " o . c. 7 . Close tops of all exterior out swinging doors flush with steel channels . Close flush and seal watertight. 8 . Grind welds off smooth and flush. ' 9 . Fold edge construction not acceptable . g p ' 10 . At angle type thresholds, extend height of door by one inch over height indicated in Door Schedule . ' D . Doors With Glass Panels 1 . Openings formed so that no bead is required on outside face of doors . 2 . Bead provided on both faces of doors and secured with oval head countersink ' screws on the inside face . E . Doors with Louvers ' 1 . Exterior: Provide 16 gauge electro zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames and weatherproof "Z" type louvers full thickness of door welded into doors . 2 . Interior: ' Provide 18 gauge elector zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames and inverted "Y" type louvers full thickness of door, welded into doors . 3 . Provide special size and shape louvers as shown . 4 . Louver Door Security Panels : Woven wire mesh. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors . 08100-5 F . Screens Where louvers are indicated on exterior doors provide 18 x 14 . 011 " alloy number 3 02/3 04 stainless steel wire cloth secured in removable . 015 inch stainless steel alloy number 302/304 roll-formed frames . Mount screens on interior of doors with stainless steel screws . G . Fire Door Assemblies 1 . Fire door assemblies, including frames and hardware, shall meet fire test and rating requirements in accordance with the procedure of Underwriters Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories . Provide appropriate labels on doors and frame . 2 . Fabrication and assembly requirements necessary to obtain labels will take precedence over requirements shown or specified, except where requirements shown or specified exceed the sizes or gauges required for labeling . 3 . Required ratings are as shown on drawings . H. Finish Hardware Coordination Metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the factory for application of finish hardware at the job site . Templates are to be supplied by the finish hardware manufacturer to assure accurate preparation of doors and frames in accordance with the Hardware Schedule . 1 , Shop Painting 1 . Imperfections spot glazed with metallic filler and sand smooth. 2 . Doors and frames to be cleaned thoroughly in preparation to receive shop painting . 3 . After cleaning and treating, apply a coat of specified baked- on-rust-inhibitive primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A. General : L Install new doors and frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly clean and prime prior to installation. 08100-6 ' 2 . Install new window frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly clean and prime prior to installation. ' 3 . Prior to applying finish paint, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall have any rust removed, sanded smooth and touched up with same primer as applied at shop . ' 4 . Field-paint doors and frames s as indicated in Section 09900 PAINTING . ' B . Deliver the work, ready to set up and erect in place as rapidly as the general construction work permits . Set work in place in accordance with approved setting drawings, in plumb and level positions, strongly secured against displacement and with built- in anchors . In masonry construction, set frames in advance of masonry work. C . Fastening : Secure each frame floor clip to concrete floor with two 3 /8 " diameter cadmium plated bolts set in drilled tamp-ins or self-drilling concrete anchors . Install jamb anchors as called for in 2/02 , B . 3 . Masonry Contractor to mud in frame and anchor solid with mortar with block walls . D . Bracing : Brace frame jambs and heads receiving poured concrete adequately to resist deflection : brace frames in masonry walls and partitions adequately so the walls and partitions may be erected against same . E . Install doors after masonry work and plastering have been completed and accurately fit and adjust doors to work properly. Application finish hardware and door installation is specified in Division 6 . ' 3 . 02 CLEAN-UP A . Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces of doors and frames by the procedure recommended by the Door Manufacturer. ' B . Clean up all rubbish and debris caused by this work and remove from the site . Leave areas surrounding openings in a broom-clean condition. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 08100-7 SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Section 08100 B . Finish Hardware Section 08700 D . Finish Carpentry Section 06200 E . Painting Section 09900 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Products of the following manufacturers or equal are acceptable : A. Weyerhaeuser Company B . Eggers Industries , Architectural Door Division C . Ipik Door Co . , Inc. D . VT Industries, Inc . , Holstein, Iowa E. Southwood Door, A Division of OSHKOSH 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data. B . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data. C . Specific Product Warranty • Submit written agreement on door manufacturer' s standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers , or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWL 11 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On- Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer' s instructions , and as otherwise indicated . B . Package doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer ' s standard method . 08200-1 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 SOLID CORE DOORS ' A . 20 Minute at interior locations and offices as indicated on plans . 1 hour label at ' interior 1 Hour rated fire wall assemblies and 1 % hour label at 2 hour rated wall assembly. B . Standard : Meet or exceed NWMA Industry Standard I . S . 1 -78 Series and Architectural ! woodwork Institute Type SLC and FD . ' C . Veneer: paint grade birch. D . Edge Band : Per manufacturers procedures . E . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures . F. Core : Staved hardwood lumber blocks bonded under pressure with 100% glue coverage ; mineral core at label doors . G. Glue: Type I (face assembly) and type II (core assembly) . H . Lights and Louvers : Cut to size as indicated on drawings . Provide type 2 stops for lights . I . Guarantee : 10 Years , interior use only . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 , 01 INSPECTION A. Verify that door frames are of type required for the door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors . B . Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors . C . Do not remove labels from rated doors or cover with paint. ' 3 . 02 INSTALLATION ' A. Fitting and machininiz : 1 . Fit doors for width by planing ; for height by sawing . a. ''/z " from bottom (3 / 16 over threshold, saddle or carpet) ' b . 1 /8 " maximum frame top and sides . 08200-2 c . Bevel lock and hinge edges 1 /8 " to 1 /211 . 2 . Machine doors for hardware . 3 . Cut light and louver openings in door not exceeding maximum 40% of height and 5 " from door edge . 4 . Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of paint before final hanging . B . Installation of Doors : Install in accordance with requirements of NWMA Standard Door Guarantee, and manufacturer ' s instructions . C . Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No . 80 . D . Finishing * Door shall be field painted as indicated in Section 09900, PAINTING. 3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A . Replace or re-hang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely . B . Replace doors damaged during the construction period or that show glue spots . C . Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. D . Replace doors that are warped and that pull away from door stops . E . Adjust all pocket doors so that door faces do not rub jambs or frames, and the doors hang plumb in the openings . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 08200-3 SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions , and Division 1 Specification Sections all apply to work in this section. ' 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : LOCATION A. Extent of Overhead Coiling Service Doors is shown on drawings . Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains , guides , counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories . B . Field painting is specified in Division 9 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer : Coiling doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of rolling doors . Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the last five years . B . Installer : Installation of rolling doors shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. ' C . Insert and Anchorages : Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units . Provide setting drawings, templates , instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devises . Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay . ' D . See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for installation of inserts and anchorage devices . E . Single - Source Responsibility : Provide doors, guides , motors , and related primary components from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary ' components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS ' A . Product Data: Submit manufacturer ' s product data, roughing-in diagrams , and installation 08330 - 1 i instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling door. Provide operating instructions and maintenance information. B . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details or framing members , required clearances , anchors , and accessories . Include relationship with adjacent materials . 1 . 05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages . Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations . Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following : Overhead Door Company The Cookson Company Cornell Iron Work, Inc. Atlas Door Company Alpine Overhead Doors , Inc . Raynor Southwestern Rolling Steel Doors Wayne Dalton Corp . Windsor Door Roll-lite Overhead Doors 2 . 02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Trade Reference : 610 Series Service Doors by Overhead Door Corporation . B . Curtain : Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified below. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. 1 . Curved profile type C- 187 for doors up to 15 '-4 " wide, fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel . (If aluminum is specified use 18 gauge) . 2 . Curved profile type C-275 for doors between 15 '4 " and 18 '-4 " wide, fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel . (If aluminum is specified use 16 gauge) . Or 1 . Flat profile type F-265 for doors up to 18 '-4 " wide , fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel . (If aluminum is specified use 18 gauge) . 08330-2 ' Co Finish (as called out on the drawings) and per the following : 1 . If Galvanized Steel : Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 525 and rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing, 0 . 2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and two coats field applied latex enamel top coat. Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. ' 2 . If Stainless Steel : Slats and hood1 h e hoodshall stainless steel with No . 4 satin finish. 3 . If Aluminum : Slats and hood shall be aluminum with mill finish. ' D . Color : Gray polyester factory top coat. Final field applied coating finish in latex enamel paint, color as selected by the Architect. rE. Windload Design : Minimum of 20 PSF . Doors must meet or exceed the local codes for hurricane protection. Door manufacturer shall insure local code requirements have been satisfied. F . Weatherseals : Vinyl bottom seal . G . Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum up to 15' -4 " wide . Two galvanized steel angles over 15 '-4 " wide . H . Guides : Roll-formed steel shapes attached to continuous steel wall angle as standard for doors up to 15 '-4 " wide . Three structural steel angles with minimum thickness of 3 / 16" for doors over 15 ' 4 " wide . J . Brackets : Hot rolled galvanized steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood . ' K . Counterbalance : Helical torsions spring e designed f p gtyp g or standard 50 , 000 cycle ' life design. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel , supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0 . 03 " per foot of span . Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel . ' L . Hood : Galvanized steel , 24 gauge hood with intermediate supports as required. ' M . Manual Operation : Provide chain hoist for all doors . N . Locking : Interior bottom bar slide bolt. Chain keeper locks for chain hoist ' operation. P . Wall Mounting Condition : Face of wall mounting and in accordance with the Architectural Details provided on the plans . 08330-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates , supports , and other conditions under which this work is to be performed . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected . 3 .02 INSTALLATION A . Strictly comply with manufacturer' s installation instructions and recommendations . Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance . Be Instruct Owner 's personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. 3 . 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A . Test coiling doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. Be Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage . Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 08330 -4 ' SECTION 08332 - PUSH-UP COUNTER FIRE DOOR PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. All Rolling Counter Fire Doors shall be Series FD10 as manufactured by The Cookson ' Company, Phoenix, Arizona, or an approved equal manufacturer listed below. Furnished materials shall include all curtains, bottom bars , guides , brackets, hoods , ' operating mechanisms and any special features . 1 . The Cookson Company 2 . Peelle 3 . Overhead Door Corporation 4 . Raynor 5 . Southwestern ' 6 . Wayne Daulton 7 , McKeon Rolling Steel Door Co . 8 . Atlas B . Work not to be included by The Cookson Company includes design of, material for, and preparation of door openings but not limited to structural or miscellaneous iron work, metal or wood trim, access panels, finish painting, electrical wiring, conduit and disconnect switches . r1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . All rolling counter fire doors shall be constructed in accordance with testing agency requirements and shall bear a fire rating as called out on the drawings . Ratings shall be one or more of the following : 1 . 3 - hour ' 2 . 1 % - hour 3 . 3 /4 - hour ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS ' A . The door curtain shall be constructed of interconnected strip stainless steel slats . The curtain shall be constructed of 22 gauge No . 10 ( 1 1 /4 " high by 3 /8 " deep) slats as designated by The Cookson Company . The finish on the door curtain shall be #4 . ' B . The bottom bar shall be constructed of tubular stainless steel measuring g Y 2 " high b 1 1 /4 " deep . The finish on the bottom rail shall be #4 . C . Theuides shall be constructed d of box sections of stainless steel . The finish on the ' guides shall be #4 . D . The brackets shall be constructed of 11 gauge steel plate and shall receive one ( 1 ) coat ' of bronze paint . 08332- 1 E . The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 4 " in diameter. Oil tempered torsion springs shall be capable of correctly counter balancing the weight of the curtain and shall have both a main and auxiliary spring . The barrel shall be designed to limit maximum deflection to . 03 " per foot of opening width. The barrel shall receive one ( 1 ) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint. F . The hood shall be fabricated from 24 gauge stainless steel and shall be formed to fit the square brackets . The finish on the hood shall be #4 . G. The counter fire door shall include the Firestop Fire Rated Countertop as manufactured by The Cookson Company and shall include the following : 1 . The Firestop countertop shall be a uniform 1 5/8 " thick throughout and shall be labeled for 1 '/z hour on interior openings . 2 . The top and edge surfaces shall be covered with black plastic laminate as manufactured by one of the following : (Formica, Nevamar or Wilsonart) . 3 . Any notching of the countertop shall be performed by the installing distributor. 2 . 02 OPERATION A. All push-up operated counter fire doors shall have an automatic closing device and governor to control the downward speed of the door which shall become operational upon the fusing of a 160 degree fusible link. The door shall have an average closing speed of not less than six (6) inches per second and not more than twenty-four (24) inches per second as indicated in NFPA Bulletin 80 . Once the door has closed, it should be able to be reset by one person on one side of the door only . B . Push-up operated doors shall open and close with a maximum of 30 pounds of effort utilizing finger lifts in the bottom bar. This type of operation should not be used for doors over 8 feet wide . 2 . 03 LOCKING MECHANISMS A . The push-up doors shall be secured by means of a concealed sliding bolt deadlock in the bottom bar operated by a thumbturn . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A . All Cookson Rolling Counter Fire Doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 80 by an authorized Cookson Distributor. 08332 -2 r 3 . 02 WARRANTY ' A . All Cookson Rolling Counter Fire Doors shall be warranted fora period of twelve ( 12) months from the time of shipment against defects in workmanship and materials . r * * *END OF SECTION * * * 1 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r 08332-3 SECTION 08350 - ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION Related Work Specified Elsewhere A . Miscellaneous Metal Section 05500 B . Rough Carpentry Section 06100 Co Finish Carpentry Section 06200 D . Lay in Panel Ceilings Section 09510 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. This Specification is based on products as manufactured by Modernfold Inc . B . Other acceptable manufacturers are : 1 . Hufcor 2 , Won-Dor Corp . 3 . Panelfold Inc . Co Other manufacturers may propose their products for consideration in accordance with Contract Conditions . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A . Shop Drawings : Indicate dimensions, construction, cover pattern, head and jamb conditions, stacking space, hardware and location . Provide plan 1 /4 " scale elevation of doors at 1 /4 " scale section at ceiling . B . Samples : Submit full range of samples for color and texture selection. Co Certificates : 1 . Fire hazard classification of finished product by an acceptable testing organization, indicating flame spread. 2 . Sound resistance : Signed by independent laboratory test results . 1 . 05 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 08350 - 1 A. Deliver products in manufacturers original unopened packages with labels legible and intact. Be Identify manufacturer, brand name, and model, size finish, location of installation . C . Store in unopened packages in protected dry area above ground or floor to prevent ' damage from environmental and construction operations . ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MODERNFOLD ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS ' A. Type : Soundmaster SM8 Be Finish 1 . Supported vinyl fabric - 36 oz. per lineal yard, 54 " wide . 2 . Flame spread classification : Class A ASTM E 84 having flame spread of 0- 25 . 3 . Sound Resistance : Minimum 38 STC ASTM E90- 70 . 4 . Fabric colors selected from manufacturers standard colors . ' C . Panel Construction l . . Steel hinge plates welded to . 187 " (5) diameter vertical steel rods . Single row at bottom, intermediate rows approximately 42 " on center, single row at ' top . 2 . Sound Insulation - 24 gauge V-grooved steel panels & heavy vinyl flame ' ' resistant acoustical membrane . 2 . 02 TRACK AND TROLLEY ASSEMBLY ' A . Track - No . 6 recessed continuous ` C ' channel with ceiling guard . Provide a sample of the track with the Shop Drawings . Be Hanger Assemblies : Designed to support weight of door and allow smooth folding operation ; heavy duty . ' C . Aluminum or steel track accessories for recessed installation . ' D . Trolleys : Nylon-tired ball bearing . 2 . 03 FINISH HARDWARE 08350-2 A. Pull handle of die cast zinc to include thumb release latch mechanism and retracting hook bolt for final closure . Be Finish : Sating Chrome 2 . 04 LEAD AND BACK POST A . 16 gauge steel . Be Provide fixed jambs on 11 classroom doors . 2 . 05 ACCESSORIES A . Sound Seals : Pair of flexible sealing sweep strips at top and bottom . Be Ceiling Guard : Formed steel 22 gauge factory prime coated . C . Anchor jamb molding plumb and in alignment with track and door. D . Hang door in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions . E. Adjust to provide for smooth operation without binding . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 08350-3 ' SECTION 08400 we ENTRANCE STOREFRONT DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL ' A. All entrances stem materials are to be v provided by one manufacturer. Entrances shall be wide OR medium stile doors as detailed on the architectural drawings and as tmanufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Co . All adjacent framing, sidelites and fixed lites shall be of system shown, or approved equal . ' PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE : See Door Schedule for Sizes and manufacturers) A . Wide Stile doors when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with 5 " ' stiled and 5 " top rail and 7- 1 /2 " bottom rail . Corners shall have reinforcing plates , extruded anti-twist guides with mortise joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated steel tension rods . B . Medium Stile doors when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with ' 3 - 1 /2 " stiles and a 34 /2 " top rail and 5 " bottom rail . Corners shall have reinforcing plates, extruded anti twist guides with mortise joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated steel tension rods . C . Glazina beads shall be an integral a g sash, non removal from the exterior with vinyl bulb inserts for dry glazing . Glazing beads for insulated glass are available . ' D . All aluminum components shall be of 6063 alloy temper.with T- 5 p r. All screws shall be of plated steel . ' PART 3 - HARDWARE ' A. Arch ' s standard hardware shall consist of AR- 800 pull handles and H-2 push bars with H- 15 butt hinges or H-26 offset pivots , and the H- 18 maximum security short or long throw deadlock. B . H-25 flush bolts are standard in the inactive leaf of pairs . ' C . Please be advised that the door manufacturer should provide all entrance hardware . Arch can provide hardware from virtually all hardware manufacturers . In the event ' that hardware is to be provided by others, such hardware must be received by Arch before fabrication can begin. ' PART 5 - FINISH A. All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes . ' Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options : ' 08400-1 1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment. Color shall be one of the following and per the door schedule on the plans : a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44 b) Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40 c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 d) Black AA M12 C22 A44 2 . Powder coated material when called out on the door schedule, shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following : a) ARCHKOTE 1000- 1 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR EXCEEDS AAMA 603 . 8 - 85 b) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85 3 . Arch Aluminum maintains 11 colors of powder in stock for shipment within two to three weeks . 4 . Over 170 standard colors are available from the manufacturer with the ability to custom match any color or finish . 5 . The option and color selected for this project is : RAL 6027, 6 year warranty. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 08400-2 SECTION 08410 - FLUSH GLAZE STOREFRONT WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL ' A . Store front framing shall be as detailed on the Architectural drawings and as manufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Company . ' PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS A . The Framing System shall have a face dimension of 1 -3 /4 " and a depth of 4 " for both vertical and horizontal members, with no projecting glass stops . All sections shall be of extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and a T5 temper. Glazing Gaskets shall be of EPDM or pvc extrusions . Assembly screws shall be of plated steel . Glass shall have a minimum bite of 5/ 16 on the perimeter. Glass type shall be as defined on the window schedule . PART 3 - FINISH A . All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes . Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options : 1 . Anodized material : shall beiven a caustic etch followed b g y an anodic oxide treatment. Color shall be : ' a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44 b) Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40 c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 d) Black AA M12 C22 A44 2 . Powder coated material shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with ' one of the following : a) ARCHKOTE 6000 - 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85 ' b) TIGER DRYLAC - SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY B . The option and color selected for this project is : RAL 6027, 6 year waranty. ' PART 4 - ERECTION ' A. The Flush Glazed store front system specified shall be installed, in properly prepared openings , level , plumb and in alignment and consistent with acceptable erection techniques and practices . Frames shall be secured to the walls/jambs with approved ' fasteners at 12 " on center. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 084104 DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 0004 G 00NTY I�jAltL4 ' 1 . 01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes : Finish Hardware Aluminum Door Hardware Thresholds key Cabinet Electro-Mechanical Devices 1 . Furnish, deliver and install the proper finish hardware necessary for all doors specified herein as enumerated in the "set numbers" and as required by actual conditions in the building. The hard- ivare shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and all other devices necessary for the proper application of the hardware. B . Related Sections : 1 . Metal Doors and Frames 2 . Wood Doors 3 . Roil -Up Doors 4 . Aluminum Entrances 5 . Toilet Room Accessories 6 . Toilet Partition Hardware 7. Metal Casework Hardware 8 . Electrical 1 . 02 REFERENCES : A. The hardware supplier is responsible for coordination of all Local, State and Federal Codes. Including NFPA 101 , Life Safety Code; NFPA 80, Fire Door & Window Code; ANSI A117. 1 ; Florida Accessibil- ity Code and South Florida Hurricane Code. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS : A. General Requirements : All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 . B . Schedules : Submit six (6) copies of the complete hardware schedule identifying each item by set, location, manufacturers name and product number to the general contractor for the architects approval. Proposal must read, "In accordance with plans and specifications", and is not to be qualified in any manner. C. Product Data : Submit two (2 ) copies of manufacturers catalog cuts and/or product data sheets with the completed hardware schedule. D. Samples : Samples, if requested for review by the architect, shall be submitted complete with manufacturers name, model number, finish and product data. SECTION 08710-01 E . Templates : ' Furnish templates and approved hardware schedules to each related manufacturer of equipment which requires same for fabrication of their material. F. Keying Schedule: ' Keying shall be as directed by the owners representative or architect and keyed into existing systems using proper keyways. Refer to DHI Manual "Keying Systems and Nomenclature" for proper symbols and sequencing. ' G. Wiring Diagrams : Furnish manufacturers complete wiring diagrams and all other electrical information where and ' when required. H. Operations & Maintenance Data : At the completion of the project furnish to the owner, two (2) copies of an owners operation and ' maintenance manual . This manual shall consist of the following: 1 - Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware. 2 - Catalog cuts for each product. 3 - Parts list for each product. 4 - Name and phone number of the local representative of each manufacturer. 5 - Copy of the final approved hardware and keying schedules. 6 - Copies of manufacturers warranties and/or guarantees. ' 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Substitutions : Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers that are similar in design and equal in function and quality may be accepted upon prior approval of the architect. Provided required data and physical samples are ' submitted to the architect at least ten ( 10) days prior to the projects bid date. B . SUPPLIER QUALIFICATION: ' The hardware supplier must be located within a reasonable distance to the projects vicinity and have been in business for a period of not less than two (2) years. The supplier must have a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) in his employ. The consultant shall be available to the ' architect, general contractor and owner during the course of the work. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING : ' A. Marking and Packing: Hardware shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturers original packaging, marked to cor- respond with the approved hardware schedule. ' B . Delivery : All hardware shall be delivered, transportation charges prepaid, to the job site. Except for those items of hardware necessary to be shipped, as directed, to fabricators for factory installation . ' C. Storage : A locked storage area for finish hardware shall be provided, by the contractor, for the protection of the material and finishes. . The area shall be kept clean, dry and locked at all times. 1 . 06 WARRANTY: A. Guarantee : The hardware supplier shall provide a written guarantee that all materials furnished under this section will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one ( 1 ) year from ' date of final inspection. Furnish a ten ( 10) year warranty on all door closers. ' SECTION 08710-02 B . Inspection : The hardware supplier shall make no less than two (2 ) inspections during the installation phase to insure the hardware is being installed as scheduled. These inspections will be as determined by the architect. The hardware supplier shall also make a final inspection following completion of the building and prior to owner taking possession. 1 .07 MAINTENANCE : A. Maintenance Service : Furnish copies of any and all maintenance contracts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS : 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS : Pioduct numbers listed in the following specification are taken from the catalogs of these approved manufacturers : (H) Hagar Hinge Co. St. Louis, Mo. (V) Von Duprin Indianapolis, IN. (S) Schlage Lock Co. San Francisco, CA. (L) L. C . N . Door Closer Princeton, IL (G) Glynn-Johnson Door Controls Indianapolis, IN (R) Rockwood Mfg. Co. Rockwood, Pa. (P) Pemko Mfg. Memphis, TN (S) Stanley New Britain, Ct. 2 . 02 MATERIALS : A. Screws and Fasteners : 1 . Provide concealed fasteners where ever possible. 2 . Use of self-tapping or sheet metal screws is prohibited, except for the application of flush mounted protective plates. 3 . Finishes to match that of hardware being fastened. 4 . Door closers and exit devices to be installed on wood or composite doors fire doors shall be attached with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). 5 . Fasteners exposed to the weather shall be of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel. B . Hinges : 1 . The width of all hinges shall be sufficient to clear all trim. 2 . Furnish one ( 1 ) pair of hinges for all doors up to 5 ' 0" high. Furnish one ( 1 ) additional hinge for every additional 30 inches, or fraction thereof, of door height. 3 . Exterior lunges shall be of non-ferrous material. 4 . All exterior out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP) . 5 . All labeled doors shall be furnished with stainless steel or steel ball bearing hinges . 6 . Doors 1 -3/4" thick and up to 36" wide shall be furnished with 44 /2" standard weight hinges . Doors 1 -3/4" thick and over 36" wide shall be furnished with 5 " standard weight hinges unless other wise specified in the hardware sets. . C. Exit Devices: 1 . All exit devices shallbe Von Duprin 98 series. 2 . Exit device trim shall match lock trim in appearance and quality. Trim is to be provided for both the active and inactive leafs. 3 . Furnish Von Duprin 994L break-a-way lever handle trim. 4 . All labeled openings with fire exit hardware must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) requirements . D. Locks & Lock Trim : 1 . All locks and latches shall be Schlage Lock Co. "D" series . SECTION 08710 -03 2. Lock trim shall be Schlage Rhodes design lever handles. 3 . All levers shall conform to Florida State accessibility requirements. t4 . All locks to be furnishes with wrought box strikes. E. Flush Bolts : ' 1 . Furnish flush bolts in pairs (top and bottom of door) . 2 . Furnish minimum 12 inch length for all rods, except top rod which must be furnished in a length sufficient to locate the flush bolt operating lever no more than 72 " above finished floor. ' 3 . Provide dust proof strikes for bottom bolts, except on doors having metal thresholds . F. Coordinators : 1 . Coordinators should be furnished on pairs of doors with overlapping astragals. ' 2 . Special mounting brackets or stop mounted coordinators shall be furnished when necessary. G. Door Closers : ' 1 . All door closers shall be L. C.N. 4041 . 2 . Closers shall be fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion with high strength cast iron cylinders. 3 . Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal adjustment for temperatures from 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) to -30 degrees F (-35 degrees Q . ' 4 . Hydraulic regulation shall be tamper proof, non-critical valves, adjustable only with a hex wrench. Closers shall have separate adjustment valves for latch speed, general speed and back check. t 5 . Spring power of closers shall be adjustable from size 1 through size 5 . 6. All closers shall have a ten ( 10) year warranty. 7. Parallel arm closer shall be furnished on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces ' and shall be mounted to permit 180 degree swing whenever conditions permit. 8 . All parallel arm closers shall have solid forged main and fore anus . All regular and top jamb mounted closers shall have solid forged main arms and adjustable fore arms. 9 . All doors shall meet the Florida accessibility opening force requirements of 8 . 5 pounds for ' exterior doors and 5 pounds for interior doors. (Note: Life Safety (NFPA) 101 and Fire Safety (NFPA) 80 supercedes the Florida accessibility requirement. ) ' H. Push Plates : 1 . Push Plates to be 34/2" X 151 , .050 thickness type 304 stainless steel. 2 . Cut for cylinders or "T" turns where applicable and bevel all four sides. 3 . Attaclument holes are to be counter sunk and furnished with oval head screws. ' I . Door Pulls : 1 . Door pull to be 3/4" round bent rod, 54/2" center to center, mounted on 3 - 1/2" X 15" plates . ' 2 . Door pull and Plate to match Push Plate, cut for cylinder or "T" turn where applicable and bevel all four sides. ' J. Protective Plates : 1 . Protective plates shall be furnished in . 050 inch thick type 304 stainless steel . 2 . All protective plates shall be 2" less full door width on single openings and 1 " less full door width on double leaves. ' 3 . All kick plates shall be 8" high. Mop plates and stretcher plates shall be 6" high. 4 . Mop plates to be furnished on all doors susceptible to damage or marring during cleaning. 5 . Protective plates shall be factory cut so as not to conflict with any other hardware or trim. ' K. Door Stops and Holders : 1 . Door stops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors, walls, equipment and/or hardware. ' 2 . Wrought wall bumpers similar to Glynn-Johnson 50W or 60W shall be provided where practical 3 . Provide Floor Stops similar to Glynn-Johnson FB 14 where wall stops are not practical . 4 . Where conditions prohibit the use of wall or floor stops furnish overhead stops similar to Glynn-Johnson 90 and 450 series or LCN Spring Cush arms as specified. • SECTION 08710 -04 _ L. Thresholds and Weather-stripping: 1 . All exterior doors to be furnished with thresholds and properly weather-stripped to provide an effective seal . 2 . All thresholds shall be similar to Pentko 2005AS, unless otherwise noted, to conform to Florida Accessibility requirements. 3 . Provide Pemko TM thresholds on openings where skid resistance and corrosion prevention may be required. 4 . All special material thresholds, marble, etc. to be supplied by others. M . Silencers : 1 . Provide silencers on all doors not Basketed. 2 . Provide silencers similar to Glynn-Johnson GJ64 for metal frames and GJ65 for wood frames. 3 . Furnish three (3 ) silencers for each single opening and two (2) silencers for each double opening. N. Smoke Detectors and Electronic Holders : I . Fire labeled openings having doors which are required to be held open shall be furnished with L. C. N. 4011SE/411ISE or 4041 with an 850SEM. 2 . Coordinate all smoke detectors, electronic and electromagnetic holders with section 16 and the electrical drawings. 3 . Electrical Contractor is responsible to run any and all Nvire and/or conduit to required openings. O. Signage : 1 . All signage to be furnished under section 10800 unless otherwise noted in hardware sets. 2 .03 FINISHES : 1 . The finish, in general, is to be Satin Stainless Steel BHMA 630 and Satin Chrome BIWA 626 . Door closers are to be BHMA 689 powder coat. . 2 ,04 KEYING : 1 . All cylinders shall be keyed into a new Grand Master Key system. 2 . All locks and cylinders shall be keyed as directed by the architect and/or owner. 3 . A proposed key schedule shall be submitted to the architect for approval . 4 . All locks and cylinders to be construction master keyed. 5 . Furnish the following keys : 6 Ea. Grand Master Keys 6 Ea. Master Keys per set 2 Ea. Change Keys per keyed different set. 4 Ea. Change Keys per keyed alike set 6 Ea. Construction Master Keys 6 . All keys shall be packaged and marked with appropriate key symbol and door number. 7. Deliver construction keys only to the contractor. All permanent cores, change keys, master keys and grand master keys shall be personally delivered or sent registered mail directly to the owner at the completion of the project. 2 . 05 KEY CONTROL : I . Provide a flush mounted key cabinet with sufficient hooks to accommodate and identify all keys . 2 . Furnish a cabinet with 100% expansion capabilities and a dual tag system as manufactured by Key Control Systems, Inc 3 . Indexing shall be provided to record information alphabetically, numerically by hook, numerically by keys and master and grand master keys . 3 . 01 EXAMINATION: A. The contractor is requires to examine the doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent proper application of finish hardware and shall not proceed with installation until defects are corrected or adjusted. • SECTION 08710 -05 _ 1 .01 INSTALLATION : A. Mounting Locations : 1 . All hardware to be mounted in accordance with the Florida Accessibility requirements manual . ' 2 . Unless otherwise directed and/or approved by the architect and/or owner in writing, the fol- lowing recommended locations are from bottom of frame to center line of Standard Pre. K - 3 Grade 4 42 a. Lock or Exit Device Strike 40-5/ 16" 30" 34" b. Push & Pull Bars 42 ' c. Hospital Arm Pull 45" d. Push and Pull Plate 45" ' e. Deadlock Strike 48"\ 3 . Install each item of hardware in compliance with the manufacturers instructions and recom- ' mendations. Whenever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which require further painting and/or finishing, coordinate removal , storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work in the painting section. 4 . Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the substrate as nec- essary for proper installation and operation. 6 . Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchors and anchorage fasteners. 3 .03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspection : 1 . Provide the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant, following the completion of inst- allation, to verify the hardware is in accordance with the approved hardware and keying sched- ules and check operation and adjustment of all hardware items. ' 3 . 04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation and function . Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended for the application. B . Final adjustments are to be made during the week prior to the owners acceptance or occupancy. Check operation of all hardware and adjust door control devices to compensate for final adjust- , meats to the heating and ventilating system. C . Instruct owners personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and finishes. D. Furnish the owners personnel with all special tools required to adjust and maintain the hardware. E. Approximately six (6) months after acceptance of the hardware in each area, the installer, accompan- ied by representatives of the various manufacturers, shall return to the project to check and read- just every item of hardware to restore proper function. Consult with and instruct the owners personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deter- , iorated or failed due to faulty design or materials. Prepare a written report of current predictable prob- lems (of a substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. 3 . 05 PROTECTION: A. The contractor is responsible , after acceptance of the finish hardware, for the proper protection of all items of finish hardware until the owner accepts the project as complete. ' 3 .06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE : A. Provide hardware as specified in previous articles and in sets according to the following schedule : • SECTION 08710-06 H w A w A H W o V � N w w � H R.' A -• N V] H z � O A H (ry Cn N N .-n r 1� .N.� 0�, ..a r�.r .-. V^i '� .ti .r .N..i ...i 4t M W) V^ 00 T om'' ^ N M 7 '4r, `S 1� CA 'J' � ^� ^ + N M moi' N N N N i POOL BUILDING ' HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1 SGL. . EXT. DOORS #3 ,9 ' 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB1199 NRP 5 X 44 /2 32D 1 PUSH BAR 16 26D 1 PULL BARS 10 26D 1 DEADLOCK MS 1850 28 2 CYLINDERS AS REQ. 26D 1 CLOSERS 4041 SP. CUSH. AL ' I THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM. DOOR MFG. I RAIN DRIP 346 C HARDWARE GROUP NO. 2 SGL. . EXT. DOORS # 112 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D 1 EXIT DEVICE 98L 994L-R 26D i CYLINDER AS REQ. 26D 1 CLOSERS 4041 SP. CUSH, AL 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D ' 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 2891 AS 1 RAIN DRIP 346 C S HARDWARE GROUP NO. 3 PR. EXT. DOOR .#20,24 3 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D 1 LOCKSET D80PD RHODES 26D 2 FLUSH BOLTS FB6 26D I THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 303 AS 1 RAIN DRIP 346 C 2 OV' HD STOP GJ900S 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 4 ' SGL . EXT. DOOR # 13 , 19, 22 14 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X .44 /2 32D 1 LOCKSET D80PD RHODES 26D I THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AS ' I RAIN DRIP 346 C 1 WALL STOP GJ50W 32D SECTION 08710 -07 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 5 SGL. INT. DOOR # 12 14 /2 PR. BUTTS 1279 4- I /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D 1 LOCKSET D80PD RHODES 26D 1 WALL STOP GJ50W 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 6 SGL. EXT. DOOR # 18 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 44/2 X 4- 1 /2 32D I LOCKSET D70PD RHODES 26D 1 CLOSER 4041 EDA AL I KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D I THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AS I RAIN DRIP 346 C I WALL STOP GJ50W 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO, 7 SGL. INT. DOOR #6 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB1279 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 26D I LOCK SET D70PD RHODES 26D 1 CLOSER 4041 REG. AL I KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW 133E 32D 1 WALL STOP GJ50W 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO, 8 SGL. INT. DOORS #8 1 - 1 /2 PR, BUTTS BB1279 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 26D I LOCK SET D70PD RHODES 26D 1 CLOSER 4040 REG AL 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 OV'HD STOP GJ450S 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 9 SGL. INT. DOOR #5 1 - 1 /2 PR, BUTTS 1279 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 26D 1 LOCKSET D53PD RHODES 26D 1 WALL STOP GJ60W 32D SECTION 08710-08 tSGL. INT. DOORS # 10715 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10 ' 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB1279 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 26D I PUSH PLATE 70B B4E 32D I DOOR PULL 106 X 70B B4E 32D 1 CLOSER 4041 REG. AL 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 WALL STOP GJ50W HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11 fSGL. EXT. DOORS # 11 , 14, 21 ,23 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X 44 /2 26D 1 PUSH PLATE 70B C/C B4E 32D 1 DOOR PULL 106 X 70B C/TK B4E 32D 1 DEADLOCK B663P 26D I CLOSER 4041 SPR. CUSH AL 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 WEATHERSTRIP 2891 AS 1 RAIN DRIP 346 C ' HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12 SHUTTERS AND ROLL-UP DOORS #4 , 7916, 17 1 CYLINDERS AS REQUIRED ' BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER rC'ONNCESSION STAND/PRESSBOX HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13 ' SGL. EXT. DRS . # 1 -A, 1 -B 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D ' 1 PRIVACY SET D40S RHODES 26D 1 DEADLOCK B663P 26D 1 CLOSER 4041 SPR. CUSH. AL ' 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 WEATHERSTRIP 2891 AS 1 RAIN DRIP 346 C • SECTION 08710-09 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14 SGL. EXT. DR. #2 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB1191 NRP 44 /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D 1 PASSAGE SET D10S RHODES 26D 1 DEADLOCK B663P 26D 1 CLOSER 4041 EDA AL I KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS I WEATHERSTRIP 2891 AS I RAIN DRIP 346 C 1 WALL STOP GJ50W 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 15 SGL . EXT. DR. #3 I CYLINDER AS REQUIRED BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY LIFT MANUFACTURER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16 SGL. INT. DOOR #4 1 CYLINDER AS REQUIRED BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY LIFT MANUFACTURER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 17 SGL. EXT. DR. #5 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2 X 4- 1 /2 32D 1 LOCKSET D70PD RHODES 26D I CLOSER 4041 SPR CUSH. AL 1 KICK PLATE 8" X 2" LDW B3E 32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS I WEATHERSTRIP 2891 AS 1 RAIN DRIP 346 C • SECTION 08710- 10 MAINTENENCE BUILDING HARDWARE GROUP NO. 18 SGL, EXT. DR. # 1 ' 1 - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 44 /2 X 4 - 1 /2 32D 1 LOCKSET D80PD ORBIT 26D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AS 1 WALL STOP GJ50W 32D HARDWARE GROUP NO. 19 ' ROLL UP DRS . #2 1 CYLINDER AS REQUIRED BALANCE OF HDWE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BUILDING HARDWARE GROUP NO. 20 SGL. EXT. DR. # 1 ' I - 1 /2 PR. BUTTS BB 1191 NRP 4- 1 /2X4- 1 /2 32D 1 PASSAGE SET D10S ORBIT 26D 1 DEADLOCK B663P 26D 1 THRESHOLD 2005 AS I WEATHERSTRIP 303 AS 1 OV'HD STOP GJ900S 32D SECTION 08710 - 11 END OF SECTION SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Definition : "glass includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass . "Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass . Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: Window units Window wall Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed" . B . Packaged mirror units are specified as "specialties" in another section . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Prime Glass Manufacturer : One of the following for each type/color/pattern of glass : ASG Industries . Inc . Guardian Industries Corporation Ford Glass Company Libbey-Owens -Ford Company PPG Industries , Inc . B . Certificate : Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements . C . Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assoc . (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated . Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this sections or other referenced standards . D . Installer Qualifications : Installation contractor specializing in glazing, with a minimum of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and also being an approved installer for the glazing product supplier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 GLASS PRODUCTS Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass : Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) , Quality q3 (glazing select) , fully tempered. Other glass products for impact resistance are called out 08800 - 1 ' on the drawings and may include, but are not limited to, safety laminate heat.strengthed glass with an . 090 innerliner. Thicknesses of laminated glass vary from 3 /8 inch to 9/ 16 ' inch . Frames to receive the glass vary to achieve various levels of impact resistance per local and state codes . Refer to the drawings for a description of each glazed opening . ' 2 . 02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS A. General : provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer ' s standard colors, or black if no color is os selected . Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for selection of hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials , and variations or modifications , carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation. ' B . 2 -Part Pol sulfide Glazing (,2P - Sealant s GSl_ Elastomeric polysulfide sealant complying with FS TTS -227, Class A, Type 2 ; specially compounded and tested to r show a minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications . Use for exterior applications . iC . Acrylic-Emulsion Glazing Sealant AcEm-GS) : Emulsion of acrylic, with or without latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing ; non-hardening, non- staining, and non-bleeding . Use for interior applications . 2 . 03 GLAZING GASKETS ' A . Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with ' ASTM D 2287, B . Cellular Neoprene Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GGA Extruded/molded, closed-cell , ' integral-skinned neoprene of profile required to maintain watertight seal ; comply with ASTM C509 , Type II , black. ' C . Vinyl Foam Glazing Tape VF-GTI : Closed cell flexible, self-adhesive, non extruding, polyvinyl chloride foam tape ; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed, ' watertight installation of glass , with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel ; comply with ASTM C 1667 . 2 . 04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A . Cleaners. Primers, and Sealers : Type recommended by sealant of gasket manufacturer. ' B . Setting Blocks : Neoprene or EPDM, 70 - 90 durometer hardness , with proven compatibility with sealants used . ' C . Spacers : Neoprene of EPDM, 40- 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with sealants used . 08800 -2 D . Compressed Filler (Rod) Ccp-FRS Closed cell or waterproof jacketed roof stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5 - 10 psi compression strength for 25 % deflection . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes , wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) , without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B . Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with significant edge damage or other imperfections . C . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass , minimum edge clearance , and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances . Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. D . Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with recommendations of Flat Glass Market Assoc . "Glazing Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 3 . 02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING A. Cleanlg azing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing . Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate . Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used . B . Applyprimer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3 . 03 GLAZING A. Install settingblocks locks of proper size in still rabbit, located 1 /4 of glass width from each corner. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any. B . Provide spacers inside and out, or proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches , except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing. Provide 1 /8 " minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape used thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape . C . Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics . 08800 -3 ' D . Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in sill channels) , except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and ' type of glass, and complying with manufacturer' s recommendations . ' E . Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces . ' F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass . Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets . G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminated stains and discoloration . ' H . Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives , including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead . ' Gasket Glazin : Miter c w I . Ga g cut and bond ends together at corners , here gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or ' leaks in glazing system . ' J. Structural Gasket Glazing : Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure . Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing channel or anchorage rabbet. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer' s ' instructions , including possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes . 3 . 03 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A . Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces . Cure sealants for high early strength and durability. ' B . Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes , accidents and ' vandalism. C . Wash and polishlg ass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for 1 inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each are of project. Comply with glass product manufacturer ' s recommendations for final cleaning . * * * END OF SECTION* * * 08800 =4 DIVISION 9, FINISHES SECTION 09100 - LATHING AND STUCCO 1 . 01 GENERAL : 1 . All applicable provisions of the General Conditions are a part of this section. 2 . Furnish all labor, materials , tools, equipment, etc . , and services necessary and incidental to the complete fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the drawings and in the specifications . 3 . All lathing, plastering, and stucco work, in addition to conforming to this section, shall conform to the American National Standards Specifications A42 . 2 and A42 . 3 . 1 .02 MATERIALS : Stucco 1 . Do not use any precolored stucco mixes . 2 . Premix stucco bag mix shall conform to ASTM C- 926, Gray . 3 . Sand shall be clean, sharp, fine, sand conforming to ASTM C- 144 . 4 . Water shall be clean, fresh, portable and free from mineral organic substances that would affect the set of stucco . Metal Lath 1 . Self-furring metal lath shall be expanded metal lath with staggered indentations spaced 3 - 'I/2" apart horizontally and 2 " apart vertically with indentations of depth to hold lath a minimum of 1 /4 " away from back-up material . Lath shall be hot dipped galvanized for interior and exterior use and shall weigh 3 .4 pounds per square yard . 2 . Metal lath to be used where supports are spaced over 16 " on centers shall be hot dipped galvanized, expanded metal lath stiffened with 3 /8 " ribs spaced 4 " on center, weighing a minimum of 3 . 4 pounds per square yard. 3 . Sheets secured to supports at intervals not exceeding six inches (6 ") . Place ties where sides of sheets lap at supports , and at side laps or sheets between supports . Tie wire to be not less than 18 ga. galvanized wire . 09100 - 1 ' 4 . Diamond-mesh lath lapped at sides not less than 1/2 " and at ends not less than 1 " . End laps of sheets should generally occur only over supports ; if between, end of sheets to be laced or adequately tied with # 18 ga. , galvanized, annealed wire. 5 . No paper backed laths will be accepted . Remove paper backings on any laths ' supplied to the job site. Utilize 30# felt roofing paper or backing as called out on the plans . ' 1 .03 MIXING AND APPLICATION . 1 . Before the application of stucco masonry, all surfaces shall be clean and free from ' defect. Concrete surfaces to receive stucco shall be coated with a bonding agent to insure proper bond. Dampen masonry surfaces with a fog spray immediately prior to application so as to prevent excessive withdrawal of moisture from the stucco . 2 . Stucco shall be applied in three 3 coats to a total thickness of " pp ( ) 7/8 over metal lath and in two (2) coats to a total thickness of 5/8 " on concrete or masonry . Finish coat ' to be installed as per manufacturer' s recommendations of approximately 1 /4 " thickness with a smooth sponge finish. ' 3 . Cross rake all scratch coats in order to form a mechanical bond with brown coats . Lightly cross-scratch all brown coats of plaster in order to form a mechanical bond with the finish coat . 4 . Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours ; commence moistening as soon as plaster is hardened sufficiently to prevent injuries . If atmospheric conditions are hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary to at no additional cost to the Owner. Allow base coat to cure for a minimum of seven (7) days before ' applying finishing coat. 5 . FINISH COAT shall be free from waves , dents , trowel marks , and shall be a ' smooth sponge finish. 6 . Plaster and stucco used for patching and replacing existing work shall be mixed, applied and finished to match adjacent surfaces . 1 . 04 CLEANING : ' 1 . After completion of work, all scaffolding, tools , and other equipment shall be removed from the building, taking care not to damage work of other trades . All ' cement plaster rubbish shall be removed and the building left broom clean . 2 . Stucco Contractor is responsible for protecting all existing work, windows , doors , ' equipment, etc. from stucco residue during application . Clean any residue that may exist at completion of work. 09100 -2 1 .05 METAL ACCESSORIES : 1 . Casing beads shall be formed of 24 ga. galvanized steel for interior use and 24 ga solid zinc for exterior use, type #66 as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Co . , or #66 as manufactured by Inland Steel Company, or an approved comparable product. 2 . Interior corner beads shall be fabricated of 26 ga. galvanized, type 1 , as manufactured by National Gypsum Co . , 1 -A as manufactured by National Gypsum Co . , 1 -A as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Co . , or # 1 as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co . , or an approved comparable product. 3 . Control Joints and Expansion Joints on flat vertical and horizontal surfaces for exterior applications shall be " solid zinc alloy" as shown and described on the building elevations and details , for all stucco systems . Manufactured by "Keene" or and approved, comparable product. 4 . Inside corner Expansion Joints for interior or exterior applications where shown on the drawings, shall be vinyl (Model CXJ-75 or CXJ- 78 as shown on details) as much manufactured by Vinyl Corp . or an approved, comparable product. 1 . 06 EXECUTION : 1 . Quality - Follow recommendations and specifications for strict installation. Allow adequate time for each of three (3 ) coats to dry before going on with the next coat. 2 . Metal Accessories : a. The stucco contractor shall request a project walk-around with the Architect prior to installing any exterior metal accessories, to insure all conditions, materials, and applications are understood. b . Corner beads, for interior applications only, shall be installed on all corners and edges of corner openings . Corner beads shall extend the full height of the corners on which they are applied and shall act as a ground . C , Casing beads shall be applied where stucco stops and other metal begins, or where stucco abuts metal door frames , exposed concrete block walls, or where indicated . d . Where plaster and stucco abuts metal door jambs or similar items and a casing bead cannot be used, the stucco shall be tooled in order that the eventual crack will follow the tooled joint. 3 . Metal lath shall be applied with long dimension of sheet across supports . 09100-3 4 . Control Joints and Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown, or as to check shrinkage and expansion cracks . 5 . Inside-Corner Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown on details . * * *END OF THIS SECTION * * * t ' 09100-4 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL 1 . 01 GENERAL : 1 . Gypsum Board Standard : ASTM C 840 1 . 02 MATERIALS : 1 . Drywall Materials : a. Exposed Gypsum Board : ASTM C 36 1 . Long' Edges : Standard taper a. ''/z" Gypsum Drywall (Regular) . b . ''/z " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall . c . 5/8 " Gypsum Drywall (Regular) . d . 5 /8 " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall . e . 5/8 " Type-X Fire Resistant Gypsum Drywall . f. 5/8 " Vandal Resistant Gypsum Drywall , 2 , Trim Accessories : Provide manufacturer' s standard metal trim accessories, of the beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. 3 . Provide corner beads at external corners . 4 . Provide edge trim of the shape indicated where edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for type abutment at edges, other U- type except special kerfed-type where kerf is provided in adjoining work. 5 . Gypsum Board Fasteners Self drilling, self tapping, bugle head, screws . 6. Joint tape : ASTM C 475 , performed, Type II . 7 , Joint Compound : ASTM 475 , Type I . 8 . Provide water-resistant type manufactured by United States Gypsum Company for use with water-resistant backing board and cementitous substrate backing board. 1 . 03 DRYWALL INSTALLATION AND FINISHING : 1 . . Install gypsum boards in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings . Install walls and partitions with exposed gypsum boards vertical , with joints offset on opposite sides of partitions . Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports , with end joints staggered over supports , except where recommended in a different arrangement by manufacturer. Install as per UL#U305 for 1 hour rating when utilizing rated panels . 09250- 1 2 . Form "Floating" Construction for gypsum boards at internal corners, except where special isolation or edge trim is indicated. ' 30 Screw gypsum boards to supports . 4 . Drywall Finishing • Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards . Apply compound at accessory flanges , penetrations, fasteners heads and surface defects . ' S . Apply compound in three (3 ) coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended b manufacturer) ; sand after last two (2) coats . y 6 . Ceiling Finish as per Finish Schedule on the Construction Plans . * * *END OF THIS SECTION * * * ' 09250-2 SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE WORK 1 . 01 GENERAL : L Coordination : Coordinate all with other trades whose work affects, connects with, or is concealed by tile installations . Before proceeding, make certain all required inspections have been made. 2 . Product delivery, storage and handling : Deliver all manufactured materials in original , unbroken containers bearing name of manufacturer, brand and grade seals . Keep materials dry, clean, and protected against deterioration in any form . 1 . 02 PRODUCTS : 1 . Materials : a. Ceramic tile : As selected by the Architect or the Interior Designer. Seethe Drawing Schedules , 1 . All ceramic floor tile located in areas that may become slippery when wet shall have a non-slip impervious surface . b . Marble : Window stools shall be Georgia or Alabama White domestic marble or an approved, comparable product, unless specified otherwise on the drawings . 1 . 03 EXECUTION : 1 . Inspection of Surfaces : a. Examine surfaces to receive tile, cement substrate backing board, setting beds, or accessories, before installation begins . b . Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected . 2 . Installation : a. Layout all work so that where possible not tiles less that half size occur. In any event install no half tiles above first course up from the bottom or away from first vertical course at internal and external corners . Align all joints, vertically and horizontally. Cut and drill neatly without marrying tile . Rub smooth any necessary cuts with a fine stone and set no cut edge against any fixture, cabinet, or other tile without a joint at least 1 / 16 " wide . Cut, fit, adjust, and establish tiles neatly and accurately to accommodate accessories, 09300- 1 interruptions, chases , returns, mechanical and electrical outlets , and finish at their exact location (as determined by jobsite conditions) . Maximum variation shall be plus -or-minus- 1 /8 " in 10 feet when straight edge is laid on the surface in any direction. ' b . Provide all required trim pieces as detailed for the various tiles specified . ' c . All floor and wall tile to be set using thin-set products . Utilize proper admixes for exterior installations and frost proof applications. d . Thoroughly wash out joints and saturate with clean water before grouting. Thoroughly grout into all joints to fill entire length and depth. Fill flush with face of tiles making a neatly finished, smooth surface . Prevent staining ' of grouted joints . 3 . Cleaning and Protection .• ' a. Wire surfaces clean afterr g outing, remove all trace of mortar and grout. Do not us acid solution for cleaning glazed tile. b . Closes spaces es to traffic or other work until the is firmly set. Protect from damaged work at no additional cost to Owner. * * * END OF SECTION * * * 09300-2 SECTION 09510 - LAY IN PANEL CEILINGS A. GENERAL : 1 , Acceptable Manufacturers : a. Grid System : Chicago Metallic Corporation Donn Corporation U. S . Gypsum Corp . W. J. Haertel Division; Leslie-Locke National Rolling Mills Company b . Lay-in-Panels : Celotex Armstrong Conwed U. S . Gypsum 2 . Product delivery storage and handling : Store materials in protective packaging to prevent soiling or physical damage. Be PRODUCTS : L Lay-in Panels : As per Finish Schedule on drawings , or an approved equal . 2 . Grid Systems : With all components conforming to the requirements of ASTM C- 635 in a low-sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by the Architect. See the plans for a complete description. 3 . Perimeter Molding : Channel formed, of not less than 22 gauge steel , 1 " horizontal exposed face with exposed edge hemmed ; low sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by Architect. 4 , Suspension System : a. Hangers : Annealed zinc-coated wire # 12 gauge or heavier. b . Carrying Channels : 1 - 1 /2 " x 3 /4 x # 16 gauge for greater spans . C. EXECUTION : 1 . Condition of Surfaces : Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached lay in panels for unevenness, irregularities that would affect quality or execution of work. Install ceiling system in strict accordance with the manufacturers printed specifications . 2 . Cleaning : Clean soiled units after installation . 3 . Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units . 09510 - 1 SCHEDULE OF SELECTED CEILINGS : Project : North County Regional Park Pool Building Location Lay In Panel & Grid Classrooms Omni Clima Plus 2 ' X 4 ' X 5/8 " , #923 , with (SLT) edge, Color : White, with DONN DX Grid, Color: White . ' For Good resistance to temperature and humidity . Office Omni Clima Plus 2' X 4 ' X 5/8 " , #923 , with (SLT) edge, Color : White, with DONN DX Grid, Color: White. For good resistance to temperature and humidity. Control Room Facets Clima Plus 2 ' X 2' X 5/8 " , #5772, with (SLT) edge , Color : White , With DONN DX Grid, Color : White . For good resistance to temperature and humidity . * * * END OF SECTION * * * i 1 t ' 09510 =2 SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART I - General 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section. 1 .02 DESCRIPTION: A . Provide resilient flooring, cove or wood base and related items and their installation. Refer to Finish Schedule for description of base being utilized. Be Related Work Specified Elsewhere : 1 . 09680 or Carpeting . 1903 QUALITY ASSURANCE : Acceptable Manufacturer - Select product of the following manufacturers or equal : A . Tarkett Floor Products Be Congoleum C . Mannington D . Armstrong : Azrock 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : A . Literature : Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for each type of material specified, Be Samples : Submit 12 " X 12 " samples of all materials specified in this Section for approval and color section. C . Maintenance Data : Furnish list of recommended maintenance products and recommended maintenance methods and procedures . 1 . 05 PRODUCT HANDLING : Deliver and store on the site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use . 1 . 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS • Temperature of the rooms shall be 70 F . (21 C .) Minimum for 24 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation . 09650 - 1 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 MATERIALS : A. Reinforced Vinyl Tile : Provide tile complying with FS - SS -T-312B , Type IV, Composition 1 (asbestos free) . Colors as selected by Architect, 15 % of which shall be feature tile and strips . Size of tile : 12 " x 12 " x 1 /8 " . B . Inlaid Commercial Sheet Vinyl Flooring : Inlaid composite with compression- resistant vinyl chips on flexible backing, with am approved mildew protection throughout all layers . Static load limit of 125 p . s . i . , Nominal thickness of 0 . 085 inch; Wear layer thickness 0 . 050 inch, roll width 6 , 8 , 9 , or 10 feet, Pattern to be omnidirectional , color as selected by the Owner. Meet Federal Specification SS =T- 312B , Type III, Vinyl . C . Vinyl Base: 4 " high x 1 /811 thick roll stock, (see finish schedule for different locations and types of base) . D . Adhesive : Provide waterproof stabilized type as recommended by the flooring manufacturer and as outlined in its Technical Manual . E . Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. F . Wax : As recommended by the flooring manufacturer. G . Reducer Strips : Beveled edge, 1 " wide, 1 /8 " thick tapered . ' H . Feature Strip : Provide where no threshold is scheduled between rooms with flooring of different color in a width to match doorjamb . PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3 . 01 PREPARATION OF SURFACE : A . The contractor is to carefully examine substrate and conditions to which the the is ' to be applied . Any conditions detrimental to work under this Contract shall be reported to the General Contractor in writing . Failure in this respect shall constitute an acceptance of the base to which his work is to be applied and any further corrections to be made in his work will be done at this contractor' s expense , insofar as his work is concerned . This Contractor will only be required to patch minor holes or cracks , with suitable materials , before applying the resilient flooring. rB . Do not commence work until other trades have completed their work. 09650-2 C . Fill all cracks , holes, etc. in concrete sub-floor with fillers as recommended by manufacturer of resilient flooring . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION : A. Apply primer, if recommended by the resilient material manufacturer, prior to application to adhesive . B . Resilient Flooring shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive . Wood floor faces shall be fully sanded to receive adhesive . C . Install reducer strips where the abuts concrete floor. D . Centering : 1 . Establish center lines for the patterns both ways with respect to principal walls in areas or rooms . Start laying tile from center lines ; keep joints parallel to principal walls . 2 . Where field pattern is not a whole number of units, lay out the. pattern so that the edge units are not smaller than half units (except corner pieces) . E . Uniformity : If vinyl composition tile, use tile from contents of at least two different containers so that pattern will be uniform and not spotty due to the variance that may be found in different containers . Use tile from one mill run. F . Application of Adhesive 1 . Evenly spread approved adhesive on prepared surfaces as recommended by manufacturer; within the time recommended by manufacturer; embed eah tile firmly in place to assure proper bond . In wet areas , such as toilet rooms , or rooms with floor drains, utilize a waterproof adhesive . 2 . Cover only. that amount of area which can be covered by resilient flooring within recommended working time of the adhesive . G . Laying Tile 1 . Ladle with grain in all tile running in the same direction (generally parallel with the short wall of the room) . 2 . Where necessary, cut tiles neatly and snugly around pipes and at other vertical projections . 3 . Provide hairline joints, cut straight and true . Seal tile joints at pipes with waterproof cement . 09650 -3 ' 4 . Provide tiles level and flush with the surface of adjoining ng files . 5 . Immediately remove stains , spots and smears of adhesive . H. Installing Base 1 . Do not install base until plaster or other backing materials has thoroughly dried. Install bases on walls, including walls behind movable equipment. ' 2 . Extend bases into closets offsets and adjoining areas scheduled to receive base . 3 . Firmly cement bases to previously prepared surfaces , using an approved recommended adhesive. 4 . Fit base points tight and align top and bottom edged in firm contact with walls and floors throughout its entire length. 5 . Install base in carpet areas after carpet has been installed. 6 . Provide factory exterior and interior corners . I . Installing Edge Strips : 1 . Install edge strips with adhesive wherever exposed tile edges occur. 2 . Where tile stops at doorways, set edge strips directly under doors . 3 . 03 CLEANING AND FINISHING : A . After flooring has been laid and adhesive is thoroughly cured, clean and finish resilient floors as recommended by tile manufacturer. Install two coats of wax and machine buff. B . Keep traffic off finished floors . Protect all floors as necessary with reinforced Kraft building paper and tape joints . Maintain this paper cover and otherwise protect floor until acceptance . C . Provide 20 square feet of extra stock of each color used. Provide 8 linear feet of extra stock of each color and size base used . Each product to be left with General Contractor for delivery to Owner at completion of the job . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 09650 -4 SECTION 09730 - SEAMLESS EPDXY FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1 .01 SCOPE A. Provide all labor and materials for a seamless, decorative, epoxy flooring material, including all surface preparation, primers , and finish coats . B . Related work specified elsewhere : 1 . Concrete - Division 3 2 . Thermal & Moisture Protection - Division 7 1 .02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLER A. DUR-A-FLEX, Inc . CRAWFORD LAB FLO-ROCKS CROSSFIELD PROD . CORP . DEX-O-TEX SELBY SELBACLAD STONEHARD, Inc. STONESHIELD HRI VALSPAR Corp : QUARTSITE B . Installer shall be a manufacturer' s approved installer, who has the technical qualifications , current and certified in writing, and the facilities to install the specified systems . 1 .03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Material shall be delivered to job-site in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspected by installer prior to start of the job . B . Material shall be stored in a dry, enclosed area protected from the elements . Temperatures of storage area shall be kept between 60 degrees and 90 degrees F . 1 .04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A . New concrete shall be cured no less than 28 days under good conditions . Concrete subfloors on or below grade shall be properly equipped with vapor barriers and perimeter drains. B . Adequate utilities , including electric, water, heat (between 60 degrees and 90 degrees F . ) and lighting of no less than 80 ft. Candles measured at floor surface to be supplied by the General Contractor. Specifier Note : Heat and light are extremely important parts of the installation . Usually these utilities are functioning before epoxy finishes are scheduled for installation, however in some cases the epoxy coating shall be installed prior to equipment, fixtures and even walls in some cases . Lack of these necessities can and will spoil a good installation . Without heat the curing process can be extended or even stopped . Without adequate light even the best mechanic cannot provide a quality finish. C . Work area shall be free of other trades during, and for a period of 24 hours , after floor installation . 09730- 1 D . Protection of finished floor from damage by subsequent trades is the responsibility of the General Contractor. ' 1 .05 WARRANTY A. Contractor to submit a (one) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship upon acceptance of the finished product and Certificate of Occupancy by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. The installed product shall be 3/16 " thick DUR-A-QUARTZ multiple-component, decorative, institutional flooring system, by DUR-A-FLEX, Inc . , or an approved a ual in standard non-skid surface texture . q 2 .02 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES A . Physical Properties - (DUR-A-QUARTZ `BM" EPDXY FLOORING) Mix Ratio (Dur-A-Glaze #4) . . . . 1 part Hardener, 2 parts Resin. Pot Life . , , *Approximately 22 minutes at 70 degrees F * . Hardness, Shore D . . . .ASTM D-2240 . . . 75 - 80 . Compressive Strength. . .AS TM D-695 . . . 17, 500 psi . Tensile Strength . . .ASTM F-638 . 614, 000 psi . Tensile Elongation' . . .ASTM D-638 . . . 7. 5 %. Flexural Strength. . .ASTM D- 790 . . . 6, 250 psi . Linear Shrinkage . . . .ASTM D-2566 . . . 0 . 02 % . Coefficient of Linear Expansion. . . 12 degrees F . to 140 degrees F . t In./in./degrees F . . . . ASTM D- 696 . . . 20 X 10- 6 . Bond Strength to Concrete . , . .ACI-403 . . . 335 psi , concrete fails . Shear from Steel Plate . . . . MIL D -3134 . . . no cracking or delamination. Indentation. . . . MIL D-3134 . . . 025 . Impact Resistance . . .MIL D -3134 . 41no cracking or delamination . Elevated Temperature . . . MIL D-3134 . . .no slip or flow. Water Absorption, . . .ASTM D- 570 . . . 0 . 04% , Electrical Conductivity, . . . non-conductive . ' Flammability . . . .ASTM D-635 . . . self-extinguishing . Abrasion Resistance Taber Abrader. . . CS - 17 wheels, 2000 gm . Load, 1000 cycles . . . avg. 24 . 0 mg. loss . Toxicity , . . . non-toxic, USDA approved. * Pot Life is shorter at higher temperatures . Do not use below 50 degrees F . or above 95 ' degrees F . Note : Chemical & stain resistance can be improved by using Poly-Thane #2 as a topcoat(s) . Scratch resistance can be improved by using Dur-A-Thane or Dur- A-Glaze #2 as a topcoat(s) . ' 2 .2 PRODUCT PACKAGING A . All materials used shall be precision mixed on site with manufacturer supplied mix and measure apparatus to ensure a timely, accurate mix ratio and minimize waste . ' 09730 -2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A . Concrete preparation to include use of a steel shotblast machine or a solution of muriatic acid to create a profiled substrate, combined with "dust-free" diamond grinding for all edges and areas where shotblast machine is unable to reach. Specifier Note : For maximum bond strength, steel shotblasting is always recommended. 3 .02 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A . COLORS : Q28 Colored Quartz Aggregate is available in 21 standard colors . The color for this installation is 028m22 . B . THICKNESS : 1 /8 " for moderate traffic, 3/ 16 " thick for heavy traffic or to fill and level eroded concrete . C . LIMITATIONS : Substrate and ambient temperature must be higher than 50 degrees F during the installation and curing period. Eroded or spalled areas must be "filled and leveled" with an epoxy grout composed of Dur-A- Glaze 94 and aggregate . D . SURFACE PREPARATION : Surface must be dry and perfectly clean, free of all oil , grease , detergent film, sealers and/or curing compounds in accordance with Dur-A-Flex, Inc . , preparation guidelines . E . APPLICATION PROCEDURE and SPREAD RATES : A Double Broadcast application should yield a uniform appearance and an approximate 1 /8 " to 3 / 16 " thickness : Procedure is as follows : 1 . Prepare the surface as recommended . 2 . Apply Dur-A-Glaze #4 at approximately 100 sq . Ft. per gallon. 3 . Broadcast Q28 Colored Quartz at approximately %2 lb . per sq . foot . 4 . Let cure. (Cure times vary depending on hardener selection, from 2 to 10 hours . ) 5 . Sweep up excess sand . 6 . Apply Dur-A- Glaze #4 at approximately 100 sq . ft. per gallon. This application serves as a base coat for a second broadcast. 7 . Broadcast Q28 Colored Quartz at approximately %2 lb . per sq . foot. 8 . Repeat steps 4 & 5 . 9 . Apply first top coat of Dur-A- Glaze #4 at 100- 125 sq . ft. per gallon. 10 . Let Cure . 11 . Apply second topcoat of Dur-A-Glaze #4 at 200-250 sq . ft . per gallon, or any Dur-A-Flex high performance topcoat such as Poly-Thane #2 , Dur-A-Thane or Dur-A-Glaze 42 at 200-300 sq . ft. per gallon. NOTE : One top coat is generally sufficient where a high degree of non-skid is required such as a shower room . For this shower and bathroom installation, provide only one coat of top coat material to insure a non-skid surface . 09730-3 1 3 . 03 DETAILS A . Moving cracks and joints shall be thoroughly routed and vacuumed clean, then filled with DUR-A-FILLER #2 . ' B . Surface deviations to be pre-patched with patching compound comprised of DUR-A-GLAZE #4 and No- Sag #2 or Q28 Quartz. C . A 4 " integral cove base is to be installed at perimeter walls . ' D . Prime surface with Elast-O-Coat membrane as per manufacturer' s recommendations . * * *END OF SECTION * * * r t o _9730 4 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 1 . 01 GENERAL : 1 . Submittals : a. In addition to manufacturer ' s data, application instructions, and label analysis for each coating material , submit samples for Architect ' s review of color and texture only . Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen, color and texture is achieved. . b . On 12 " x 12 ' hardboard, provide two (2) samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate finish conditions . c. On wood surfaces provide two (2) 4 " x 8 " samples for natural and stained wood finish. d. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted finishes of aceptable samples, as directed by Architect . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : 1 . Paintine and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Paint exposed surfaces , except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are designated . If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect from standard colors available for the coatings required. 3 . Work Not Included : Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming of ferrous metal items and fabricated components are included under their respective trades . Unless otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas . Finished metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel , bronze, and similar metals will not be painted. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units , or over any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code- required labels . 1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE : 1 . Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing manufacturer ' s name, trade name, and label analysis . Store where indicated in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions . 1 . 04 PROTECTION : 1 . Protect work of other trades . Correct any painting related damage, by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Architect. 09900 - 1 1 .05 COORDINATION : ' 1 . Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required . Notify Architect in writing of ' anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others . 1 .06 SURFACE PREPARATION : ' 1 . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer' s instructions of each substrate condition. ' 2 . Remove hardware and accessories machined surfaces , plates , lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied protection . Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at completion of work. 3 . Seal wood required to be job-painted . Prime edges , ends, face, undersides and backsides of counters, cases, cabinets, counters , etc . Use varnish for back-priming where transparent finish is required. 4 . Backprime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside . 5 . Seal tops, bottoms , and cut-outs of wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or similar sealer immediately upon delivery to job . 1 . 07 MATERIAL PREPARATION : 1 . Mix , pre are and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer ' s directions . 1 . 08 APPLICATION : 1 . ADDIV Dainting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer ' s directions . Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to which applied, but in no case will spray application be used unless approved by Architect. 2 . Apply additional costs when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance . 1 3 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before equipment is installed . 09900 -2 4 . Finish exterior doors on tops , bottoms and edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. 5 . Sand lightly between succeeding enamel , urethane or varnish coats . ,. 6 . Omit first coat (hrimer .1 on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch- up painted, unless otherwise specified. 7 . Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others . 8 . Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4 . 0 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coats for a (3 ) coat work. 90 Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 . 5 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coat for two (2) coat work. Specialty finishes wet and dry mil thickness are also specified within this section. L09 COMPLETED WORK : 1 . Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage . Remove, finish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements . TOUCHING UP AND CLEANING Upon completion, all touching up as required shall be done and paint removed from all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint. PAINTING SCHEDULE The following paints specified shall be manufactured by one of the following manufacturer' s or an approved, comparable product : 1 . Benjamin Moore Paints 2 , Sherwin Williams Paints 3 , Porter Paints 4 . Devoe Paints 5 , MAB Paints 6 , ICI Paints T Color Wheel Paints Color selection to be by the owner, the Architect, and/or the Interior Designer. See Finishes Schedule on the Plans . 09900 -3 r r A . Exterior wood Trim, Wood Siding, Fascias, Soffits , Etc . : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer on all faces and edges . Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Exterior Acrylic Latex paint on ' exposed surfaces . B . Interior Drywall ; Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Regal AquaVelvet Eggshell (319) over base sealer coat. Specialty finishes may apply also . ' C . Galvanized Metal : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Galvanized Iron Primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Meta-lastic Paint. ' D . Structural Steel : One coat red oxide primer over shop primer. Two coats over all field welds . NOTE : All galvanized metal to be washed with minerals spirits to remove e any oil . E . Exterior Stucco and Cementicous Wall Panels : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Masonry sealer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Latex paint. rF . Steel Doors & Frames : Spot prime with Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rudt Inhibited ' Red Oxide . Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust Inhibited (semi-gloss) . G. Wood Doors (Painted) : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore enamel . H. Wood Doors (Sealed) : Three coats of Satin Finish clear urethane, lightly sanded between coats . I . Metal Handrails : One coat metal primer and two coats shop applied industrial enamel . ' J. Exposed finish Grade Concrete Block : One coat filler and sealer primer. Specialty Paint over primer in accordance with the Manufacturers Specifications . K. Toilet Room Walls : ' Apply water base epoxy coating full height on the walls in toilet rooms/bathrooms , to achieve an impervious finish . ' 09900-4 t (ON INTERIOR MASONRY) - Semigloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints . 1st coat: S - W KEM CATI-COAT EPDXY FILLER/SEALER B42 WA8B42 WA9 (87- 108 sq . ft./gal @ 8 - 10 mild dry) . 2 "d coat : S - W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/1360 V25 . 3rd coat: S - W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70B60 V25 , (8mils wet, 3 mils wet per coat) . NOTE : DO NOT APPLY EPDXY PAINTS TO ANY INTERIOR FACES OF BARE BLOCK OR MASONRY EXTERIOR WALLS. UTILIZE LATEX PAINTS WITH BREATHABILITY OF 1 PERM OR GREATER PER ITEM «B " ABOVE. (ON DRYWALL) - Semi - Gloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints . 1st coat : S -W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28W200, (4 mils wet, 1 .2 mils dry) . 2 "d coat : S - W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/B60 V3 . 3 `d coat : S - W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/ B60 V3 . ( 10 mils wet, 6 mils dry per coat) . * * * END OF THIS SECTION * * * 09900-5 SOME • ■ • • � ■ w do ��.`io ,.d /Cir�r+r *7^a. rq T••G'M x�Y�Y 1 seX #i MM 4itse• � ..� � j,.�+' '—'... z� '+3�.,i'�-e s^��w �.�` 4 y� �."� 'r�'�`���•'I,.� � y�•a 'rig Y.i»` sN�'S4Y ss <���'x `� �til.�� � '�• sL".,2��1�y� a"'Y_ i"` �� - r kA`t'�"f?'y'�'i ' N .``a"+/h�= � �.6 '�.�* .�'S"': -, "�'1�" Z �,,f .� �i`> �4•t�s,,�r^'� " `�S� 1 1 f t I PM mmolowlM Vr. ds" + rf 111 ' 1 s IP" r t ji s I � r ur w < .rs..xa'.d 1 � . 1 i • • 1 • • 1 LITH O C H R O M E � L • SCOFIELO COMPANY MANUFACTURER & MARKETER OF BUILDING SPECIALTIES SINCE IA 9 6533 BANDINI BLVD. • LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90040 C H E M S TA I N TM ® 4155 SCOFIELD ROAD • DOUGLASVILLE, GEORGIA 30134 Offices and warehouses nationwide and internationally. Inquiries: (800) 800-9900 TECH - DATA BULLETIN A - 414 . 01 Los Angeles, CA: (213) 720 -3000 Fax (213) 720 -3030 Atlanta, GA: (770) 920- 6000 Fax (770) 920-6060 U, wQ A ready - to - use , penetrating , acidic Crete before it is Chemically .stained is preparation methods and application stain that chemically reacts with cured available in the ScofieldTm Tech - Data procedures , the number of Chemstain w concrete to produce permanent , varie - Bulletins A - 104 LITHOCHROME Color applications , experience in use of the gated or translucent color effects. Hardener, A -204 EMERCHROME Floor material , sealing or finish-coating materi- Z Hardener, and A -304 CHROMIX Admix- als and methods , and other factors . 1 . Description and Uses : Formulated tures for Color-Conditioned Concrete. Each will significantly affect the final to add color to uncolored concrete or to Application of CEMENTONEO Clear appearance and performance of the M change the color of colored concrete Sealer intensifies the variegated appear- chemically stained concrete . To verify LITHOCHROME8 ChemstainT"' chemi ance of chemically stained concrete and approve suitability and appearance , re 0711 cally reacts with the surface of cured hardscapes and floors , producing a representative test sections as concrete to produce unique and perma clear, satin finish that seals the Chem - described in 12. Test Sections must be `V LO cent color effects . stain concrete and protects the surface produced on each individual concrete >_ LITHOCHROME Chemstain creates during everyday use . A two-coat initial surface for each color effect , prior to uneven , variegated or translucent color application and periodic maintenance general application of the chemical stain . effects much like the shadings Hato- coats of CEMENTONE Clear Sealer are Mottling and wide variations in color O ral stone or the aged a recommended . Additional information and intensity will occur. The color g appearance of a about sealing concrete flatwork is avail- obtained and the depth of penetration is o timeworn patina . Distinctive and lasting , able in Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletin not predictable , and it is not possible to w F the look obtained is ideal for exterior A - 764CEMENTONE ClearSealer. successfully stain some concrete sur- LU interior floors , walls , and O artificial rock and water features . The When more uniform color and a semi- faces . If contaminants remain on the sur- L) result is unique to each concrete sur- opaque , coated look is desired for new face , the penetration of the chemical face and cannot be duplicated with floors or to refurbish older concrete floors , stain may be blocked . Older or weath - J other coloring materials . such as those in offices , warehouses , ered concrete or areas that are fre - Chemically stained floors mimic the and commercial or light industrial build- quently exposed to runoff or dripping Ings , two coats of COLORCUREO Con- water may lack the ingredients neces- aged appearance of those from ancient crete Sealer in the matching color should sary for reaction with the chemical stain . civilizations or assume the understated be applied as a finish over the chemically Chemically stained concrete from dif- aspect of modern sculpture . Walkways stained surface . Additional information ferent loads or pours and in patched crete walls and and eye-stopping features , such as con- about sealing and finish-coating concrete areas may appear significantly different blend environmentallydrainage gnto the nland flatwork is available in Scofield 's Tech - in color from that in adjacent areas . scape . Malls and plazacome alive with Data Bulletin A -634 COLORCURE Con- The wear resistance and durability of r glare - reducing , subtly shaded color. Crete Sealer. LITHOCHROME Chemstain is depen - 3 ' Concrete water and rock features lose When uniformly colored concrete is dent on the strength and abrasion resis- their commonplace appearance and desired for new concrete installations , tance of the concrete surface to which it is c; assume a rich , natural beauty. Commer- CHROMIX Admixture , LITHOCHROME applied . Chemically stained surfaces sub- o Color Hardener, or EMERCHROME Floor ject to pedestrian and vehicular traffic will rr easy-to-maintain , polished floors . Hardener should be specified instead of require periodic maintenance and reappli r cial installations gleam with colored , The color of chemically stained con - LITHOCHROME Chemstain . These con- cation of CEMENTONE Clear Sealer or Crete is superior in durability and abrasion crete -coloring systems produce perma- COLORCURE Concrete Sealer. O resistance tthat u concrete surfaces hent, uniform , streak-free color in a wide range of standard , designer, or custom 3. Composition and Materials: LITHO- coated with acrylic stains or other types of colors . Additional information about color- CHROME Chemstain is an acidic, water- paint which can wear Or weather off ing freshly placed concrete is available in based solution of metallic salts that pen- quickly and may n with concnate . rete , Due C their Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletins A -304 etrate and react with chemicals in cured Lill chemical reaction with concrete , Chem- CHROMIX Admixtures for Color-Condi- concrete to produce insoluble color stain colors become part of the surface . tioned Concrete, A - 104 LITHOCHROME deposits in the pores . Each color is pro- They will not fade , chip, crack, or peel and Color Hardener, and A -204 EMER- duced from a different, complex propri- wear only as the concrete wears. CHROME Floor Hardener. etary formulation containing no pigments When planning new concrete installa- LITHOSEALTM Trafficalk-3GTIVI a pre or resins . They lightly etch the concrete �. tions , an additional range of color mium joint sealant formulated for high - surface to remove laitance and allow a effects is possible when the concrete is performance in pedestrian and vehicular more effective chemical reaction and i colored before the surface is chemically... traffic areas is available in standard col- deeper color penetration . .T. andards : LITHO - rri stained . LITHOCHROME � Color Hard- ors that blend with those of LITHO ener is ever or EMERCHROME ® Floor Hard- CHROME Chemrecommended forstain . Additional CHROMEChemstalicable �n complies thappli- ha hardscapes and floors since hard , dense information about sealing joints in chem - cable air quality management regulations . ically stained concrete is available in surfaces , particularly rich in color, are Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletin S-404-3G 5. Color Effects : LITHOCHROME D produced when LITHOCHROME Chem - LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G. Chemstain is available in eight standard r- stain is applied to color- hardened con colors , approximated on Scofield 's Color Crete . Concrete walls , artificial rock 2. Limitations: LITHOCHROME Chem - Chart A - 412 LITHOCHROME Chem - displays , water features , and many stain cannot be used to hide surface stain . The color effect produced is types of concrete flatwork from blemishes or to cover construction errors . unique to each concrete surface , and the addition of CHROMIX Admixture to The color produced is unique to each may differ significantly from that shown the concrete mix , providing a base color concrete surface and depends on the on the color chart . Experimentation with for the chem cal stain and producing chemical composition , mix design , stain colors and application methods is realistic and durable color effects . Addi- porosity, age , texture and color of the required . A representative test section tional information about coloring con - concrete substrate , the Chemstain color, must be prepared on the jobsite CEMENTONE . CHROMIX, COLORCURE, EMERCHROME, LITHOCHROME, LITHOSEAL. 9 . Chemstain, Trafficalk-3G. and Scofield are trademarks of L. M . Scofield Company. © L. M. Scofield Company All rights reserved concrete, chemically stained, and sealed areas can be left natural or chemically CAUSES EYE AND SKIN BURNS . MAY or finish-coated as described in 12. Test stained in a different color. Sections to verify and approve suitabilityBE FATAL IF SWALLOWED , INHALED , and color. BE or uneven applications of the OR ABSORBED THROUGH SKIN . ChemstBROKEN SKIN MAY Wide color variations , mottling , and ed color effe tsomay be p oduc dbe used. pby RESULT IN ULCONTACTICERS. PROLONGED OR unevenness of color is normal and usu- sprinkling a granular, iron soil supple - REPEATED BREATHING MAY CAUSE ally desired . These variations will be ment over the surface during the staining ULCERATION OR PERFORATION OF heightened when Chemstain flatwork is procedure or spraying the surface with NASAL MEMBRANES . CANCER HAZ- -• sealed with CEMENTONE Clear Sealer chemical stain in darker color using a ARD—CAN CAUSE CANCER . RISK OF and less apparent when it is finish hand-held plastic spray bottle. Streaked CANCER DEPENDS ON DURATION coated with COLORCURE Concrete or mottled effects may be created by lay- AND LEVEL OF EXPOSURE . ' Sealer in the matching color. ing or sprinkling absorbent materials , To produce a strong color effect on such as cloth or sawdust, over the sur- Contains Cupric Chloride , Aced , Chromic uncolored concrete or to change the face . Darker colors are normal) Chloride , Cupric Chloride , Ferrous Chlo- color of previously colored concrete , a duced under the inert material. y pro - ride , Ferric Chloride , Manganese Chlo- minimum of two Chemstain applications ride , and Sodium Dichromate . Do not get must be made , since satisfactory color 7. Textures and Slip Resistance: Only in eyes , on skin or clothing . Wear acid effects are normally not obtained with a uniformly slip - resistant concrete sur- vapor mask ( NIOSH /MSHA TC 23C single application . To achieve the faces , such as broomed , swirl , sand- approved) , goggles , gloves , protective desired color effect , two or more Chem- blasted , or most imprinted concrete ; clothing , chemical- resistant apron and stain standard colors may be intermixed should be considered for application of boots . Use only with adequate ventila- before application or applied one over LITHOCHROME Chemstain . When a tion . Do not breathe vapor or mist. Close the other while wet, or a sequence of flat interior floor is required , extra pre- container after each use . Store upright in applications may be made using a differ- cautions should be taken to insure that tightly closed containers away from com- ent color for each application. the surface is uniformly troweled so that bustible materials and sources of heat . For a greater selection of color effects , it will not be slippery. A slip-resistant flat- DO NOT TAKE INTERNALLY. KEEP a single application ti of coloHROME troweled finish is suggested. OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN . Chemstain may be made over concrete For safety considerations, a representa- Wash thoroughly immediately or handling , in after the previously colored with LITHOCHROME tive test section as described in 12. Test Mate Before using or handling , read the Color Hardener, producing a variegated Sections should be produced prior to Material Safety Data Sheet. surface color that is uniquely modified by general application and the entire surface FIRST AID : Eyes— FLUSH ATTEN - the underlying concrete color. inspected to verify and approve the ade- TION . THEN SEEK MEDICAL ATTEN- Chemstain color effects are more quacy of wet and dry slip resistance. TION . Hold eyelids apart while flushing intense on color - hardened concrete , LITHOCHROME Chemstain slightly amounts out thoroughly with large newly cured concrete , and concrete with etches the surface during application amounts of water. Ingestion—Give sev- higher cement contents . On older or lightly exposing some of the fine aggre� era) glasses I water or milk. GET MEDf- weathered concrete , the color may not gate . The depth of etch depends on the CAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. Skin— fully develop and the best results are concrete strength and porosity. Since Wash thoroughly with soap and water. ' usually produced by the darkest Chem - the substrate is harder and the concrete Remove soiled clothing and footwear stain shades . more dense , surface etching is reduced and wash before reuse . Destroy to fresh If a more polished surface a when color-hardened concrete is chemi inated shoes . Inhalation—Move to fresh appearance call stained. air. If symptoms persist or develop , get is desired for floors , LITHOCHROME y Chemstain should be applied over medical attention . ar 8. Sizes: LITHOCHROME Chemstain is In case of spillage , neutralize , absorb LITHOCHROME Color Hardener fol - available in one-gallon (3 . 8 L) and five- with inert material , and dispose of in lowed by two coats of CEMENTONE gallon ( 18 . 9 L) containers . Sample sizes accordance with applicable regulations . Clear Sealer. Due to the density of the are available for investigational use . Do not reuse empty container. color-hardened surface , etching will be minimized , and the sealer will bring out 9. Coverage: A minimum of two sepa- 12. Test Sections: Producing chemi - the full beauty of the variegated color. rate Chemstain applications is normally Cally stained concrete to achieve the Depending on the composition of the required . One application may be made desired effect requires experimentation , aggregate , LITHOCHROME Chemstain over LITHOCHROME Color Hardener skill , and practice . The color produced is may color the aggregate as well as the when a color wash is desired . Additional unique to each concrete surface and concrete matrix when applied to applications may be needed on older or depends on the chemical composition , exposed-aggregate concrete . weathered concrete surfaces or to mix design , porosity, age , texture and 6. Special Effects: Man unique desi n obtain a particular color effect. color of the concrete , the Chemstain y q 9 LITHOCHROME Chemstain should color, preparation methods and applica- effects are possible . Experimentation be applied full - strength ( unthinned ) . tion procedures , the number of Chem - with stain colors and application meth - Coverage will vary widely depending stain applications , experience in use of ods is required , and the production of on the porosity and texture of the sur- the material , sealing or finish - coating test sections is a necessity. face , composition and age of the con- materials and methods , and other fa - Dramatically patterned hardscapes Crete , preparation and application tors . Each will significantly affect the final can be created by chemically staining techniques , number of applications , appearance and performance of the adjacent sections in contrasting colors . and other factors . The coverage rate is chemically stained concrete . To verify Color variegation can be intensified or approximately 75 square feet per and approve suitability and appearance , subdued in adjoining sections by use of gallon ( 1 - 8 - 2 . 4 m 1 ) for two applica- representative test sections must be pro- Scofield 's clear or colored sealers . tions or 150 -200 square feet per gallon duced prior to general application of the Chemstain floors can be sawcut , (3 . 7 - 4 . 9 m2/L) perapplication . chemical stain on each individual con - scored, or imprinted to achieve the look of natural-stone paving or tile . Imprinted 10. Shelf Life: Under normal conditions Crete surface and for each color effect. or vertical rock patterns can be high - when properly stored , the shelf life of Test sections should be of adequate lighted by sponge application of different LITHOCHROME Chemstain is at least size to be representative , and be pro - Chemstain colors to individual stones . one year from the date of purchase . duced by the same workers who will Accent designs can be template sand- Containers should be tightly closed and apply the LITHOCHROME Chemstain blasted into the surface before or after stored upright, awayfrom direct sunlight, using the contemplated Chemstain col- Chemstain application to produce subtle combusblmateals and sources of ors , application equipment , and tech - J or striking engravings . Patterns can be heat. Inventory should be rotated. niques . All test sections should be or finish -coeformed by masking. areas with a sacrifi- 11 . Cautions : DANGER ! OXIDIZER . prepared , chemically stained , and cial coating to prevent stain deposit . CAUSES SEVERE EYE IRRITATION , s If littlechemical aled at takes place , After coating removal , the unstained POSSIBLE BLINDNESS . CORROSIVE , chemical stain in a darker color, such as Black, may produce a stronger reaction , brush is recommended . On flat interior facilitate cleaning . The surface must be It the concrete is so old or weathered floors , blue scrubbing pads may be rinsed after cleaning until the rinse water that it is not reactive it will not be possible required . Walk-behind automatic scrub- is completely clean . to successfully use a chemical stain . bing machines should be considered for Existing , older concrete must be 13. Equipment for Application and cleaning larger areas . cleaned so that the surface is completely f Preparation : LITHOCHROME Chem - 14. Preparation : A representative test Penetrable before receiving the initial stain is normally brush applied and section must be produced and application of LITHOCHROME Chem - scrubbed into the concrete surface . In approved as described in 12. Test Sec- stain . An indication of whether the con - larger areas , a hand-pump sprayer may tions. Concrete flatwork should be uni- crete is penetrable can be obtained by be used to transfer the Chemstain solu- formly and adequately textured for slip spotting the surface with water. The tion to the surface , while scrubbing . resistance as described in 7. Textures water should immediately darken the Other types of equipment , such as and Slip Resistance. substrate and be readily absorbed . If the sponges , sponge floats , lambswool Surrounding areas , landscaping , and water beads and does not penetrate or applicators , or acid-resistant spray bot- adjacent surfaces should be protected. only penetrates in some areas , additional surface preparati ties may be used to create special The work area should be roped off , on and testing must be effects . All preparation and application nearby vehicles removed , and appropri Performed . On dense , hard troweled procedures should be tested before use. ate sections closed to traffic. Needed floors , acid washing with a solution of For transferring and scrubbing , equipment , as described in 13. Equip- one part muriatic acid ( 200 Baume or brushes. should be of professional-qual- ment for Application and Preparation, 31 .4 /o pool acid) to 20 parts of water, or ity, long - handled or hand - held , with should be available . a light sandblasting , may be needed to uncolored , acid -resistant nylon bristles Prior to makin Chemstain a lica - make the surface sufficiently penetrable of medium stiffness , having the ability to tions , precautions should be taken to for the chemical stain to react. hold liquids . Inexpensive paint brushes reduce hard- water and alkali deposits The cleaning method to be co used depends on the condition of the co may be used when applying stain to that will discolor the chemically stained used small areas . They will be damaged by surface . Sprinklers and fountains should To remove dirt and other contaminants , the Chemstain solution and should be be adjusted to avoid wetting the surface . detergents and other commercial clean - frequently replaced . Brushes with col - In hard water areas , soft water should be ers should be considered and tested . ored bristles should be avoided since considered for use in water features . Pressure washing or scrubbing with a they may bleed , discoloring the surface . Though the effect achieved is primarily rotary floor machine is normally required. Push brooms will not retain the chemical P y After cleaning , the surface must be stain when lifting it from a container or dependent on the surface of the con - rinsed to remove any remaining residue . during scrubbing and should not be crete to which it is applied and not on Rinsing should continue until the rinse used.. Since they splash liquids , of b ambient temperatures , weather condi - water is completely Clean : Wet vacuums floor machines are not recommended tions should also be considered when may be helpful to remove dirty water, par- Rollers or mops should not be used Planning Chemstain applications . The ticularly from interior floors . After drying , because they cannot effective) scrub chemical stain will dry faster and may the surface must be carefully inspected y require more material or additional appli- and retested for penetrability. If neces- the Chemstain solution into the surface, cations to produce the desired results in sary, additional general or spot cleaning ,, .. Containers for holding chemical stain hot , dry, and windy weather. Rain will and rinsing should be performed. / during brush application should be acid- wash the chemical stain from the surface resistant, nonleakin wide - mouthed prematurely and runoff may stain adja- Concrete that has been previously plastic pails . They should be large cent areas or damage landscaping . coated with liquid curing materials , enough to allow the entire bristle section Before chemically staining the concrete Paints , coatings , waxes , or water repel- to be dipped into the Chemstain solution . surface , all dirt, form oil , plaster stains , lants, or surfaces that cannot be success- Use of a plastic mop bucket with rubber oil , and grease must be completely fully cleaned by other methods must be casters will facilitate application and removed by cleaning . Coatings , water sandblasted . Sandblasting must be suffi reduce bucket marks or ringing from liquid repellents , previously applied adhesives , cient so that the coatings or contaminants running down the side of the container. and curing membranes must be removed are completely removed . Sand remaining Metal containers should never be used as by sandblasting , though small spots of on the surface should be removed by they rapidly corrode and may change the aint ma be removed with a scra er and sweeping or by pressure washing before P color of the Chemstain solution . y P the concrete is chemically stained. a commercial paint stripper. Acid wash - For transferring solution to the sur- ing should normally not be used as a 15. Application: All surfaces must be face, the hand-pump sprayer must be cleaning procedure , since it removes dry and properly prepared as described of professional quality and should nor- necessary reactants from the surface . in 14. Preparation. mally be equipped with a fan tip . All Failure to remove all contaminants and Surrounding areas , landscaping , and parts that will be in contact with the coatings that impede the penetration of adjacent surfaces must be masked or chemical stain should be made from LITHOCHROME Chemstain into the acid-resistant plastic . The use of an air- concrete will cause appearance defects . Protected from spills , d runoff. tracking , less sprayer is not recommended. equipment contact, and runoff. The work Newly placed concrete should be suf- area should be roped off, nearby vehicles For residue and runoff collection , an ficiently cured to allow the concrete to removed , and appropriate sections acid-resistant wet vacuum may be used become reactive , a minimum of 14 days . closed to traffic. Adjoining walls of porous or residue and runoff can be absorbed Liquid curing materials must not be used . material , such as masonry, should be by scattering an inert material , such as Concrete flatwork should be cured with masked . The surface should be divided sawdust, over the surface or by wiping new and unwrinkled, nonstaining , high- into small work sections using walls , joint with rags , quality curing paper. Overlapping the lines, or other stationary features as natu - For cleaning horizontal or vertical curing paper should be avoided when ral stopping points . This allows for easier concrete, the pressure washer should be possible , since the color may appear dif- control of coverage , wet edge , and over- equipped with a fan tip with an adjustable ferent under the overlapped sections . lap. For safety and appearance , applica- pressure range up to 2, 500 psi ( 170 bar) For a more similar color appearance , tion procedures should be planned so and an output of up to 4 . 5 gallons per all surfaces should be cured by the same that the wet surface is not stepped on . minute ( 17 L /min) . Hot water capability method and be chemically stained when Safety precautions must be followed and may facilitate cleaning of existing con - the concrete is the same age . full protective gear must be worn . crete . Nonmarking hoses are helpful . Immediately prior to chemically stain - LITHOCHROME Chemstain should be For cleaning flatwork, the rotary floor ing , the concrete must be thoroughly applied full strength ( unthinned ) at the machine should be heavy duty and oper- cleaned . The surface should be swept, coverage rate given in 9. Coverage and ate at 175 RPM . It may be equipped with then pressure washed or scrubbed using using the equipment described in brushes or with apad - driver that a rotary floor machine . Use of a high - 13. Equipment for Application and Prep- securely holds pads in place . For clean- quality commercial detergent , such as aration. The color of the liquid Chem - ing, a stiff-bristled bassine or nylon scrub LITHOCHROME® Floor Cleaner, will stain solution will have no resemblance to the final color produced on the con - Proper safety precautions must be taken with LITHOSEAL Trafficalk- 3G , a pre- crete surface . The solution will appear to prevent contact with the surface until mium-quality, colored joint sealant spe- transparent when first applied but will the stain residue is removed and the sur- cially formulated for high performance in assume a cloudy or muddy appearance face rinsed. pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas , as the chemical reaction occurs. For one-color or mixed-color applica- Selecting LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G in a LITHOCHROME Chemstain normally tions , the chemically reacted residue color that blends with the Chemstain sur- fizzes while reacting . If fizzing does not should not be removed from the surface face provides harmonious transitions at occur, the surface has not been ade - before the next Chemstain application is the joint lines and allows the beauty of quately prepared or the concrete is not made . When different colors are used in the design to dominate . Additional infor- sufficiently reactive to be chemically consecutive applications , the surface is mation about joint design , preparation , ' stained . If contaminants are preventing normally washed between applications and sealant installation is available in the chemical reaction from occurring , so that the color effect can be evaluated Scofield 's Tech- Data Bulletin S-404-3G additional cleaning as described in before another color is applied. LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G. 14. Preparation must be performed . After the final application of LITHO - 18. Availability: LITHOCHROME Chem- The Chemstain solution should be CHROME Chemstain has remained on stain is marketed nationwide and interna- transferred to the surface by brush or the surface for a minimum of approxi - tionally, directly to the user through spray and immediately scrubbed in . For mately four hours , all residue must be strategically located warehouses, dealers , most applications the solution should be removed by wet scrubbing with a high- and representatives . Scofield should be poured into a wide- mouthed container, quality, commercial detergent, such as contacted for its nearest representative. then lifted from the container to the con- LITHOCHROME Floor Cleaner, using a crete surface with the brush , bristles rotary floor machine or a stiff- bristle 19. Costs : Material costs will vary upward to reduce splashing . In larger brush . The surface must be rinsed after depending on the porosity and texture of areas or on vertical surfaces , spray scrubbing until the rinse water is com - the surface , composition and age of the equipment may be used to transfer the pletely clean . Runoff may stain adjacent concrete , and the effect desired . The solution to the concrete . Working as a areas or harm plants . It should be col- material cost f . o . b . Scofield 's ware - team , one workman should spray the lected by wet-vacuuming or absorbing houses is approximately 480 to 66¢ per Chemstain solution evenly a few inches with an inert material . square foot for two applications at the ahead of the brush while a second work- All stain residue , runoff liquid , absor- rate of 75 2100 square feet per gallon man scrubs it into the surface , bent materials used during application, ( 1 .8 - 2 .4 m /L) , or 240 to 330 per appli- Whether transferred to the surface by and discarded equipment should be dis- cation at the rate of 150 - 200 square feet brush or spray, the chemical solution posed of in accordance with local , state , per gallon (3 . 7 — 4 . 9 m2/L) . Prices are must be scrubbed in by brush as soon as and federal regulations, subject to change. it touches the concrete , using a circular 16. Sealing or Finish Coating Con - 20. Maintenance: Chemically stained or figure-eight motion . Working in small 16. S Flatwork: in soon as g and sealed hardscapes or floors should sections and keeping the brush in con- after the concrete has been chemically le be maintained by sweeping . Spills should stant contact with the surface and in con - Y be cleaned when they occur. Dirt may be tinuous motion , the Chemstain solution stained , rinsed , and allowed to dry thor- hosed off with water. Heavilysoiled areas ' should be gradually spread until all fizz- oughly, a minimum of approximately may be wet-cleaned by mopping r b ing action ceases . To avoid lap marks , 24 hours , the surface should be sealed scrubbing with a rotary floor mchine reacted solution should not be spread to or finish -coated . CEMENTONE Clear equipped with a scrubbing brush and a new work sections , but should be Sealer should be used to seal and pro- properly diluted , high-quality commercial brushed back over the section just tect chemically stained concrete hard- detergent , such as LITHOCHROME treated . New applications of chemical scapes or floors when the natural , Floor Cleaner. For larger areas walk- stain should be overlapped with and variegated appearance of the Chem - behind or ride- on automatic scrubbers worked into the edges of adjacent, still- stain surface is desired . When a more are efficient and cost effective. wet , previously treated areas . A wet opaque , coated appearance is desired , shin Interior floors that require polishing edge must be maintained . Chemstain flatwork should be finish - q p coated with COLORCURE Concrete should be maintained by using a com - During brushing the surface should be Sealer in the matching or a similar color. patible , premium - grade , emulsion - thoroughly and uniformly saturated with type , commercial floor polish following the liquid Chemstain solution , but it Two coats should be applied evenly by the manufacturer 's instructions and should not be splashed , dripped or airless sprayer at the rate of safety requirements , allowed to puddle in joint indentations 300 - 400 square feet per gallon A maintenance application of CEMEN - and depressions unless desired for the (7- 10 m2/L) per coat. When using COL- TONE Clear Sealer or COLORCURE color effect . Stepping on wet surfaces oRCUR a Concrete f floor on neflat nte- Concrete Sealer should be made period- should also be avoided . Such irregulari- �' y be ically as the sealer or finish coat is worn ties or footprints will appear darker than used, but spray application is . normally off the surface . Additional information the surrounding surface and normally recommendof colored oeunc uncolored flatd when work becausthe e about the maintenance and recoating of should be brushed out immediately and sealed or finish -coated surfaces is avail- permitted to d even) it produces a more opaque color. Addi- e dry Y• able in Scofield's Tech - Data Bulletins tional information on application and A - 764 CEMENTONE Clear Sealer or The Chemstain solution should be maintenance is available in Scofield 's applied to vertical surfaces in the same Tech - Data Bulletins A - 764 CEMEN A -634 COLORCURE Concrete Sealer. manner. Application should start at the TONE Clear Sealer and A -634 COLOR- 21. Warranty: LITHOCHROME Chem - bottom and proceed upward . Excessive CURE Concrete Sealer stain is warranted to be of uniform quality rundown should be avoided . All surfaces should be thoroughly within manufacturing tolerances . Since Reaction time depends on wind condi- inspected to verify and approve installa- no control is exercised over its use , no tions , ambient temperature, and humidity. tion , wet and dry slip resistance , and warranty, express or implied , is made as Whether the Chemstain solution remains safety prior to opening the area to traffic. to the effects of such use . Seller's and wet or dries on the surface , it should be manufacturer 's obligation under this allowed to remain in contact with the con- 17. Joint Sealing: All joints in chemi - warranty shall be limited to refunding the crete until the desired effect is obtained , cally stained flatwork through which purchase price of that portion of the a minimum of approximately four hours . water may penetrate should be sealed material proven to be defective . Suggested Short Form Specification for Chemically Staining Concrete Flatwork: All concrete surfaces designated in the plans and speci- fications as being chemically stained shall receive two applications of LITHOCHROMEe Chemstain TM in color after the concrete ✓ has cured a minimum of approximately 14 days . The surface shall be prepared and LITHOCHROMEe ChemstainTM shall be applied in accor- dance with the ScofieldTm Tech- Data Bulletin A-414 using the recommended minimum coverage rate. All chemically stained surfaces shall be sealed with CEMENTONEe Clear Sealer in accordance with the ScofieldTm Tech- Data Bulletin A-764 (or COLORCUREe Concrete Sealer in the matching color in accordance with Scofield 's Tech-Data Bulletin A -634). All joints in chemically stained flatwork shall be sealed using LITHO- SEALTN' Trafficalk-3G 'm in the blending color in accordance with Scofield's Tech-Data Bulletin S-404-3G LITHOSEAL11 Trafficalk -3GTM . All prod ucts shall be manufactured by L. M . Scofield Company, (800) 800-9900 , Los Angeles , CA, (213) 720-3000 and Atlanta, GA, (770) 920-6000. Prinle0 onA r�IM paper0J - L . M . SCOFIELD COMPANY MANUFACTURER & MARKEER OF BUILDINGSINCE 1933 Do & Dont Guide 6533 BANDINI BLVD. • LOS ANGELES, ICTAUFORNIA 90040 LITHOCHROME ® CHEMSTAIN TM 4155 SCOFIELD ROAD • DOUGLASVILLE, GEORGIA 30134 District offices and warehouses nationwide. Inquiries: (800) 800-9900 GUIDE 6 - 407 . 01 - Los Angeles, CA: (213) 720-3000 Fax (213) 720-3030 N Atlanta, GA: (404) 920-6000 Fax (404 ) 920-6060 J Q W This guide is meant as a quick reference only. Read the appropriate Scofield '"M Tech - Data Bulletins for additional informa- 2 tion , special effects , and installation instructions. ►WU W- Producing chemically stained concrete to achieve the desired effect requires skill and practice . Follow professional con- creting standards and practices , including those published by the American Concrete Institute (ACI ) and the Portland Ce- 0 ment Association ( PCA) . U s �' ' .. "2 4 e 3 ¢f`wx xar� v 4ay, 1 " ry rr ` df: t . "-X� M1 x 'rjtr Fx .x•yFf'+ h „x .v [ a tT f 1Y k T 4 M 4s "3Kr �44x� jLlrtt-� OCHROJVI6� Cyh emstau { .3 .. .: .:., .. .A'Y yf�' v ":{ r < `` :, '. •.i •,,Y', �tj� '� Y �•fii4r ti Zx.Sv„ .st�" +�'t�,`L�r.< A:,,: '}_ L, ' _ $f, .. � -`!` � .et. s,,,,t N. i �.UK : .j�� w3 A a � � is ���� Benefits • Variegated , uneven color effects , much like the shadings of natural stone or timeworn concrete . � � � • Colors old or new, uncolored or previously colored concrete . } Q • Chemical reaction produces permanent color effects . o • Color will not fade , chip , or peel and wears only as the concrete wears . J • Application over LITHOCHROMP Color Hardener gives a wider range of color effects . o Coverage • To color uncolored or previously colored concrete , make two applications of Chemstain solution . cn 0 • For a color wash over LITHOCHROME Color Hardener, make one application of Chemstain solution . • Additional applications may be needed on older or weathered concrete surfaces or for special effects . .J • Apply at the coverage rate of 150 - 200 square feet per gallon (3 . 7- 5 . 0 m2/L) per application . LITHOCHRO b E� ` FBefore M Ghems alrin App11 ioProcedures {idxx Nying LITHOCHROME Chemstain , read Scofield 's Tech Data Bulletins A -414 LITHOCHROME8, A - 764 CEMENTONE ® Concrete Sealer or A -634 COLORCUREO Concrete Sealer, and S-404-3G LITHOSEAL "m Trafficalk-3t9rm . Before applying LITHOCHROME Color Hardener read Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletin �. A - 104 LITHOCHROME Color Hardener. C The color effects produced by LITHOCHROME Chemstain vary widely and are unique to every surface . Successfully producing a chemically stained surface requires experimentation with stain colors and application methods . Prepare and chemically stain a representative test section on each individual concrete surface and for each color effect prior to general Chemstain application . _ Al, yam, i� y,KE �{ 'c' << Zw ! XSy+ .ex ,$ � , g P,. { 1� D� ..� � .z t . ' ` ;; Don 't Preparation • Protect surrounding areas , landscaping , and • Don 't chemically stain concrete flatwork that adjacent surfaces . Rope off work area , remove has not been uniformly and adequately textured nearby vehicles , and close appropriate sections for slip resistance . to traffic. . CA Don 't cure freshly placed concrete flatwork with • Verify that all concrete flatwork is uniformly and liquid curing compounds . Don 't chemically stain adequately textured for slip resistance . concrete until it is sufficiently cured , a minimum of • Cure freshly placed concrete flatwork with new 14 days . and unwrinkled , nonstaining , kraft paper. • Don 't make an initial Chemstain application un- • Completely remove all dirt , form oil , plaster less the surface is completely penetrable . stains , oil , and grease by cleaning with a pres- • Don 't use acid washing as a cleaning procedure . sure washer, a rotary floor machine , a walk-be - Use only if needed to open the surface of dense , D hind automatic scrubbing machine , or a stiff- hard -troweled floors to make them penetrable . U bristled bassine or nylon scrub brush . • Don 't leave residue from cleaning on the sur- e Completely remove all coatings , waxes , water face . Thoroughly rinse surfaces after scrubbing . repellents , previously applied adhesives , and Remove sand after sandblasting . curing membranes by sandblasting . CEMENTONE, COLIORCURE. LITHOCHROME, LITHOSEAL, © . Chemstain, Scofield, and © L M . Scofield Company 1995 Trafficalk-3G are trademarks of L. M. Scofield Company. All rights reserved "+3 *' • f" i £y T 4 '""" : ny ' ' J ,'r y'3 "nt `?.' cr LITHOCHROME® I .Chemstain4 FApplicatio�n, proKf. edtrlre (�or�tinoed) Y t+y. � z•�ro 3`.yfsr• ' S.".+.•..i [C.,3°+Y >" , ' K ' .Py^" ' .'.y. , Oib - u Y P $:� e{*_'fay� n . •.�'? ,. l(. K .x ,. - Y`d 'b1 `s =v, ��, , x ,a r3 �� • .;_ i N . .4 k' '• „k yiP yirhs Application • Protect all surrounding areas , landscaping , and • Don 't use LITHOCHROME Chemstain to hide adjacent surfaces from spills , overspray, tracking , surface blemishes or construction errors , equipment contact, and runoff. • Don 't thin the Chemstain solution ora I It at • Divide the surface into small work sections using less than the recommended coverage rate unless natural stopping points such as walls or joint lines. required for a special color effect. • Follow safety precautions and wear full protec- • Don 't allow the Chemstain solution to run down tive gear, the sides of the pail and drip to the surface or to • Transfer the Chemstain solution to the surface collect under the pail , forming permanent rings . 1 and scrub with a professional-quality, long-han- • Don 't use metal containers for holding the died or hand- held , acid-resistant brush with un- Chemstain solution during application . colored nylon bristles of medium 'stiffness : : Don 't use push brooms , rollers , rotary floor ma- • Use an acid-resistant, nonleaking , wide- chines , or mops for transferring and scrubbing . mouthed , plastic pail for holding the Chemstain . Don't continue an application if the surface does solution while transferring and scrubbing . not fizz when the Chemstain solution is applied , • If desired , use an acid-resistant, hand-pump since no reaction is taking place . sprayer to transfer the solution while scrubbing . . Don 't step on wet surfaces or allow the Chem - Scrub the Chemstain solution into the surface stain solution to be tracked to adjacent areas . as soon as it touches the concrete using a figure- . Don 't allow the Chemstain solution to splash , eight motion and keeping the brush in constant contact with the surface. drip , or puddle , unless desired for a color effect. • Maintain a wet edge , keep the surface thor- ' Don 't spread reacted Chemstain solution to oughly and uniformly saturated, and gradually new work sections , but brush it back over the spread the Chemstain solution with the brush un - section just treated . til all fizzing stops . • Don 't allow excessive rundown during vertical • Brush out footprints or other irregularities imme- Chemstain applications, diately so they don 't show as darker areas on the • Don 't remove the chemically reacted residue finished surface . from the surface between Chemstain applica- • Start vertical Chemstain applications at the bot- tions unless desired to evaluate the color effect. ' tom and work upwards . • Don 't allow contact with the surface between ap- e Allow the Chemstain solution to remain on the Plications or after the final application until the res- surface between applications and after the final idue is removed and the surface rinsed. application until the chemical reaction is com- • Don 't allow spillage , reacted residue , runoff , or plete , a minimum of approximately four hours , discarded equipment to contact adjacent areas . • Remove reacted residue by wet scrubbing with Collect liquids and residue by wet-vacuuming or a commercial detergent and a rotary floor ma- absorbing with inert materials , and dispose of chine , then rinsing the surface until the rinse wa- them in accordance with applicable regulations . ter is completely clean . • Don 't reuse empty containers . Sealing • To protect the concrete during everyday use and intensify its natural , variegated appearance , seal or Finish- the surface with CEMENTONE Clear Sealer. Coating . When a more uniform color and a semi-opaque , coated look is desired for new or refurbished floors Concrete or hardscapes , finish -coat the surface with COLORCURE Concrete Sealer in the matching color. Flatwo • Apply two coats of CEMENTONE Clear Sealer or COLORCURE Concrete Sealer by airless sprayer at the rate of 300 square feet per gallon (7 m2/L) as soon as possible after the concrete has been chemically stained , rinsed , and allowed to dry thoroughly, a minimum of approximately 24 hours . ' Sealant • Seal all horizontal joints with LITHOSEALTm Trafflcalk 3G TM in a blending color, r . . >b (DANGERS - tnl rxTi°C'�=.. � dF ,a zn t.-n-*�-,a`�, a , '%� � ., �� ra ,x"'c , rfl''a.>w,�s .. , Mr-rx:- ' 4�. 4 K ¢` •�e OXIDIZER. CAUSES SEVERE EYE IRRITATION, POSSIBLE BLINDNESS . CORROSIVE, CAUSES EYE AND SKIN BURNS. MAY BE FATAL IF SWALLOWED, 1 INHALED, OR ABSORBED THROUGH SKIN. CONTACT WITH BROKEN SKIN MAY RESULT IN ULCERS. PROLONGED OR REPEATED BREATHING MAY CAUSE ULCERATION OR PERFORATION OF NASAL MEMBRANES. CANCER HAZARD—CAN CAUSE CANCER. RISK OF CANCER DEPENDS ON DURA- TION AND LEVEL OF EXPOSURE. Contains Hydrochloric Acid, Chromic Chloride , Cupric Chloride, Ferrous Chloride, Ferric Chloride, Manganese Chloride , and Sodium Dichromate. Do not get in eyes, on skin or clothing. Wear acid vapor mask (NIOSH/MSHA TC 23C approved) , goggles, gloves, protective clothing, chem- ical-resistant apron and boots. Use only with adequate ventilation . Do not breathe vapor or mist. Close container after each use. Store upright in tightly closed containers away from combustible materials and sources of heat. DO NOT TAKE INTERNALLY. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN . Wash thoroughly immediately after handling. Before using or handling , read the Materia! Safety Data Sheet and Warranty. FIRST AID : Eyes—FLUSH IMMEDIATELY THEN SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION. Hold eyelids apart while flushing material out thoroughly with large amounts of water. Ingestion--Give several glasses of water or milk. GET MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. Skin—Wash thoroughly with soap and water. Remove soiled clothing and footwear and wash before reuse. Destroy contaminated shoes. Inhalation—Move to fresh air. If symptoms persist or develop, get medical attention . Printedon Vi recycled OaDer �.� CEMENTONEO M5338ANDINscoFlELo COMPANY MANUFACTURER & MARKETER OF BUILDING SPECIALTIES SINCE 1933 SIB 4155 SCORELD ROAD • DO GLASVIL EAGEORGIA 300134 CLEAR SEALER Offices and warehouses nationw de and internationally. Inquiries: (BOO) aoo_9900 Los Angeles, CA: (213) 720 -3000 Fax (213) 720 - 3030 TECH- DATA BULLETIN A -764 . 02 Atlanta. GA: (770) 920- 6000 Fax (770) 920 -6060 LM SCOFIELD EUROPE LTD, UK: 44 1226-732222 _Q W A premium - quality, durable , water- wear-resistant surface rich with subtle If applied improperly or too heavily, W based , clear sealer for protecting colors . Additional information about cre- the surface may whiten , peel , or I— antiqued-imprinted , chemically stained, ating Colorstone flatwork is available in become slippery, particularly on exposed-aggregate, and uncolored con- Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletin A - 904 pool decks or other areas where Z Crete hardscapes and floors . LITHOTEX Colorstone. water may stand on the surface. v Exposed-aggregate finishes also ben- efit from being coated with CEMEN - 2, Limitations: CEMENTONE Clear (� 1 . Description and Uses: CEMEN - TONE Clear Sealer. The color of the Sealer must be protected from freezing . PMON NON TONES Clear Sealer is designed for aggregate is enhanced and the porous Once frozen an ' thawed , it must not be sealing new or old , interior or exterior, concrete surface is sealed and pro - used . All clear sealers will accentuate , Ito concrete flatwork where a clear, low- tected, Attractive color effects are pos- any nonuniformity in concrete color, tex- a' gloss to semi-gloss finish is desired. It is sible when the concrete matrix is } especially effective when used over colored with CHROMIX ® Admixture for ture , or finish . Z multicolored architectural concrete fin - Color-Conditioned Concrete in a con - CEMENTONE onco Clear Sealer must only 2 ishes . For most other colored-concrete trasting or blending color, Additional be used on concrete that is placed on a o flatwork, the ScofieldTM color-matched information about integrally colored , well-drained substrate and not subject S0 curing and finishing products are rec- exposed-aggregate concrete finishes is to hydrostatic pressure . Alkali or hard- U.1 ommended . Additional information available in Scofield's Tech-Data Bulle- water deposits may form on or under tL about curing and finishing colored con- tins A -304 CHROMIX Admixtures for the coating at edges , cracks , joints , Crete is available in the ScofieldTm Tech- Color-Conditioned Concrete and T-203 depressions or other locations where U) Data Bulletins A -514 LITHOCHROME® LITHOTEX® Top Surface Retarder. water collects or enters the substrate .Colorwax and A -634 COLORCUREO CEMENTONE Clear Sealer is espe- Potted plants or other damp objects Concrete Sealer. cially effective when used over concrete may leave deposits ; stains , or "shad - As a premium - quality, water-based flatwork colored with LITHOCHROME ® ows" if allowed to remain on the sealed environmentally compatible coating , ChemstainTM concrete for an extended period of time . CEMENTONE Clear Sealer offers excel- variegated or translucent color effects Due to greater retention of moisture in lent durability while complying with the much like the shadings of natural stone the slab , CEMENTONE Clear Sealer most stringent air-quality regulations, or the patina of timeworn concrete . should not be used to seal concrete that CEMENTONE Clear Sealer reduces CEMENTONE Clear Sealer intensifies contains reactive aggregates since the surface staining from materials such as the variegated appearance while pro- possibility of popouts will be increased . r automotive oil , grease , and food spills . tecting the surface during everyday CEMENTONE Clear Sealer should It produces a low- maintenance film use . Additional information about not be used in areas subject to continu- resistant to abrasion , deicing salts , chemically staining concrete is avail- Ous water submersion or chemical p many chemicals , weather, and ultravio- able in Scofield's Tech - Data Bulletin exposure , concentrated abrasion and T let ( UV) radiation - It is helpful in prevent- A-414 LITHOCHROME Chemstain. scratching , or metal-wheeled traffic. On ing concrete dusting , and the sealed Warehouse , factory, and many other areas subject to forklift traffic, the use of surface is easier to clean and maintain . interior floors should normally be sealed nonmarking tires is recommended to CEMENTONE Clear Sealer offers to protect the concrete surface and facili- avoid unsightly, black tire marks . K excellent protection for imprinted-con- tate cleanup. Applied to these surfaces, Unless it is to be stripped later, CEMEN- crete surfaces , especially over LITHO- CEMENTONE Clear Sealer becomes TONE Clear Sealer should not be used CHROME ® Color Hardener that has part of an ongoing floor maintenance pro- in areas that require the application of co been textured with a mat-type imprint- gram. CEMENTONE Clear Sealer may adhesives for floor coverings . ing tool and antiqued by means of be top coated with a compatible , com- CEMENTONE Clear Sealer must be LITHOCHROMEOAntiquing Release , mercial floor polish . For improved allowed to dry completely before it is a powdered , colored release agent . appearance on colored-concrete floors, subjected to temperatures below 42° F This type of surface requires initial color-matched COLORCURE Concrete ( 6 ° C ) or to water from any source . coating and periodic recoating with a Sealer is recommended as described in Water-based sealers applied to improp- clear sealer to preserve its antiqued Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulletin A -634 erly prepared surfaces , applied too appearance over time . Additional infor- COLORCURE Concrete Sealer. Add!- heavily or puddled in joints and indenta- mation about coloring concrete by the tional information about coloring and tions , or that cannot dry properly may m dry - shake method and creating hardening interior floors is available in become sensitive to water, experience � I antiqued , colored concrete finishes is Scofield 's Tech- Data Bulletins A - 104 adhesion failure , whiten or soften . available in Scofield 's Tech - Data Bulle- LITHOCHROME Color Hardener and Application should not be made on sur- tins A - 104 LITHOCHROME Color A -204 EMERCHROMEOF1oorHardener. faces previously treated with a pene- �➢ Hardener and A -854 LITHOCHROME trating water repellent. Antiquing Release. WARNING CEMENTONE Clear Sealer is a pre- CEMENTONE Clear Sealer should be CEMENTONE Clear Sealer must only mium -quality coating, and like all such used over LITHOTEXTM ColorstoneTM be used in thin coats on surfaces coatings , will require periodic mainte- flatwork. LITHOTEX Colorstone creates adequately textured for slip resis- nance and reapplication . Spills should elegant , multicolored , architectural - tance. Unless used on surfaces pre- be removed promptly and floors concrete hardscapes and floors with a viously coated with the sealer, they cleaned regularly to minimize possible textured , stogie- like appearance and a must be porous to allow penetration. staining and damage to the sealer. CEMENTONE, CHROMIX. COLORCURE. EMERCHROME, LITHOCHROME, LITHOSEAL, LITHOTEX, ©, Chemstain, Colorstone, Colorwax. Scofield. and Trafficalk-3G are trademarks of L. M. Scofield Company. © 1996 L. M. All rights Company All rights reserved. 3. Composition and Materials : other means to ensure fresh air entry For safety considerations , a represen- ' CEMENTONE Clear Sealer represents during application and drying . If you ex- tative test area as described in 12. Prep- the most advanced polymer technology perience eye watering , headaches or aration must always be prepared and available . It is a proprietary water- dizziness, increase fresh air or wear res- sealed prior to general application and borne , modified methyl - methacrylate piratory protection (NIOSH/MSHA TC the entire job inspected after completion emulsion . Its viscosity is optimized for 23C or equivalent) or leave the area. to verify and approve the adequacy of surface penetration , leveling ability, and First Aid : Eyes — DO NOT RUB wet and dry slip resistance . ease of application by airless sprayer EYES . Immediately flush thoroughly without thinning . Some separation oc- with plenty of water. Skin—Wash thor- 11 . Equipment for Application and ' curs during storage that will be easily oughly with soap and water. Inhalation— Preparation: An airless sprayer is re- reincorporated when stirred before Move to fresh air. quired for most applications of CEMEN- using . Cleanup is with soap and water. If symptoms persist or develop or if TONE Clear Sealer. On flat interior 4. Applicable Standards and Bul/d- ingested , get medical attention . Wash floors if application is not by airless ' ing Codes : CEMENTONE Clear thoroughly immediately after handling . sprayer, a lambswool applicator should Sealer complies with all applicable air Close container after each use . Before be used . Hand-pump sprayers or rollers quality management regulations includ- using or handling , read the Material are not recommended because they ing those restricting VOC content to Safety Data Sheet and Warranty. cannot apply the material evenly. All 1 less than 350 g/L (2.92 Ib/gal) , equipment should be rinsed regularly 9. Chemical Resistance and Staining: with water and periodically washed with C� Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories Chemical resistance may vary depend- soap and water. Use of a pressure �� Inc.® as to slip resistance only. 61-90 ing on condition of concrete substrate , Washer, a rotary floor machine , or a ' surface preparation , method of applica- walk-behind automatic scrubbing ma- chine will facilitate cleaning . 5. Sizes: CEMENTONE Clear Sealer is tion , and length of time the chemical has available from stock in one gallon remained on the surface . The following For general application , the airless (3.8 L) and five gallon ( 18 . 9 L) pails. chart for assessing chemical and stain sprayer must be of professional sure resistance should be considered as a of with a variable output fluid pressure 6. Coverage : CEMENTONE Clear guide only. When protection is required of 1 , 500 fitted w psi ( 100 — 170 bar) , Sealer must be applied full strength or resistance to staining is important, a and be fitted with a fan -tip size of 0 . 013 - 0 . 018 inches (0 . 33 - 0 . 46 mm ) . without thinning by airless sprayer or, test application should be made with the on flat interior floors only, by lambswool materials involved to determine if the For application on flat interior floors applicator. The coverage will vary de - coating is suitable , only, the lambswool applicator should pending on the method of application be of high quality, 12 to 18 inches wide , and the porosity and texture of the sur- CHEMICAL AND STAIN RESISTANCE with either a natural or a synthetic face. Two coats are normally required lambswool pile . An adequate supply of on uncoated or stripped concrete . One Reagent 1 Flour 1 Day 1 Week refill pads should be available so they ' NE NE NE coat is usually sufficient on concrete Antifre ze NE NE NE may be changed whenever necessary. previously coated with CEMENTONE Brake Fluid 2c 2C 2C For preparation , the pressure ' Chlorine (Pool Powder) NE NE NE washer should be equipped with a fan Clear Sealer. Application of more than two spray coats is not normal ) recom- Cutting NE NE NE P adjustable pressure range up P Y y ti with an mended. If required , an additional coat Detergent (Industrial1-iq. ) NE 1C. 1D 2C, 7D to 2 , 500 psi ( 170 bar) and an output of Y e applied to at interior floors by may blied fla Ethanol 1C 1C,3D 1C,3D up to 4. 5 gallons per minute ( 17 Umin ) . Gasoline (Reg. Unleaded) 2C 2C 3C lambswool applicator. Milk NE NE NE Hot water capability may facilitate For application by airless sprayer, Mineral otor snE 30) NNE NE NE E NE NE cleaning of existing concrete . Nonmark- the recommended coverage rate per Murlatic Acid (Pool Acid) NE 1D F ing hoses are helpful . coat is 300 -400 square feet per gallon Salt Solution NE NE NE For preparation , the rotary floor (7 - 10 m2/L) . Cola Sugar softDrink NE NE NE machine should be heavy duty and For application by lambswool appli- Transmission Fluid NE NE NE operate at 175 RPM . It may be cator on flat interior floors only, the Vinegar NE 1D 1D equipped with brushes or with a "pad recommended coverage rate for the first Xylene F F F driver" that securely holds pads in coatis 800 - 1000 square feet per gallon NE No effect F Failed place . A stiff-bristled bassine or nylon (20 -25 m2/L) . The recommended cov- 1C Slight softening 1D Slight staining scrub brush is recommended . On flat 2c Moderate softening 2D Moderate staining erage rate for additional or maintenance 3C Considerable softening 3D Considerable staining interior floors , blue scrubbing or black coats is 1000 — 1600 square feet per stripping pads may be required . Walk- gallon (25 -40 m2/L) . During testing, liquid chemicals were in constant contact behind automatic scrubbing machines with the sealer. Chemicals that evaporate rapidly from the should be considered for cleaning surface will have less effect than shown. 7. Shelf Life: When stored indoors in larger areas . the original unopened containers and protected from freezing and extreme 10. Textures and Slip Resistance: 12. Preparation: Sealing of concrete heat , the shelf life of CEMENTONE Only uniformly slip- resistant concrete flatwork takes skill and practice . Prior to Clear Sealer is at least one year from surfaces , such as broomed , swirl or general application , a representative the date of purchase . Inventory shouldoate sandblasted , acid - jobsite *test area must be prepared and be rotated since product improvements etched, expose -aggregate, or most im- coated to verify and approve proper are made without notice as new tech - printed-concrete should be considered surface preparation , adhesion , wet and nologies become available . for application . Textures that are not slip dry slip resistance , performance , appli- resistant must be roughened by some cation techniques, and coverage . 8. Cautions: Use only with adequate texturing method such as acid etching , During cleaning and stripping , all sur- ventilation . Avoid contact with eyes and sandblasting , or machine scarifying . rounding areas should be closed to traf- skin . DO NOT TAKE INTERNALLY. When a flat interiorfloor is required, extra fic , roped off , and protected . Testing KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN . precautions should be taken to ensure should be performed to verify that the Contains Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl that the surface is uniformly troweled so cleaning or stripping methods and mate- Ether. To avoid breathing vapors or spray that it will not be slippery. A slip-resistant rials will not damage the concrete. Before mist, open windows and doors or use flat-troweled finish is suggested. sealing the concrete surface , all dirt, oil , PawherS auF � L0A� -AQP 5 (aas IN .BGG �4AX 511. 775/is s7,;P </(Z previously applied curing compounds , water. The water should immediately removed , and appropriate sections and coatings must be completely darken the substrate and be readily closed to traffic . The surface should be removed. Failure to remove all contami- absorbed. If the water beads and does divided into work sections using walls , nants and coatings that impede the pen- not penetrate or onlypenetrates in some P joint lines , or other stationary features etration of the initial coat of areas , additional surface preparation as natural stopping points . This allows CEMENTONE Clear Sealer into the con- and testing must be performed . for easier control of coverage , wet crete will cause appearance defects , The cleaning method to be used edge , and overlap . adhesion loss , peeling , and reduced depends on the surface finish and the An airless sprayer must be used to durability. Water-based sealers must not condition of the concrete . Detergents , coat all concrete surfaces , except that be applied over a surface previously paint removers , or other commercial on flat interior floors lambswool appli- treatedwith apenetrating water repellent. cleaners should be considered and cators may be used . An airless sprayer To reduce hard-water and alkali depos- tested . Pressure washing or scrubbing produces an abrasion-resistant appli- its , sprinklers and fountains should be with a rotary floor machine is normally . _ cation with a low-gloss to semi-gloss adjusted to avoid wetting of the surface. required . After cleaning , the surface finish . Curbs and risers are easily In hard-water areas , soft water should must be rinsed to remove any remain - spray coated . be considered for use in water features. ing residue . Rinsing should continue On flat interior floors , .a lambswool Construction joints should be sealed until the rinse water is completely clean , applicator produces an easy to apply, with LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G , a Wet vacuums may be helpful to remove wear- resistant, semi-gloss finish . The high-qualilty, color-matched joint sealant dirty water, particularly from interior sealer should be spread thinly and evenly for areas subject to pedestrian or vehic- floors . After drying , the surface must be as far as possible with the applicator. ular traffic. Additional information about carefully - inspected and retested for CEMENTONE Clear Sealer must be designing and sealing joints is available penetrability. Additional general or spot in Scofield ' s Tech - Data Bulletin cleaning and rinsing should be per- stirred immediately prior n using and S-404-3G LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G. formed if necessary. applied full strength (unthined) . It will have a milky appearance when wet , but All washed or wet areas should be Acid washing may be required when when properly applied will dry to a clear allowed to dry thoroughly before appli- the above surface preparation does not finish . If puddled , the milky appearance cation of CEMENTONE Clear Sealer. yield adequate penetration or if there will remain . Newly placed concrete must be uni- are excessive alkali deposits or sur- Application must be made at the cover- formly and adequately textured for slip face discoloration . Acid washing may age rate recommended in 6. Coverage resistance as described in 10. Textures also be beneficial to clean and brighten using the equipment described in and Slip Resistance. exposed - aggregate finishes . Since 11 . Equipment for Application and Prep- It should be cured by the use of new acid washing may affect the appear- aration . The sealer must be applied and unwrinkled , nonstaining , high-qual- ance or uniformity of the color, a repre- thinly and uniformly. A wet edge should ity curing paper. Before application of sentative area should first be tested . be maintained , and overlap controlled . - . the sealer, the moisture content of the After preparation as described above , Material should not be overapplied or ( concrete must be low enough so alkali the surface should be acid washed allowed to puddle or collect in joint and other salts do not become trapped using a solution of one part muriatic indentations . A brush or rag should be beneath the coating causing discolora- acid (20° Baume or 31 .4% pool acid) to kept available to brush out or mop up tion or clouding, normally a minimum of 20 parts water. Proper protective gear excess material . 14 to 28 days after placement. as recommended by the acid supplier The sealer should be a tie Immediately prior to sealing , the con - should be worn . The reacted residue pp don a calm day when concrete and ambient crete must be thoroughly cleaned . The must be scrubbed and thoroughly surface should be swept , then pressure rinsed until the rinse water is corn temperature' are between 50 and g rotary letel crinsing , 90 F ( 10 -32 C) and will not fall below washed or scrubbed using a rota floor an remaining Y lean . After. neutralize 42° F (6° C) . When interior heaters are maccialhine . Use of a detergent , hsu hu ass LITHO - wi h a good ally detergenacid residue t such as required , temperatures and humidity CHROME® Floor Cleaner, will facilitate LITHOCHROME Floor Cleaner, fol - should be moderate and consistently maintained . The surface must be dry cleaning . Additional cleaning methods lowed by another thorough rinsing , and not subject are described below and in 16. Mainte- Rinsing should continue until the rinse s moisture that may interfere with the s nance and Removal. The surface must water is clean . After drying , the surface sealer drying properly. A be rinsed after cleaning until the rinse should be retested for penetrability as pplication should not be made during water is completely clean . described above . Additional acid rainy, foggy, or very humid weather washing and rinsing should be per- when water condensation forms on the Care should be taken in preparing a formed if necessary. surface . On hotter, drier days , applica- surface to which an antiquing release ry tion should be made during the coolest has been applied . The antiquing part of the day and when the concrete is release may affect the adhesion 13. Application; All surfaces must be in the shade . between the sealer and the concrete , properly prepared as described in The second coat may be applied after particularly if excess release has not 12. Preparation. the first coat is completely dry, a mini- been adequately removed from the sur- Two coats are normally required on mum of 4 to 24 hours after application of face prior to application . uncoated or stripped concrete . One the first coat depending on temperature Existing concrete must have a uni- coat is usually sufficient on concrete and humidity. For a more even spray formly slip-resistant surface . Textures previously coated with CEMENTONE application , the second coat should be that are not slip resistant must be Clear Sealer. Application of more than applied at 90 degrees to the direction of roughened by some texturing method two spray coats is not normally recom- the first coat . If desired on flat interior as described in section 10. Textures mended . If required, an additional coat floors , a lambswool applicator may be and Slip Resistance. may be applied to flat interior floors by a used to apply the second coat over an Before receiving the initial coat of lambswool applicator. initial spray coat. CEMENTONE Clear Sealer, all concrete Surrounding areas , landscaping , and CEMENTONE Clear Sealer must be must be cleaned completely so that the adjacent surfaces must be masked or allowed to dry completely, normally a surface is penetrable . An indication of protected from overspray, spills, tracking , minimum of 12 to 48 hours , before it is whether the concrete is penetrable can and equipment contact . The work area subjected to temperatures below 42° F be obtained by spotting the surface with should be roped off, nearby vehicles ( 6 ° C ) or to water from any source , such as hoses , sprinklers , condensa- Concrete flatwork coated with applied sealer unless film buildup is tion , or rain . CEMENTONE Clear Sealer should be heavy or the surface cannot be cleaned Sealed surfaces will be tack free after maintained by sweeping . Spills should sufficiently. If floor polish has been approximately one or two hours at an be cleaned up when they occur. Dirt applied , it should be completely ambient temperature of 75° F (24° C) may be hosed off with water. Heavily removed following the manufacturer's _ and 50% relative humidity. Under these soiled areas may be cleaned by scrub- instructions and safety requirements , conditions, the area may be walked on bing with a stiff- bristle brush and a All dirt and contaminants must be com- gently after a minimum of approxi - properly diluted , high-quality commer- pletely removed from the surface of the mately four hours. cial detergent , such as LITHO - sealer, and the surface thoroughly After the coating is completely dry, the CHROME Floor Cleaner. rinsed and allowed to dry. CEMEN - area may be opened to light use after a Warehouse and industrial floors TONE Clear Sealer may then be reap- minimum of approximately 24 hours coated with CEMENTONE Clear Sealer plied and slip resistance verified and to general use after a minimum of should be maintained by immediately following the instructions in 13. Appli- approximately 72 hours . The sealer cleaning up spills , removing damp cation. Care must be taken so that gains strength during the first several objects , frequent sweeping , and regular excessive buildup of the coating does days after application . Longer drying wet mopping using a high-quality com- not occur. times are helpful and will be necessary mercial detergent , such as , LITHO - When complete removal of CEMEN - if temperatures are lower or the humid- CHROME Floor Cleaner. TONE Clear Sealer is necessary, the old ity is higher. Interior floors sealed with CEMEN - sealer may be removed by using All surfaces should be thoroughly TONE Clear Sealer that require polish - LITHOCHROME® Coating Remover, inspected and wet and dry slip resis - ing should be maintained by using a Scrubbing with a rotary floor machine tance as well as safety verified and compatible , premium-grade , emulsion- equipped with a stiff-bristled bassine or approved before the sealed surface is type , commercial floor polish following nylon brush , or on flat interior floors a opened to traffic. the manufacturer 's instructions and black stripping pad , will facilitate Sealed surfaces should be protected safety requirements . removal . Abrasive stripping may wear from damage by other trades . Contami- On areas subject to heavier use or away softer concrete and test areas are nates such as cutting oil will stain the more severe conditions , periodic gen- recommended . Multiple applications of surface and heavy objects dropped or eral cleaning should be performed remover may be required. Following the dragged will abrade it. using a high -quality commercial deter- stripping procedure , the concrete sur- gent and a rotary floor machine or auto- face must be thoroughly rinsed and ' 14. Availability: CEMENTONE Clear matic scrubber equipped with a allowed to dry. CEMENTONE Clear Sealer is marketed nationwide and in- scrubbing brush , or on flat interior Sealer may then be reapplied following ternationally, directly to the user and floors, a blue scrubbing pad or red buff- the instructions in 13. Application. Addi- through strategically located ware - ing pad . The dirty water should be wet- tional information about stripping and ' houses , dealers , and representatives . vacuumed and the surface rinsed until cleaning concrete surfaces is available Scofield should be contacted for its the rinse water is completely clean . For in Scofield's Tech -Data Bulletin M-544 nearest representative. larger floor areas , walk-behind or ride- LITHOCHROME Coating Remover. on automatic scrubbers are efficient - 15. Costs: At an application rate per and cost effective . On areas subject to 17. Warranty Summary: For the com- 1 coat of 300 - 1600 square feet per gal- forklift traffic, nonmarking tires are rec- plete warranty statement and important Ion , the material cost per coat f. o . b . ommended , since black tire marks are limitations , read the Material Safety Scofield's warehouses is approximately unsightly and labor intensive to remove . Data Sheet and Warranty. Generally, 10 to 70 per square foot. Prices are sub- A maintenance application of Scofield represents and warrants only 1 ject to change. CEMENTONE Clear Sealer should be that its products are of consistent qual- made periodically as the sealer is worn ity. No other oral or written statement is 16. Maintenance and Removal: All off the surface . The need for mainte - authorized . Any liability is limited to re- cleaning , maintenance , and removal nance coating will be accelerated in fund or replacement of defective prod- methods should be tested , and all sur- areas of heavy use or that receive fre- uct . The end user shall determine rounding areas should be closed to traf- quent or aggressive cleaning . It is not product ' s suitability and assume all fic, roped off, and protected, necessary to strip the previously risks and liability. Suggested Short Form Specification for Sealing Concrete Flatwork: All concrete flatwork designated as being sealed in the plans and specifications shall be sealed with two coats of CEMENTONE® Clear Sealer manufactured by L. M . Scofield Company, (800) 800 - 9900 , Los Angeles , CA , (213) 720 - 3000, and Atlanta, GA, (770) 920 - 6000. CEMENTONE® Clear Sealer shall be applied full strength in accordance with Scofield's Tech-Data Bulletin A-764 . Prinled on A recOed paper J SCOFIELD TIM CURING L . M . SCOFIELD COMPANY FINISH - COATING MANUFACTURER & MARKETER OF BUILDING SPECIALTIES SINCE 1933 6533 BANDINI BLVD. • LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90040 AND SEALING 4155 SCOFIELD ROAD • DOUGLASVILLE, GEORGIA 30134 PRODUCTSDistrict offices and warehouses nationwide. Inquiries: (80o) 800-9900 COMPARISON GUIDE G - 507 . 01 Eos Angeles, CA: (213) 720 -3000 Fax (213) 720 -3030 J Atlanta, GA: (404) 920- 6000 Fax (404) 920 -6060 Q LU Q This chart should be considered a guide only. Read the ScofieldT"' Tech- �w Data Bulletins A-514 L/THOCHROME ® ColorwaxTM , A-634 COLORCURE ® LITHOCHROME ® COLORCURE ® CEMENTONE ® Concrete Sealer, and A- 764 CEMENTONE® Clear Sealer for complete TM o information including application and maintenance instructions. ColorwaX Concrete Sealer Clear Sealer U M Concrete curing material for use on : Exterior flatwork that will weather naturally >K Nlm Exterior flatwork that will be regularly maintained/recoated x } Interior floors >K z tColored flatwork >K x U Uncolored flatwork A 11 only A- 11 only wFlatwork that is not finished for slip resistance Do not use Do nonuse Do not use ENONE o Concrete finishing or sealing material for use on : CO g Exterior flatwork that will weather naturally >K x -i Exterior flatwork that will be regularly maintained/recoated >K X Interior floors that will be regularly maintained/recoated x x Uncoated or stripped , colored flatwork >K x Uncoated or stripped , uncolored flatwork A- 11 only A- 11 only X Uncoated or stripped , LITHOCHROMEO ChemstainTM flatwork X x Exposed-aggregate and LITHO.TEXTM ColorstoneTM flatwork r x • Single-color imprinted flatwork X x Cr Antiqued-imprinted and multicolored flatwork >K Flatwork cured/coated with LITHOCHROME® ColorwaxTM >K If first stripped Flatwork cured/coated with COLORCURE® Concrete Sealer 1t c Flatwork that is not finished for slipresistancerDo c not use Do not use Do not use NONE Appearance and application method : Opacity Low Medium Clear Ln Applied by airless sprayer X x x tllt Applied by rotary floor machine (flat interior floors only) X c i Applied by lambswool applicator (flat interior floors only) X c c. Number of coats required and coverage : n Cure coats requiredrr 1 1 Finish coats on concrete cured with same material 1 optional 1 Seal/finish coats required on uncoated or stripped flatwork 1 2 2 7) Seal/finish coats if previously coated with same material D 1 1 1 i Additional seal coats when applied by lambswool applicator 1 optional Coverage when applied by airless sprayer (ft2/gal) 300 - 400 300 - 400 300 - 400 ]LoveragLewhen appliedLbylambswoolapplicator (ft2/gal) 800 - 1600 en appliedtary flchine (ft2/gal) 800 - 1200 CEMENTONE. COLORCURE . LITHOCHROME. LITHOTEX. © , Chemstain, Colorsione , Colorwax. and Scolield are trademarks of L M . Scofield Company ® L M . Scofield Company All rights reserved ' SECTION 09986 - SANITARY & CEILING PANELS PART I - GENERAL 1901 RELATED DOCUMENTS • ' Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - Specification sections , addenda to work of this section. 1 1902 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : ' Extent of sanitary panels is shown on drawings . 1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS : Lightguage Metal FramingSection n 05400 Gypsum Wallboard Section 09250 1904 UALITY ASSURANCE : ' A. Furnish sanitary wall panels produced by one manufacturer including hardware, accessories, mounting, and installation componenets . ' B . Acceptable Manufacturers - Select products of one of the following manufactuers : ' "Ornyte" Fiberglass Panels ; Xerxes Corporation " Structoglas" Fiberglass Panels; Sequentia Corp . "Kemlite" Fiberglass Panels ; Sequentia Corp . "Lascoboard"; Lasco Panel Products C . Equivalent products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in Contract Conditions . D . Applicator Qualifications : Two years experience installing sanitary wall panels . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS : LA . Submit samples of sanitary wall panels and matching accessories . B . Manufacturers Date : Submit copies of manufacturers specifications , recommendations, installation, and maintenance instructions . ' C . Certification : Manufacturers certification that products comply with specified requirements . D . Warranty : Manufacturers specific product warranty . 09986- 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS : A. Colors & Patterns : As selected by Owner from Manufacturers standard products . B . Fiberglass Wall Panel : 1 . Size : 4' x 10 ' 2 . Weight : 7 lb . Per sq. ft. 3 . Thickness : . 09 in. 4 . Flame Spread : Class C (III) 5 . Smokw Developed : Under 450 6 . Water Absortion : . 16% C . Accessories : 1 . Molding/Trim : Color matched, non-staining vinyl . 2 . Caulk and Adhesives : Construction grade adhesives and clear silicone sealant per manufacturers recommendations . 3 . Fasteners : Non- corroding mechanical fasteners per manufacturers recommendations . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine areas and conditions under which fiberglass panels and accessories are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditiolis have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3. 02 PREPARATION : Subwalls must be flat, clean, dry, and free of all dirt, dust or grease . Start of paneling installation indicates acceptance of subwall conditions and full responsibility for completed work. 3 . 03 EXECUTION : A . Follow manufacturers recommendations for installation, attachment, caulking and trim applications . Caulk all pipes and other wall penetrations . B . Install all panels in a true and even plane. 3 . 04 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT . 09986-2 Followinginstallation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces of units . Remove and replace units which are damaged or improperly installed. 3 . 05 CLEANING UP : A . At completion, remove all excess materials and all debris resultant from operations of work of this section. Leave entire work in neat, clean condition satisfactory for receipt of other related items of work which are to be installed as part of work of other Sections of these Specifications . * * *END OF SECTION * * * ' 09986-3 SECTION 10155 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS PART I - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1 .02 SUMMARY: Extent of toilet partitions as indicated on drawings . Types of toilet compartments include : Solid plastic homogenous color. St les of toilet compartments include : Floor-anchored, overhead braced. Sty.les of screens include : Floor-anchored. Toilet accessories , such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, are specified elsewhere in Division 10 , 1 .03 SUBMITTALS : A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer ' s detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors , hardware, fastenings , and accessories . B . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates , and instructions for installation for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C . Samples : Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required . Submit 6 " square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE : A . Field Requirements : Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fillings of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B . Coordination : Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay . 10155- 1 tPART 2 - PRODUCTS r2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS : ' Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following : A . Accurate Partitions Div. , U. S . Gypsum Co . ' B . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc . Co Santana Products Company D . AMPCO , Hialeah, FL ' E. Capitol Partitions , Inc . F . Global Steel Products Corporation G. Rockville Partitions Inc . 2 . 02 MATERIALS : A . General : Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness . Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks , roller marks , stain, discoloration, telegraphing of core material , or other imperfection on finished units are not acceptable . ' B . Solid Plastic : High density, solid polymer resin with homogenous color throughout. Provide material not less than 1 " thick, seamless construction with edges eased to a radius of . 250 " . SCo Pilaster Shoes : ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 " high, 20 gage, finished to match hardware, with theft proof stainless steel hex bolts . ' D . Stirrup Brackets : Manufacturer ' s standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilaster, either chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized ' aluminum . Continuous stirrups required . E . Edging Strips : Annodized aluminum . F . Hardware and Accessories : Manufacturer' s standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") . G. Wall Brackets : Full length, continuous, (6063 -T Alloy) with mill finish weighing g g not less than 1685 lbs . Per linear foot similar or equal to Santana Products, Co . , Inc . Section #58992 shall be used for all panels to pilaster, pilaster to wall and panel to wall connections . Wall brackets shall be pre-drilled by manufacturer with holes spaced every 6 " along full length of brackets . Wall brackets shall be thru-bolted to panels and pilaster with one-way hex bolts . Attachment of brackets to adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished by ( 1 ) theft proof Zamac mushroom nail in head anchor directly behind the vertical edge of panels and pilasters at every 12 " along the full length of bracket and (2) No . 5 plastic anchors and No . 14 x 1 1 /4 " 10155-2 £-SSTOT puu sloop of pajjoq -njgj puu ` sa2urg punom dram ujim gsiug pazipoup dip u2irq LIjim (XoH 91- £909) uoisnllxa uiwnjn XnpaH : sa uiHmj : snnojjoJ su ` wz)IsXs uoilpmd luou pudtuoo goua .ioj ;)lump q gsrum3 : arennpreH 3 a2protjouu jeaouoo of zalsulid 1p aotjs gjsium3 *100 T o1 uor�oauuoo punjonris Iiuuod of ` slaisujid ju sinu 2upsnfpe 21.1113n01 puu `sloqum Nooj ` spor popuanjl gjyA apjduroo `saornap a2pzouj0uu jaals paziuunjp2 tjsitun3 • suoijj: .md jaliol su tlsiug pure uoilonusuoo autres3o srmselid pure sjauud `ssau3joilIT ui „ I uurlj ssal iou s.raisujid gsiuurrd : suaaras palro ns - roo13 g •tusiuptjoatu 21111anzI puu spoddns jpaouoo of impIld gopa Ie cogs gsitun3 %imsujid tloea aoj dol �� Ruroezq-peatjzano drat-roue umununju popnrlxo sonur�uoo 5uunoos pue tut as rod suorsinord aaIpWsuoi� ipuoo moll kms oi rarnjoujnureur Xq papuattrurooar su ` srajsulid Ie sjjoq 2uranapp sroddns aas pazienl2 jsiu3 : sop! Ld ourg-puauumUgjranp Q * wogs aaisujid t1j!m sIximiq Ilum of puu loojj of paualsuj pup ul2r14 „ Z8 : sra�spIid •a2pa uzo7aoq Ijnj 01 pauajsuj dims iuropa uji^n 3 �'3 ' ,, ti1 Palunotu aq ol ul�iu „ SS Paluouqug : siooCj •poddumpuutj Xq asn ioj paddrnba sjjuls lu sloop 2ui2uims;no (Ouivado .zeajo) apron „ Z £ pure sjlp�s �alio� �auurpr0 rod sloop 2111211"Sur apron „ 17Z gsiu nj `pajeoipui asrAu;)gjo ssajun : suolsuQw ! dooQ g • pa1poipui su `s.ruq quit puu ` szuosszoou `Plump uq pajunotu-uoij!wd anraoar o1 juaurao.jojuta.r jpuraIui puu `sajoul pajji.zp `sinolno gjjm sjiun gsium3 • pMorpur asiM.ragjo ssajun `tualsXs uopp red aoi pajuouquj szaisujid puu ` suaa.zos `sjauud `sloop prupupis ujsrum3 : juamog •y WOI.LVVOMEMA £0 ' Z • jaa1s pa1uoo-anr1oajord 1uMsrsW-1sn1 .ratilo .ro pajujd-umnuo qo `paziuunje2 dip-jogl asn `srogouu pajuaouoo ao3 • sjnu pure spuaul adA, juMsisar-jjagj igl!m `look ssaluiuls JO s.raualsuj posodxo pzupuels s ,.rajmoujnu utu asn `paluorpui osrnnratjjo ssajun : s,;Dua,su3 puu sa progloud •f I001s ssajulms 0&2 9I 3o aq Ituujs s�aaIourq jiurpuaH 1 • sjjoq x;)q Xem-auo qj!m i?ui4joq-rugj Xq sixjou.zq jiurpu;Dq pure siaisujid jo sdol 01 pouaisu3 aq Hulls IluJpuaH ' £6685# uoi1oaS • out ° • oD slonpord uuuluuS of junba puu .rums food .reaurj .rad • sqj 661 ' 1 uPu1 ssal 10112uiuj2iaM uoilem2guoo du& ijuu ui tlsiug tutu tjJinn (Xoli�' 91- £909) uoisrum umurgunju Xnuagj oq jjegs IluzpuaH H • su01133uru03 .rogjouu uaann�aq paouds XIaluuua,jp Iunzajui „ Zj uloua ju snnaros ppauj sdrjjitjd jaajs ssajuipIs Pilasters with one-way hex bolts . Hinges will be factory set to a full close position unless otherwise noted. (Recessed flush mounted hinges not acceptable) . 2 . Door Pull : Heavy chrome plated Zamac . Include wall stop in handicapped ' stall . 3 . Coat Hook/Bumper : Heavy chrome plated Zamac with rubber bumper. 4 . Door Strike and Kee er: Heavy vy aluminum extrusion (6063 -T6 Alloy) with ' bright dip anodized finish with wrap-around flange surface, mounted, and thru bolted to pilaster with one-way hex bolts . ' 5 . Door Latch Housing : Heavy aluminum extrusion (6063 -T6-Alloy) with bright dip anodized finish surface mounted and thru-bolted to door with one-way hex bolts . Slide bolt and bottom hall be heavy aluminum with "Tough-Coat Black" finish . 2 . 04 FINISHES : ' A. Surface : Of all Polymer Resin components to be similar and equal to "Plasti-Glaze 280 " by Santana products Co . Colors are to be selected from Santana' s Premier ' Delux Color 1000 Series . Maximum two colors . Be Colors : One of the manufacturer' s standard colors in each room as indicated or, if ' not indicated, as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 INSTALLATION . ' A . General : Comply with manufacturer' s recommended procedures and installation sequence . Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level . Provide clearances of ' not more than 1 /2 " between pilasters and panels , and not more than 1 " between panels and walls . Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel . Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall ' anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints . Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall . Secure panels in position with manufacturer' s recommended anchoring devices . ' Be Overhead-Braced Partitions : Secure pilasters to floor and level , plumb , and tighten installation with devices furnished . Secure overhead-brace to each pilaster with not ' less than two fasteners . Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead-brace when doors are in closed position . C . Screens : Attach with concealed anchoring devices , as recommended by 10155-4 manufacturer to suit supporting structure . Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. 3 . 02 ADJUST AND CLEAN : A . Hardware Adjustment : Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B . Clean exposed surfaces of partition system using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 10155-5 ' SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : iDrawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section . A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ' 1 . Extent of louvers and vents is indicated on drawings , including indications of sizes and locations . 2 . Types of louvers and vents include the following : Extruded aluminum louvers . 3 . Sealants including installation are specified in Division 7 . 4 . Air-handling louvers connected to ductwork are specified in Division 15 . 5 . Louvers in hollow metal doors and frames are specified in Division 8 . B . QUALITY ASSURANCE : 1 . Performance Requirements :q ements : Provide louvers with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal evidencing that produst complies with AMCA Standard 500 . 2 . Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures , except as otherwise indicated . 3 . Field Measurements : Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication, wherever possible . 4 . Shop Assembly : Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustment, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of unit. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations . ' Co SUBMITTALS : 1 . Product Data: Submit manufacturer ' s specifications ; certified test data, ' where applicable ; and installation instructions for required products , including finishes . 2 . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories . Include plans , elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials , finishes , fasteners , joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements . 3 . Samples : Submit 6 " square samples of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gage and alloy to be use in work. Where normal 10200- 1 Color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each sample showing limts of such variations . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS : A . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following : Airline Products Co . The Airolite Co . American Warming & Ventilating Co . Construction Specialties, Inc . Industrial Louvers, Inc . Ruskin Mfg . Co . 2. 02 MATERIALS : A . Aluminum Sheet : ASTM B 209 , ALLOY 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming , or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide. required finish . B . Aluminum Extrusions : ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063 -T52 . C . Fastenings : Use 3 /8 " diameter stainless steel machine screws . Provide, gages and lengths to suit unit installation conditions . Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners . D . Anchors and Iserts : Cadmium plated steel , self drilling type . E. Bituminous Paint : SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic) . 2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL : A . Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials , sizes , depth, arrangement, and metal thicknesses indicated . B . Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation, including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work. C . Include supports , anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. D . Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not further apart than recommended by manufacturer or 72 " o . c . , provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated . 10200 -2 E . Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers , where required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. ' F . Join frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by welding, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers . Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance . ' 2 .04 STATIONARY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS . ' A . Horizontal Drainable Blade Louvers : Dual drain recessed mullion type . Units designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades , and channels in jambs and mullions . Furnish units with extrusions ' not less than 0 . 081 " thick, of depth, and sizes indicated, equal to C/S Model 6155 . 1 . Free Area : Not less than 50 % for a 48 " x 48 " size . 2 . Static Pressure Loss : Not more than 0 . 15 " of water gage at an airflow of 1050 fpm free area velocity in intake direction. 3 . Water Penetration : Not mor than 0 . 05 oz. Per sq . Ft. of free area at an airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity . 4 . AMCA Certification: Furnish units bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal . 5 , Continuous Horizontal Blades : Conceal supporting framework from vision on outside face of louver by placing braces , mullions and brackets on inside face ; with close fitting, field-made splice joints in blades designed to permit expansion and contraction without deforming blades or framework. r2 . 05 LOUVER SCREENS . Provide removable screens for exterior louvers . ' Fabricate extruded aluminum screen frames of same finish as louver units to which secured. Use bird screens of the following : 1 /2 " sq . Mesh, 0 . 063 " aluminum or stainless steel wire . ' Use insect screens of the following : 18 X 16 X . 01 I grey fiberglass mesh. Locate screens on inside face of louvers . Secure screens to louver frames with stainless machine screws , spaced at each corner and at 12 " o . c . between . 2 . 06 METAL FINISHES : A . General : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations , except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in tfactory after products are assembled . Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with 10200 -3 protective covering, prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces which will be visible after completing finishing process . B . Provide Colors or color matches as selected by Architect. C . Aluminum Finishes : Baked Enamel Finish : AA-C12C42R1x (cleaned with inhibited chemicals, conversion coated with an acid-chromate-flouride-phosphate treatment, and painted with organic coating specified below) . Apply where factory painted finish is indicated, in strict compliance with paint manufacturer ' s specifications . Organic Coating : Manufacturer ' s standard thermosetting acrylic enamel , 0 . 8 mil minimum dry fill thickness. PART 3 - EXCUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION : Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages which are to be imbedded in concrete or masonry construction. Cordinate delivery of such items to project site . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION : A . Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B . Use concealed anchorages wherever possible . Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connnection. C . Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated . D . Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units , at Contractor' s option. E . Provide concealed gaskets , flashings , joint fillers , and insulations , and install as work progresses to make installations weathertight . F . Refer to Division- 7 sections for sealants in connection with installations of louvers . * * *END OF SECTION * * * 10200-4 SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS PART I - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : ' Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section . ' 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Areas of specialty signage may include : 1 . Construction Signs 2 , Exterior Handicapped Signs at Parking Areas 3 , Toilet Room Handicapped Signs 4 , Interior Room Number and Name Signs 5 , Occupancy Capacity Signs 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE • Uniformi1y of Manufacturer: For each sign form a graphic image process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer. Americans With Disabilities Act : All signage shall meet the requirements of the A . D .A. including grade 2 braille raised lettering, etc . As manufactured by one of the following approved companies : ASI Sign Systems , Tampa, FL (813 ) 620-4360 Attn : Ilene Advance Corporation , Braille-Tac ( 800) 825 - 0150 The Southwell Corp . San Antonio , TX (210) 223 - 1831 Best ManuL Sign Systems (800) 235 -2378 Bunting Graphics Inc . (800) 735 -0445 FRS Industries (800) 747-4795 HART Arch . Signage, Chesapeake, VA (804) 420- 1666 Mohawk Sign Systems , Schenectady, NY (518 ) 370-3433 ' Metallic Arts , Spokane, WA 1 - 800-541 -3200 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : ' A . Shop Drawin s : Submit shop drawings for all i �- p g terns in this Section including all accessories . ' B . Submit samples p of all interior signage and graphics . ' PART II - PRODUCTS 10440- 1 2 . 01 CONSTRUCTION SIGN : A . Furnish and install 8 ' - 0' long x 4 ' - 0 ' high construction sign, on 3 /4 plywood . B . Locate on site in compliance with Local Permitting Agency requirements and as directed by Owner. C . Sign shall have two coats of exterior oil base paint. D . All work shall be performed by an experienced sign painter. E . Furnish and install supporting structure . F . Sign shall indicate : Name of Project, Name of Owner, Name of Contractor, Name of Architect, Name of Structural Engineer, Name of Mech/Elec . Engineer and Name of Civil Engineer. 2 .02 EXTERIOR HANDICAPPED SIGNS AT PARKING AREAS : A . Provide one ( 1 ) sign for each handicapped parking space . B . Sign shall comply with the "Accessibilty Codes and Standards" latest edition, State of Florida, for the physically handicapped, and F . T. O . 25 or 26 . C . Sign shall read: "Parking for Wheelchair Drivers only" depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) as detailed. D . Size shall be V - 0 " wide x 16 " high, aluminum. E . Provide standard aluminum post (white) set in 6 " diameter concrete foundation . Post and concrete foundation shall be by the Contractor. F . Height to bottom of sigh shall be Helvetica Medium, G . Lettering style shall be Helvetica Medium, 2 . 03 TOILET ROOM HANDICAPPED SIGN : A. Provide one ( 1 ) sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped . Size shall be as per Signage Legend . B . Color shall be as per Signage Legend C . Material shall be as per Signage Legend . D . Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws at locations 10440-2 detailed in Architectural Signage. 2 . 04 "INTERIOR" ROOM NAME AND NUMBER SIGNS AND OCCUPANCY ' CAPACITY: A. Separate signs for room name room number, or room capacity required , Sizes shall be in accordance with the Signage Legend . ' Be Color shall be as per Signage Legend, C . Material shall be 1 /8 " thick plastic , or 1 /8 " thick etched zinc , with raised symbol for ' identification by blind. D . Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws or clear silicone ' at locations detailed in Architectural Signage Legend . 2 . 05 PARK MONUMENT SIGNAGE A . Provide individually mounted letters per the details on theP lans . Letters as manufactured by the Southwell Company . Letters to be height as scheduled and in Garamond H444 style in bronze Duranodic Aluminum . Flush mounted letters . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 CLEANING AND PROTECTION : tA. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions . Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. Be Mount standard Signs on middle of doors at 48 " above the finish floor. co Mount A . D . A. Compliant Signs adjacent to door openings, at the latch side, with the center of the sign at 60 " above the finish floor. Where there is no wall space to ' the latch side of the door, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall . SIGN LEGEND SIGN TYPE "A" : As manufactured by ASI , 3 " high x 8 " long or 12 " long, square corner 3905 Series with molded plastic frames, (interior only), White background with 2 " high Turquoise SC- 531 Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind . Note : Utilize 1 %" high letters for longer room descriptions to insure that the description will fit on a 12 " long sign. ' SIGN TYPE "B " : As manufactured by ASI 10 " high x 20 " long, Sign Etch-2 , 3 /8 " aluminum base metal with etched letters . Radiused corner 3905 Series design (exterior only) . White background with 5 " high paint filled text, TERRACOTTA SC-202 Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for the blind . 10440-3 SIGN TYPE "C" : As manufactured by ASI, 9 " square to meet ADA, 390 Series, (interior and exterior rated), with radiused corners, White background with S - 5 Unisex Symbols in black, and S -6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors , per schedule, with raised symbols for blind . SIGN TYPE "D " : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high and 12 " long, square corner 390 Series (interior only), Red background with 1 " high White letters in Upper Case Helvetica Medium, SIGN TYPE "E" : As manufactured by ASI, Closed-Circuit TV Door (In Use) Sign : Three (3 ) SL Series SLO 66 with Helvetica Regular Lettering . First letter capitalized, remaining letter to be lower case . Install at location determined by the Architect. SIGN TYPE "F" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 12 " long, Sign Etch- 1 , zinc base metal with etched letters . Match square corner 390S Series design (exterior only), Turquoise background with 1 %" high White Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind . SIGN TYPE " G " : As manufactured by ASI, 9 " square to meet ADA, 390 Series, (interior and exterior rated) , with radiused corners . White background with S - 1 & S -2 Symbols in black, and S -6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, per schedule, with raised symbols for blind . SIGN TYPE "H" : As manufactured by ASI, 12 " high X 18 " long, 320 Series with 3 /4 " radiused comers and aluminum frame . White background with 4 " high letters/numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Bold Italic . Exterior rated. Color of letters/numbers shall be SC -224 Wine, LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS : COUNT LOCATION (9) Item # 1 Sign type "F" / MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ROOM, STORAGE ROOM # 11 STORAGE ROOM #2 , SERVICE CORE, CONCESSIONS , JANITOR, CLASSROOM -A, CLASSROOM - B , CONTROL ROOM. Secure to the wall at the latch side of the appropriate doors . (2) Item #2 Sign type "D" / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted extinguishers as located on the plans . (2) Item 43 Sign type "G"(consists of 2 Symbol signs , S - 1 & S -2 gender appropriate, and 2 Symbol signs , S -6) - located on the wall at the latch side of the two doors that access the MENS & WOMENS restrooms . Mount them side by side. 10440 -4 1 r (2) Item #4 Sign Type "F " / MEN, WOMEN, - located on the wall at the latch side of ' the restroom doors . (2) Item #5 rSign type "A" - MANAGER, CONTROL ROOM, - located on the wall at the latch side of the appropriate doors . ' Item #6 Sign type "G" - Consists of two Handicapped symbols S - 6 to be placed on rthe face of the doors accessing the handicapped stalls . ( 1 ) Item # 7 House Numbers- 9450 , As manufactured by Metallic Arts , Style : Helvetica r Bold, Projected mounting type PM4 , height 15 " , stroke 4 1 /4 " , depth 1 1 /411 , average width 13 1 /2 " . Letters to be cast aluminum alloy, with rbaked enamel paint, Color: #72 Blue Green. ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * i r r r r r r r r 10440-5 i SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section . 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : A. Extent of metal lockers is shown on drawings. B . Types of products in this section include the following : Steel lockers . Single-tier lockers . Multi-tier lockers . C . Concrete base for lockers is specified in Division 3 , 1903 QUALITY ASSURANCE : Uniformity : provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer' s technical data and installation instructions for metal locker units . B . Samples : Submit color samples on squares of same metal to be used for fabrication of lockers . C . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for metal lockers , verifying dimensions affecting locker installations . Show lockers in detail , method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories . Include locker numbering sequence information. 1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS : Do not deliver lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 10500- 1 1 r Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following : All American Locker Div. ; De Bourgh Mfg . Co . ' Art Metal Products Interior Steel Equipment Co . List Industries Inc . ' Medart Inc . Penco Products Inc . ' Republic Storage Systems Lyon Metal Products, Inc . 2 . 02 MATERIALS : i A . Sheet Steel : Prime, mild, cold-rolled and leveled steel , hot-dipped galvanized free ' from buckle , scale and surface imperfections . B . Fasteners : Cadmium, zinc, or nickel plated steel ; exposed bolt heads , slotless type ; self-locking nuts or locker washers for nuts on moving parts . C . Equipment : Hooks and hang rods of cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel or cast ' aluminum. 2 . 03 FABRICATION, GENERAL : r A. Construction : Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces ' flat and free of dents or distortion. Make all exposed metal edges safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form rigid, one-piece structure . Weld, bolt, or rivet other joints and connections as standard with manufacturer. Grind exposed welds flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on fronts of locker doors or frames . B . Frames : Fabricate of 16-gage channels or 12 -gage angles, minimum, with ' continuous stop/strike formed on verticle members . C . Finishing : Chemically pretreat metal with degreasing and 5 stage iron ' phosphatizing process . Apply baked-on enamel finish to all surfaces , exposed and concealed, except plates and non-ferrous metal . ' Color: Provide locker units in color (s) as shown on drawings, or if not shown, as selected by Architect from manufacturer ' s standards . Concealed parts may be ' manufacturer ' s standard neutral color. 2 . 04 LOCKER ACCESSORIES : A. Equipment : Furnish each locker with the following items unless otherwise shown : 10500 -2 1 . Single- Tier Units : Hat shelf, one double -prong hook and not less than 2 single-prong wall hooks . 2 . Three-Tier Units : One double-prong hook and not less than 2 single. prong wall hooks . B . Number Plates : Manufacturer' s standard etched, embossed, or stamped, non- ferrous metal number plates with numerals not less than 3 /8 " high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plates . C . Continuous Sloping Tops : Not less than 20-gage sheet steel , approximately 25 deg. pitch, in lengths as long as practicable but not less than 4 lockers . Provide closures at ends . Finish to match lockers . D . Separators : Provide horizontal dividers of not less than 16 gage sheet metal between doors of multiple tier lockers, to ensure rigidity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION : A . Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions for plumb, level , rigid, and flush installation. B . Touch-up marred finishes , but replace units which cannot be restored to factory. finished appearance . Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 10500-3 rSECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ' PART I - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENT ' Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : ' A. Definition : "Portable fire extinguishers" includes units which can be hand-carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing systems, unless otherwise indicated. Be Extent of fire extinguishers g fishers is indicated on drawings with a FE designation. ' Co Accessories include : Mounting brackets . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A . Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer of contractors choice, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. Be Portable Fire Extinguisher Standard : Provide new portable fire extinguishers which comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled ny UL . All extinguishers shall be installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 10 , "Portable Fire Extinguishers . " Install only fully charged fire extinguishers . ' 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : A . Product Data : Submit manufacturer' s technical data, detail drawings , and installation instructions for each portable fire extinguisher and/or recessed cabinet for the project. Be Schedule : Submit schedule indicatingtypes, uanities sizes an YP � q d installation locations for each portable fire extinguisher and/or cabinet for the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER ' S : ' A . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extinguishers and cabinets . 10520- 1 J. L . Industries, Inc . Larsen ' s Manufacturing Co . Modern Metal Products by Muckle Potter-Roemer, Inc. 2. 02 MATERIALS - GENERAL : Provide the following types of extinguishers in accordance with area/occupancy uses : In General Office Spaces Fire Extin uishers : Multi -purpose dry chemical type (2A4013C- FE) : UL rated 2-A : IO : B : C , 5 lb . Nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for class A, Class B , and Class C fires . Equal to J. L . Industries Cosmic 5E. In Kitchen/Bre akrOOn]/Em to ee Loun e S aces/ Electrical Rooms : Liquid carbon dioxide, UL rated, 10 lb nominal capacity, in enamled steel container for class B , and Class C fires only. Equal to J. L . Industries Sentinal 10 . In Electronic Equipment/Comnuter Room Halotron 1 , or Halonite, clean agent EPA approved, portable fire extinguisher. Wall bracket mounted, as manufactured by Larsen ' s Manufacturing Company. Discharges as a liquid and quickly evaporates leaving no residue to clean-up . Class A,B , C fires, 10 pound nominal capacity. 2003 MOUNTING BRACKETS : Provide manufacturer' s standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in manufacturer' s standard plated finish . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION : Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities . Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and/or bracket-mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect . 3 . 02 IDENTIFICATION• Identify bracket-mounted extin uishers with a permanently affixed sign with a red background and white letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface . Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect or scheduled in Section 10440 - Specialty Signs . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 10520 -2 SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division - 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this Section. ' 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK : ' A . Extent and location of each types of toilet accessory is shown on drawings . B . Types of toilet accessories required include the following : ' Paper towel dispensers Toilet tissue dispensers ' Grab bars Soap dispensers ' Mirrors Shower Rods ' C . Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in Division 10 . ' 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : A. Inserts and Anchorages : Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry ; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B . Accessory Locations : Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid ' interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units . C . Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by ' one of the following : 1 . American Specialties Inc . ' 2 . Bradley Corporation 3 . Hallmark - Nutone 4 . Parker Scovill ' S . Watrous, Inc. 6 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc . 7 . Gamco ' 8 . Franklin Brass 9 . A & J Washroom Accessories 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : 10800- 1 A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory . B . Setting Drawings : Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices and cut out requirements in other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS : A. Stainless Steel : AISI Type 302/304, with satin No . 4 finish, 22 gage minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. co Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed . 2 . 02 FABRICATION : A . General : Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted, except where otherwise indicated . Wherever locks are required for a particular type of toilet accessory, provide same keying throughout project. Furnish two keys for each lock. B . Surfaced-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints , exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1 %2 " pin hinges of same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible . C . Recessed Toilet Accessories , General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners . Hang doors or access panels with full -length stainless steel piano hinge . Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed . 2 . 03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS : Toilet Tissue Dispenser: BOBRICK B - 2740 . 2 .04 SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL DISPENSERS : BOBERICK B - 262 2 .05 GRAB BARS (GR BR) : Stainless Steel Type : Equal to Bobrick B -6206 x 36 and B - 6206 x 42 . 10800-2 ' 2 . 06 SOAP DISPENSERS : Bobrick B -90 Surface Mounted Dispenser. ' 2 . 07 SHOWER RODS : ' Bradley Model 9531 Heavy Duty 1 1 /4 " O . D . , 18 ga. Satin finish stainless steel . 2.08 MIRRORS : Bobrick B - 165 , 18 " X 30 " mirror. Satin finish stainless steel frame with 1 /4 float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated . ' 2 . 11 INSTALLATION : Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers ' instructions usingfasteners ers which are appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of unit. Install units ' plumb and level , firmly anchored in locations indicated . 2 . 12 ADJUST AND CLEAN : A . Adjust toilet accessories forro er operation and ver' p P p verify that mechanisms function smoothly . ' Be Relace damaged or defective units . ' C . Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 10800-3 DIVISIONS 124 FURNISHINGS SECTION 12290 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK : LIGHT COMMERCIAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS : The Bidding and Contract Documents , General Requirements and Addenda, as may be issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section. A. References 1 ) AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute : Applicable Quality Standards . 2) FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood . 3 ) FS MMM-A- 130 Adhesive, Contact . 4) NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates . 5 ) ANSI A156 . 9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware . 6) PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood . 7) PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 8 ) PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood , 1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK: A . Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service to complete the casework and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NOT IN CONTRACT" (NIC) . B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following : 1 . Fabrication of Casework. 2 . Installation. 3 . Accessories . 4 . Hardware . 5 . Filler Panels . 1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS : A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06100, and Finish Carpentry Section 06200 . Provide blocking within wall floor, or ceiling, required to give adequate support for casework. B . Mechanical Division 15000 : Stainless steel sinks and fittings which are integral with casework, including all work for plumbing rough- in, supply waste and vent, including shut-off valves at floor or wall . All heating and ventilating ductwork and grilles in cabinets where required including connections , flashings , caps or hoods . 12290 - 1 C . Electrical Division 16000 : Electrical rough-in and connections from rough-in to cabinet or equipment fixtures and devices requiring same, whatever type and kind . ' 1 .04 BIDDING . Do not bid sections of casework separately . Any item required to make the casework a complete and workable unit will be by the casework Subcontractor, including installation. ' 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE : A . The "Quality Assurance" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and ' by reference are made part of this specification. Be All work shall conform to section 400B Architectural Cabinets (Laminate Clad Cabinets) as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards" unless detailed as a higher grade . ' C . Competence : The approved casework manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work . D . The woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to make certain that casework is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the casework will not be damaged by excessive changes in ' moisture content. ' 1 . 06 LIST OF SAMPLES , CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS • A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission by the Contractor to the Architect for approval . Be Any omission of items which require the Contractor ' s compliance under the ' contract documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility . CO Submit samples , product data, certificates and shop drawings as required or ' requested by the Architect, whether included in this list or not. 1 .07 SUBMITTALS : A. Submit complete shop drawings on all items showing details , materials , location in building and installation requirements prior to starting work. ' Be Submit sample cabinet built to specification, prior to starting of work, for approval of all materials . ' C . The casework manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control . The General Contractor and the casework 12290 -2 manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions . D . Submit samples of laminated plastic for color selection. E . Submit manufacturer ' s descriptive literature of all items not manufactured by the casework contractor, as requested by the Architect. 1908 DELIVERY4 STORAGE AND HANDLING : A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Be Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding or similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate the woodwork, have been completed in the installation areas . If, due to unforseen circumstances , woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas , store only in areas meeting the requirements specified for the installation area. 1 . 09 PROJECT CONDITIONS : A . Conditioning : Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise the Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for the woodwork installation and storage areas . Be Maintain temperature and humiditX in installation areas as required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1 . 0 % tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation to through remainder of construction period . Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 WOOD MATERIALS : A . Softwood Lumber for stiles and rails : PS 20 ; graded in accordance with AWI ; moisture content of 6 to 11 percent; 8 to 13 percent for damp locations (as defined by AWI) . Be All lumber in contact with concrete floor shall be pressure treated . 2 .02 SHEET MATERIALS : A. Softwood Plywood for box construction" to be 3 /4 " luan plywood with melamine finish for bottoms , tops and sides of wall cabinets, ends and sides of base cabinets , and all shelving . Backs shall be 1 /2 " luan plywood on wall cabinets and 1 /8 " masonite with hanging rail for base cabinets . All shelving adjustible, line board with 32 mm system . No shelves or wall cabinets to exceed 33 " wide . 12290 -3 ' B . Countertops all 3 /4 " plywood construction with 3 /4 " buildup , and all exposed faces plastic laminate covered . C . Doors shall be 3 /4 " MDF covered with plastic laminate . ' 2.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC : All laminated plastic shall meet NEMA LD -3 Standards and application of various types shall be as follows : A . 0 . 050 " Nominal Thickness Standard OualitX : Counter tops, backsplashes , counter edges, all tops, sides and edges of shelving . B . 0 . 042 " Nominal Thickness vertical surfacerg ade : Door and drawer fronts and edges and other exposed vertical and postformed surfaces . C . Acceptable Laminate Manufacturers : ' 1 . Nevamar 2 , Wilsonart 3 . Pionite ' 4 . Formica 5 . Substitutions : Only allowed with prior written approval from the Architect. ' 2 . 04 ACCESSORIES : ' A. Adhesive : FS MMM-A- 130 . Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B . Fasteners : Size and type to suit application. All base and wall cabinets shall be ' screwed together. Dowels are not acceptable . ' C . Bolts , Nuts . Washers , Lags . Pins and Screws : Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations . 2 . 05 HARDWARE : ' A . TYPES AND MANUFATURERS 1 . Hinges : concealed box construction (Grass, Mepla, Blum or an approved manufacturer of equal quality) . ' 2 . Drawer and Door Pulls : Stanley or approved equal , brushed aluminum wire Pulls . 3 . Cabinet Locks : CCL or approved equal . ' 4 . Robe Hooks : Ives or Stanley . 12290 -4 B . HINGES 1 . 1 pair for doors up to 48 " in height. 2 . 2 pair for doors over 48 " in height. C . PULLS 1 . 3 - 1 /3 " brushed aluminum finish. D . DRAWER GUIDES 1 . Drawer sides all metal , rated for 75 lbs . ; 5/8 " plywood drawer bottoms and backs and 3 /4 " MDF (medium density fiberboard) plastic laminate covered fronts . E . FILE DRAWERS 1 . Drawer sides, back and front 1 /2 " plywood with melamine finish, 1 /4 " plywood bottoms , with full extension drawer guides rated for 150 lbs . Provide 3 /4 " MDF plastic laminate covered fronts . 2 . 07 SEALANT : a. Equal to General Electric Silicone Sealant, 2 . 08 ANCHORS : A. Select material , type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage . Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistances . Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt shields for drilled-in-place anchors . Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 2 . 09 CASEWORK FABRICATION • Detail shall conform to AWI (flush overlay design) and or as shown on drawings . A . Wood moisture Content : Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas . 12290-5 i iB . Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings . Condition to average prevailing humidity conditions prior to installation. CO Fit shelves , doors and all edges with plastic laminate edging . Use full length pieces only . All edges shall be clad in plastic laminate, including all 6 edges of adjustable shelving . i D . Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication of casework required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. Where sequence of measuring isubstrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of casework for accurate fit, iE . Complete fabrication assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work i before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible . Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. i R Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes . Make joints hairline . iG . Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern . H . Mechanically fasten backsplashes to countertops . i I . Pre -Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural casework withre-cut openings , where p possible , to receive hardware , appli ances , plumbing fixtures , electrical work and similar items . Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough- in diagrams for proper size and shape . Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures , seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating . J . Quality Standard : Comply with AWI Section 1600 -B , unless otherwise indicated . iPART 3 - EXECUTION i3 . 01 COORDINATION : ' A . Casework manufacturer is reponsible for coordinating his work with workof other trades, such as structural, plumbing, electrical and air conditioning . In so far as possible , dimensional adjustments are to be determined before fabrication, and ireflected on the Shop Drawings . To minimize changes required by field conditions . 3 .02 INSPECTION : 1 12290 -6 A . Prior to installation of casework, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. B . Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in the installation areas prior to installing. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION : A. Pre-Installation Meeting : Set up a meeting at the project site with the general contractor prior to delivery of casework and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Proceed with casework installation only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be properly maintained . B . Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. Co Install casework plumb, level , true and straight with no distortions . Shim as required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 " IN 8 ' - 0 " for plumb and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces . D . Anchor casework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates . Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. E . Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation . Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated . F . Tos : Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated and secure cabinet and counter bases to the floor using appropriate angles and anchorages . G . Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops . H . Carefully scribe and cut casework to fit adjoining casework or other building materials, leaving gaps of 1 /32 " maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose but refinish the cut surface . 3 . 04 ADJUSTMENT CLEANING9 FINISHING AND PROTECTION: a. Repair damaged and defective casework where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually ; where not possible to repair the casework then rpalce it . Adjust joinery for uniform appearance . Adjust doors, drawers , hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and corectly. b . Clean casework on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces . Touch-up shop -applied 12290 - 7 1 ' finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas . c . Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section to whatever extent ' not completed at the shop or prior to installation of casework. 1 d . Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural casework being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. ' e . Caulk top of backsplask at walls with G.E . Silicone Sealant or equal . If wall varies over 1 /8 " at back splash, the wall is to be re-plastered to correct waves . 1 f. All casework to receive rubber base at the portion that touched the floor. ' * * * END OF SECTION * * * i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 12290 -8 SECTION 12484 - DIRT CONTROL FLOOR MATS AND GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION A . Related work specified elsewhere : 1 . Cast in place concrete, Section 03300 . 2 . Miscellaneous Metals : Section 05500 Be Work furnished but not installed : Recessed frames and anchors . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Applicator Qualifications : acceptable to foot grille manufacturer. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples : One 12 inch X 12 inch piece of each type and color of grille specified. Be Shop Drawings : Details of recessed frame installation. C . Manufacturer' s literature : Manufacturer ' s recommended installation ' and maintenance instructions . D . Certificates : Manufacturer ' s certification that materials meet specification requirements . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPATABLE MANUFACTURERS A. J. L . INDUSTRIES , INC . Be KENAGRILLE Co KADEE INDUSTRIES , INC . D . REESE E. C/S ENTRANCE FLOORING SYSTEM 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Tread : See models by Manufacturer and as per drawing details . Be Tread Style : Serrated Aluminum T-Extensions , C . Tread Infill : None . D . Frame : Aluminum, recessed, no pans , provide french drain as per drawings . Install treads parrallel to the door sill . Size and location of grille(s) as per drawings . Provide adjustable intermediate supports under frame as required by manufacturer. 12484- 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION ' A . Examine surfaces and locations to receive footrilles for deviations beyond g y manufacturer' s allowable tolerances . tBe Check that dimensions of completed recesses conform to manufacturer ' s grille sizes . Do not begin work until shop drawings have been reviewed so as to insure ' the proper recess dimensions . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install grille in a single piece, or multiple pieces as size and manufacturer' s specs indicate . Be Fit grille neatly into prepared recess . C . Protect finished product from paint overspray, and other sub-trades , prior to certificate of Occupancy . ' D . All hardware shall be stainless steel . E . The finished grille must be flush with the adjacent walking surfaces . * * * END OF SECTION* * * i 12484 -2 SECTION 13125 - PORTABLE BLEACHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design and fabrication of Portable Bleachers , 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications : Manufacturer must have five years experience in the manufacture of bleachers and grandstands . Welders must be AWS certified. Be Source Quality Control : Mill Test Certification, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A . Outdoor Aluminum (800) 225 -4249 Be E&D Specialty Stands, Inc . (800) 525 - 8515 C . Sturdisteel (800) 433 -3116 D . All Star Bleachers (80) 875 -3141 E . Diversified Metal Fabricators (800) 356-7248 2 . 02 PORTABLE BLEACHERS A. Product Description : A . Rise and Depth Dimensions : Vertical rise and horizontal depth per row: 8 " x 24 " . Seat is 17 " above its respective tread . Be Framework: Prefabricated angle or aluminum square tube bleacher frames are spaced at 6 foot intervals and joined by aluminum angle cross-brace . C . Seats : Nominal 2 x 10 anodized aluminum plank, with 2 x 10 end caps . D . Treads : Nominal 2 x 10 mill aluminum plank, with 2 x 10 end caps (optional 2 x 12 or two 2 x 10 mill aluminum planks) . E . Risers : Optional 8 " riser, mill finish aluminum . F . Joint Sleeve Assembly : Optional on large continuous units to maintain true alignment in joining two planks together. G. Entry Stairs : On elevated units, frames shall be constructed of structural aluminum channel supports with 2 x 12 mill finish aluminum treads and anodized aluminum handrail pipe . 131254 ' H . Guardrailing : To be set at all sides of bleacher. Railing shall be anodized aluminum with end plugs and elbows where required. All rails shall be secured to structural aluminum channel supports with galvanized fasteners . ' Top rail on back and sides shall be 42 " above nearest seat . 1 . Standard System : Two -line guardrail at the front, sides and exits for elevated units . Three-line rail on the rear of all units . Two-line rail on the rear of all units . Two-line guardrail at the sides , and three rail on the rear above row five for non-elevated units . Be Materials/Finishes 1 . Framework : a. Galvanized Steel : Structural fabrication with ASTM-A36 steel . Shop connections are welded . After fabrication all steel is hot- dipped galvanized to ASTM-A123 specification . b . Aluminum : Structural fabrication with aluminum alloy 6061 -T6 , mill finish. MC , Weathering Steel : Structural fabrication with ASTM-A588 high strength " Weathering Steel" . Shop welds made with weathering steel electrodes . ' 2 . Extruded Aluminum : a. Seat Planks : Extruded Aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 , clear anodized 204R1 , AA-M10C22A31 , Class II . b . Tread Planks , Riser Planks : Extruded Aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 , mill finish. c . Joint Sleeve Assembly : Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 , mill finish. 3 . Accessories : a. Channel Ends Caps : Aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 , clear anodized 204RI , AA-M10C22A31 , Class II . ' b . Hardware : ( 1 ) Bolts, Nuts , Washers : Stainless Steel or Hot Dipped Galvanized . (2) Hold-Down Clip Assembly : Aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 . C , Guardrailing : Handrail pipe to be schedule 40 anodized aluminum . C . Fabrication ' 1 . Design Load a. Live Load : 100psf gross horizontal projection ; 13125-2 b . Lateral Sway Load : 24plf seat plank; 13125 -2 C * Perpendicular Sway Load : plf seat plank; d . Wind Load : 100mph; e . Live Load of Seat and Tread Plank: 120 plf; £ Guardrail : 100plf vertical and 50 plf horizontal . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install bleacher unit in accordance with manufacturer' s installation procedures . Be Secure all bleacher units to the concrete slab below in accordance with local codes wind loading requirements . Utilize stainless steel expansion bolts to secure to the concrete deck . C . Each aluminum bleacher shall be grounded with a 10 foot X 5/8 " diameter ground rod, lug and braided copper lead as required. D . The total number of seats shall be as per the plans, in rows and lengths . E. NOTE : The Bleacher Manufacturer shall manufacturer and install their bleachers to conrorm with the Florida Accessibility Code and the Americans with Disabilites Act. All ramps , railings and dispursement areas shall be depicted on the required shop drawing submittals prior to fabrication and erection of bleachers. * * * END OF SECTION* * * 13125-3 SECTION 1315 2 SPECIALTY CONSTRUCTION SECTION ' SWD IING POOL tA. GENERAL All work called for in this section shall be subject to the project general and special conditions. Contractors doing work of this section shall refer thereto. This section of the specifications is intended to describe the swimming pool construction, swimming ' pool equipment installation and service. Only contractors capable of meeting the qualifications and fiunishing all work called for in this section shall be considered. All work, called for in this section shall be, and remain through the warranty periods, the sole responsibility of this Contractor. A.01 Substitutions ' 1 . The Owner and the Architect have made a detailed investigation before selecting the specified swimming pool structure, recirculation, filtration and other special pool equipment. All base bids shall include this equipment without substitution since the operation and maintenance of this swimming pool facility has been predicated upon the specified equipment. ' 2 . If any Contractor wishes to submit an alternate swimming pool structure, recirculation system and/or filter, he shall submit plans and specifications to the Architect for approval at least ten ( 10) days prior to the bid date. Said plans and specifications shall be for this specific project and show the installation of the proposed substitute equipment. All changes required in the pool structure and in the building construction ' shall be listed - in order to determine the extra costs or savings thereof. Any product offered as a substitute must be a proven design with at least ten ( 10) installations in service for more than five (5) years. If a substitute is approved, all bidders shall be notified by addendum and the bid form will be modified so that all bidders may offer the approved alternate. r 1 13152 - 1 QUALIFICATION OF POOL CONTRACTOR 1 . The pool contractor shall . be a state certified commercial swimming pool contractor. 2 . The pool contractor shall have maintained fully documentable working experience in this field, under the present trade name for a period not less than five (5) years prior to this bid date. 3 . The pool contractor shall document having completed at least five (5 ) jobs of this size and scope. 4 . The pool contractor shall be able to provide a qualified, full time project manager throughout the contract period. 5 . The pool contractor shall be bondable and shall furnish a letter of intent to furnish 100% Performance and Payment Bond from their bonding agent. 6. Successful pool contractor to acquire and pay for all necessary permits . 7. Successful pool contractor shall furnish proof of all liability insurance, etc. and also that of any subcontractor. 2 13152 - 2 ' A.02 Summary of Work Included The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: ' 1 . Layout pools with bench mark and exact location supplied by the Owner/Architect. ' 2. Perform bulk excavation and furnish grandular sub-base, if required, per Article C . 04 . 3 . Perform all required hand trimming of excavation. ' 4 . Provide and install all required forms for pool construction. 5 . Provide and install specified Myrtha Pool System on the 50 meter pool and construct the interactive play feature pool as per plans . 6. Construct poured, concrete perimeter footing for Myrtha wall sections . 7. Provide and install the entire recirculation system. ' 8 . Install pvc membrane with racing lanes and end wall markers . 9 . Provide and install complete filter equipment and pool mechanical system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 10. Provide and install the specified pool sanitizing equipment. 11 . Furnish and install the specified pool sanitizing equipment. 12. Furnish and install pool deck equipment and accessory equipment shown and/or specified. All anchorages contained within the pool deck shall be furnished by the Pool Contractor, ' but installed by the Pool Deck Contractor, 13 . Provide miscellaneous pool testing and cleaning equipment, etc. , as specified herein. 14 . Provide instruction manuals and/or operating charts as required. 15 . Provide start-up supervision upon project's completion. A.03 Related Work Specified Elsewhere ' 1 . Site access for heavy equipment. 2. Disposal of excavated material. 3 . Stripping pool area, grading, backfilling, and any other area preparation required prior to ' the start of pool construction. t3 13152 - 3 4. Construction and backfill of all foundations, equipment room walls, footings and sumps required for pool construction work. 5 . Deck construction, finishes, expansion joints, caulking drains, etc. 6. All necessary sleeves, openings, or other penetrations in equipment room walls and closure of same as required for pool construction work. 7. Dewatering of poofxcavation, if necessary. wl G 8. All general construction work not called for in pool specifications in this section including the concrete collector tanks and pump pits in the filter equipment room. 9 . Fresh water connection to filter, fillspout, or makeup water tank (see drawings) and waste water connection from filter as shown on the drawings . 10. Provide access to filter room for filter equipment. 11 . All electrical connections and oo1 ori equipment grounding shall be by the Electrical Contractor. The Pool Contractor A provide the filter pumps and motors . All controls , including starters, shall be pro ed and installed by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall ins I all lectrical equipment furnished by the Pool Contractor and he shall provide all disc nnect switches as indicated or required by codes . A.04 Quality of Materials 1 . Special attention is directed to the materials, products and equipment described in these specifications . They establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality. 2 . Where only one manufacturer's name is mentioned for a particular item of equipment or material, the Pool Contractor's base bid shall be on that item. 3 . The Pool Contractor may, at his option, offer similar products of other manufacturers . In proposing a substitution, the pool contractor is cautioned to refer to Section A. 01 -2 of the specifications . No consideration will be given to substitutions after award of contract. 4 . Whenever the words "or equal", "or approved equal", or "or equal as approved" appear in the specifications, they shall be interpreted to mean material or an item of equipment equal in quality to that named. The burden of proof of quality or service shall be on the supplying contractor. Proof of inequality is not implied by the specifications and is not a burden of the owner or his representative. The architect shall be sole judge as to whether or not an item submitted as an equal is acceptable. If the Pool Contractor submits a substitution on an " equal" basis, he shall assume all risks involved, should the architect find it not acceptable. The Pool Contractor shall assume all costs for charges in drawings and specifications affected by the substitution, and the cost increase, if any, on adjoining work. 4 13152 - 4 ' 5 . It will be the obligation of the respective Prim g p e Contractors to inform thea Subcontractors of this requirement as the respective Prime Contractors will be held responsible to comply ' with all requirements set forth by the drawings, specifications and Contract Documents. 6 . Where references are made to Federal Specifications, American Society for Testing and Materials, American Standards Association, American Institute of Steel Construction, Steel Institute, and similar associations organizations and standards, it shall be considered to mean their current specifications and designations as amended as of the date of bid opening. ' A.05 Patented Materials The Pool Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees . He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner, the Contractor and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Pool Contractor shall not be responsible for all such loss when a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Pool Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Contractor, r Owner, and Architect. A.06 Codes All work in this division shall be according to applicable local, state and national codes ' and regulations . A .07 Shop Drawings Before commencing any work, Pool Contractor shall submit and obtain approval of shop drawings indicating all work called for in this division. ' A.08 Job Coordination ' All bidding contractors are cautioned to clearly understand the limits of responsibility of the Pool Contractor as detailed in these specifications in preparing their bid. Prior to a work start by either the Pool Contractor or the General Contractor, a meeting will be held at the jobsite to establish work limits, job schedule and liaison among contractors and the Architect to ensure a coordinated construction process . A.09 Bonds Payment and Performance Bond ' The Pool Contractor shall provide a Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bond in the full amount of this subcontract. Such Bond shall be of a form acceptable to the Owner and written by a Surety licensed to do business in this State. ' S 13152 - 5 The Pool Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds no later than the date of execution of the Contract, or if the work is commenced prior thereto in response to a notice to proceed, the Pool Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be issued. 6 1315 2 - 6 ' B. WARRANTY ' B.01 Standard Warranty The Myrtha wall and gutter sections will be warranted for fifteen ( 15) years . The pvc ' floor membrane will be warranted for fifteen ( 15) years . Standard one year contractual warranty shall apply to all remaining work of this ' section. 8.02 Owner's Responsibility tIt is understood that the Owner will continuously maintain the installation according to service procedures and directions issued by the manufacturer and Contractor. The warranty shall not cover damage to the pool attributable to corrosive or other water action, excessive use of acid or other foreign materials during cleaning or for ' discoloration or other consequences resulting from improper or inadequate use of chemicals or other materials, or from neglect or misuse by the Owner, his agents or invitees . rThis warranty shall also be void unless pool is kept full of water at all times and if drained for cleaning purposes, does not remain empty for more than a 48 hour period, unless under supervision furnished by Contractor. 7 13152 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUC'TS 2.01 Prefabricated Swimming Pool : Approved Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with specification requirements, and Architect's/Engineer's approval, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Project include the following: Myrtha Pool Systems Via Solferino 27 46043 Castiglione d/s (MN) Italy Phone : 613 /2564106 (U. S . and Canada) Fax : 613 /256-0261 (U. S . and Canada) General : The pool shall be a modular construction with components pre-fabricated at the manufacturer's facility and installed at the pool site by technicians who are qualified and certified by the manufacturer. Materials : All components shall be supplied pre-finished by the manufacturer, with no additional fabrication or material finishing to be performed on the jobsite. 1 . Pool Walls and Gutter: Metal component of the wall panels and gutter shall be fabricated from low carbon content, anti-magnetic, Type 304 stainless steel with a finish equal to type 2B (171 ). Nominal metal thickness of the gutter and panels up to 48 " ( 1 . 2m) in height - 0. 079 " (2mm,44ga.). For panels 48 " or higher - 0. 098 " (2. 5mm, - 12ga_ ). The gutter section shall be bolted to the wall panel by means of type 18 - 8 stainless steel flat head bolts . Nominal panel width shall be 36 " (0. 9m. ) . Panels shall be fabricated to a tolerance of ± 0 . 04" (+ lmm) and shall not deflect more than 3 /16" (5mm) when interior and/or exterior loads are acting on the pool walls . A permanent finish layer of 0 . 020 " (0 . 5mm) thick, light blue pvc (97± 1 Shore A hardness) shall be laminated to one side of the stainless steel panel. PVC to PVC panel connections (bolted) shall not require use of a gasket - the spacing and size of the bolts used must be designed to avoid any distortion of the panels . 2 . Gutter Coping/Hand-Hold: An extruded, white PVC coping shall cover the connection of the wall panel and the gutter. It shall have a shim-to-level adjustment capability. Removal of the coping shall require a minimum force of 1509/foot (250kg/m) . 3 . Gutter Gratin: A 10 " or 20 " (25 or 50cm) wide bar grating shall span the gutter trough between the coping and an aluminum angle fixed to the back of the gutter. The grating shall be injection-molded of a high-density polyolefin or polyamide material with an integral non-slip finish and shall have a 60% (min. ) open area maximum space between bars shall be 5 /16 " (8mm) . Grating sections shall lock together, between bars, to form continuous grating runs to pool comers. The bars shall be from 1 " to 1 -3 /8 " (25 to 36mm) in height and afford a minimum 3 /4 " ( 19mm) hand-grip at the coping. 8 13152 - 8 4 . Base Frame. Braces and Supports : A hot dipped galvanized steel channel, ' made up of 8'- 10" (2. 7m) long modules, shall continuously support the bottom of the pool wall panels . A-frame buttress's (constructed of structural steel angles which are machined, welded together, then hot dip galvanized) shall brace the walls at every panel joint. Base frame and braces shall be bolted to the wall panels with type 18 -8 stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts . Also, ' they shall be anchored to a concrete curb (providing a footing for the wall system) in a manner which allows micro-adjustment to the height and plumb of the wall panels ; using 1 /2" ( 12mm) plated steel stud anchors, washers and nuts . ' Pool comers are to be reinforced with flat, horizontal supports (bolted under the base frame) and U-shaped, vertical supports bolted to and enclosing the corner panel joints. Lastly, tensioning hooks shall be provided to allow connection of a steel grid to the base frame for installation of a reinforced ' concrete pool floor. ' 5 . Pool Bottom Material : Light blue reinforced PVC (supplied in rolls) with the following physical characteristics : ' PROPERTY VALUE UNIT TEST Thickness 0 . 059 " ' ( 1 . 5mm Density 1 . 23 8/m3 DIN 53479 Resistance to breaking L 1266 N/50mm NFT 54102 ' T 1211 DIN 53455 Resistance to breaking L 18 . 5 % NFT 54102 T 18 . 8 DIN 53455 Resistance to tearing L 268 N NFT 54108 T 270 DIN 53363 Cold Bending -20 0°C DIN 53361 Dimensional stability L 006 % NFT 54105 800 for 6 hours T005 DIN 53357 ' Resistance to peeling L 148 N/50mm DIN 53357 T 144 Hardness 79+2 Shore A NFT 54109 ' lOS DIN 53505 Resistance to cold -20 0°C NFT 54110 DIN 53372 Stability to light 7 Note DIN 53389 L= Longitudinal T = Transversal ' 6 . Lane Markings : Floor and wall markings (striping, tees, and crosses in the center of each swimming lane) shall be of dark blue or black reinforced PVC, as above, applied by solvent welding and hot air welding. 1 9 13152 - 9 7. Liquid PVC Sealant: After installation of the complete pool, the joints between the panels and between the panels and floor lining will be sealed with fluid PVC dissolved in the THF solvent - a process that guarantees water-tightness of the pool tank. The PVC shall be the same as the PVC wall laminate and this sealing process will be used on all bolt heads within the gutter and at the edges of floor material joints, and lane and target markings. 2.02 ADDITIONAL SWEMT*UNG POOL COMPONENTS A. Pool Outlets . 1 . Gutter Converters : Pool return converters shall be installed in the system where shown on the plans. They shall be fabricated of the same material as the gutter and shall be fitted with flanges for the installation of piping, as shown, which shall then interconnect the gutter to the filtration system. 2. Main Drains : Stainless steel/Fiberglass main drain boxes shall be constructed - of materials as specified for the SS Pool Gutter described in this Section. Sizes as per plans . Main drains shall include a 2 " bronze hydrostatic relief valve and 2 " PVC pebble stop pipe, as required by code and as shown on the drawings . B . Pool Inlets . 1 . Filtered Water Floor Inlet: White ABS fitting with female and male threads for connecting 1 - 1 /2" or 2" pipe, 5 -7/8 "0 face with 360° distribution lid, dual gaskets and compression flange; internal flow control disk adjustable through lid; all fasteners in stainless steel . C . Pool Equipment: Main Pool Filter: See equipment list on plans for size and manufacturer. Activitv Pool Filter: See equipment list on plans for size and manufacturer. Collector Tank: Tanks to be constructed of reinforced concrete as per plans with valved connections and an automatic water level controller. Pumps : See "Swimming Pool Filter Equipment" and "Activity Pool Filter Equipment on drawings . Perimeter Gutter System: The perimeter gutter system to be constructed as shown on drawings . Maintenance Equipment: See equipment list on drawings . 10 13152 - 10 C . Pool Equipment: (Continued) ' Deck Equipment: See equipment list on drawings . ' Safety Equipment: See equipment list on drawings. Racing Equipment: See equipment list on drawings. Miscellaneous Equipment: See Equipment list on drawings. 1 ' 11 13152 - 11 SECTION 14420 - VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT The product described herein is a vertical platform lifting device consisting of a machine tower with lifting platform, selected and dimensioned to provide adequate lifting height to suit the individual building requirements . The lift can be used either indoors or outdoors to vertically transport a wheelchair user or mobility impaired person up and over a barrier thus creating access to or within a building . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Supplier : Company with not less than ten ( 10) years experience in the design and fabrication of vertical platform lifts , such as one of the following manufacturers, or an approved equal . 1 . Dover Elevators 2 . National Wheel-O-Vator 3 , Garaventa 4 . Inclinator Company of America Be Technical Services : Supplier shall work with architects , engineers and contractors to adapt the platform lift product to the design and structural requirements of the building, site, and code requirements . 1 . 03 SECTION INCLUDES A . All materials and labor necessary to complete the installation of the vertical platform lift. Be Obtain all information affecting work at the job site. Include verification of field dimensions, anchoring and storage. Verify voltages and outlets on electrical drawings . 1 . 04 RELATED SERVICES Electrical devices and services shall be by a qualified electrician. 1 . 05 REFERENCES All designs, clearances , construction, workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of codes having jurisdiction. The platform lift shall be subject to local city and state approval prior to and following installation. 1 . 06 SUBMITTALS 14420 - 1 ' Submit drawings or suppliers literature for approval . Drawings shall show dimensional and wiring requirements . ' 1 . 07 SUBSTITUTIONS No substitutions shall be considered unless a written request for approval has been submitted and received by the architect at least ten ( 10) days prior to the bid date . ' Each substitution request shall include the name of the material for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitutions including drawings, performance and test data, a list of projects similar in scope, photographs of existing ' installation, design differences and other information necessary for evaluation. 1 . 08 TESTING ' The lift shall be designed and tested in accordance with ANSI A17. 1 , Part XX. Load the vertical lift unit to rated capacity and test for several cycles to insure proper operation. No mechanical failures shall occur and no wear that would effect the reliability of the unit shall be detected. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2 . 01 SUPPLIER One of the following approved manufacturer ' s : 1 . Dover Elevators 2 . National Wheel-o-Vator 3 . Garaventa ' 4 . Inclinator Company of America ' 2 . 02 PRODUCT TYPE The Model shall be the Vertical Platform Lift Model BC 108 as manufactured by National ' Wheel-o-Vator or an approved equal . 2 . 03 FABRICATION A . Platform and stationary ramp (if required) shall be constructed of 12au e g g minimum zinc clad steel . Platform and ramp must have a non-skid surface . The ' platform must have a minimum of 12 square feet. B . Platform side panels must be 42 " high. Side panel framework shall be a minimum ' of 1 " X 1 - 1 /2 " X . 065 tubing . The solid infill panels shall be a minimum of 24 gauge zinc clad steel . ' Co The main frame support tubing shall be a minimum of 1 - 1 /2 " square tubing X . 120 . 14420 -2 D . Carriage arms shall be a minimum of X 2 " steel flatbar along with % " X 34 /2 " seel flatbar uprights . Cam rollers shall be used for axial carriage guidance and wear pads used for horizontal stability. E . Fasteners shall be grade five or higher. Locking fasteners shall be used in all critical locations . F . The machine tower sides shall be of 12 gauge steel . Front and back covers shall be a minimum of 18 gauge steel . G. The drive mechanism shall be an acme screw design. The screw shall be a minimum of 1 " diameter. The acme screw shall have a secondary safety nut which in the event of a main lift failure will prevent uncontrolled descent. H . The motor shall be an instant reversing with a minimum of 3 /4 HP capacity. J. The operating control circuit shall be 24 volts . K. Finish shall be electrostatically applied power coating oven baked to cure. L . Color shall be selected by the architect from the standard colors submitted by the manufacturer. M . Emergency Stop / illuminated alarm switch shall be provide on the car as a means of signaling for assistance in the event of an emergency . N. The lift shall be equipped with a 42 " high upper landing gate, 42 " high platform gate which rides on the platform and a lower landing gate which remains at lower level to prevent access to the underside of the platform while in the raised position. The platform gate may be eliminated if the enclosure and lower gate extent a minimum 42" above the lift height. All gates shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to the unit meeting ANSI A17 . 1 , Part XX requirements . P . A grab rain shall be provided on the platform as required by ANSI for commercial applications . Q . Lift shall have enclosed framework of 1 - 1 /2 " square tubing X . 083 " and shall have an enclosure panel infill of 18 gauge zinc clad steel minimum. The enclosure shall extend a minimum of six (6) inches above to the underside of the platform in the raised position. R. The lift shall be supplied at the landing levels with constant pressure up/down switches which are keylocked and shall meet the requirements of ANSI A17 . 1 , Part XX . S . The main lift nut will be equipped with a continuous lube system to distribute lubrication between the main lift nut and the acme screw. 14420 -3 T. The handcrank shall be provided as a means of manually raising and lowering the platform in the event of a power or component failure . ' OPTIONAL - ELECTRIC STRIKE (see drawings to determined if specified) . If a door is provided by other instead of standard landing gates , the unit may be supplied with an electric strike allowing the door to be interlocked to unit . The strike should be 24V DC, fail secure unit that contains electric contacts to insure ' door is both closed and locked . (Modify N above when electric strike is utilized) . 2 . 04 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ' Unit shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Al7 . 1 , PartXX for vertical platform lifts in public places . 2 . 05 PERFORMANCE A . Rated Load : 550 pound capacity. Be Travel Speed : 9feet per minute . C . Lifting Height : floor to floor is 9' - 1 / 14 " , (nine feet one and one quarter inch) . ' PART 3 - INSTALLATION ' 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Unit shall be installed and operated in accordance with ANSI a 17 . 1 , Part XX. Be A dedicated electrical circuit with a lockable service disconnect switch rated per ' Table 1 shall be supplied by the electrical contractor at the job site . If ground fault interrupt protective device is supplied for equipment protection, please reference applicable electrical codes . Confer with lift contractor to insure appropriate motor for specific applications . C . Coordinate work with general contractor. ' D . The installation of the vertical platform lift shall be made in accordance with the approved plans for specifications and the suppliers installation instructions . ' PART 4 - MAINTENANCE ' 4 . 01 MAINTENANCE Maintenance of the platform lift unit shall consist of regular cleaning of the unit, regular ' inspection and periodic lubrication as specified by the supplier. Part X, Section 10 10 . 10 of the current ASME / ANSI A17 . 1 requires all Vertical Platform Lifts to be inspected every ' six (6) months . These same guidelines are used for recommended maintenance . 4 . 02 WARRANTY 144204 Unit shall have a one ( 1 ) year limited warranty on the basic unit and electrical system components . * * * END OF SECTION * * * 14420 -5 SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A . Hanger and Pipe Attachments : Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings ; nonmetallic coated for ' hangers in direct contact with copper tubing . B . Building Attachments : Powder-actuated-type , drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities ' appropriate for supported loads and building materials ; UL listing and FM approval for fire-protection systems . C . Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners : Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate ' for supported loads and building materials ; UL listing and FM approval for fire-protection systems . ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install piping free of sags and bends . ' B . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections . C . Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls , gypsum-board partitions , concrete floor , and roof slabs . D . Exterior Wall , Pipe Penetrations : Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast- iron pipes for wall ' sleeves . E : Fire-Barrier Penetrations : Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material specified in Division 7 . Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment . tF . Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas , compressed air , and vacuum piping . ' G . Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in water and steam piping . ' 3 . 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A . Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel . Install additional attachments at ' concentrated loads , including valves , flanges , guides , strainers , expansion joints , and at changes in direction of piping . ' NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS 01 NOV 2000 15055 - 1 B . Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick . C . Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick . D . Support fire-protection system piping independent of other piping . E . Load Distribution : Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment . END OF SECTION 15055 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS O1 NOV 2000 15055 -2 4 SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Summary : Mechanical insulation includes pipe and duct insulation for indoor applications . B . Submit Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation iC , Quality Assurance : UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 1 PIPE INSULATION A . Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 547 , Class 1 , jacketed , with a k-value of 0 . 26 at 75 deg F mean temperature and an average maximum density of 10 lb/cu . ft . . B . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 534 , Type 1 , closed=cell insulation with a k- value of 0 . 30 at 75 deg F mean temperature . 2 . 2 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION A . Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 612 , Class 113 , semirigid , jacketed board with a k-value of 0 . 26 at 75 deg F mean temperature and an average maximum density of 12 lb/cu . ft . . B . Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 553 , Type II , Class Fl , jacketed blankets with a k-value of 0 . 31 at 75 deg F mean temperature . C . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Sheet Insulation : ASTM C 534 , Type I , closed-cell insulation with a k- value of 0 . 30 at 75 deg F mean temperature . ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F . B . Insulate fittings , valves , and specialties . ' C . Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers , supports , anchors , and other projections . ' D . Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - MECHANICAL INSULATION 01 NOV 2000 15080- 1 E . Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive . F . Roof Penetrations : Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof flashing . G . Exterior Wall Penetrations : For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls , terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal . H . Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions , except fire-rated walls and partitions . - I . Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions . Seal around penetration with firestopping specified in Division 7 . L Floor Penetrations : Terminate insulation at the underside of the floor assembly and at the floor support at top of floor . Seal around penetration• with firestopping specified in Division 7 . K . Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation : Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive . Seal seams and joints with vapor-barrier compound . L . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation : Seal joints with adhesive . M . Interior Piping System Applications : Insulate the following piping systems : 1 . Domestic hot water . 2 . Recirculated domestic hot water . 3 . Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping . 4 . Exposed sanitary drains for handicapped accessible fixtures . 5 . Hydronic heating and cooling piping . 6 . Refrigerant suction piping . N . Do not apply insulation to the following systems , materials , and equipment : 1 . Flexible connectors . 2 . Fire-protection piping systems . 3 . Sanitary drainage and vent piping . 4 . Drainage piping located in crawl spaces , unless otherwise indicated . 5 . Below-grade piping . 6 . Chrome-plated pipes and fittings , except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled . 7 . Piping specialties , including air chambers , unions , strainers , check valves , plug valves , and flow regulators . O . Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule : Insulate piping with the following materials and thicknesses : 1 . Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Hot Water : 1 /2-inch flexible elastomeric pipe insulation . 2 . Hydronic Heating and Cooling Piping , 0 to 100 Deg F and Refrigerant Suction Piping : 3 /4- inch flexible elastomeric pipe insulation. 3 . Sanitary Drains and Storm Water Piping : 1 /2-inch 1 /2-inch flexible elastomeric pipe insulation . P . Install duct insulation as follows : 1 . Install insulation continuously on ducts that penetrate walls and floors , except at fire- rated assemblies terminate insulation at the assembly . Maintain insulation vapor retarder on cold duct . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - MECHANICAL INSULATION O1 NOV 2000 15080-2 ' 2 . Install removable or segmented insulation on access panel and doors . 3 . Install vapor barriers on insulated ducts and plenums with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F . Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor ' barrier . 4 . Seal penetrations for hangers , supports , anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier . 5 . Taper glass-fiber insulation ends at a 45-degree angle and seal with adhesive . Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive . 6 . Board Insulation Installation : Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers and ' anchor pins . Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3 inches from insulation joints . Apply vapor-barrier coating compound to insulation in contact , open joints , breaks , punctures , and voids in vapor barrier . ' 7 . Blanket Insulation Installation : Bond ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than 24 inches with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch- wide transverse strips on 12-inch centers . Bond ducts having long sides or diameters 24 inches and larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way . Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation . Overlap joints 3 inches . Seal joints , breaks , and punctures with vapor-barrier compound . Q . Duct System Applications : Insulate indoor concealed supply- , return- , and outside-air ducts . R . Do not apply insulation to the following systems , materials , and equipment : 1 . Fibrous glass ducts . ' 2 . Metal ducts with duct liner . 3 . Factory- insulated flexible ducts . 4 . Factory- insulated plenums , casings , terminal boxes , and filter boxes and sections . 5 . Flexible connectors . 6 . Vibration-control devices . 7 . Testing laboratory labels and stamps . 8 . Nameplates and data plates . S . Duct Insulation Thickness and Application Schedule : Insulate ducts with the following materials and thicknesses : 1 . Concealed Applications : 1 - 1 /2 inches thick . 2 . Exposed Applications : Fiberglass board , 2 inches thick . END OF SECTION 15080 1 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - MECHANICAL INSULATION O1 NOV 2000 15080-3 SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES A . Hard Copper Tube : ASTM B 88 , Types L and M , water tube , drawn temper . B . Soft Copper Tube : ASTM B 88 , Types K and L , water tube , annealed temper . C . Steel Pipe : ASTM A 53 , Type S , Grade A . Schedule 40 , seamless , galvanized , plain ends . D . Ductile-Iron Pipe : AWWA C151 , Classes 50 and 51 ; mechanical or push-on joint; with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining . E . PVC Plastic , Water Pipe : ASTM D 1785 , Schedules 40 and 80 , plain ends . 2 . 2 FITTINGS A . Wrought-Copper , Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 22 . B . Cast-Copper-Alloy , Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 18 . C . Bronze Flanges : ASME B16 . 24 , Classes 150 and 300 . D . Copper Unions : ASME B16 . 18 , cast-copper-alloy body , hexagonal stock , with ball-and-socket joint , metal-to-metal seating surfaces , and solder joint , threaded , or solder joint and threaded ends . Threads complying with ASME 131 . 20 . 1 , E . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings : AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile- iron AWWA C153 compact pattern , 250-psig minimum pressure rating , with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining and AWWA CI II rubber gaskets . F . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings : AWWA C110, 250-psig minimum pressure rating , with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining . G . Steel Pipe Nipples : ASTM A 733 , made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106 , Schedule 40 , seamless , galvanized , carbon-steel pipe . H . Malleable-Iron Unions : ASME B16 . 39 , Classes 150 and 300 ; hexagonal stock ; with ball-and-socket joint ; metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces ; and female threaded ends with threads complying with ASME 131 . 20 . 1 . I . Galvanized , Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings : ASME B16 . 4 , Classes 125 and 250 ; standard pattern ; with threads complying with ASME B1 . 20 . 1 . J . Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges : ASME B16 . 1 , Classes 125 and 300 . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 01 NOV 2000 15140- 1 K . PVC Plastic , Schedule 40 , Socket-Type Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2466 . ' 2 . 3 JOINING MATERIALS A . Ductile-Iron Pipe Push-On Joints : AWWA CI I I rubber gaskets and lubricant . B . Ductile-Iron Pipe Mechanical Joints : AWWA C I I I ductile- or gray-iron glands , high-strength steel bolts and nuts , and rubber gaskets . ' C . Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanged Joints : AWWA C115 ductile- or gray-iron pipe flanges , rubber gaskets , and high-strength steel bolts and nuts . D.. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials : Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents . E . Solder Filler Metal : ASTM B 32 , alloys to suit. system requirements . F . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8 , alloys to suit system requirements . G . Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10 . 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded . H . Solvent Cements : As recommended by manufacturer . ' 1 . Plastic Pipe Seals : ASTM F 477 , elastomeric gasket . PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A . Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications : 1 . Underground , Service Entrance Piping : Soft copper tube , Type L , cast-copper-alloy , solder- joint pressure fittings and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94 , or E solder . 2 . Aboveground : Hard copper tube , Type M ; wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy pressure fittings ; copper unions ; bronze flanges ; and solder joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94 , or E solder . 3 . 2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A . Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated . B . Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item , on each supply to each plumbing ' fixture not having stops on supplies , and elsewhere as indicated . C . Install drain valve at base of each riser , at low points of horizontal runs , and where required to drain water distribution piping system . D . Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated . E . Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 01 NOV 2000 15140-2 3 . 3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A . Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable Plumbing Code and as recommended by pipe manufacturer . B . Support vertical piping at each floor . 3 . 4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction . B , Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction . END OF SECTION 15140 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING O1 NOV 2000 15140-3 SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) rPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES A . Copper Drainage Tube : ASTM B 306 , Type DWV , drawn temper . B . Hubless , Cast-Iron Soil Pipe : CISPI 301 . C . PVC Plastic , DWV Pipe : ASTM D 2665 , Schedule 40 , plain ends . 2 . 2 FITTINGS A . Wrought-Copper , Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16 . 29 . B . Cast-Copper-Alloy , Solder-Joint , DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16 . 23 . C . Wrought-Copper , Solder-Joint , Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B16 . 43 . rD . Cast-Copper-Alloy , Solder-Joint , Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B16 . 32 . E . Hub-and- Spigot , Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : ASTM A 74 , Service class . F . Hubless , Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : CISPI 301 . iG . Cast- Iron , Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B16 . 45 . H . PVC Plastic , DWV Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311 ; socket-type ; drain , waste , and vent pipe patterns . I . Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant . ' J . CISPI Couplings for Hubless , Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : CISPI 310 , having ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve , with 300 series stainless-steel , corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly . ' K . Cast-Iron-Pipe Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End , Nonpressure System Pipe : Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly , fabricated to match OD of pipes to be joined . L . Plastic Pipe Sleeves : ASTM C 564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 PIPE APPLICATIONS tNORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 01 NOV 2000 15150- 1 A . Hubless , cast-iron soil pipe ; hubless , cast-iron soil pipe fittings ; cast- iron , heavy-duty couplings for hubless , cast-iron soil pipe and fittings ; and hubless joints . B . PVC plastic DWV pipe ; PVC socket-type drain, waste , and vent pipe pattern fittings ; and solvent- cemented joints . C . Copper drainage tube , wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage fittings , and soldered joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder . 3 . 2 PIPING INSTALLATION A . Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer . B . Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains . 3 . 3 INSPECTION A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction . END OF SECTION 15150 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING O1 NOV 2000 15150-2 SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL ` I . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Submit Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture . B . Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486 , " Energy Policy Act , " regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures . PART 2 - PRODUCTS A . See Schedule on Drawing . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATIONS ' A . Install fitting insulation kits on handicap-accessible fixtures . B . Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals . C . Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment . Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach . D . Install tanks for accessible , tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment . E . Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified , and to building wall construction where no support is indicated . F . Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate . Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction , to reinforcement built into walls . G . Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls . ' H . Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework . I . Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture . J . Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout . K . Install individual supply inlets , supply stops , supply risers , and tubular brass traps with cleanouts at fixture . L . Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 01 NOV 2000 15410- 1 M . Install traps on fixture outlets . Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps . Omit traps on indirect wastes , unless otherwise indicated . N . Install disposers in sink outlets . Install switch where indicated , or in wall adjacent to sink if location is k not indicated . O . Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink . P . Install escutcheons at wall , floor , and ceiling penetrations in exposed , finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings . Q . Seal joints between fixtures and walls , floors , and counters using sanitary-type , one-part , mildew- resistant , silicone sealant . Match sealant color to fixture color. R . Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment . Install insulation on supplies and drains of handicap-accessible fixtures . S . Ground equipment . Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B . END OF SECTION 15410 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 01 NOV 2000 15410-2 SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS ' A . Submit Product Data . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS ' A . Floor Drains : See Drawings . ' B . Backflow Preventers : ASSE standard backflow preventers , 150-psig minimum working pressure , bronze body with threaded ends , and an inlet strainer . C . Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1001 , with floating disc and atmospheric vent . D . Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1011 , rough bronze , with nonremovable and manual drain features and garden-hose threaded connection . E . Water Filters : Cartridge type . F . Thermostatic Mixing Valves : See Schedule on Drawings . G . Hose Bibbs : Bronze body in chrome-plated finish , with removable composition disc , threaded or soldered inlet , garden-hose threaded outlet , and loose-key handle] . H . Water Hammer Arrester : Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION ' A . Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and where required by authorities having jurisdiction . ' B . Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker . C . Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated . Set tops of drains flush with ' finished floor . Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as indicated below : 1 . 5 -Foot Drain Area Radius : 1 /2-inch depression . 2 . 10-Foot Drain Area Radius : 3 - 1 /2- inch depression . 3 . 15 -Foot Drain Area Radius : 1 -inch depression . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 ' - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 01 NOV 2000 15425 - 1 4 . 20-Foot Drain Area Radius : 1 - 1 /4-inch depression . 5 . 25 -Foot Drain Area Radius : 1 - 1 /2-inch depression . D . Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain . E . Install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring . Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes . END OF SECTION 15425 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 01 NOV 2000 15425 -2 ' SECTION 15738 - SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ' PART 1 - GENERAL LI RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section . ' 1 .2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components . Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts . 1 .3 DEFINITIONS A . Evaporator-Fan Unit : The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for ' cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space . B . Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing. 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Include rated capacities ; shipping, installed, and operating weights ; furnished specialties ; and accessories for each type of product indicated . Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics . ' B . Shop Drawings : Diagram power, signal , and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer- installed and field- installed wiring . 1 . 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A . Product Options : Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split- system units and are based on the specific system indicated . Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered . Refer to Division 1 Section " Substitutions . " ' NORTH COUNTY PARK Pro 'J No . 0024 - SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS01 NOV 2000 15738- 1 B . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 , by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction , and marked for intended use . 1 . 6 COORDINATION A . Coordinate size and location of bases for units . B . Coordinate size, location , and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section " Roof Accessories . " 1 . 7 WARRANTY x A . General Warranty : Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with , other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents , 1 . 8 EXTRA MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp . 2 , Trane Co . (The) ; Unitary Products Group . 3 . As directed by owner. 2 .2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS A . Chassis : Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel . I . Insulation : Faced , glass-fiber duct liner. 2 . Drain Pans : Galvanized steel , with connection for drain ; insulated . B . Refrigerant Coil : Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins , complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS01 NOV 2000 15738-2 C . Electric Coil : Helical , nickel -chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings ; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built- in magnetic contactors ; manual -reset ' thermal cutout ; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection . D . Fan : Forward -curved , double-width wheel of galvanized steel ; directly connected to motor. E . Fan Motor: Multispeed , PSC type . F . Disposable Filters : 1 inch (25 mm ) thick, in fiberboard frames . G . Wiring Terminations : Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection . 2 . 3 . WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS rA . Cabinet : Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain connection . B . Refrigerant Coil : Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve . C . Electric Coil : Helical , nickel -chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings ; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built- in magnetic contactors ; manual -reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent ' protection . D . Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan , directly driven by multispeed , electric motor with integral overload protection ; resiliently mounted . E . Filters : Permanent, cleanable . F . Integral circuit breaker/disconnect switch . 2 .4 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS A . Casing: Steel , finished with baked enamel , with removable panels for access to controls, weep ' holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base . Provide brass service valves , fittings , and gage ports on exterior of casing. B . Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation . Compressor motor shall have thermal - and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. ' 1 . Compressor Type : Scroll . 2 . Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high -pressure switch and automatic- reset low-pressure switch . C . Refrigerant Coil : Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins , complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS01 NOV 2000 15738-3 3 D . Fan : Aluminum -propeller type, directly connected to motor. E . Motor : Permanently lubricated , with integral thermal -overload protection . F . Low Ambient Kit : Permits operation down to 45 deg F ( 7 deg Q . G . Mounting Base : Polyethylene . H . See drawings for coastal construction requirements . 2 . 5 ACCESSORIES A . Combination thermostat/humidistat : Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan , with the following features : 1 . Compressor time delay. 2 . Fan timer controller when turning off strip heaters . B . Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. C . Refrigerant Line Kits : Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned , dried , pressurized , and sealed ; factory- insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends . D . Only a humidistat is required in garage spaces . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install units level and plumb . B . Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's mounting devices securely fastened to building structure and which meet 140 mph certification . C . Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports as detailed to meet 140 mph certification . D . Install compressor-condenser components on restrained , spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of I inch (25 mm) . Refer to Division 15 Section " Mechanical Vibration Controls . E. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings . Install tubing to allow access to unit. F . Provide certification by a Florida Licensed engineer that the installation meets all local applicable codes . 3 . 2 CONNECTIONS NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS01 NOV 2000 15738-4 ' A . Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections . Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties . ' B . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance . C . Unless otherwise indicated , connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements . 3 . 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A . Installation Inspection : Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation , including piping and electrical connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection . ' B . Leak Test: After installation , charge system and test for leaks . Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. C . Operational Test : After electrical circuitry has been energized , start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation . Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest. D . Test and adjust controls and safeties . Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' END OF SECTION 15738 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS01 NOV 2000 15738-5 1 SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL Li SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Summary : Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure classes 2 inch wg (500 Pa) or less and a maximum velocity of 2400 fpm ( 12 m/s) . B . Submit Product Data for fire dampers and smoke dampers . C . Submit Shop Drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct accessories , duct sizes , transitions , radius and vaned elbows , special supports details , and inlets and outlet types and locations . D . Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25 , 000 cu . ft . (708 cu . m) in volume or building Types II , IV , and V construction over 3 stories in height . E . Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces 1 - or 2-family dwellings or serving spaces less than 25 , 000 cu . ft . (708 cu . m) . F . Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 DUCTS A . Metal Duct : Comply with UL . B . Duct Liner : ASTM C 1071 , Type II , with an airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating . C . Thickness : 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm) . D . Adhesive : ASTM C 916 , Type L E . Mechanical Fasteners : Galvanized steel pin , length required penetrate liner plus a 1 /8-inch (3 -mm) projection maximum into the airstream . F . Joint and Seam Tape : Comply with UL 181A . G . Joint and Seam Sealant : Comply with UL 181A . H . Fabricate Metal Ducts : Comply with SMACNA ' s " Metal Duct Construction Standard . " NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 01 NOV 2000 15810- 1 ' 2 . 2 ACCESSORIES A . Volume-Control Dampers : Factory-fabricated volume-control dampers , complete with required hardware and accessories . Single-blade and multiple opposed-blade , standard leakage rating , and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications . ' B . Fire Dampers : Factory- fabricated fire dampers , complete with required hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers . C . Ceiling Fire Dampers : Factory-fabricated fire dampers , complete with required hardware and accessories . UL listed and labeled ; comply with the construction details for the tested floor/roof- ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL ' s " Fire Resistance Directory . ' D . Smoke Dampers : Factory-fabricated smoke and fire dampers , complete with required hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL SSSS , " Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems . " Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also be UL labeled for 1 - 1 /2- hour rating according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers , E . Flexible Connectors : Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics , coatings , and adhesives complying with UL 181 , Class 1 . F . Flexible Ducts : Factory-fabricated , insulated , round duct , with an outer jacket enclosing 1 - 1 /2- inch . . PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 1 INSTALLATION ' A . Duct System Pressure Class : Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated . B . Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces . C . Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures . 1 D . Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA ' s " HVAC Duct Construction Standard . " E Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in ' SMACNA standards . F . Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner . G . Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer ' s UL-approved written instructions . ' H . Install fusible links in fire dampers . 3 . 2 TESTING , ADJUSTING , AND BALANCING ' A . Balance airflow within distribution systems , including submains , branches , and terminals to indicated quantities . END OF SECTION 15810 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES O1 NOV 2000 15810-2 i SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS , REGISTERS , AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL i F� Li SECTION REQUIREMENTS E A . Submit Product Data , including color charts for factory finishes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 OUTLETS AND INLETS A . Diffusers : schedule on Drawings . B . Wall and Ceiling Registers : schedule on Drawings . C . Wall and Ceiling Grilles : schedule on Drawings . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and wall- mounted items . B . Locate ceiling diffusers , registers , and grilles , as indicated on general construction " Reflected Ceiling Plans . " Unless otherwise indicated , locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels . END OF SECTION 15855 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - DIFFUSERS , REGISTERS , AND GRILLES 01 NOV 2000 15855 - 1 SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS ' A . Summary: Electric/electronic controls sequences for HVAC systems and equipment . B . Submit Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of ' HVAC equipment and system . rC . Submit Product Data for controllers , sensors , operators , control panels , thermostats , humidistats , actuators , and control valves and dampers . D . System Description: Control systems consists of sensors , indicators , actuators , final control elements , interface equipment, other apparatus , accessories , and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multitasking , multiuser environment on token-passing network and programmed to operate ' mechanical systems according to sequences of operation indicated and specified . E . Operation Sequence : SeeMechanical Sheet Details (M -2 , 3 , etc . ) . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install control wiring concealed , except in mechanical rooms , and according to requirements specified i in Division 16 sections . ' END OF SECTION 15900 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proi No . 0024 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 01 NOV 2000 15900- 1 SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 LI SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Summary : Building wires and cables and associated splices , connectors , and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less , and twisted-pair cable ; and raceways and boxes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 WIRES AND CABLES A . Building Wires and Cables : Type XHWN/THWN copper conductor . B . Connectors and Splices : Wiring connectors of size , ampacity rating , material , and type and class for application and for service indicated . C . Single Conductor Plenum Coaxial : 75-ohm characteristic impedance , solid bare copper - central conductor , foamed Teflon dielectric , 100 percent coverage tinned-copper , double-braid shield , Teflon jacket, suitable for installation in air-handling spaces . D . Twisted Pair : No . 22 AWG tinned-copper conductors ; PVC insulation ; overall aluminum/polyester shield and No . 22 AWG tinned-copper drain wire ; PVC jacket . E . Twisted-Pair Plenum : No . 24 AWG , 7-strand , tinned-copper conductors ; Teflon insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield and No . 22 AWG tinned-copper drain wire ; Teflon jacket ; suitable for use in air-handling spaces . 2 . 2 RACEWAYS A . Conduit : Comply with the following : 1 . Rigid Steel Conduit : ANSI C80 . 1 . 2 . Intermediate Metal Conduit : ANSI C80 . 6 , 3 . Electrical metallic Tubing : ANSI C80 . 3 . 4 . Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit : NEMA TC 2 , Schedule 40 . B . Wireways : Hinged type , with manufacturers standard finish . C . Surface Metal Raceway : Galvanized steel with snap-on covers . Finish with manufacturer ' s standard prime coating suitable for painting . D . Surface Nonmetallic Raceway : 2-piece construction , manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer ' s standard color . E . Outlet and Device Boxes : UL listed and labeled sheet metal boxes . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - WIRING METHODS 01 NOV 2000 16100- 1 ' F . Floor Boxes : Cast metal , fully adjustable , rectangular . ' G . Pull and Junction Boxes : Small sheet metal boxes . 2 . 3 ENCLOSURES A . Hinged-Cover Enclosures : NEMA 250 , steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch . Finish inside and out with manufacturer ' s standard enamel . B . Cabinets : NEMA 250 , Type 1 , except where another Type is indicated . 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install wires and cables according to the NECA ' s " Standard of Installation . " ' B . Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new wire and cable . Co Wiring at Outlets : Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet . ' D . Color-code 208/ 120-V system secondary service , feeder , and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows : ' 1 . Phase A : Black. 2 , Phase B : Red . ' 3 . Phase C : Blue . 4 , Neutral : White . 5 , Ground : Green. E . Outdoors Wiring Methods : As follows : 1 . Exposed : Rigid or intermediate metal conduit . ' 2 . Concealed : Rigid or intermediate metal conduit . 3 . Underground , Single Run : Rigid nonmetallic conduit . 4 . Underground , Grouped : Rigid nonmetallic conduit . ' F . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic , Pneumatic , Electric Solenoid or Motor-Driven Equipment) : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit . ' G . Indoors Wiring Methods : As follows : 1 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic , Pneumatic , Electric Solenoid or Motor-Driven Equipment) : Flexible metal conduit , except in wet or damp locations use liquidtight flexible metal conduit . 2 . Use armored cable and nonmetallic sheathed cable in applications allowed by NFPA 70 . 3 . Damp or Wet Locations : Rigid steel conduit . 4 . Exposed : Electrical metallic tubing or rigid nonmetallic conduit . 5 . Concealed : Electrical metallic tubing , or rigid nonmetallic conduit . 6 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250 , Type 1 . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - WIRING METHODS O1 NOV 2000 16100-2 7 . Install raceways , boxes , enclosures , and cabinets as indicated , according to manufacturer ' s written instructions . 8 . Conceal conduit and electrical metallic tubing , unless otherwise indicated , within finished walls , ceilings , and floors . H . Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location . For intermediate steel conduit , use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings , unless otherwise indicated . 1 . Raceways Embedded in Slabs : Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical , and leave at least 1 -inch concrete cover . J . Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members , and follow the surface contours as much as practical . K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight . Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration . Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight . Use insulating bushings to protect conductors . L . Install pull wires in empty raceways . Use No . 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-]b tensile strength . Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire . M . Install raceway sealing fittings and locate at suitable , approved , accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound . For concealed raceways , install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces . Install raceway sealing fittings where required by the NEC . N . Stub-up Connections : Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit ; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor . O . Flexible Connections : Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures ; for equipment subject to vibration , noise transmission , or movement; and for all motors . Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations . Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections . P . Install a separate green ground conductor in surface metal raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals . END OF SECTION 16100 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - WIRING METHODS O1 NOV 2000 16100-3 C . Protect devices and assemblies during painting . ' D . Install wall plates when painting is complete . END OF SECTION 16140 1 NORTH COUNTY PARK Pro ' No � . 00_4 - WIRING DEVICES O1 NOV 2000 16140-2 SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) . -I PART2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 SWITCHES A . Enclosed , Nonf isible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD , with lockable handle . B . Enclosed , Fusible Switch , 800 A and Smaller : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD , clips to accommodate specified fuses , enclosure consistent with environment where located , handle lockable with 2 padlocks , and interlocked with cover in closed position . 2 . 2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A . Enclosed , Molded-Case Circuit Breaker : NEMA AB 1 , with lockable handle . 1 . Characteristics : Frame size , trip rating , number of poles , and auxiliary devices as' indicated and interrupting rating to meet available fault current . 2 . Circuit Breakers , 200 A and Larger : Trip units interchangeable within frame size . 3 . Circuit Breakers , 400 A and Larger : Field-adjustable , short-time and continuous-current settings . 4 . Current-Limiting Trips : Where indicated , let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1 , Class RK-5 . 5 . Enclosure : NEMA AB 1 , Type 1 , unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 TESTING A . Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS . END OF SECTION 16410 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 1022 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 01 NOV 2000 16410- 1 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS ' A . Submit Product Data , PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS ' A . Flush-mounted , NEMA PB 1 , Type 1 . 1 . Front : Secured to box with concealed trim clamps . 2 . Bus : Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity . 3 . Feed-through Lugs : Sized to accommodate feeders indicated . ' B . Molded-Case Circuit Breaker : NEMA AB 1 ; no tandem circuit breakers ; single handle for multipole circuit breakers . ' C . Fusible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD , clips to accommodate specified fuses , handle lockable . D . Motor Controllers : NEMA ICS 2 , Class A combination controller . ' E . Contactors : NEMA ICS 2 , Class A combination contactor . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1 . 1 . Indicate installed circuit loads on a circuit directory after balancing panelboard loads . ' B . Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards : Stub four empty conduits from panelboard into accessible or designated ceiling space and four empty conduits into raised floor or slab space . C . Wiring in Panelboard Gutters : Arrange conductors into groups , bundle and wrap with wire ties . ' D . Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS . END OF SECTION 16442 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - PANELBOARDS 01 NOV 2000 16442- 1 1 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Submit Product Data for each luminaire , including lamps . B . Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaires with ceiling construction . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 LUMINAIRES A . Fixture Type See schedule on Electrical Drawings (E- 1 , 2 , etc . ) . B . Voltage : See schedule on ElectricalDrawings (E- 1 , 2 , etc . ) . C . Mounting : See schedule on ElectricalDrawings (E- 1 , 2 , etc . ) . PART 3 . EXECUTION 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Set units plumb, square , and level with ceiling and walls , and secure . B . Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures : Install ceiling support system rods or wires at a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture , located not more than 6 inches from fixture corners . C . Support for Suspended Fixtures : Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches long to limit swinging . Support stem-mounted , single-unit , suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin-stem hangers . For continuous rows , use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis , including one at each end . D . Lamping : Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer ' s written instructions . END OF SECTION 16500 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - LIGHTING 01 NOV 2000 16500- 1 SECTION 16715 - TELEPHONE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION ' PART 1 - GENERAL LI SECTION REQUIREMENTS A . Summary : Telephone distribution systems , including a service by the telephone utility , and distribution of instruments and switching equipment throughout Project . ' B . Submit Product Data . C . Coordinate the Work of this Section with requirements of Owner ' s telephone system supplier . ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2 . 1 CABLE AND WIRING COMPONENTS A . Terminal Blocks : Type 66 or 110 , mounted on standoff brackets . ' B . Jack Assemblies : 8-position modular , latching , plug type , in flush-mounting wall plate , unless otherwise indicated . C . Wall Plates : Designed for telephone service . Match those indicated for power receptacle outlets in same spaces for materials and finish . For wall telephone units , include provision for support of unit . ' D . Cable : 4 pair , No . 24 AWG , solid copper, unshielded , twisted-pair construction in PVC sheath . Comply with ICEA S80576 . Cable in plenums shall be listed for use in plenums . ' E . Backboard : 3 /4-inch interior-grade plywood . PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 1 INSTALLATION A . Telephone Service : Comply with telephone utility requirements for details of telephone service . ' B . Wiring Method : Install outlet boxes with jack assemblies at outlets . Connect to cable fished in wall , unless walls are solid or filled with insulation . Install cable in raceway concealed in wall where walls are solid or filled with insulation . Terminate raceway with a bushing in ceiling space above outlet , ' unless otherwise indicated . Run cable concealed in accessible ceiling space , unless otherwise indicated . C . Exposed Cable : Install parallel or perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow ' surface contours where possible . D . Cable Support : Secure cable to independent supports at intervals as required to prevent sagging between supports . Use metallic supports with corrosion-resistant finish . NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - TELEPHONE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION01 NOV 2000 16715 - 1 E . Splices : Do not splice cable between the normal terminations of runs . F . Cable Taps : Install numbered terminal blocks where cable taps are made in wire closets and cabinets and in junction , pull , and outlet boxes . Install plywood backboards in telephone wire closets and cabinets . G . Wiring in Wire Closets and Cabinets : Install conductors parallel to and at right angles to walls . Bundle , lace , and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess . Use wire distribution spools at points where cables are fanned or conductors turned . Connect conductors that are terminated , spliced , or interrupted to terminal blocks . Label each terminal with designations approved by telephone equipment supplier. H . Conductor Terminations : Terminate conductors of cables on terminal block using tools recommended by terminal block manufacturer . Y I . Identify telephone system backboards and cabinets with the legend " Telephone . " Identify terminals of terminal strip and jack outlets and pull-and-junction boxes with approved designations . 3 . 2 TESTING A . Acceptance Tests : Test each pair or conductor of each cable run for continuity of pair loop ; insulation resistance for pair loop (report evaluation of readings less than 1 megaohm) ; and do loop resistance (report evaluation of differences greater than 3 percent) . END OF SECTION 16715 NORTH COUNTY PARK Proj No . 0024 - TELEPHONE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION01 NOV 2000 16715-2